16 English

Machine Translated by Google
NF C15-100
December 2002
AFNOR
French Standardization
Association
www.afnor.fr
This document is for the exclusive and non-collective use of AFNOR SAGAWEB customers.
Any networking, reproduction and rebroadcast, in any form whatsoever, even partial, are
strictly prohibited.
This document is intended for the exclusive and non-collective use of AFNOR SAGAWEB.
(Standards on line) customers. All network exploitation, reproduction and re-dissemination, even
partial, whatever the form (hardcopy or other media), is strictly prohibited.
SAGAWEB
For: AMEC SPIE SA
5/10/2005 - 5:17 p.m.

Any full or partial reproduction or
representation, by any means
whatsoever, of the pages published in
this document, made without the
authorization of the publisher is
unlawful and constitutes an infringement.
Only reproductions strictly reserved for
the private use of the copyist and not
intended for collective use are
authorized, on the one hand, and, on
the other hand, analyzes and short Distributed by
quotations justified by the scientific or
informational nature of the work. work
in which they are incorporated (Law of
July 1 , 1992 – art. L 122-4 and L 122-5,
and Penal Code art. 425).
SAGAWEB for: AMEC SPIE SA on 5/10/2005 - 5:17 p.m.
NF C 15-100
December 2002
Classification index: C 15-100
ICS 29.020; 91.140.50
Low voltage electrical installations

E: Low-voltage electrical installations
D: Elektrische Niederspannungsanlagen
Approved French standard

by decision of the CEO of Afnor on November 5, 2002, to take effect from December
5, 2002.
Is intended to replace the approved standard NF C 15-100 of May 1991 and its
amendments A1 of December 1994 and A2 of December 1995.
Correspondence Standards of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) of the 60364

series and harmonization documents of the European Committee for
Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC) of the HD 384 series (see
table I of the Foreword).
Analysis This document deals with the design, construction, verification and maintenance of
electrical installations supplied with a voltage not more than 1,000 volts (effective
value) in alternating current and 1,500 volts in direct current.
Descriptors Electrical installations, buildings, residential premises.
Changes See Foreword.
Fixes
published and distributed by the Technical Union of Electricity and Communication (UTE) – BP 23 – 92262 Fontenay-aux-Roses Cedex – Tel:
01 40 93 62 00 – Fax: 01 40 93 44 08 – E-mail : ute@ute.asso.fr – Internet: http://www.ute-fr.com/ also distributed by the
French standardization association (afnor), 11, rue Francis de Pressensé, 93571 Saint-Denis La Plaine Cedex – tel. : 01 41 62 80 00
Print UTE © 2002 – Reproduction prohibited

NF C 15-100
SUMMARY
INTRODUCTION
Summary
Foreword
Alphabetical index
TITLE 1. Scope, object and fundamental principles
TITLE 2. Definitions
TITLE 3. Determination of the general characteristics of installations
TITLE 4. Protection to ensure security
TITLE 5. Choice and implementation of materials
TITLE 6. Verifications and maintenance of installations
TITLE 7. Rules for special installations and locations
____________
-I- 2002
NF C 15-100
(Blank page)
- II - 2002
NF C 15-100
FOREWORD
1. The new French standard NF C 15-100 was adopted after the preliminary investigation of the various parties, the
examination of the observations received during this investigation and the approval.
The provisions of this standard are applicable to works for which the date of submission of a building permit application
or failing that the date of prior declaration of construction or failing that the date of signature of the contract, or failing
that the date of acknowledgment of receipt of order is after May 31, 2003.
2. The revision of the NF C 15-100 standard was necessary for the following reasons:
- the evolution of production techniques and practices leads to adaptations and

periodic changes to installation rules;
- continued work on an international and European level to harmonize installation rules.
3. This edition of standard NF C 15-100 includes:
- on the one hand, the requirements of the standard itself which generally reproduce the texts of international
standards or harmonization documents. These prescriptions are printed in straight black Roman characters. - on
the other hand, comments which
contain recommendations facilitating the application of the prescriptions, based on experience and current use. In
general, these commentaries do not repeat any international text, but allow the corresponding texts to be
explained and the justifications for the corresponding rules to be provided. These comments can also draw
attention to French regulatory aspects and are printed in blue italics immediately below the reference normative
text.
At the top of each page, the references to the titles and parts are indicated.
Compliance of an installation with the NF C 15-100 standard implies full compliance with the normative part.
4. The plan of the standard is that adopted internationally, within the framework of study committee n°64 of the
International Electrotechnical Commission, for the establishment of standards concerning electrical installations
in buildings (IEC Publication 60364 ).
The numbering of the standard is based on the division into titles, parts, articles, paragraphs and subparagraphs as
shown in the following example:
472.3.3.2 means:
4 .......................... Title
47............. .................. Part
472............................ Article
472.3........................... Paragraph
472.3.3 and 472.3.3.2.... Subparagraphs
5. The rules of this standard take into account the progress of the work on the plan
internationally, both within the framework of the IEC and that of CENELEC.
Table I indicates the situation of the texts of the standard in relation to the texts of international documents.
- III - 2002
NF C 15-100
5.1 Texts which repeat those of a CENELEC harmonization document are marked by the letter H in a circle with a
double line in the margin.
5.2 The texts which are marked by the letter C in a square and with a single line in the margin are those of the
standards adopted within the framework of the IEC. They are not yet harmonized within the framework of CENELEC
but are generally the subject of draft harmonization documents which have been taken into account.
5.3 The texts of the articles which are not preceded by either the letter H or the letter C are national supplements.
6. Overall, the plan of this standard is the same as that of the 1991 standard, because
that this plan is that of the international standard IEC 60364.
However, numerous groupings have been made to make the standard easier to read.
The main groupings are:
• Protection against electric shock: chapter 41 and sections 471 and 481 • Protection
against thermal effects: chapter 42 and section 482 • Protection against
overcurrents: chapter 43 and section 473 • Sectioning and control: chapter
46 and section 476 • External influences : chapter 32, article 512.2
and section 522.
At the date of publication of this standard, these groupings have not yet been adopted at European level.
7. The main changes to this standard concern the following points:
Title 3:
• Direct current diagrams (312.2.4) and harmonic currents (330.1.1).
Title 4:
• New presentation of the rules on protection against electric shock (41); • Protection against fire
risks (422.1); • Protection against the risk of explosion
(422.3); • Protection against temporary overvoltages
(442); • Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin
(443); • Measures to limit electromagnetic interference (444).
Title 5:
• Classification of external influences (512.2);
• Section of conductors in the presence of harmonic currents (524); • The various
types of DDR (531.2.1.5); • Coordination of
protection devices (535); • Functional earthing (545); •
Equipment sets (558); Security facilities (56).
Title 7:
• Temporary electrical installations (711);
• Mobile or transportable units (717); • Electric
heating equipment (753); • Residential premises (771)
• Unsupervised facilities (773); • Electrical

service premises (781).
8. This standard has been approved by the Board of Directors of the Technical Union of
Electricity and Communication on September 24, 2002.
- IV - 2002
NF C 15-100
TABLE I
CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE NF C 15-100 STANDARD
AND INTERNATIONAL PUBLICATIONS
NF C 15-100 standard Harmonization Document IEC Publication

of CENELEC
TITLE 1 60364-1
TITLE 2 60364-1
TITLE 3 60364-1
TITLE 4
Part 41 60364-4-41
Part 42 HD 384-4-42 60364-4-42
Part 43 60364-4-43
Part 44 HD 384-4-442, HD 384-4-443, 60364-4-44
prHD 384-4-444
Part 46 60364-4-41 and
60364-5-53
TITLE 5
Part 51 HD 384-5-51 60364-5-51
Part 52 HD 384-5-523 60364-5-52
Part 53 HD 384-5-537 60364-5-53
Part 54 HD 384-5-54 60364-5-54
Part 55 60364-5-55
Part 56 HD 384-5-56 60364-5-55
TITLE 6
Parts-61, 62 and 63 HD 384-6-61 60364-6-61
TITLE 7
Part 701 60364-7-701
Part 702 HD 384-7-702 60364-7-702
Part 703 HD 384-7-703 60364-7-703
Part 704 HD 384-7-704 60364-7-704
Part 705 HD 384-7-705 60364-7-705
Part 706 HD 384-7-706 60364-7-706
Part 707 60364-7-707
Part 708 HD 384-7-708 60364-7-708
Part 709 prHD 384-7-709 60364-7-709
Part 711 prHD 384-7-711 60364-7-711 and
60364-7-740
Part 717 60364-7-717
Part 752
Part 753 prHD 384-7-753
Part 771
Part 772
Part 773
Part 781
A white box indicates that there is no corresponding IEC or CENELEC document.
-V- 2002
NF C 15-100
(Blank page)
- VI - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
The terms preceded by an asterisk are those designating the classes of external influences defined in the article
512.2. Following each term are the letters designating the class of external influence and the number
of the corresponding article.
HAS
Accessibility ................................................ 513.1 General rules

Accessible (parts) .............................. 232.6 Definition
423 Protection against burns
513.1 General rules
Assets, active (parts)................................... 232.1 Drivers - definition
232.4 Part- definition
232.5 Dangerous part - definition
Accumulators ......................................... 554 Aerial See batteries
(lines) .... ............................... 529.7 Agricultural Rules
(Establishments) .............. ....... 705 Replacement Special rules
power supply ............... 132.4 213.3.4 313.2 353 Design
Definition
Features
Sources
Safety power supply .......................... 132.4 213.3.1 Design
*Altitude Definition
(AC) ............ .............................. 512.2.3 Features
Antennas ................ ................................. 559.4 Choice
Apparatus ............... ............................. 270.3 Definition
Protection – Control – Sectioning
53 Recessed into walls
530.4.3 Heating devices ........................... 423 Protection against the risk of burns
559.5 Industrial heating
705.422 Agricultural and horticultural establishments
753 Implementation
771.314.2.5 Housing
Control devices ...... ................... 465 536.5 Functional command
Functional control devices
Connection devices ......................... 526 555.1 Drivers
Power sockets
Starting devices ......................... 553.2.2 Solid State Starters
559.6 Engines
Lighting devices .......................... 559.2 701.55 Choice and implementation
702.55 Powder rooms
Swimming pools
Measuring devices ........ ......................... 556 Choice and implementation

Control connection devices and
protection (ACP) .................................. 253.7 Table Definition
53E Choice
Cabinets ........ ......................................... 558 See: Apparatus assemblies
Elevators ...... ....................................... 142 772.3.2 Installation limit
Special rules
Assigned (value) ... ................................. 212.1 Definition
254.1 Rated current of a protection device
Autotransformers .............. .................. 552 Choice
*Sprinkling water (AD3) ....................... .... 512.2.4 Features
*Atmospheric (AF2) ............................. 512.2.6 Features
*Warned (people) ( BA4) ................... 291.2 512.2.16 Definition
531.2.2.2 Features
Auxiliary source DDR
B
Bathtub ................................................. 701 Powder rooms
Voltage drop .................................... 445 Protection
Balneotherapy (installations) .... ......... 701.1 Special rules
- VII- 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Barriers .................................................. 235.4 _ Definition

41/Appendix A2 Rules
Fire barriers .................................. 527.2 Pleasure Implementation
boats ......... ..................... 709 Storage marinas and boats
batteries ....................... 554 Capacitor Choice and implementation
banks ............................... 557 Flush-mounting Choice and implementation
box .................................. ........ 530.4.3 Connection Installation conditions
boxes ................................ 526 Earth Rules
terminal ............................................. 242.5 542.4 Definition
Implementation
Ventilation vents ................................ 701/Annex (B2) Shower rooms
Loop at the bottom of the excavation ......................... 542.2.3.1 Rules
Burns (risk of) .......... .................... 423 Protection - temperature limits
VS
Cables .................................................. .... Table 52A Table 52D Standards

521.6 Parallel Use
Laid
cables .................................. 523.6 Heating Rules
cables .. ................................. 753.4 Class II Special rules
cables ............. ......................... 412.2.1 Table 52A Definition
List of Class II cables
Cables (pathways) .............................. 262.3 Definition
521 Installation methods
522 Choice according to external influences
523 Allowable currents
Cables without insulated neutral ......................... 543.4.2 PEN conductors
Single-conductor (or unipolar) cables 261.3 Multi-conductor Definition - see cables
(or multi-polar) cables 261.4 Flexible Definition - see cables
cables ......................................... 521.6.12 Laid
Pipelines ...... ................................... 261.6 Definition
Heating pipes ..................... 528.2.1 Buried Neighborhood
pipes .................... ...... 529.5 Pipes attached to Installation rules
walls ................ 262.1 Definition
Table 52B 523 Installation methods
Allowable currents
Prefabricated pipelines ..................... 262.14 Definition
521.4 Facility
529.6 Standards
543.2.2 Protective conductor
Gutter .......................................... ..... 262.2 Definition
Table 52B 523 Installation methods
Permissible currents in conductors
Caravans (and parks for) .................. 708 Fuel Special rules
(distribution, depot) ............ .... 752 Categories of Special rules
overvoltages ........................ 443.2.2 Description
534.1 Choice of surge arresters
Building cellars .................................. 772.2.3.4.3 Equipotential Special rules
bonding .. ................. 545.2 *CEM Rules
(AM) ........................... ................... 444.3 512.2.10 General provisions
Features
Frames .......................................... 529.2 Laid
Frame .... .................................................. 558 See equipment sets
Construction sites ................................................. 213.2 Definition
704 Special rules
*Hot (AA5) ......................................... 512.2.1 * Hot (very) Features
(AA6) ............................... 512.2.1 Features
Boilers ........ ............................................. 559.5.2 Liquid heating devices
- VIII - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Heating (of premises) ............................. 753 Electric heating equipment

771.314.2.5 Residential premises
Boiler rooms .............................................. 463.1 Emergency cut-off
Cable ways .................................. 262.3 Definition
Table 52B Installation methods
543.2.3 Grounding
523.4 Circuit grouping
Electrical shock ........................................ 231.1 Definition
41 Protection rules
532 Selection and implementation of protective devices
*Mechanical shocks (AG) ......................... 512.2.7.1 Characteristics
Voltage drops ......................................... 525 Acceptable limits
Tour .................................................. ...... 251.1 Definition
314.1 Facilities Division
43 Overcurrent protection
Control circuits ............................. 465.2 Rule
Communication circuits ......................... 444.3 General rules
444.4 Protection
771.559.6 Residential premises
Distribution circuits ............................. 251.2 Definition
Table 41A Breaking time
Terminal circuits .................................. 251.3 Definition
314 Facilities Division
Table 41A Breaking time
Classes .................................................. ... 237 Definition
0 ........................................... 237.1 Definition
41/Annex C1 Rules for premises or locations not
drivers
I ............................................. 237.2 Definition
II ........................................... 237.3 Definition
III ......................................... 237.4 Definition
*Climatic (AB) ................................... 512.2.2 Characteristics
Box ................................................. ..... 558 See equipment sets
*Fuels (CA2) .......................... 422.1 Premises at risk of fire
512.2.21 Characteristics
Functional control ......................... 281.5 Definition
465 Rules
536.5 Devices for
711.462 Fairs and exhibitions
Compatibility ......................................... 330.1 Characteristics
512.1.5 Material choices
People skills (BA) ............ 29 Definition
Continuous components ......................... 330.1.3 Compatibility
531.2.1.5 DDR disturbance
Electronic counter ............................. 771/Annex D Management, teleinformation+
Communications ......................................... 112 Application domain
330.1 Electromagnetic compatibility
Static capacitors ......................... 557 Choice and implementation
Drivers ............................................. Table 52A Standards
521.6 Installation
Table 52D Use
524 Section
Active driver ......................................... 232.1 Definition
312.1 Types of diagrams
462.1 and Sectioning
536.2.1
463 Emergency shutdown
- IX - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Charged conductors .............................. 523.5 Number

Different circuit conductors ........... 521.6 Rules
Insulated conductors .................................. 261.1 Definition
Equipotential conductor ............... 243.4 Definition
544 Rules
612.6.4.2 Effectiveness verification
Neutral conductor ......................................... 232.2 Definition
312.2.3 Distribution - Restrictions for IT scheme
524.2 Harmonics – Neutral section
431.2 Protection
524.2.4 Common neutral ban
461.3 Cutting in TNC and TNS schemes
524.2 Section equality with phases
524.3 Reduced section compared to the phases
Protective conductor ......................... 242.1 Definition
543 Rules
612.2 Continuity check
612.6.4 Measurement of their resistance
Reinforced protective conductor........ 543.7 Rules
Earth conductor ................................. 242.3 Definition
542.3 Rules
PEN conductor .................................. 232.3 Definition
422.1.8 Premises at risk of fire
424.11 Premises at risk of explosion
462.1 Sectioning and cutting
463.2 Emergency cut-off
461.2 Sectioning and control at origin
Main protective conductor .......... 242.2 Definition
Conductors in parallel ......................... 433.6 Overload protection
434.4 Protection against CC
523.6 Rules
Water pipes ......................................... 411.3.1.1 Main OEL
528.2.2 Neighborhood with electrical conduits
542.2.6 Non-use as protective conductor
Gas lines .................................. 411.3.1.1 Main OEL
542.2.6 Non-use as protective conductor
Ducts .................................................. .. 262.4 Definition
Table 52B Choice
Table 52C Installation method
521.6 Laying conductors
522 Choice according to external influences
523 Allowable currents in conductors
527 Choice to limit the spread of fire
529.1 Special rules
Steam pipes .................................. 528.2 Neighborhood with electrical conduits
Compliance of materials ......................... 511 See Quality
Connectors ......................................... 559.1. Rules
Connections .............................................. 261.7 Definition
526 Rules
*Construction (materials) (CA) ........... 512.2.21 Implementation
Contactors .............................................. 253.5 Definition
Table 53E Choice
*Contact people with potential
of the earth (BC) ......................................... 512.2.18 Features
-X- 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Direct contacts ......................................... 131.2.1 Design

231.2 Definition
41/Annex A General rules
531.2 Use of DDR
Indirect contacts ............................................. 131.2.2 Design
231.3 Definition
411.3 General rules
531.2 Use of DDR
*Contamination (risks of) (BE4) .......... 512.2.20 Characteristics
Continuity of earthing ............... 543.3 Rules
Tension stresses ............................. 442.2.1 Allowable values
442.2.5.1 TN and TT limitation
442.2.5.2 IT limitation
442.5 Breakage of neutral conductor
442.6 First fault in IT diagram
442.7 Phase-neutral short circuit
Permanent insulation monitor (CPI) 411.6.3 Obligation in the event of an IT scheme
537.1 Choice
Converters ......................................... 553.1 Choice
Coordination between protective devices 535 General rules
Crows .................................................. 262.9 Definition
523 Permissible currents in conductors
*Solid bodies (presence of) (AE) .......... 512.2.5 Features
*Corrosives (substances) (AF) ................ 512.2.6 Features
Fused circuit breaker ......................... See Fuses
Firewall ............................................... . See Barriers
Automatic cut-off .......................... 411 General rules
Emergency cut-off .................................. 281.3 Definition
132.9 Facility design
463 Rules
536.3 Choice of devices
771.463 Residential premises
Shutdown for mechanical maintenance ......... 281.2 Definition
464 Rules
Allowable currents ......................... 252.2 Definition
433 Overload protection
434 Short circuit protection
523 Rules
Tables Values
52H - 52D
Rated current ......................................... 254.1 Definition
Short-circuit currents ......................... 252.5 Definition
313.1.1 Power supply characteristics
434 Short circuit protection
434.3 Exemption from short circuit protection
435 Coordination of protection devices
533.3 Choice of protection devices
Fault currents .................................. 233.3 Definition
411 Protection by automatic cut-off
food
543.1.1 Protective conductor section
Earth fault current ......................... 233.4 Definition
411 Protection by automatic cut-off
food
Starting current ......................... 559.6 See engine start
330.1.1 (c) General
- XI - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Differential-residual current .................... 233.7 Definition

411.5.1 TN scheme
411.5.2 TT scheme
531.2 DDR choice
Operating current ......................................... 252.1 Definition
311.3 Determination
Leakage current ....................................... 233.5 Definition
330.1.3 General
Harmonic currents ............................. 330.1.1 d) General
33 Compatibility
523.5.2 Allowable currents
524.2 Drivers Section
Overload currents ......................... 252.4 Definition
433 Overload protection
435 Coordination of protections
533.2 Choice of devices against overloads
Short circuits ......................................... 252.5 Definition
434 Protection
533.3 Choice of devices...
(1) ............................. 463.1
Kitchens (large) Emergency shutdown
D
DCL .................................................. ......... 559.1.1 Ruler
DDR .................................................. ........ 253.6 Definition
415.1 Additional protection
411.4.4 TN scheme
531.2.4.1 Choice
411.5.3 TT scheme
531.2.4.2 Choice
411.6.5 IT diagram
531.2.4.3 Choice
531.2.5 Use of 30 mA DDRs
773 Protection of unsupervised facilities
431.1 Protection of phase conductors
431.2 Neutral conductor protection
531.2 Choice
536.2 Association with overcurrent devices
536.3 DDR coordination
Table 771E Residential premises
432 Nature of the devices
533 Choice of devices
535.1 Device selectivity
535.4.3 Association with DDR
DDR type A ......................................... 531.2.1.5 Definition, generalities
Table 771E Choice
Control devices ......................... 465 Functional command
462 Sectioning
536.5 Functional control devices
Luminaire connection devices 559.1.1 Ruler
(DCL) ......................................... .............. 771.314.2.3 Residential premises
Cutting devices .............................. 536.3 For mechanical maintenance (choice)
536.4 For emergency cut-off (choice)
Sectioning devices ................... 462 Rules
536.2 Choice
(1) See C 15-201.

- XII - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Protection device at maximum

fluent ................................................. ...... 531.1 Choice
Provisions for protection against
direct contacts .......................................... 411.2 General rules
41/Annex A Requirements
Provisions for protection against
indirect contacts ....................................... 411.3 41/Appendix B General rules
Special rules
Short circuit protection
devices ......................................... .............. 533.3 Choice
Protective devices against
overcurrents .............................................. 533.1 General
Protective devices against
overloads .................................................. 533.2 Minimum Choice
distances .......................................... 781.4 Division of Rules – Electrical Service Location
facilities ........ .................... 314.1 Voltage Facility structures
ranges ......................... ..... 222 223 442 Definition (alternating current)
Definition (direct current)
Insulation fault with plus voltage installations
high
528.1 Neighborhood with other electrical conduits
Home automation ................................................ .. 330.1 Compatibility
Double insulation ......................................... 236.4 237.3 Definition
412 Classification of equipment - Protection
Protection by class II or equivalent insulation
Showers .................................................. .... 701.71 Special rules
E
Water (piping) .......................................... 411.3.1.1 *Water THE P
(presence of) (AD) ............................. 512.2.4 Warm- Features

ups .............. ............................. 423 Cable See Thermals (effects)
ladder .............................. ......................... 262.12 Definition
Table 52C Installation methods
Lighting ................................................. ... 559.2 General rules
Fluorescence lighting............................. 330.1.1 (d) Compatibility - Harmonic currents
524.2 Neutral conductor section
Electrodes (devices) ............................. 559.3 Domestic material choices
559.5.2 Choice of industrial heating devices
*Electromagnetic (influences) (AM) ...... 512.2.10 Conductive Choice according to environment
elements .............................. 232.9 Definition
411.3.1.1 THE P
415.2 Additional LEP
543.2.1 Use as protective conductors
Electrical service location ........... 781.1 Special rules
Non-conductive locations ............... 41/C.1 See non-conductive premises
Recessed (mounting) ................................... 529.1.2 - Rules
Pipelines ...... ................................... 513.2 Accessibility
529.1 Special rules
Conductive speakers .............................. 706 *Children Special rules
(BA2) ........ ................................... 512.2.16 Apparatus Rules
assemblies ........ .................. 558 Buried Rules
(pipes) ........................... 523 523.3 529.5 Table 52B Allowable currents
708.52 Thermal resistivity of soils
Installation rules
Installation methods
Parks and caravans
- XIII - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Mechanical maintenance ............................. 464 Rules

Envelopes .............................................. 235.3 Definition
41/Annex A2 General rules
412 Double insulation
Establishments open to the public (ERP) 35 Security facilities
56 Power supply for security installations
*Evacuation of people (BD) ............. 512.2.19 Characteristics
*Explosions (risks of) (BE3)................... 424 Locations - Rules
752 Liquid fuel distribution areas
F
Correction factors ............................. 523.2 For room temperature
523.3 For thermal resistivity of the ground
523.4 For grouping of circuits
Non-symmetry factor ......................... 523.6 Parallel cables
Reduction factor ......................... 512.2.20 For pipes in BE3 use
523.5.2 For charged neutral
Simultaneity factor ......................... 215.2 Definition
311 Facility structure. Power
power supply
Utilization factor .................................. 215.1 Definition
311.2 Facility structure. Power
power supply
*Wildlife (AL) ............................................. . 512.2.9 Features
Pilot wire ................................................ .... 753.6.2 Sectioning
Fixed (materials) ......................................... 271.5 Definition
Fixing the devices ......................... 530.4 Rules
*Flora (AK) ............................................. .. 512.2.8 Features
Fairs .................................................. ...... 711 Fairs and exhibitions
*Lightning (AQ) ............................................. 443 Atmospheric surges
512.2.13 Rules
534 Choice of surge arresters
Scabbards .................................................. 262.6 Definition
521.8 Crossings
527 Choice of pipes to limit propagation
fire
529.5 Buried pipelines
Ovens .................................................. ....... (2) 559.5.1 Rules
Frequency ......................................... 112 PF area of application
313 Features
330.1.1 Compatibility. LF disturbance
523.0 Allowable currents
*Refrigerated (AA1) ................................... 512.2.1 Characteristics
*Cold (AA3) ........................................... 512.2.1 Characteristics
*Cold (very) (AA2) ............................. 512.2.1 Characteristics
Smoke (ducts) ................................ 528.2.1 Neighborhood with electrical conduits
Fuses .................................................. ... 253.3 Definition
432 Nature
533.1 Devices
533.3 Choice
Table 53E Disconnecting devices
G
Sheath (of a cable)................................... 261.5 Definition
(2)
See UTE C 15-421.
- XIV - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Duct (ventilation, smoke extraction) ............ 528.2 Neighborhood of pipelines

528.2.1 Passage of pipes
Housing Technical Sheath .................... 771.558.2 Implementation
Galleries .................................................. ... 262.7 Definition
Garages .................................................. .. 752 Liquid fuel distribution areas
772.2.3.4.2 Rules for buildings
Gas (pipes) ............................. 411.3.1.1 SARA
Generators ......................................... 551 Rules
Troughs .................................................. . 262.8 Definition
Table 52E Use
521.6 Laying conductors
522.3 Choice following external influences
529.3 Implementation
*Drops of water (falls) (AD2) ............ 512.2.4 Characteristics
Circuit grouping ............................. 523.4 Allowable currents
GTL .................................................. ......... 771.558.2 Implementation
H
Dwellings (premises) ............................. 771 Special rules
*Disabled (BA3)................................... 512.2.16 Features
Harmonics ......................................... 330.1.1 LF disturbances
523.5.2 Charged conductors
524.2 Conductor section - neutral
Height of sockets and boxes... (3) 555.1.8 Rules
............................................. See NF C 15-211
Horticultural Hospitals (Establishments)...................705 See agricultural
*Wet (conditions) (BB1) ................... 512.2.17 Features
Humidity (AB) ........................................... 512.2.2 Features
I
*Immersed (conditions) (BB3) ................ 512.2.17 Features
701 Powder rooms
702 Swimming pools
*Immersion (AD7)................................... 512.2.4 Features

Buildings, common area lighting Fault loop 772.2.3.4.1 Special rules
impedance ........... 233.2 Definition
411.4 TN scheme
411.5 TT scheme
411.6 IT diagram
521.5 Ferromagnetic envelopes
612.6.1 Verification
612.6.3 Verification - Measurement
*Fire (spread of) (CB2) ............. 422.4 Propagating structures
512.2.22 Features
*Fire (risks of) (BE2)................... 422 Protection
422.1 Premises at risk
422.1.4 Choice of pipes
433.3, 433.4 and Overload protection waiver
433.5
512.2.20 Features
527 Fire spread
529.1.2.2 Choices made
531.2.3.3 DDR choice
Independence of installations .............. 132.11 Design
515 Materials
External influences .................................. 512.2 Classification
51/Annex A List
(3) See NF C 15-211.

- XV - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
*Insects (AL) ......................................... 512.2.9 Characteristics

*Unstable (structures) (CB4) ................... 512.2.22 Characteristics
Stand-alone installation .............................. 771/Appendix B Rules
Site installations ......................... 213.2 Definition
704 Special rules
Earthing installations ............... 241.4 Definition
542 Rules
Semi-permanent installations ............... 213.1.3 Definition
364 Rules
Temporary installations ......................... 213.1 Definition
36 Rules
Work facilities ............................. 213.1.2 Definition
363 Rules
Security installations ............................. 213.3 Definition
313.2 Characteristics
351 General
353 Sources for...
561 Special rules
Unmonitored installations .......................... 773 Special rules
Switches .......................................... 253.2 Definition
Table 53E Control and sectioning devices
Insulation (floor or wall)................................... 235.2 Definition
41/Annex C1 Protection by distance or obstacle
612.5 Verification. Resistance measurement
Insulation .................................................. ... 236.1 Definition
Double insulation ......................................... 236.4 Definition
412 Protective measures
Main insulation ......................................... 236.2 Definition
41/Annex A General rules
Reinforced insulation ......................................... 236.5 Definition
237.3 Definition - Classification
412 Protection
Additional insulation ......................... 236.3 Definition
Isolation .................................................. 214.1 Definition
612.3 Verification. Measuring the resistance of
J
*Water jets (AD5)................................... 512.2.4 Features
Junctions .................................................. . 526 Pipe connections
L
(4)
Discharge lamps ............................. 463.1 Emergency shutdown
Equipotential bonding (LEP) ................... 243.1 Definition
Main equipotential connection ............. 411.3.1.1 Ruler
542.4.1 Main earth terminal
544.1 Equipotential conductors
Additional equipotential connection.... 415.2 General rule
544.2 Equipotential conductors
701.415.2 Powder rooms
702.415.2 Swimming pools
705.415.2 Agricultural and horticultural premises

Non-earthed equipotential bonding 41/Appendix C1 Fundamental principles
Earth connections .......................................... 312.2 Earth connection diagram
Overhead lines .................................. 529.7 Rules
Surge limiters ......................... 442 Faults with higher voltage installations
534.2 Choice and implementation
Fault location ......................... 537.3 Choice of devices
(4) See NF C 15-150.

- XVI - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Non-conductive premises ......................... 41/Annex C1 Protection

Electrical service premises ................... 781.5 Special rules
M
Maintainability .............................................. Main Features
Marinas .................................................. ... Special rules
Masses .................................................. .... 34,709,232.8 Definition
411.3 Protection against indirect contact

Ferromagnetic materials .................... 521.5 Installation methods
Materials (reaction to fire) ........................ 42/Annex Classification
Electrical equipment .................................. 511 Compliance with standards
443.2.2 Surge Categories
512.1.2 Operating current
*Mechanics (constraints) (AG, AH. AJ). 512.2.7 Features
Protective measures
- by automatic cut-off ....................... - by double 411 Rules
insulation ................... ............. - by electrical 412 Rules
separation ....................... - by very low 413 Rules
voltage ..... ................. 414 Rules
Reference methods ............................. Table 52G Rules
Protective measures ............................. 411 to 414 Choice of measures
Grounding ......................................... 241.4 Definition
411.4 TN scheme
411.5 TT scheme
411.6 IT diagram
442 Surge protection
542 Rules
544 Rules for protection in TN - TT - IT
545 for functional reasons
545.4.2 For combined reasons
Putting it out of range.................................. 41/B.2 Fundamental principles
Mobile (hardware) ......................................... 271.2 Definition
559.1.2 Connection of devices
Installation methods ......................................... Table 52C Description
*Mold (AK)................................... 512.2.8 Characteristics
Engines .................................................. ... 445 Brownout Protection
559.6 Starting and troubles
772.3.2.2 Calculation of sections for elevators
Wet (BB conditions) ............................. 512.2.17 Characteristics
Moldings .................................................. . 262.8 Definition
Table 52E Use
529.2 Installation
*Air movement (AR) ......................... 512.2.14 Characteristics

*Building movements (CB3) ......... 512.2.22 Characteristics
NOT
Neutral (conductor)................................... 232.2 Definition

524.2 Section
330.1.1 d) Harmonic currents
543.4.2 Cables without insulated neutral (PEN)
- Location .............................................. 514.3 Insulated conductors
- Protection .............................................. 431.2 overcurrent
- Cutoff ................................................ . 461.3 Non-sectioning of the PEN
Keraunic levels .............................. 512.2.13 Definition
443 Original surge protection
atmospheric
771,443 Original surge protection
atmospheric
771/Appendix A Level map
- XVII - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Number of power points (per circuit) 771.314.2 O Residential premises
Obstacles ................................................. .. 235.6 Definition

41/Appendix B1 Rules
Origin of the installation .............................. 141 Definition
211.3 Definition
461.2 Sectioning and control
P
Control panel .................................. 771.558.3 Residential premises
*Water packets (AD6) ................................ 512.2.4 Features
Surge protectors .............................................. 443 Power surges
Lightning rod .............................................. 443.3 Presence of lightning rods
Insulating walls .......................................... 235.2 Definition
612.5 Insulation resistance measurement
Accessible parts ......................................... 232.6 Definition
423 Burn risk protection
Active parts ......................................... 232.4 Definition
41 Protection against electric shock
Intermediate parts ................................ 232.7 Definition
412.2.2 Envelopes
Simultaneously accessible parts............ 232.6 Definition
41/Appendix B Distance and obstacles
Passages (service, maintenance) ............. 781.4 Minimum distances
Informed people .................................. See Warnings
Qualified people .................................. See Qualified
Electromagnetic disturbances ............. 444.3 Arrangements to take
Swimming pools .................................................. ..... 702 Special rules
Test platforms .................................. 463.1 Emergency shutdown
Plans .................................................. ......... See diagrams
Skirting boards .................................................. ..... 262.8 Definition
529.2 Laid
*Pollutants (substances) (AF) ................... 512.2.6 Features
Pumps ................................................. ..... 464 Shutdown for mechanical maintenance
Marinas .......................................... 709 See Marinas
Portable (hardware) ......................................... 271.1 Definition
Posts, posts ......................................... 410.3.7 Exemption from protection
529.7 Rules (airlines)
*Earth potential (BC) ......................... 512.2.18 Features
Dust (AE) ......................................... 422.1 Premises at risk of fire
424 Locations at risk of explosion
512.2.5 Features
Breaking capacity ......................................... 254.5 Definition
434.1 Presumed DC current
435 Overload and DC protection coordination
Prefabricated See Pipelines
*Presence of water (AD) ................................ 512.2.4 Features
*Presence of solid bodies ........................ 512.2.5 Features
Cable gland ......................................... 521.7 Implementation
Main (insulation) ................................... See Insulation
Outlets ....................................... 142 Downstream limit of installations
555.1.6 Shutters
555.1.7 Height
704.555.1 Construction sites
708.530.2 Parks and caravans

709.530.3 Marinas and boats
- XVIII - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
- Very low voltage ................................... 414.4 SELV and PELV

Earth connections ......................................... 241.5 Definition
241.7 Independent earth connections
542 Rules
54/Appendix C Guide
Profiles .................................................. ....... 520.2.1 Standards
*Water splashes (AD4) ............................. 512.2.4 Characteristics
Accompanying protection ................... 535.2 Between overcurrent protections
Protection against electric shock...... 131.2.1 Design - Direct contacts
131.2.2 Design – Indirect Contacts
410.1 General rules
535 Coordination between devices
Overcurrent protection............ 131.4 PF Protection against thermal effects
251.4 Definition
43 General rules
535 Coordination between devices
Protection (conductors of) ......................... 543 See protective conductors
Power supply ......................... 133.2.4 PF Choice of materials
311 Structure of facilities
512.1.4 Choice according to service conditions
Control consoles .............................. 558 See Equipment sets
Differential protection .............................. 415.1 Additional protection by DDR
411.4 TN scheme
411.5 TT scheme
411.6 IT diagram
Table 771E Residential premises
Q
*Qualified (people) (BA5)................... 291.1 Definition
512.2.16 Features
531.2.2.2 Auxiliary source DR devices
Quality of materials .................................. 511 Rules
R
Reaction to fire ......................................... 42/Appendix Material classification
Rectifiers .............................................. 330.1.1 d) Harmonic currents
553.1 Choice
Pipeline identification.................................. 514.2 General
Driver identification.............................. 514.3 General
51/table 51B Colors
Marking (of insulated conductors) ............ 514.3 Rules
Location .................................................. ... 514 General - Equipment
Distribution network ................................. 114 Domain of the standard
141 Origin of installations
312 Types of distribution schemes
312.2 Earth connection diagrams
313 Structures - Food
33 Accounting
443 Atmospheric or switching overvoltages
559.6.1 Limitation of problems due to motors
*Electrical resistance of the human body (BB) 512.2.17 Earth Features
connection resistance ......................... 411.5 TT scheme
411.6 IT diagram
442 Faults with higher voltage installations
612.6.2 Resistance measurement
Resistance of protective conductors or
equipotential connections ......................... 415.2 Additional equipotential connection
612.6.4 LEP resistance measurement
- XIX - Updated: June 2005

NF C 15-100 Index
Thermal resistivity of soils ......................... 523.3 Values

S
Shower rooms .............................................. .... 701 Special rules
Saunas ......................................... .............. 703 Installation Special rules
diagrams ......................... 514.5 TN diagram. .................................................. Identification and tracking
312.2.1 Earth connections
411.4 Automatic cut-off
442.2.4.1 Power surges
444.3.12 Electromagnetic disturbances
461.3 General
462.1 Omnipolar disconnection
463.2 Emergency shutdown
531.1.1 Protection by overcurrent devices
531.2 Protection by DDR
612.6.1 a) Verifications and measurements
41/Annex D1 Connection to the network
TNR/TNS scheme ........................................ 442.2.4.1 TT Grounding
scheme. .................................................. 312.2.2 Earth connections
41/Annex D1 TN/TT compatibility
612.6.1 b) Verifications and measurements
TTN/TTS scheme ......................................... 442.2.4.2 Upgrade Earth
IT diagram .................................................. .... 312.2.3 Grounding
431.2.2 Neutral conductor protection
512.1.1 Equipment insulation voltage
534.2 Industrial frequency surge limiters
612.6.1 c) Verifications and measurements
ITR/ITS scheme ........................................... 442.2.4.3 Direct current Grounding
diagram .......................... 312.2.4 *Dry (conditions) (BB1) ..... ..................... Earth connections
512.2.17 Conductor section ....................... ....... 132.6 Features
Design
524 Rules
Table 771F Residential premises
Neutral conductor section ......................... 524.2 Minimum Harmonics
sections .................... ................... 524.1 According to types and uses
Sectioning ............................. ................. 132.10 Design
281.1 Definition
462 Rules
461.2 Device originally
Disconnectors .................................................. 253.1 536.2 Security Definition
Choice and implementation
(facilities) ............................. 35 56 Facilities
Choice and implementation
*Earthquake (AP) ............................................. ... 512.2.12 General provisions
Selectivity ........................................... .......... 314.2 535.1 535.4 Terminal circuits
Between overcurrent protections
Between DDR
-XX- Updated: June 2005

NF C 15-100 Index
Partial selectivity ......................................... 535.4.3.2 Total Rules

selectivity ... ............................................. 535.4.3.1 Semi- Rules
permanent (facilities) ................. 213.1.3 Definition
364 Temporary facilities
Electrical separation .................................... 413 Main rules
41/Annex C3 Special rules
612.4 Verifications
Electrical service (premises) ............................ 41/Appendix B Obstacles and distancing
551.2.1 Implementation of generators
554.2 Implementation of accumulator batteries
781 Rules
Controlled situation ......................................... 443.3.2 Definition
Natural situation ......................................... 443.3.1 Definition
Socket socket .......................................... 555.1 Rules
*Solar (radiation) (AN) ............... 512.2.11 Characteristics
Non-conductive floor (or wall) ........................ 41/Appendix C1 See Non-conductive premises
612.5 Resistance measurement
Heat sources ......................................... 522.1 Rules
*Building structure (CB) ........................ 512.2.22 Characteristics
*Submersion (AD8) ......................................... 512.2.4 Characteristics
Soils (conductive or insulating) ........................ 235.2 Definition
612.5 Measurement of the resistance of …
Overloads .................................................. ... 252.4 Definition
433 Protection
533.2 Choice and implementation of devices
Overcurrents .............................................. ... 131.4 General rule
132.8 Design – Protective devices
252.3 Fused circuit breaker
252.4 Circuit breaker
43 Protection rules
533 Choice and implementation
*Atmospheric surge (AQ) ............... 443.3 443.4 512.2.13 Arrangements for surge control
Choice of materials
Industrial Features
surges ................... ............ 442.2.1 Constraints
Atmospheric overvoltages ......................... 131.6 330.1 General rule
44 Compatibility
Protection - Rules
443 Surge Categories
Duct Systems ......................................... 520.2.1 Standards
Table 52E Use
529.1 Installation
T
Distribution board .................................. 251.5 Definition
558 Apparatus sets
771.558.3 Residential premises (control panel)
Communication board ............................. 771.558.5 Residential premises
Distribution board .......... ......................... 771.558.4 Residential premises
Tablets .......................... .................................. 262.3 Definition
Table 52C Installation method
Remote switches .................................................. .536.5 Functional command
Allowable temperature .......................................... 132.6 Design - Conductor Section
423 Accessible parts of electrical equipment
523.1 Conductor insulation
Touch temperatures .......................................... 423 Values
- XXI - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
Ambient temperature (AA) ......................... 216.1 Tables General definition

Correction factors
52K - 52L
512.2.1 Features
523.2 Choice of pipes
Insulation temperatures ................................ Table 52F Temporary Maximum values
(installations) .......... ................. 213.1 Definition
36 General rules
Breaking time ......................................... Table 41A Values
Tensions .................................................. ...... 313.1.1 Tolerances - Variations
512.1.1 Assigned
Voltage (drops) .................................. ..... 132.6 Design - Conductor Section
525 Allowable values
Contact voltage ......................................... 234.2 Presumed Definition
contact voltage .. .................... 234.3 411.3.2 Fault Definition
Cutoff time
voltage ....................... .................. 234.1 Rated voltage (of Definition
an installation) ........... 221.1 313.1.1 512.1.1 Rated voltage Definition
Power Features
following conditions of service
withstand shocks .......... 512.1.6 General
Table 44B Prescribed values for materials
Rated voltage ......................................... 133.2.1 512.1.1 Choice of electrical equipment
Choice according to service conditions
Alternating current voltages (ranges of) 222 Direct Definitions
current voltages (ranges of) 223 414.1.2 Earth Definitions
(conductors SELV and PELV
of) ......................... ......... 242.1 542.3 Earth Definition
Choice
(receptacles) .................................. ......... 542.2 Functional See earth connections
earth ......................................... ... 545 Thermal Rules
(effects) ....................................... 42 Treatment of Protection
information (materials) .... See IT
545 Grounding (protective and functional)
Transformers ............................................. 552 Instrument Choice
transformers ......................... 556 Safety Choice and implementation
transformers .......................... .... 414.3 Isolation Sources
transformers ..................... 413.3.2 Rules
552 Material choices
701.53 Powder rooms
Works (installations) .............................. 213.1.2 Definition
363 Rules
Crossings .................................................. ... 521.8 527.2 IK degree
Fire barriers
Very Low Voltage
- SELV .................................................. ........... 414.1 Limits of the voltage domain
414.3 Sources
414.4 Installation of circuits
701.41 Powder rooms
702.41 Swimming pools
703.414.4.7 Saunas
706.410.3 Conductive speakers
- TBTP .......................... .................................. 414.1 414.3 limits of the voltage domain
414.4 Sources
- Installation of circuits
TBTF ............ ............................................. 411.7 Types of General rules
DDR .............................................. 531.2.1.5 u Implementation
Mobile units .............................................. 717 Emergency Special rules

(cut) ......................................... 463 See emergency cut-off
- XXII - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
V
Steam (piping) ............................. 528.2.2 Motor vehicles Neighborhood with electrical conduits
(power supply) ...... 717 *Wind Special rules
(AR) ............................................. ........ 512.2.15 *Vibration Features
(AH) .................................. .......... 512.2.7.2 Construction Features
voids .................................. .. 262.11 Definition
529.4 Installation rules
Neighborhood of pipes ........................... 528 Volume Rules
of accessibility to touch .............. ..... 235.1 Definition
41/Annex B Non-conductive premises and locations
423 Protection against the risk of burns
____________
- XXIII - 2002
NF C 15-100
(Blank page)
- 24 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Title 1
Title 1 – Scope, object and fundamental principles
11 FIELD OF APPLICATION ............................................. .................................................. 2
12 PURPOSE ................................................ .................................................. ......................... 5
13 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES ............................................... ............................................. 5 131

Protection to ensure safety .................................................. ................................. 5 132 Design of electrical
installations ........... .................................................. .............. 7 133 Choice of electrical
equipment .............................. .................................................. ......10 134 Carrying out electrical
installations and checks during commissioning ...........12
14 LIMITS OF FACILITIES........................................................ .............................................12 141 Origin

of installations... .................................................. .............................................12 142 Downstream limit of
facilities ................................................. ...........................................13
-1-
NF C 15-100 Title 1
11 FIELD OF APPLICATION
H 111 This standard mainly applies to electrical installations such as those of:
a) buildings for residential use; b)

commercial buildings; c) establishments
open to the public; d) industrial
establishments; e) agricultural and
horticultural establishments; f) prefabricated
buildings; g) campsites and
similar facilities; h) construction sites, funfairs, fairs,
exhibitions and other temporary installations; i) marinas;
j) public or private lighting installations.

(1)
Public lighting installations are subject to a specific standard. Generally speaking, .
this standard is applicable to all electrical installations supplied with a voltage not more than 1000 volts in
alternating current and 1500 volts in current. continuous.
The rules of this standard are supplemented for certain installations by specific standards; this is the case for:
(2) - installations in premises for medical use; - cold cathode

discharge lamps supplied with high voltage from one (3) low voltage installation
.
The list given above is not exhaustive and for example, under the term commercial use, it is necessary to
include offices, administrations, associations and groups of all kinds and, in general, any activity in the tertiary
sector classified or not in establishments open to the public.
Title 7 and the UTE C 15-xxx series guides also deal with specific installations such as temporary installations,
electrical service premises, mobile or transportable units, etc.
H 112 It is applicable:
a) circuits supplied with a nominal voltage not more than 1,000 V in alternating current and 1,500 V in direct
current;
(1) NF C 17-200
(2) NF C 15-211
(3) NF EN 50107 (C 15-150-2)
-2-
NF C 15-100 Title 1
H
in alternating current, the preferential frequencies taken into account in this standard are 50 Hz, 60 Hz
and 400 Hz. The use of other frequencies for particular applications is not excluded;
For frequencies above 100 Hz, precautions must be taken, particularly for pipelines due to the increase in
conductor impedance. The UTE C 15-421 guide gives indications for installations powered between 100 and
400 Hz. b) circuits, other than the internal circuits of devices, operating at a voltage greater than 1,000
H V from a voltage installation at most equal to 1,000 V in alternating current, for example: discharge lamp
circuits, electrostatic dust collectors;
The application of this paragraph is limited to special cases for which high voltage is necessary to directly
power a single user device, the protection, control or sectioning devices forming part of the low voltage
installation which supplies the primary of the transformer.
H c) any wiring and any pipework which is not subject to the standards relating to
operating devices;
d) all user facilities located outside buildings; e) fixed communication and information
technology, signaling or control pipes (with the exception of internal circuits of devices); f) extensions or
modifications of installations as well as parts of existing installations affected by these
extensions or modifications.
113 This standard does not apply to:
a) electric traction equipment (including rolling and signaling equipment);
b) electrical equipment of automobiles;
c) electrical installations of caravans and leisure vehicles;
d) electrical installations on board ships, fixed and mobile platforms at sea;
e) electrical installations on board aircraft;
f) installations in mines and quarries;
Mines and quarries are subject to regulatory requirements, but the safety rules of this standard are applicable.
H g) equipment for reducing radio interference, to the extent that they do not
do not compromise the security of the installations;
h) electric fences;
(4)
Electric fence installations are subject to a specific standard .
H i) lightning rod installations in buildings.

(5)
Lightning rod installations are subject to specific standards .
H NOTE - Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to operations is covered in 443.
(4) NF C 15-140
(5) NF C 17-100 and NF C 17-102
-3-
NF C 15-100 Title 1
H 114 This standard does not apply:
- public energy distribution networks; - production and transmission

facilities for these networks.
Electric energy production and distribution works placed under the concession regime are subject to the provisions of the
decree of May 17, 2001.
H NOTE - The protection of low voltage installations against faults between high voltage networks and earth is covered in 442.
The diagrams of the different types of situations with regard to high voltage were introduced in 442 in order to give the user of
the standard an overview including the distribution networks or HV installations supplying LV installations, and thus facilitate
sizing in terms of overvoltages, performance and safety.
H 115 Electrical equipment is only considered with regard to its choice and installation conditions.
This also concerns equipment assemblies that comply with the standards applicable to them.
This standard does not in principle deal with the protection of internal circuits of user equipment (see 430).
H 116 The application of these rules does not exempt from respecting the administrative regulations with which certain installations
are required to comply.
As of the date of publication of these rules, the main administrative regulations concerning certain facilities are as follows:
- the decree of November 14, 1988 relating to the protection of workers in (6) establishments which use electrical currents
and implementing orders;
- the decree of September 23, 1991 supplementing the general regulations for extractive industries (creating a title entitled
Electricity);
- the safety regulations relating to protection against the risks of fire and panic (7) in establishments open to the public;
- instructions concerning electricity installations in historic monuments,

established by the Ministry of National Education, April 24, 1952; Decree No. 92-587
- (amended)(8) relating to the Electromagnetic Compatibility directive

(EMC Directive) 1: Directive 89/336 EEC (amended) – 2: Directive 92/31 EEC;
- the safety regulations concerning the measures to be observed in the construction, fittings and occupation of barracks and
temporary buildings;
- orders issued pursuant to the law relating to classified establishments;
(6) C 12-101
(7) C 12-201
(8) UTE C 00-200
-4-
NF C 15-100 Title 1
- decrees and orders taken pursuant to the law of May 2, 1930 relating to the protection of natural monuments or sites of an
artistic, historical, scientific, legendary or picturesque character;
- the decree relating to fire protection in residential buildings;

- the safety regulations in high-rise buildings;
- the “Machines” directive 98/37/ EC of 06/22/98.
117 The execution of new installations, modifications or extensions of existing installations, as well as the maintenance of all
H
these installations must only be entrusted to people who have the knowledge enabling them to design and carry out the work
correctly in accordance with these rules.
12 PURPOSE
121 This standard lists the rules for the design and construction of electrical installations with a view to ensuring safety and
their satisfactory operation, taking into account the intended use.
Satisfactory operation means that the installation must function correctly for the purpose assigned to it - in particular the power
supply of the user devices - but without a particular level of efficiency or economy. Any economic consideration is excluded
from the rules of this standard.
H 122 Article 13 of this standard lists the fundamental principles. It does not contain detailed technical requirements which may
be subject to modification depending on technical developments.
123 Titles 3 to 7 of this standard include technical requirements which must be respected in order to ensure compliance of
electrical installations with the fundamental principles set out in 13.
124 Definitions of the main terms used in this standard are covered in Title 2 .
H 13 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES
131 Protection to ensure safety
131.1 General
The rules set forth in this section are intended to ensure the safety of people, domestic animals and property against dangers
and damages that may result from the normal use of these facilities.
NOTE – Two main types of dangers are to be feared in electrical installations: - shock currents; -
temperatures that are too
high which could cause burns, fires or other effects
dangerous.
These rules are developed in the different parts 4 of the standard.
-5-
NF C 15-100 Title 1
H 131.2 Protection against electric shock
131.2.1 Protection against direct contact
People and domestic animals must be protected against dangers that may arise from contact with active parts of the installation.
This protection can be ensured by one of the methods listed below:
- provision preventing a current from passing through the human body or the body of an animal; -
limitation of the current that can pass through the body.
Provisions for protection against direct contact are described in Appendix A.1 of Part 4-41.
H 131.2.2 Protection against indirect contact
People and domestic animals must be protected against dangers that may arise from contact with masses in the event of a fault.
This protection can be ensured by one of the methods listed below:
- provision preventing a fault current from passing through the human body or the body of a domestic animal;
- limitation of the fault current that can pass through the body; - automatic cut-off within
a determined time as soon as a fault appears, likely to give rise, in the event of contact with masses, to the passage of a current
through the body.
NOTE – In conjunction with protection against indirect contact, the use of equipotential bonds constitutes a fundamental safety
principle.
Provisions for protection against indirect contact are described in Part 4-41.
By definition, indirect contact refers to contact with masses, but protective measures against indirect contact are intended to protect
people against the dangers that may arise from contact not only with the masses themselves but also with any part conductive in
contact with masses.
H 131.3 Protection against thermal effects
The electrical installation must be arranged in such a way as to exclude any risk of ignition of flammable materials due to high
temperatures or electric arcs. In addition, during normal use, people and pets must not incur any risk of burns.
Provisions to ensure protection against thermal effects in normal service are given in Part 4-42.
H 131.4 Overcurrent protection
People, pets and property must be protected against damage from excessively high temperatures or mechanical stress due to
overcurrents that may occur in active conductors.
This protection can be ensured using one of the methods listed below: - automatic cut-off before the overcurrent
reaches a dangerous value

given its duration; -
limitation of the maximum overcurrent to a safe value taking into account its duration.
-6-
NF C 15-100 Title 1
The rules for ensuring protection against overcurrents are described in part 4-43 of the standard:
- article 433 for protection against overloads; - article 434 for protection against
short circuits.
H 131.5 Protection against fault currents
The conductors, other than the active conductors, and other parts intended for the flow of fault currents must be able to withstand
these currents without reaching too high temperatures.
NOTES -
1 - Particular attention should be paid to earth fault currents and leakage currents.
2 - For active conductors, compliance with 131.4 ensures their protection against overcurrents resulting from faults.
The rules for ensuring protection against fault currents are described in part 5-54, and in particular in 543.
H 131.6 Overvoltage protection
131.6.1 Persons, domestic animals and property must be protected against the harmful consequences of a fault between the live parts
of circuits supplied at different voltages.
131.6.2 People, domestic animals and property must be protected against the harmful consequences of overvoltages due to other
causes when such overvoltages are likely to occur (atmospheric phenomena, switching overvoltages, etc.) when the risk unacceptable.
The rules for ensuring protection against overvoltages are described in part 4-44 :
- article 442 for industrial frequency overvoltages; - article 443 for overvoltages of
atmospheric origin or due to operations.
H
132 Design of electrical installations
132.1 General
When designing an electrical installation, the following factors must be taken into account to ensure: - the protection of people,
domestic animals and property
in accordance with 131 ; - the satisfactory operation of the electrical installation according to the intended use.
The necessary guidance for the design of the electrical installation is listed in paragraphs 132.2 to 132.5. The requirements that the
design of the electrical installation must meet are the subject of paragraphs 132.6 to 132.12.
These rules are developed in titles 3 and 4 of the standard.
H 132.2 Characteristics of normal or replacement power supply
132.2.1 Nature of current: alternating current or direct current
-7-
NF C 15-100 Title 1
H 132.2.2 Nature and number of conductors:
- Alternating current : phase conductor(s); neutral

conductor; protective
conductor;
– Direct current: conductors equivalent to those listed above.
Rules for determining power supply characteristics are given in 3-31.
H 132.2.3 Characteristic values and tolerances:
- tensions and tolerances; -

frequencies and tolerances; - maximum
admissible current; - prospective short-circuit
current.
132.2.4 Diagram of earth connections and other conditions inherent to the power supply relating to protection.
The different earth connection diagrams are described in 312.2.
H
132.2.5 Special requirements of the electrical energy distributor
See standards NF C 14-100 and NF C 13-100.
H 132.3 Nature of the request
The number, type and section of circuits necessary for lighting, heating, motive power, control, signaling, communication and
information technology networks, etc., are determined on the basis of the following instructions:
- points of consumption of electrical energy demand; - current IB employment ; See 311.3

for its determination. - daily and
annual variation in demand; - special
H conditions ; - control, signaling, communication networks and monitoring
installations
information technology, etc.
132.4 Safety or replacement power supply

H
- sources (nature, characteristics); - circuits powered
by the safety source.
The rules relating to safety or replacement power supplies are given in 313.2 and in 35 and 56.
H 132.5 Environmental conditions
See 512 of this standard.
The environmental conditions in the different premises (or locations) are given in the UTE C 15-103 guide.
-8-
NF C 15-100 Title 1
H 132.6 Conductor section
The cross section of the conductors must be determined according to:
a) their maximum admissible temperature; b) the

allowable voltage drop; c) electromechanical
stresses likely to occur in the event of a short circuit; d) other mechanical constraints to which drivers may
be subjected; e) the maximum value of the impedance making it possible to ensure the operation of the
protection against faults and short circuits.

NOTE – The points listed above concern, firstly, the safety of electrical installations. Section values larger than those required for
safety may be desirable for economical operation.
The conditions for determining conductor sections are given in the following articles:
- 523 for the admissible currents as a function of the maximum admissible temperature;
- 533 for constraints in the event of a short circuit; - 532 and
543 for constraints due to fault currents; - 525 for voltage drop.
The practical application of these conditions is given in guides UTE C 15-105 for insulated conductors and
cables and UTE C 15-107 for circuits comprising prefabricated pipelines.
H 132.7 Installation methods and types of pipes
The choice of pipe laying method depends on:

- the nature of the premises or locations; - the nature
of the walls and other construction elements supporting the
pipes;
- the accessibility of pipes to people and domestic animals; - tension; - electromechanical stresses
likely to occur in the
event of a short circuit; - other constraints (for example mechanical, thermal and associated with fire, etc.)
to which the pipes may be subjected during the construction of the electrical installation or in service.
The rules relating to the methods of laying pipes are developed in 52.
Practical instructions for carrying out the different installation methods are also given in the UTE C 15-520
guide.
H 132.8 Protective devices
The characteristics of the protective devices must be determined according to their function which may be, for
example, protection against the effects:
- overcurrents (overloads, short circuits); - earth fault
currents; - overvoltages; - drops or absence
of tension.
-9-
NF C 15-100 Title 1
H Protective devices must operate at current, voltage and time values appropriate to the circuit characteristics
and possible hazards.
The rules relating to the choice of protection devices are developed in 53.
Practical application instructions are also given in guides UTE C 15-105 and UTE C 15-107.
H 132.9 Emergency cut-off devices
If it is necessary, in the event of danger, to immediately de-energize a circuit, a cutting device must be
installed so as to be easily recognizable and quickly operable.
The rules relating to emergency disconnection are given in 463 and for the choice of devices in 536.3.
H 132.10 Sectioning devices
Isolating devices must be provided to allow the isolation of the electrical installation, circuits or individual
devices, in order to allow maintenance, verification, fault location and repairs.
The rules relating to sectioning are given in 462 and, for the choice of sectioning devices, in 536.2.
H
132.11 Independence of the electrical installation
The electrical installation must be arranged in such a way as to exclude any harmful material influence
between the electrical installation and the non-electrical installations of the building.
The rules relating to the independence of the electrical installation are given in 515 and, for pipes, in 528.
H 132.12 Accessibility of electrical equipment
Electrical equipment must be arranged in such a way as to allow, to the extent necessary:
- to leave sufficient space to carry out the initial installation and subsequent replacement of individual
equipment;
- accessibility for service, verification, maintenance and repair purposes.
Rules relating to the accessibility of electrical equipment are given in 513.
H 133 Choice of electrical equipment
133.1 General
All electrical equipment must comply with the appropriate European standard (EN) or harmonization
document (HD) or with the national standard resulting from the HD. In the absence of EN or HD, the
materials must comply with the appropriate national standards. In all other cases, reference should be
made to the appropriate IEC standard or the appropriate national standard of another country.
When there is no standard applicable to electrical equipment, it must be chosen by mutual agreement
between the user or project owner and the installer.
See also 511.
- 10 -
NF C 15-100 Title 1
H
The characteristics of the electrical equipment chosen must correspond to the conditions and characteristics defined for the electrical
installation (see 132), they must in particular satisfy the following requirements.
133.2.1 Voltage
Electrical equipment must be adapted to the maximum value of the permanent voltage (effective value in alternating current) likely to
be applied. This equipment must be appropriate for the anticipated overvoltage category.
NOTE - For certain equipment, it may be necessary to take into account the lowest voltage likely to occur.
133.2.2 Current
Electrical equipment must be chosen taking into account the maximum value of the current intensity (effective value in alternating
current) which passes through them in normal service. It is also necessary to consider the current likely to flow through them in
abnormal conditions, taking into account the duration of the passage of such a current depending on any protection devices.
133.2.3 Frequency If
frequency has an influence on the characteristics of electrical equipment, their nominal frequency must correspond to the frequency
of the supply voltage.
133.2.4 Power
Electrical equipment, chosen on the basis of its power characteristics, must be able to be used at the maximum power it absorbs in
service, taking into account the utilization coefficients and normal service conditions.
H 133.3 Installation conditions
Electrical equipment must be chosen so as to safely withstand the constraints and environmental conditions (see 132.5) specific to
the place where this equipment is installed, and to which it may be subjected. If, however, equipment does not, by its construction,
have the qualities corresponding to the location of its installation, it can be used provided that it is provided with appropriate additional
protection as an integral part of the installation.
See external influences (512).
H 133.4 Prevention of adverse effects
The equipment must be chosen so as not to cause, in normal service, any harmful effects to other equipment or to the power supply
network, including during maneuvers. In this context, among the factors that can have an influence, we can cite:
-
the power factor; current calls; the
-
imbalance of loads; harmonics.
-
-
Indications on the absence of disorders are given in 33.
- 11 -
NF C 15-100 Title 1
H
134 Carrying out electrical installations and checks during commissioning
134.1 Realization
Careful execution by qualified personnel and the use of appropriate materials are essential for the
construction of electrical installations.
The characteristics of electrical equipment, determined in accordance with 133, must not be compromised
by mounting.
Drivers must be identified in accordance with 514.3.
The connections of the conductors to each other and to other electrical equipment must be carried out in
such a way as to ensure safe and durable contacts.
Electrical equipment must be installed in such a way as to ensure the planned cooling conditions.
Electrical equipment likely to give rise to high temperatures or produce electric arcs must be arranged or
protected in such a way as to eliminate any risk of ignition of flammable materials. Any external part of
electrical equipment whose temperature is likely to harm human health must be arranged or protected in
such a way as to prevent any accidental contact.
The rules for choosing and implementing materials are given in Title 5 .
H 134.2 Verification during commissioning
Electrical installations must be tested and checked before they are put into service as well as during any
major modification, to ensure that they have been carried out in accordance with this standard.
The conditions for checking electrical installations when they are put into service are given in 6-61.
By significant modification, we mean a modification of the structure of the installation such as:
- modification of the earth connection diagram; - increase

in the short-circuit power of the power supply; - modification or addition of
distribution circuits; - creation of new distribution boards.
14 LIMITS OF FACILITIES
141 Origin of installations
The origin of the installations defined in this standard corresponds to:
a) for installations supplied directly by a public distribution network

low tension,
- 12 -
NF C 15-100 Title 1
(9)
• in the case of limited power connection to the output terminals of
the general control and protection device (AGCP);
(9) • in the case of monitored power connection at the downstream terminals of the device
disconnecting device with visible cut-off.
b) for installations supplied by a transformer station, at the output terminals of the
transformer,
Low voltage installations can be powered:
• by a high-voltage public distribution network, via a (10) so-called “delivery” transformation station
complying with the standard in force;
• by a high voltage installation via a transformer station,
(11) in accordance with the standard in force .
c) for installations powered by an independent low-voltage energy source,

the installation includes the source of electrical energy.
142 Downstream limit of installations
The scope of this standard is limited, downstream:

- at the power terminals of user equipment or equipment supplied by fixed pipes; - to power socket bases in
other cases.
However, the fixed equipment of the installation is subject to specific rules in this standard for their choice
and implementation.
Certain applications are subject to specific standards to which reference should be made, for example: (12) -
electrical
installations of elevators and goods lifts; (13) - electrical
equipment of industrial machines
.
______________
(9) NF C 14-100
(10) NF C 13-100, NF C 13-101, NF C 13-102, NF C 13-103
(11) NF C 13-200
(12) NF P 82-201
(13) NF EN 60204 (C 79-130)
- 13 -
NF C 15-100 Title 1
(Blank page)
- 14 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
Title 2 – Definitions
21 TERMS RELATING TO THE CHARACTERISTICS OF INSTALLATIONS..............................18 211

General characteristics .............. .................................................. ..............................18 212
Sizes ............... .................................................. .................................................. .18 213 Miscellaneous
installations ............................................. .................................................. .......18 214
Isolation ......................................... .................................................. .............................19 215
Factors ............... .................................................. .................................................. ...20 216 External
influences ............................................. .................................................. ...........20
22 VOLTAGE............................................ .................................................. .....................20 222 Alternating current voltage

ranges ..................... ............................................. 21,223 Domains of direct current voltages ......................................... .........................21
23 TERMS RELATING TO PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK..............22 236

Insulation.............................. .................................................. .............................................26 237
Classification of materials regarding protection against electric
shock........................................ .................................................. .27
24 TERMS RELATING TO GROUNDING ..................................... .................29
25 TERMS RELATING TO ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS............................................ ...........30 252 Terms

relating to currents ................................ .................................................. .......31 253 Definitions relating to
disconnecting, control and protection devices....32 254 Definitions relating to the characteristics of
protection devices.............. .............33
26 TERMS RELATING TO PIPES .......................................... .......................34 261 General

terms ....................... .................................................. ..................................34 262 Installation
methods.......... .................................................. .................................................. 35
27 TERMS RELATING TO MATERIALS ......................................... ..............................37 270 General

terms ............... .................................................. .............................................37 271 Terms relating to
travel possibilities .................................................. ...........37
28 SECTIONING AND CONTROL .......................................... ..................................38
29 COMPETENCE OF PEOPLE ............................................. ...................................38
- 15 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
LIST OF DEFINITIONS
Power supply of Crows .................................... 262.9

replacement ............................. 213.3.4
Power supply Fused circuit breaker ............... 253.3
safety .................................... 213.3.1
Removable (hardware) ............... 271.4 Automatic cut-off
food ......................................... 234.5
ACP ......................................... 253.7 Cut-off for mechanical maintenance 281.2
Apparatus ... ............................. 270.3 Assigned Emergency cut-off ......................... 281.3
(value) ................ ........ 212.1 Permissible (permanent) current
of a conductor (Iz)................... 252.2
Warned (person) ................................ 291.2 Rated current of a device
protection(In)................................... 254.1
Main earth bar .............. 242.5 Conventional current of
operation (I2)................... 254.2
Barrier .................................. 235.4 Main earth Contact current ......................... 231.4
terminal ...... ........ 242.5 Loop at bottom of Short circuit current (Ik) .......... 252.5
excavation ............... 241.6 Leakage current .......................... 233.5
Nozzle ................... ......................... 262.6 Cable Operating current of a circuit (IB) .. 252.1
(insulated) ............... .......... 261.2 Single-core Fault current (If) ................... 233.3
cable ............... 261.3 Multi-core Earth fault current ......... 233.4
cable ................... ..... 261.4 Multi-conductor Differential-residual current ............... 233.7
cable ............... 261.4 Current in the conductor
protection ................................... 233.6
Single-core cable .......................... 261.3 Setting current (Ir) ................... 254.3
Pipeline .................... ............ 261.6 Pipeline fixed Overload current.................. 252.4
to walls ....... 262.1 Prefabricated pipework ........... Default ........................................ 233.1
262.14 Residual-differential current
device ......................................... 253.6
Channel .................................... 262.2 Cable Circuit breaker ................................. 253.4
tray ......... .............. 262.3 Current voltage ranges
alternative ......................................... 222
Electric shock ........................... 231.1 Current voltage ranges
continuous ......................................... 223
Electrical circuit ......................... 251.1 Control Double insulation ......................... 236.4
circuit ............... 281.5 Distribution circuit .................. Cable ladder ......................... 262.12
251.2 Safety electrical circuit ....... 213.3.3 Conductive element .................... 232.9
Bass gear set
voltage ......................................... 251.6
Terminal circuit ........................... 251.3 Class 0 Envelope .................................. 235.3
(equipment) .............. ... 237.1 Class I Non-conductive environment ... 216.2
(equipment) ............... 237.2 Class II Utilization factor .................... 215.1
(equipment) ............... .. 237.3 Class III Simultaneity factor .............. 215.2
(equipment) ................ 237.4 Fixed 271.5 .........................
Collars ......................... ................ 262.13 Functional Scabbard ....................................... 262.6
control ............. 281.4 Active driver .............. ........... Sheath (of a cable) ......................... 261.5
232.1 Equipotential bonding conductor ...... 243.4 Gallery ......................................... 262.7
Conductor (insulated) ....................... 261.1 Chute ......................................... 262.8
Earthing conductor of the Fault loop impedance. 233.2
Electrical installations......................... 211.1
neutral ......................................... 242.4
Neutral conductor (N)................... 232.2 PEN Temporary installations ............... 213.1
conductor ......................... .232.3 _ Site installations ............... 213.2
Protective conductor (PE) ..... 242.1 Main Emergency installations ............ 213.1.1
protective conductor 242.2 Earthing Work facilities ............... 213.1.2
conductor ..................... 242.3 Semi-permanent installations ..... 213.1.3
Conduit (circular)................................... 262.4 Grounding installation ............... 241.4
Conduit-profile ................... ......... 262.5 Switch (mechanical)................... 253.2
Connection .......................................... 261.7 Insulators (floors, walls) ............... 235.2
Construction (empty of ) .............. 262.11 Contactor Insulation............................................. 236.1
(mechanical) ............... 253.5 Direct Main insulation ......................... 236.2
contact ......... .................... 231.2 Indirect Reinforced insulation ......................... 236.5
contact ............................. 231.3 Voltage to Additional insulation ............... 236.3
frequency constraint Isolation .......................................... 214.1
industrial .................................. 214.2
- 16 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
Equipotential bonding ............... 243.1 Equipotential bonding Qualified (person) ............................. 291.1
Reinforced (insulation)................................... 236.5
functional ................................ 243.3
Equipotential bonding of Distribution network .................. 211.2
protection .................................... 243.2
Mass .............................................. 232.8 Electrical Sectioning .............................. 281.1
equipment ... ..................... 270.1 Equipment for Disconnector .................................. 253.1
use ............................... 270.2 Semi-fixed (hardware) (stationary). 271.3
Mobile (material) ........................... 271.2 Nominal Simple electrical separation ......... 235.6
(value).............. ............. 212.2 Protective separation ............... 235.7
Obstacle ......................................... .... 235.5 Origin of the Insulating floor .................................. 235.2
installation ............... 211.3 Insulating wall ................... ............. Replacement electrical source 213.3.5
235.2 Active part ......................................... 232.4 Dangerous Safety electrical source ......... 213.3.2
active part................ 232.5 Simultaneously accessible parts Additional (insulation) .............. 236.2
232.6 Intermediate part ......................... 232.7 Service Overload .................................... 252.4
passage ......................... 292.2 Maintenance Overcurrent .................................. 252.3
passage .................. .... 292.3 Informed Distribution board ............... 251.5
person ........................... 291.2 Ordinary person (on the plan Tablet ......................................... 262.3
Ambient temperature .................. 216.1
Contact voltage (effective) ............... 234.2
Presumed contact voltage ............... 234.3
electric) .................................... 291.3
Qualified person ......................... 291.1 Portable handheld Fault voltage ......................... 234.1
(equipment) ............... 271.1 Conventional limit voltage of
contact (UL) ................................... 234.4
Breaking capacity (Icu) ............... 254.4 Shock withstand voltage of
materials........................................ 221.2
Breaking capacity rated in Rated voltage of an installation 221.1
service (Ics) .................................... 254.5
Main (insulation) ............... 236.1 Tensions (domains of) ................ 222,
223
Earth connection .................................. 241.5 Independent Reference earth ......................... 241.1
earth connection ......... .. 241.7 Protection against impacts Local land .................................. 241.2
Earth (put to) ......................... 241.3
electrical .................................... 231.5
Main protection.............................. 231.6 Protection in the Trench ......................................... 262.10
event of a fault............ 231.7 Supplementary Construction void ......................... 262.11
protection..... ........ 231.8 Overcurrent protection . 251.4 Touch accessibility volume 235.1
Restricted access area ......................... 292.1
(1)
The numbers following the defined term are the International Electrotechnical Vocabulary references.
———————
(1) Publications CEI 50... and Standards NF C 01-...
- 17 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
21 TERMS RELATING TO FACILITY CHARACTERISTICS
VS 211 General characteristics
211.1
electrical installation (826-01-01) set
of associated electrical equipment having coordinated characteristics for a given application.
211.2
distribution network
installations intended for the transport of electrical energy between production sources and use installations.
VS 211.3
origin of the installation (826-01-02)
point of delivery of electrical energy to the electrical installation.
An electrical installation can have several origins.
213.1.1
emergency installations
installations necessary to compensate for an operating incident.
212 Sizes
VS
212.1
assigned value (151-16-08)
value of a quantity, generally set by the manufacturer for specified operation of a component of a device
or equipment.
This definition applies to a quantity such as a rated voltage, a rated current, etc.
212.2
nominal value
value used to name a material by a quantity which characterizes it (intensity, voltage, etc.). This quantity
is generally close to the rated value of this material.
For example, for an adjustable circuit breaker with rated current In, the rated current corresponds to the
maximum rated setting current.
213 Miscellaneous installations
213.1
temporary installations
installations which only have a duration limited to the circumstances which motivate them.
- 18 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
The following temporary installations can be distinguished:

213.1.2
work installations installations
carried out to allow repairs or transformations of installations without interrupting their operation.
213.1.3
semi-permanent installations installations
intended for developments of limited duration, outside the scope of the usual activities of the premises or recurring periodically.
Examples of semi-permanent installations include installations at fairs, exhibitions and fairground activities.
213.2
site installations temporary
installations intended for the execution of building construction and similar works.
Outdoor installations on large construction sites or operations subject to severe conditions may be subject to additional rules.
(2)
.
213.3
security installations
213.3.1
safety power supply power supply intended to
maintain the operation of devices essential for the safety of people.
VS 213.3.2
safety electrical source (826-01-05) electrical source
intended to be part of a safety electrical supply.
213.3.3
electrical safety circuit (826-01-06) electrical circuit
intended to be part of an electrical safety installation.
213.3.4
replacement electrical power supply intended to maintain,
for reasons other than personal safety, the operation of an electrical installation or parts thereof.
213.3.5
VS
replacement electrical source (826-01-08) electrical source
intended to maintain, for reasons other than the safety of persons, the power supply of an electrical installation or parts thereof, in
the event of interruption of normal power supply.
214 Isolation
VS
214.1
insulation (151-15-42) set of
properties which characterize the ability of insulation to ensure its function.
Note – Examples of relevant properties are resistance, breakdown voltage.
———————
(2) Publication IEC 60621
- 19 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
214.2
admissible voltage stress at industrial frequency voltage stress
taken equal to the dielectric test voltage (50 Hz) whose value is fixed by the corresponding equipment
rules.
215 Factors
215.1
utilization factor ratio
of the power actually absorbed by a utilization device to its nominal power.
215.2
simultaneity factor ratio
of the sum of the nominal powers of the devices capable of operating simultaneously to the sum of the
nominal powers of all the devices supplied by the same circuit or the same installation.
The powers used to determine the simultaneity factors are assigned, if necessary, utilization factors.
216 External influences
VS 216.1
ambient temperature (826-01-03)
temperature of the air or environment at the location where the equipment is to be used.
The ambient temperature to be considered for the equipment is the temperature in the place where this
equipment must be installed, resulting from the influence of all other equipment placed in the same place
and in operation, without taking into account the thermal contribution of the equipment considered.
216.2
VS
non-conductive environment (826-03-36)
provision by which a person or domestic or livestock animal touching an accessible conductive part that
has become a dangerous live part is protected by the high impedance of its environment (e.g. walls and
insulating floors) and by the absence of grounded conductive parts.
22 TENSIONS
221.1
VS
nominal voltage of an installation (826-02-01) voltage
by which an electrical installation or part of an electrical installation is designated.
The voltage value in the installation may differ from the nominal voltage within the specified tolerances
(see 313.1.1).
221.2
rated impulse withstand voltage of equipment peak value
of an impulse voltage of prescribed shape and polarity that the equipment is capable of withstanding
without damage under the specified test conditions and to which reference is made for the values of the
isolation distances.
Paragraph 443.2 classifies equipment into four overvoltage categories according to the value of the rated
impulse withstand voltage of the equipment.
- 20 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
222 Alternating current voltage ranges
The alternating current voltage ranges, in which the voltages must be classified
installations according to their nominal voltage, are defined in table 22A:
- for systems connected directly to earth (TT and TN schemes), by the values
effective voltage between a phase conductor and earth and between two conductors
phase,
- for systems not directly connected to earth (IT diagram), by the effective value of
the voltage between two phase conductors.
Table 22A - Alternating current voltage ranges
(effective values)
AREAS CONNECTED SYSTEMS UNLINKED SYSTEMS

DIRECTLY TO EARTH DIRECTLY TO EARTH (*)
Between phase and Between phases Between phases

earth
I U < 50 U < 50 U < 50
II 50 < U < 600 50 < U < 1000 50 < U < 1000
U is the nominal voltage of the installation (volts)
(*) If the neutral is distributed, the equipment powered between phase and neutral is chosen to
such that their insulation corresponds to the voltage between phases (see 512.1.1).
This classification of areas of tension does not exclude the possibility of introducing
intermediate limits for certain installation rules.
The very low voltages TBTS, TBTP and TBTF (respectively called in English
SELV, PELV and FELV) are in domain I.
223 Direct current voltage ranges
The direct current voltage ranges in which the voltages must be classified
installations according to their nominal voltage are defined in table 22B:
- for systems connected directly to earth, by the values of the voltage between a pole
and the earth and between two poles;
- for systems not directly connected to earth, by the value of the voltage between two
poles.
Table 22B - Direct current voltage ranges
AREAS CONNECTED SYSTEMS UNLINKED SYSTEMS

DIRECTLY TO EARTH DIRECTLY TO EARTH (*)
Between pole and Between poles Between poles

earth
I U < 120 U < 120 U < 120
II 120 < U < 900 120 < U < 1500 120 < U < 1500
U is the nominal voltage of the installation (volts)
(*) If the compensator is distributed, the equipment supplied between pole and compensator is
chosen in such a way that their insulation corresponds to the voltage between poles
- 21 - Updated: June 2005

NF C 15-100 Title 2
NOTES -
1 - The values in this table refer to smooth direct current.
By smooth direct current, we mean a current whose ripple rate is not greater than 10%.
2 - This classification of voltage ranges does not exclude the possibility of introducing intermediate limits for certain installation
rules.
The very low voltages TBTS, TBTP and TBTF (respectively called in English SELV, PELV and FELV) are
in domain I.
23 TERMS RELATING TO PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK
VS 231.1
electric shock (826-03-01)
physiological effect resulting from the passage of an electric current through the human body or that of a
domestic or livestock animal.
The term electric shock refers to both direct contact (231.2) and indirect contact (231.3).
VS 231.2
direct contact (826-03-03)
electrical contact of people or domestic or livestock animals with live parts.
231.3
indirect contact (826-03-04)
electrical contact of people or domestic or livestock animals with masses energized following an insulation
fault.
231.4
contact current (826-02-12) electric
current passing through the human body or that of a domestic or livestock animal when it is in contact
with one or more accessible parts of an electrical installation or equipment electrical.
231.5
protection against electric shock (826-03-02) set of
measures ensuring a tolerable risk of electric shock
231.6
main protection (826-03-05)
protection against electric shock in the absence of a fault.
231.7
fault protection (826-03-06) protection
against electric shock under fault conditions.
231.8
additional protection (826-03-07) protective
measure in addition to the main protection and/or protection in the event of a fault.

NF C 15-100 Title 2
232.1
active conductor
conductor assigned to the transmission of electrical energy, including the neutral conductor in alternating
current and the compensator in direct current.
VS 232.2
neutral conductor (N) (826-05-07)
conductor electrically connected to the neutral point and capable of contributing to the distribution of
electrical energy.
The neutral point of a polyphase system is defined as a common point of a polyphase network connected
in a star or midpoint of a single-phase network. (826-05-05)
232.3
PEN conductor
conductor providing both the functions of protective conductor and neutral conductor.
NOTE - The PEN designation results from the combination of the two symbols PE for the protective conductor and N for the neutral
conductor.
VS 232.4
active part (826-03-08)
conductor or conductive part intended to be under voltage in normal service, as well as the neutral
conductor but, by convention, not the PEN conductor.
NOTE - The term active part does not necessarily imply a risk of electric shock.
232.5
dangerous active part (826-03-13) active
part which can cause, under certain conditions, a harmful electric shock.
232.6
simultaneously accessible parts (826-03-12)
conductors or conductive parts which can be touched simultaneously by a person or by domestic or
livestock animals.
NOTE - The simultaneously accessible parts can be:
- active parts; - masses;
- conductive
elements; - protective conductors;
- the ground or a conductive floor.
232.7
intermediate part
inaccessible conductive part which is not energized in normal service, but which can be energized in the
event of a fault.
The intermediate parts are in particular the conductive parts of class II equipment which are isolated from
the active parts by main insulation only.
VS
232.8
mass (826-03-10)
accessible conductive part.
conductive part of equipment, likely to be touched, and which is not normally under voltage, but can
become so when the main insulation fails.
NOTE- A conductive part of equipment which can only be energized in the event of a fault via a ground is not considered as a ground.
- 23 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
The term mass essentially designates the accessible metallic parts of electrical equipment separated from
the active parts by a main insulation only (236.1) but likely to be accidentally put into electrical connection
with active parts following a failure of the measures taken to ensure their insulation. This failure may result
from a fault in the main insulation or the fixing and protection arrangements. It follows that :
- accessible metal parts of electrical equipment other than those of class II (237.3), metal armor of
cables, metal conduits when they contain insulated conductors are masses;
- no part of class II electrical equipment is considered earth.
232.9
VS
conductive element (foreign to the electrical installation) (826-03-11)
conductive part not forming part of the electrical installation and likely to introduce an electrical potential,
generally that of a local earth.
The following may be conductive elements:
- metal elements used in the construction of buildings; - metal pipes for gas, water,
heating, etc., and the non-electric appliances connected to them (radiators, non-electric cookers, metal
sinks, etc.);
- non-insulating floors and walls (235.2).
233.1
fault
failure of the insulation of an active part producing a reduction in the insulation level and potentially
causing an accidental connection between two points of different potentials.
A fault can be clear or present a certain impedance. A clear fault between active conductors is a short
circuit.
233.2
fault loop impedance total impedance
offered to the flow of current resulting from a fault.
In each case, it is necessary to specify the nature of the impedance of the fault loop, for example the
impedance of the earth fault loop in the event of a fault between an active part and the earth, the
impedance of the phase-neutral fault loop in the event of a fault between a phase conductor and the
neutral conductor.
VS
233.3
fault current (If) (826-02-11) current
flowing at a given fault point, following an insulation fault.
In this document, the expression “fault current” is reserved for a current flowing between an active
conductor and a ground or a protective conductor.
233.4
earth fault current fault current
flowing to earth.
VS
233.5
leakage current (826-02-19)
electric current which, under normal operating conditions, flows to earth or into conductive elements.
233.6
current in protective conductor (826-02-20) electric current
flowing in a protective conductor, such as leakage or fault current.
- 24 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
233.7
VS
differential-residual current (826-02-18)
algebraic sum of the instantaneous values of the electric currents circulating in all the active conductors at
a given point of an electrical circuit.
234.1
fault voltage (826-02-02) voltage
between a given fault point and the reference earth, following an insulation fault.
234.2
contact voltage (effective) (826-02-05) voltage
between conductive parts when touched by a person or a domestic or livestock animal.
NOTE - The value of the effective contact voltage can be significantly influenced by the impedance of the person or domestic or
livestock animal in electrical contact with these conductive parts.
234.3
presumed contact voltage (826-02-03) voltage
appearing between simultaneously accessible conductive parts when these conductive parts are not
touched by a person or a domestic or livestock animal.
234.4
conventional contact voltage limit (UL) (826-02-04) maximum
value of the presumed contact voltage that it is admitted to be able to maintain indefinitely under conditions
of specified external influences.
In certain regulatory texts, this voltage is called safety limit voltage.
VS
234.5
automatic power interruption (826-03-18) interruption of
one or more active conductors caused by the automatic operation of a protective device in the event of a
fault.
235.1
volume of accessibility to touch (826-03-19) area
extending between any point on the surface where people usually stand and move around, and the limit
that a person can reach with the hand, in all directions , without auxiliary means See also appendix B2 of
part 4-41.
235.2
insulating floors and
walls the floors and walls of premises or locations can be considered insulating when their electrical
resistance is high enough to limit the fault current that they can transmit to a non-dangerous value.
The resistance measured under the conditions described in article 612.5 must be at least equal to: - 50,000
ohms if the nominal voltage of the installation is not greater than 500 volts
(300 volts relative to earth);
- 100,000 ohms if the nominal voltage of the installation is greater than 500 volts
(300 volts relative to earth).
In general, wooden parquet floors, floors covered with carpet or with plastic or linoleum coverings are
considered insulating floors.
On the other hand, concrete or tiled floors are not considered insulating; it is the same for all metal
coverings.
- 25 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
In certain premises, a metal grid connected to earth is placed under the carpet to limit the effects of static
electricity. The presence of this grid can reduce the electrical resistance presented by the ground to a
value lower than that allowing the ground to be considered as insulating.
235.3
enclosure
ensuring protection of equipment against certain external influences and in all directions, protection
against direct contact.
VS
235.4
barrier (826-03-23)
part ensuring protection against direct contact in any usual direction of access.
235.5
obstacle (826-03-24)
element preventing incidental direct contact but not preventing direct contact by deliberate action.
235.6
simple (electrical) separation (826-03-28)
separation between electrical circuits or between an electrical circuit and the local earth by primary
insulation.
235.7
protective (electrical) separation (826-03-29) separation
between two electrical circuits by means of:
- double insulation or
- main insulation and electrical protection by screen or
- reinforced insulation.
236 Insulations
VS 236.1
insulation (151-03-30)
Set of materials used to insulate a device.
236.2
main insulation (826-03-14)
insulation of dangerous active parts which ensures main protection.
NOTE - This concept is not applicable to insulation used exclusively for functional purposes.
236.3
supplemental insulation (826-03-15)
independent insulation provided, in addition to the primary insulation, as protection in the event of a fault.
236.4
double insulation (826-03-16)
insulation including both primary insulation and supplemental insulation.
236.5
reinforced insulation (826-03-17)
insulation of dangerous active parts ensuring a degree of protection against electric shock equivalent to
that of double insulation.
NOTE - Reinforced insulation may have several layers which cannot be tested separately as main insulation or additional insulation.
- 26 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
237 Classification of equipment with regard to protection against electric shock
The class numbers are intended not to reflect the level of security of the equipment, but only to indicate how
security is achieved.
It is up to the manufacturer to declare the class of his equipment.
The provisions of this section are those of the general standard relating to protection (3) against electric shock
.
237.1
class 0 equipment
equipment in which protection against electric shock relies on the main insulation; This implies that no
provision is made for the connection of accessible conductive parts, if any, to a protective conductor forming
part of the fixed wiring of the installation, protection in the event of an insulation fault mainly based on the
environment.
Class 0 equipment is no longer permitted.
237.2
Class I equipment
equipment in which protection against electric shock does not rely solely on the main insulation, but which
includes an additional safety measure in the form of means of connecting the conductive parts accessible to
a protective conductor placed to earth, forming part of the fixed wiring of the installation, in such a way that
accessible conductive parts cannot become dangerous in the event of a fault in the main insulation.
NOTE - For equipment intended to be used with a flexible cable, these means include a protective conductor forming part of the
flexible cable.
The essential rules of class I concern the creation of equipotentiality between all the masses and the earth
terminal connecting the equipment to the protective conductor of the installation.
237.3
Class II equipment
equipment in which protection against electric shock does not rely solely on the main insulation but which
includes additional safety measures, such as double insulation or reinforced insulation. These measures do
not include a means of protective earthing and do not depend on the installation conditions.
NOTES -
1 - Class II equipment may be equipped with means to ensure the continuity of protection circuits, provided that these means are
an integral part of the equipment and are isolated from accessible surfaces in accordance with the requirements of class II.
2 - In certain cases, it may be necessary to distinguish between “totally insulated” and “metal-encased” class II equipment.
3 - Class II equipment in a metal casing may only be fitted with a device for connecting a potential equalization conductor to the
casing if this necessity is recognized in the corresponding standard.
4 - Class II equipment may only be fitted with an earthing device for functional purposes (separate from that of earthing for protective
purposes) only if this necessity is recognized in the standard corresponding.
The principle of class II is that it ensures its own safety and does not require any other provision to ensure
protection against indirect contact.
This means that the hardware is designed in such a way that any fault between the active parts and the
accessible parts is made improbable. In other words, class material
———————
(3) NF EN 61140 (C 20-030)
- 27 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2 It must have properties such that it is not likely, under the intended conditions of use,
to be the site of a defect likely to propagate a dangerous potential towards its exterior surface.
There are two types of Class II equipment, but which are equivalent from the point of view of safety and
therefore the conditions of protection against indirect contact.
Materials with double insulation or reinforced insulation, already well known and recognized in the
standards for domestic electrical appliances, portable tools, small transformers, lighting.
Equipment comprising constructive provisions ensuring equivalent safety, these provisions having to be
defined and specified for each equipment by the corresponding standards. This category concerns
electronic devices, cables, certain equipment and other machines.
Grounding for functional purposes is not incompatible with the safety level of Class II if all the conditions
of Class II are met. Such provisions apply for example to electronic, medical and IT applications.
237.4
Class III material
equipment in which protection against electric shock relies on the very low voltage SELV or PELV power
supply and in which voltages higher than the upper limit of domain I are not generated.
NOTES -
1 - Class III equipment must not include a protective earthing terminal.
2 - Class III equipment in a metal casing may only be fitted with devices for connecting a potential equalization conductor to the
casing if this necessity is recognized in the corresponding standard.
3 - Class III equipment may only be fitted with an earthing device for functional purposes (separate from that of earthing for protective
purposes) only if this necessity is recognized in the standard corresponding.
Class III is characterized by the fact that no voltage above the TBT limit must appear in the corresponding
equipment. This means that it must be powered exclusively by a SELV source and that it must not include
any internal device likely to generate a higher voltage.
This is why equipment supplied with very low voltage and which produces, even for its internal use, higher
voltages cannot be considered to be class III. It then belongs to one of classes 0, I or II, it can be the same
for a television receiver powered by a battery.
- 28 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
24 TERMS RELATING TO GROUNDING
VS
241.1
reference earth (826-04-01) part
of the Earth considered conductive, whose electric potential is taken, by convention, to be equal to zero,
being outside the zone of influence of any earthing installation.
NOTE - The notion of “Earth” refers to the planet and all the matter of which it is composed.
The reference land is sometimes called “distant land”.
VS
241.2
local earth (826-04-02)
part of the Earth in electrical contact with an earth connection, and whose electric potential is not
necessarily equal to zero.
241.3
ground (826-04-03) make an
electrical connection between a given point of a network, an installation or equipment and a local ground.
NOTE - The local earth connection can be:

- intentional, or
- unintentional or accidental
- and can be permanent or temporary.
241.4
grounding installation (826-04-04) all electrical
connections and devices used in the grounding of a network, an installation or equipment.
241.5
earth connection (826-04-06)
conductive part, which can be incorporated in the ground or in a particular conductive medium, for
example, concrete or coke, in electrical contact with the Earth.
241.6
loop at the bottom of the
excavation conductive part incorporated in the foundation excavations of the building, generally in the
form of a loop.
241.7
independent earth connection (826-04-07)
earth connection sufficiently distant from other earth connections, so that its electrical potential is not
appreciably affected by electric currents flowing through other earth connections.
242.1
protective conductor (PE)
conductor prescribed in certain measures for protection against electric shock and intended to electrically
connect some of the following parts:
- masses, -
conductive elements, - main
earth terminal, - earth socket, -
power supply point
connected to earth or to the artificial neutral point.
A protective conductor can be common to several circuits.
- 29 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
242.2
main protective conductor protective
conductor to which the earth protective conductors, the earth conductors and possibly the equipotential
conductors are connected (243.3).
242.3
earth conductor
protective conductor connecting the main earth terminal or bar to the earth connection.
Uninsulated portions of earth conductors buried in the ground are considered part of the earth connection.
242.4
neutral grounding conductor conductor
connecting a point on the neutral conductor to an earth ground.
242.5
main earth terminal - main earth bar terminal or bar
provided for connection to earthing devices of protective conductors, including equipotential conductors
and possibly conductors providing functional earthing.
243.1
equipotential connection
electrical connection placing masses and conductive elements at the same potential, or at neighboring
potentials.
We distinguish:
- the main equipotential connection (411.3.1.1) ; -
additional equipotential connections (411.3.2.5) ; - local equipotential
connections not connected to earth (appendix C.2 of part 4-41).
VS
243.2
protective equipotential connection (826-04-20)
equipotential connection made for safety purposes.
NOTE – When the term “equipotential bonding” is used, it means protective equipotential bonding.
243.3
functional equipotential bonding (826-04-21)
equipotential bonding made for functional purposes other than safety.
243.4
equipotential conductor protective
conductor ensuring an equipotential connection.
25 TERMS RELATING TO ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
251 General terms
VS 251.1
(electrical) circuit (electrical installation) (826-05-01) all
electrical equipment of the electrical installation supplied from the same origin and protected against
overcurrents by the same protection device(s).
A circuit includes active and protective conductors and associated equipment.
- 30 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
VS 251.2
distribution circuit (826-05-02)
electrical circuit supplying one or more distribution panels.
251.3
terminal circuit (826-05-03)
electrical circuit intended to directly power user devices or socket outlets.
251.4
protection against overcurrents
function intended to prevent electrical equipment from being affected by overcurrents which are harmful
to them and to their environment.
It involves :
- overcurrent detection; breaking
- the circuit under load.
Depending on the nature of the protection devices, the detection, overcurrent and load cut-off functions
can be provided by the same device or by separate devices.
VS 251.5
distribution/distribution panel (826-07-08) assembly
comprising operating or protection devices associated with one or more outgoing electrical circuits
supplied by one or more incoming electrical circuits, as well as terminals for the neutral conductors and
protection. It may also include signaling devices and other control devices.
251.6
low-voltage switchgear assembly combination
of one or more low-voltage connection devices with associated control, measuring, signaling, protection,
regulation equipment, etc., completely assembled under the responsibility of the manufacturer with all
their internal mechanical and electrical connections and their construction elements.
NOTE - The constituents of an ASSEMBLY may be electromechanical or electronic.
252 Terms relating to currents
VS
252.1
operating current of a circuit (IB)(826-02-10)
electric current intended to be transported in an electrical circuit in normal operation.
In steady state, the operating current corresponds to the greatest power carried by the circuit in normal
operation, taking into account simultaneity factors.
In variable regime, we consider the thermally equivalent current which, in continuous regime, would bring
the elements of the circuit to the same temperature.
VS
252.2
admissible (permanent) current of a conductor (Iz) (826-02-13) maximum
value of the electric current which can permanently flow through a conductor, a device or an appliance,
without its steady state temperature, under conditions data is greater than the specified value.
252.3
overcurrent (826-02-14)
value of electric current greater than the rated value of the electric current.
For conductors, the rated current value is the admissible current.
Depending on its importance and duration of application. overcurrent may or may not have harmful effects.
- 31 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2 Overcurrents can be the consequence either of overloads due to user devices, or of faults
such as short circuits or earth faults.
VS
252.4
overload current (826-02-15)
overcurrent occurring in an electrical circuit, which is not due to an electrical fault.
252.5
short-circuit current (Ik)
overcurrent produced by a fault having negligible impedance between active conductors presenting a
potential difference in normal service.
253 Definitions relating to disconnecting, control and protection devices
A mechanical connection device is a device intended to close and open one or more electrical circuits by
means of separable contacts.
253.1
disconnector
mechanical connection device which ensures, in the open position, a disconnection distance satisfying
specified requirements.
NOTE – A disconnector does not allow the breaking of a circuit under load.
253.2
VS
switch (mechanical) (441-14-10)
mechanical switching device capable of establishing, carrying and interrupting currents under normal
circuit conditions, possibly including specified conditions of overload in service, as well as of withstand
for a specified duration currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of short circuit.
NOTE - A switch may be capable of establishing short-circuit currents but is not capable of breaking them.
253.3
fuse circuit breaker (fuse) (441-18-01) device
whose function is to open, by the fusion of one or more of its elements designed and calibrated for this
purpose, the circuit in which it is inserted by cutting off the current when it exceeds a given value for a
sufficient time. The fuse includes all the parts that make up the complete device.
The fuse circuit breaker includes all the parts which form the whole device, in particular base and
replacement element.
VS 253.4
circuit breaker (441-14-20)
mechanical connecting device capable of establishing, sustaining and interrupting currents under normal
circuit conditions, as well as establishing, sustaining for a specified duration and interrupting currents
currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of short circuit.
A circuit breaker is generally designed to operate infrequently although some types are capable of
frequent operation.
253.5
VS
contactor (mechanical) (441-14-33)
mechanical connecting device having a single rest position, controlled otherwise than by hand, capable
of establishing, supporting and interrupting currents under normal circuit conditions , including in-service
overload conditions.
NOTE - The contactors can be designated according to the way in which the force necessary to close the main contacts is provided.
A contactor is generally designed to operate frequently.

- 32 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2 Certain contactors may also be capable of establishing and interrupting short-circuit
currents.
The rest position of a contactor corresponds to the opening of the main contacts.
A contactor is a combination in a single device, produced by the manufacturer or according to its instructions,
of a contactor and a protection relay, intended to cause the automatic opening of the contactor under
predetermined conditions.
Example: A contactor, made up of a contactor and an overload protection relay, creates a direct motor
starter.
VS 253.6
differential-residual current device (abbreviated "DDR") (445-05-02) mechanical
device or combination of devices intended to cause the contacts to open when the differential current
reaches, under specified conditions, a given value .
The differential devices may be differential switches or differential circuit breakers depending on whether
they also meet definition 253.2 or 253.4.
A differential device may be a combination of various separate elements designed to detect and measure
differential current and to make or break current.
253.7
control and protection connection device (abbreviated "ACP") connection device
comprising, integrated into the device, all the devices necessary to ensure in a coordinated manner: control;
overload protection; protection
- against short
- circuits.
-
This device is capable of making, carrying, and interrupting currents under normal circuit conditions,
including in-service overload conditions, and of making, carrying for a specified time, and interrupting
currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as short circuit, it satisfies tests comprising mixed
sequences of these functions.
This device is either automatically controlled or automatically and manually controlled with automatic
opening in the event of overcurrent.
254 Definitions relating to the characteristics of protective devices
254.1
rated current of a protection device (In) value of current
according to which the operating conditions of the protection device are determined.
Differential devices have two rated currents designated respectively by In and I

ÿ not.
254.2
VS
conventional operating current (I 2
) (of a protective device) (826-02-17)
specified value of electric current which is intended to cause operation of the protective device in a specified
time.
The conventional operating current is greater than the rated or setting current and the conventional time
varies depending on the type and rated current of the protection device.
- 33 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
254.3
setting current (Ir) tripping
current value of an overcurrent protection device expressed in amperes or as a multiple of the rated current (In).
254.4
rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu) value of the maximum
short-circuit current that a circuit breaker can break.
This breaking capacity is called Icu for industrial circuit breakers and Icn for domestic circuit breakers.
254.5
rated breaking capacity in service (Ics) short-circuit current

value that a circuit breaker can break (expressed as a % of the ultimate rated breaking capacity Icu or Icn) without degrading
its performance.
26 TERMS RELATING TO PIPES
261 General terms
VS
261.1
conductor (insulated) (461-04-04)
assembly comprising the core, its insulating envelope and its possible screens.
By convention, in this standard, the term conductor means an insulated conductor.

When it comes to bare conductors, the text explicitly states this.
The same term designates both the constituent conductor of a cable and the conductor used separately from the others.
VS
261.2
cable (insulated) (461-06-01)
assembly consisting of: - one or
more insulated conductors; - their possible individual
covering;
- possible assembly protection; any covering(s) or
- protective sheath(s).
It may also include one or more uninsulated conductors.
261.3
single-conductor cable single-
core cable (461-06-02) cable
comprising a single insulated conductor.
NOTE - The term single-pole cable is more particularly used to designate the cable constituting one of the phases of a polyphase
system.
261.4
multiconductor cable
Multipolar cable (461-06-04) cable
comprising more than one insulated conductor.
NOTE - The term multipolar cable is more particularly used to designate the cable constituting the phases of a polyphase system
(example three-pole cable).
- 34 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
VS 261.5
sheath (of a cable) (461-05-03)
continuous and uniform tubular covering in metallic or non-metallic material, generally extruded.
261.6
pipeline (826-06-01)
assembly consisting of one or more insulated electrical conductors, cables or busbars and the elements
ensuring their fixing and, where applicable, their mechanical protection.
261.7
connection (581-03-01)
material junction between conductors or contacts, intended to ensure the passage of current.
The references appearing in parentheses after the defined term indicate the numbers of the corresponding
installation methods described in part 5-52 (see in particular Table 52C).
262.1
pipe fixed to walls pipe placed
on the surface of a wall or in its immediate vicinity, this wall constituting a means of fixing and possibly a
protective element.
VS
262.2
gutter (Ref. 41, 42, 43) (826-06-06) pipe
element located above or in the ground or floor, open, ventilated or closed, having dimensions not
allowing people to enter there circulate, but in which the conduits or cables are accessible over their
entire length, during and after installation.
NOTE - A gutter may or may not be part of the construction of the building.
Different values of admissible currents are applicable depending on whether the gutters are open or
closed (see 523).
VS 262.3
cable tray (or shelf) (Ref. 12, 13, 14) (826-06-08) cable support
consisting of a continuous base and edges, and not having a cover.
NOTE - A cable tray may or may not be perforated.

If a cable tray is provided with a cover during its installation, then it is considered as a trunking (262.8)
for the determination of allowable currents.
262.4
conduit (circular) (Ref. 1, 2, 3, 5, 22) closed
envelope, of circular straight section, intended for the installation or replacement of insulated conductors
or cables by pulling, in electrical installations.
262.5
profiled conduit (Ref. 4, 23, 24)
closed envelope, of non-circular section, intended for the installation or replacement of insulated
conductors or cables by pulling, in electrical installations.
The term "profiled conduit", defined in international standards, designates a product similar to a conduit,
but with a non-circular section.
A profiled conduit can be partitioned.
- 35 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
262.6
sheath (or nozzle) (Ref. 61)
element surrounding a pipe and giving it additional protection in wall penetrations (wall, partition, floor,
ceiling) or in buried routes.
VS 262.7
gallery (826-06-06)
corridor whose dimensions allow people to move freely along its entire length, containing supports for
cables and their junctions or other pipe elements.
262.8
trunking (Ref. 31 to 34)
closed envelope, fitted with a removable cover and intended for the complete protection of insulated
conductors or cables, as well as for the installation of other electrical equipment.
A chute may or may not have separations.
Depending on its dimensions and location; a channel may be called a "molding", "plinth" or "chair rail".
VS
262.9
corbels (Ref. 14) (826-06-10)
horizontal cable supports, arranged from place to place, fixed at one end only and on which the cables are
laid.
262.10
trench
opening made in land to lay cables, and closed after their installation.
VS
262.11
building void (Ref. 21, 22, 23) (826-06-02) space existing
in the structure or elements of a building and accessible only in certain locations.
NOTES -
1 - Spaces in walls. supported floors. Ceilings and certain types of window or door frames and jambs are examples of construction
voids.
2 - Specially constructed construction voids are generally referred to as "cells".
Shafts, galleries and gutters are not considered construction voids. The same applies to spaces above
removable suspended suspended ceilings for which the installation conditions are those of exposed
assembly, the pipes being fixed or supported independently of the removable panels.
262.12
VS
cable ladder (Ref. 16) (826-06-09) cable
support consisting of a series of transverse elements rigidly fixed to longitudinal main uprights.
262.13
clamps (Ref. 3, 11) (826-06-11)
supports arranged in place and which mechanically retain a cable or conduit.
262.14
prefabricated pipeline set of
series equipment in the form of a conductive network comprising, in a conduit, a sheath or an envelope,
separate busbars supported by insulating materials [VE1 441-12-07 modified].
- 36 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
This set can be made up of elements such as:
- pipe elements with or without possibility of diversion; - phase transposition

elements, expansion elements, flexible elements, elements
feeding and adaptation; - diversion
elements; - additional
conductors for communication and/or control purposes.
NOTE - The term “busbar” does not prejudge the geometric shape, size and dimensions of the conductor.
27 TERMS RELATING TO MATERIALS
270 General terms
VS 270.1
electrical equipment (826-07-01)
equipment used for the production, transformation, transport, distribution or use of electrical energy, such
as machine, transformer, apparatus, measuring device, protection device, electrical conduit, equipment
for use.
270.2
user equipment (826-07-02) electrical
equipment intended to transform electrical energy into another form of energy, for example light, heat,
mechanical.
270.3
apparatus (826-07-03)
electrical equipment intended to be connected to an electrical circuit in order to ensure one or more of
the following functions: protection, control, sectioning, connection.
271 Terms relating to travel possibilities
VS 271.1
portable (hand-held) equipment
(826-07-05) equipment intended to be held by hand in normal use.
Portable equipment is equipment whose operation requires the constant action of the hand either as
support or as a guide.
271.2
VS
mobile equipment (826-07-04)
equipment that is moved during operation or that can be easily moved while remaining connected to the
power circuit.
Mobile equipment can either move under its own power or be moved while it is powered on.
VS
271.3
semi-fixed (stationary) equipment (826-07-06)
equipment not provided with a handle for transport and having a mass such that it cannot be moved
easily.
Example: this mass is set at 18 kg in the standards relating to household electrical appliances.
- 37 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
271.4
removable
equipment portable hand-held or mobile or semi-fixed equipment.
271.5
fixed material
material sealed to a support or otherwise attached to a specific location.
28 SECTIONING AND CONTROL
VS
281.1
sectioning (826-08-01) function
intended to ensure the de-energization of all or part of an electrical installation by separating the electrical
installation or part of the electrical installation, from any source of electrical energy, for security reasons.
The sectioning function helps to guarantee the safety of people having to carry out repair work, fault finding
or replacement of equipment.
281.2
cut-off for mechanical maintenance
opening of a cut-off device intended to cut off the power supply to parts of equipment supplied with
electrical energy so as to avoid dangers when working on this equipment.
This function is intended to ensure that the electrical power supply to a device is cut off during work on
mechanical parts.
VS
281.3
emergency shutdown (826-08-03)
action intended to cut off the electrical supply to an electrical installation to eliminate or reduce a hazard.
281.4
functional control (826-08-05) action
intended to ensure the closing, opening or variation of the electrical energy supply to all or part of an
electrical installation for normal operating purposes.
281.5
control circuit circuit
used to transmit orders from an operating device (such as key, handle, lever, push button, automatic
control device, etc.) to the device ensuring opening, closing or setting another circuit.
29 PEOPLE COMPETENCE
VS
291.1
qualified person (in electricity) (826-09-01) person
with the appropriate training and experience to enable them to perceive the risks and avoid the dangers
that electricity can present.
This definition corresponds to the external influence condition BA5 (512.2.16).
(*) Publication UTE C 18-510 gives the following definition of a qualified person (2.1.9): “ A person
possessing the theoretical and practical knowledge necessary for the proper execution of the tasks
entrusted to him but who may not possess of safety knowledge.
In France, only people authorized within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to work
under BA4 and BA5 conditions.
- 38 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
291.2
VS
knowledgeable person (in electricity) (826-09-02)
person sufficiently informed or supervised by persons qualified in electricity to enable them to perceive the
risks and avoid the dangers that electricity can present.
This definition corresponds to the external influence condition BA4 (512-2-16).

In France, only people authorized within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to work
under BA4 and BA5 conditions.
291.3
VS
ordinary person (826-09-03) person
who is neither a person qualified in electricity nor a person knowledgeable in electricity.
292.1
limited access zone (826-09-04)
zone accessible only to electrically qualified persons and electrically savvy persons.
292.2
service passage (826-01-09)
passage used for purposes such as command, control, adjustment and observation of electrical equipment.
292.3
maintenance passage (826-01-10)
passage used for access to electrical equipment for maintenance purposes.
______________
- 39 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
(Blank page)
- 40 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
Title 3 – Determination of the general characteristics of the Installations
30 GENERAL ................................................ .................................................. ..............42
31 POWER SUPPLY AND STRUCTURES........................................................ ..................................42

311 Supply power and simultaneity factor....... ..................................................42 312 Types of distribution
schemes ............................................. ..................................43 313 Power
Supply .............. .................................................. .................................................. ......53 314 Facilities
Division ......................................... .................................................. .......55
32 (Available) ............................................. .................................................. ...................56
33 COMPATIBILITY................................................ .................................................. .............56
34 MAINTENANCE................................................ .................................................. ..........60
35 SAFETY INSTALLATIONS ............................................. .......................................61 351

General ............... .................................................. .................................................. ........61 352
(Available) .................................. .................................................. ..................61 353 Safety or replacement
sources........................ .................................................. .......61
36 TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS........................................................ .....................................61 361

General conditions ......... .................................................. .........................................61 362 Troubleshooting
installations ... .................................................. .......................................62 363 Work
installations ...... .................................................. .........................................62 364 Semi-permanent
installations .. .................................................. ..................................63
- 41 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
H 30 GENERAL
A determination of the following characteristics of the installation must be made

in accordance with the articles indicated:
– the intended use of the installation, its general structure and its power supplies (31) ;
– the external influences to which the installation is subject (512) ;
– the compatibility of its equipment (33) ;
– its maintainability (34).
These characteristics must be taken into consideration when choosing the measures of
protection to ensure safety (see title 4) and the choice and implementation of materials
(see title 5).
31 POWER SUPPLY AND STRUCTURES
311 Supply power and simultaneity factor
311.1 A determination of power supply is essential for a design

economical and safe for installation within the limits of temperature and temperature drop
tension.
The UTE C 15-105 guide gives indications for determining the operating current
of a circuit, taking into account in particular the power factor and the efficiency of the
usage devices (lighting, motors, heating, etc.), the utilization factor of
devices, the simultaneity factor.
H
311.2 When determining the supply power of an installation or part thereof, non-simultaneity may be
taken into account.
Simultaneity factors can be used to determine employment flows

involved in the choice of the sections of the pipe conductors (523) and in the
choice of equipment (512.1.2).
Their determination requires detailed knowledge of the installation considered and

experience of installation and operating conditions.
The UTE C 15-105 guide gives simultaneity factor values in the absence
precise instructions.
311.3 Determination of operating current

The operating current IB is determined by multiplying the nominal power Pn of each
device of use or group of devices by the following five factors:
IB = Pn • has • b • vs • d • e
a) Factor a
It takes into account the power factor and efficiency
L
The factor a is equal to , r being the electrical efficiency of the device.

r cos
The values given below are average values that can be used in
the absence of more precise data:
For lighting and motors see UTE guide C 15-105.

- 42 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
HEATING (by resistance): a = 1
OTHER RECEIVERS: a must be determined according to the manufacturers’ instructions
b) Factor b: device utilization factor
In an industrial installation, the b factor can vary between 0.3 and 0.9.
In the absence of more precise guidance, a duty cycle of 0.75 can generally be adopted for motor-driven
appliances. For lighting and heating appliances, the utilization factor is always 1.
c) Factor c: simultaneity factor
Determining the simultaneity factors c requires detailed knowledge of the installation considered and
experience of operating conditions, particularly for motors and power outlets. It is practically not possible
to specify values of the factor c for each type of installation, but, in the absence of more precise
indications, the value of the simultaneity factor can be taken from the following table:
USE SIMULTANEITY FACTOR

vs
Lighting ................................................. ............................. 1
Heating and air conditioning ......................................... 1
Outlets ............................................... .................... 0.1 to 0.2 (*)
Elevators (**) ÿ for the most powerful motor ..... ÿ for the next
And motor .................. ÿ for the 1
Load lift others ...... ......................... 0.75 0.60
(*) In certain cases, notably in industrial installations, this factor may be more
pupil.
(**) The current to be taken into consideration is equal to the rated current of the motor, increased by
third of the starting current.
d) Factor d
It takes into account expansion forecasts
The value of the factor d must be estimated according to the foreseeable conditions of development of
the installation; it is at least equal to 1 and, for industrial installations, a value of at least 1.2 is
recommended.
e) Factor e: conversion factor from powers to intensities
The conversion factor of power, expressed in kW or kVA, into intensity expressed in amperes can be
taken equal to:
- in single-phase 127 V, e = 8 - - in single-phase 230 V, e = 4.35 -

in three-phase 230 V, e = 2.5 in three-phase 400 V, e = 1.4
H 312 Types of distribution schemes

The characteristics of the distribution schemes are determined based on:
– types of active conductor diagrams; – types of earth
connections.
- 43 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
H
312.1 Types of active conductor diagrams
The active conductor schemes described below are considered within the scope of this standard:
Alternating current Direct current 2

single phase 2 conductors conductors 3
single phase 3 conductors conductors
three phase 3 conductors
three phase 4 conductors
The diagram of the active conductors is chosen taking into account the nature of the devices used (for
example three-phase devices with or without neutral), and the limits of use of the available source (for
example, power balance in polyphase circuits , power limits of single-phase devices, etc.).
It is necessary to take into account the limits set on this subject by the electrical energy distributor (for
example for motor power, see 559.6.1).
H 312.2 Types of grounding diagrams

The following types are considered within the scope of this standard.
NOTES –
1 - Figures 312A to 312E show examples of commonly used three-phase alternating current systems. Figures 312F through
312K show examples of commonly used DC systems.
2 - The symbols used have the following meaning:
First letter – Power supply location in relation to earth: T = direct connection
of a point to earth; I = either isolation of all
active parts from earth, or connection of a point to earth through an impedance.
Second letter – Location of the masses of the electrical installation in relation to the earth: T =
masses connected directly to the earth, independently of the possible earthing of a point of the power supply; N = direct electrical
connection of
the masses to the earthed point of the power supply (in alternating current, the earthed point is normally the neutral point or, if a
neutral point is not available, a phase conductor) .
Other letters (possible) – Arrangement of the neutral conductor and the protective conductor: S = protective
function provided by a separate conductor from the neutral or from the earthed active conductor (in alternating current, a
grounded phase conductor earth).
C = neutral and protection functions combined in a single conductor (PEN conductor).
When the installation is supplied directly by a low voltage public distribution network, the scheme used
is generally the TT scheme.
H NOTE – For Figures 312A, 312B, 312C, 312D and 312E.
Table 31A - Explanation of symbols according to publication NF C 03-211

Neutral conductor (N)
Protective conductor (PE)
Protective and neutral conductors combined (PEN)
- 44 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
H 312.2.1 TN scheme
TN schemes have a point connected directly to earth, the installation masses being connected to this point by protective
conductors. Three types of TN schemes are taken into consideration, depending on the arrangement of the neutral conductor and
the protective conductor, namely: - TN-S scheme: in which a separate protective conductor is used in
the whole diagram;

- TN-CS scheme: in which the neutral and protection functions are combined in
a single conductor in part of the diagram;
- TN-C scheme: in which the neutral and protection functions are combined in
only one conductor in the entire diagram.
The point connected directly to earth is generally the neutral. In these diagrams, the fault loop being made up exclusively of
galvanic elements (active conductors and protective conductors), any direct phase-to-ground fault current becomes a short-circuit
current.
H L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
NOT PE
PE
PE
NOT
PE PE
Power supply Power supply

Masses
earth connection earth connection
Masses
Separate active grounded conductor and protective

conductor throughout the scheme
Figure 312A – TN-S diagrams
TNC TNS
L1
L2
L3
PEN PE
PEN NOT
PE
Power supply
Masses
earth connection
Figure 312B – TN-CS diagram

Neutral and protection functions combined in a single conductor in part of the diagram
- 45 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
H
L1
L2
L3
PE NOT
PEN
Power supply
earth connection
Masses
Figure 312C – TN-C diagram

Neutral and protective functions combined in a single conductor throughout
the diagram
312.2.2 TT scheme
The TT diagram has a point on the power supply connected directly to earth, the masses of the electrical
installation being connected to earth connections electrically distinct from the earth connection of the
power supply.
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
NOT
NOT
Masses PE Masses PE

Figure 312D – TT diagrams
The point of the power supply connected directly to earth is generally the neutral.
The fault loop generally includes the earth along part of its route, which does not exclude the possibility
of electrical connections, voluntary or de facto, between the earth connection of the installation grounds
and that of the power supply.
Except in this last hypothesis, the phase-to-ground fault current has a lower intensity than that of a short-
circuit current and can nevertheless be sufficient to cause the appearance of dangerous voltages.
Even when the earth connections of the neutral and the masses coincide, the diagram remains a TT
diagram if all the rules of the TN diagram are not respected.
In other words, in such cases, the connections between the earth connections are not taken into account
when determining the protection conditions.
Such conditions are encountered for example in buildings housing the transformer station supplying the
electrical installation; the earth connections are then confused.
In such buildings, the conditions imposed for the TN scheme are likely not to be respected for the
terminal circuits located in the parts of the building far from the transformer station, particularly if the
building is high.
They can also be encountered when the neutral and earth earth connections are actually connected by
buried metal pipes located in the immediate vicinity of each of the earth connections.
- 46 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
312.2.3 IT diagram
In the IT diagram, all active parts are isolated from earth or a point is connected to earth via an impedance, the masses of the
electrical installation being:
- either earthed separately; are collectively
- grounded; - or connected collectively to the power
supply earth connection. (See 411.6)
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
NOT
1)
Impedance
1)
Impedance
NOT
PE PE
Masses Masses

Figure 312E – IT diagrams
1) the circuit can be isolated from earth. The neutral conductor may or may not be distributed.
In this diagram, the first fault current is closed by the leakage capacities of the installation and possibly by the impedance inserted
between a point of the power supply - generally the neutral - and the earth. The current resulting from a single phase-to-ground
fault has a sufficiently low intensity not to cause the appearance of any dangerous contact voltage.
In the IT diagram, it is always recommended not to distribute the neutral conductor.
The distribution of the neutral conductor, when it is not connected to earth, requires measures to be taken: - to prevent that in the
event of two faults occurring in the
same installation on two circuits of different sections, the neutral conductor of smaller section is not traversed by currents of
intensity greater than its admissible current; - so that the operating devices cannot be subjected to voltages greater than
their nominal voltage.

These provisions are set out in 431.2.2, but require a detailed technical study of the installation for their implementation.
It is strongly recommended to carry out new installations using an IT diagram without distribution of the neutral conductor. The
power supply of devices intended to operate under the voltage between phase and neutral can then be provided from separate
generators or transformers.
H 312.2.4 Direct current schemes
312.2.4.1 General
NOTE – In direct current earthing schemes, electrochemical corrosion should be taken into account.
Where Figures 312F through 312K indicate grounding of a specific polarity of a 2-wire DC circuit, the decision to ground the
positive or negative polarity should be based on operating conditions or any another consideration.
For symbols, see note in 312.2.

- 47 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
The principles of designing and installing a DC circuit remain the same as

those of an alternating current circuit.
The main differences concern the calculation of short-circuit currents and the choice of
protective devices.
a) calculation of short-circuit currents
For the calculation of the short-circuit current of a storage battery of which we do not know the
internal resistance, the following formula can be used:
I K= 10. VS
This is the battery capacity in A/ h.
For the calculation of short-circuit current at the terminals of a direct current generator, the formula
following applies:
1.1 One
IK=
Ri
Ri is the internal resistance of the generator.
To calculate the short-circuit current at any point in the installation, we will adopt the
following formula:
1.1 One
IK=
Ri 2 R + L
RL is the resistance of the line.
and, in the case of the presence of a direct current motor, the value of Ik above will be increased by the
value 6 In of the motor.
b) choice of protection devices

For the choice of protection devices, it is necessary to present the characteristics of the circuit
(short-circuit current, rated current, time constant) to a manufacturer who will help with the choice
of the appropriate protective device.
Differential devices cannot be used.
- 48 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
312.2.4.2 DC TN diagram
H
L+
PEN
L-
PE
Diagram a)
Taken from the ground

food
Masses
L+
PEN M
L-
PE
Diagram b)
Masses

food
Figure 312F – DC TN-S diagrams
The active conductor connected to earth (for example L-) of diagram a) or the middle conductor
(M) connected to the earth of diagram b) is separated from the protective conductor throughout the
plan.
- 49 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
DC TN-S scheme
The point connected directly to ground is usually L- or the center conductor. In these diagrams, the fault
loop being made up exclusively of galvanic elements (active conductors and protective conductors),
any direct phase-to-ground fault current becomes a short-circuit current.
H
L+
PEN
Diagram a)
Power supply
earth connection
Masses
L+
PEN
L-
Diagram b)
Masses
Power supply
earth connection
Figure 312G – DC TN-C diagrams
The functions of the active earthed conductor (e.g. L-) of diagram a) and the protective conductor are
combined into a single PEN conductor throughout the diagram, or the middle earthed conductor (M) of
diagram b ) and the protective conductor are combined into a single PEN conductor throughout the
diagram.
- 50 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
H
L+
PEN PEN
L-
Diagram a)
Taken from the ground Masses

food
TN-C scheme TN-C scheme
Current TN-CS scheme
L+
PEN
PEN
L-
M
Diagram b)

Masses
food
TN-C scheme TN-C scheme
Current TN-CS scheme
Figure 312H – DC TN-CS diagrams
The functions of the active conductor connected to earth (for example L-) of diagram a) and of
protective conductor are combined into a single PEN conductor in parts of the
diagram, or the middle conductor connected to earth (M) of diagram b) and the conductor of
protection are united into a single PEN conductor in parts of the diagram.
- 51 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
H 312.2.4.3 DC VT scheme
L+
L-
Diagram a)
Masses
Power supply Earthing of masses

earth connection
L+
L-
Diagram b)
Masses
Power supply Earthing of masses

earth connection
Figure 312J – DC VT diagrams
The point of the power supply connected directly to ground is usually L- or the center conductor.
The fault loop generally includes the earth along part of its route, which does not exclude the possibility
of electrical connections, voluntary or de facto, between the earth connection of the installation grounds
and that of the power supply.
Except in this last hypothesis, the phase-to-ground fault current has a lower intensity than that of a short-
circuit current and can nevertheless be sufficient to cause the appearance of dangerous voltages.
In practice, this diagram is not used, the earth connections are generally not distinct.
- 52 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
H 312.2.4.4 DC IT diagram
L+
L-
Diagram a)
Masses
Earthing of masses
L+
L-
Diagram b)
Masses
Earthing of masses
Figure 312K – DC IT diagrams
Scheme in which the current resulting from a single fault between an active conductor and ground has a sufficiently low intensity
not to cause the appearance of any dangerous contact voltage.
The first fault current is closed by the leakage capacities of the installation (at power-up) and possibly by the resistance inserted
between a point of the power supply - generally L- or the middle conductor - and the earth.
The limitation of the intensity of the current resulting from a first fault is obtained, either by the absence of connection to the earth
of the power supply, or by the value of the resistance inserted between the conductor L- or M and the earth .
H 313 Food
313.1 General
313.1.1 The following power supply characteristics must be determined:
- nature of the current and frequency; - value of

the nominal voltage; - value of the presumed
short-circuit current, at the origin of the installation; - possibility of meeting installation requirements,
including power
power supply.
- 53 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
When the installation is supplied by an external distribution network, the electrical energy distributor must
be consulted (see NF C 14-100). When the power comes from a private generator, the corresponding
characteristics must be determined according to the characteristics of this generator or according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Nature of current
If a direct current supply is required and the available source is alternating current, or vice versa, the
necessary conversion equipment and its location must be provided. The same applies if an alternating
current supply at a frequency different from that of the source is necessary.
To determine the power of the installation (311), the powers of the equipment supplied with direct current
or at a different frequency are increased taking into account the efficiency of the conversion equipment.
Tensions
In France, the nominal voltages delivered by public distribution networks are single-phase 230 V and
three-phase 230/400 V.
When the installation is supplied by a transformer station or by an independent source, the nominal
voltage and the tolerances are preferably chosen from the following normal values:
single phase 230 volts three-phase 230/400 volts

400 volts 400/690 volts
690/1000 volts (Neutral generally not distributed).
Voltages 230/400 volts are harmonized internationally, tolerances in France are + 6%, - 10%. For higher
voltages, tolerances can be contractually reduced.
When tolerances are greater than allowable limits for the equipment being powered, voltage regulators
are required. To determine the power of the installation, it is necessary to increase the power of the
equipment thus supplied taking into account the efficiency of the regulators. Alternatively, when the
installation includes transformers, these can have adjustment by taps.
When the required power of the installation is such that it requires a high voltage supply, the instructions
of the electrical energy distributor for the transformer station must be taken into account. Suitable
arrangements are made for the location of transformer stations in relation to the power demand points.
In such cases, this standard only concerns parts of the installation supplied at a voltage not higher than
1000 V alternating current or 1500 V direct current.
Frequency
The nominal frequency of public distribution networks in France is 50 Hz.
Contractually, the frequency must not deviate by ± 2% from the nominal value of 50 Hz.
Other frequencies may be required for special purposes, in which case provision must be made for
appropriate frequency changing equipment.
- 54 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
Presumed short-circuit current The

prospective short-circuit current at the origin of the installation is determined and taken into account in
the design of the protection of the installation against short circuits in accordance with 434.
When an installation is powered by an independent source (thermal engine-generator group or UPS),

the short-circuit current is lower than when it is powered by an HV/ LV transformer of the same power; in
particular, the minimum short-circuit current may be little higher than the allowable current in the circuit
or even lower.
Indications are given in guides UTE C 15-401 and UTE C 15-402.
H 313.1.2 These characteristics must be estimated in the case of an external source and must be
determined in the case of a private source. They are applicable to main power supplies as well as safety
and replacement power supplies.
313.2 Power supplies for safety installations and replacement power supplies Where safety
installations are required by the authorities responsible for fire protection or by conditions relating to the
evacuation of premises in the event of an emergency, or where power supplies replacement are required
by the owner of the installation, the characteristics of the power supplies for safety or replacement
installations must be determined separately. Such power supplies must have capacity, reliability and
availability appropriate for the specified operation.
Additional requirements for power supplies for safety installations are given in 35 and 56.
NOTE – This standard does not include specific rules regarding replacement power supplies.
In particular, reference should be made to the official texts relating to fire safety in high-rise buildings (C
12-061) and to the official texts relating to protection against the risks of fire and panic in establishments
receiving of the public (C 12-201).
H 314 Facilities Division
314.1 Any installation must be divided into several circuits according to needs, in order to:
- to avoid any danger and limit the consequences of a defect; - to

facilitate checks, tests and maintenance (see also 46) ; - to take into account
the dangers which could result from a failure of a single circuit such
than a lighting circuit.
- to limit the value of the leakage current in the protective conductor of each
circuit.
Limiting the leakage current in the protective conductor allows optimal use of differential devices with
residual-differential current at most equal to 30 mA with regard to the need for continuity of service. It is
recommended to limit leakage currents to one third of the sensitivity of the differential device, which in
practice limits to ten socket outlets for differential protection of 30 mA.
H
314.2 Separate distribution circuits shall be provided for those parts of the installation which it is
necessary to control separately, so that these circuits are not affected by the failure of other circuits.
Terminal circuits are generally specialized by the function of the devices they serve. Separate terminal
circuits are then provided for lighting, for socket outlets, for motors, etc.
- 55 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
The preceding conditions imply that, in certain cases, a selection or selectivity between the different protection devices is ensured
(see in particular 536).
H 314.3 When a building is served by several installations, the corresponding circuits must be clearly differentiated.
The same building can be served from several power supplies (transformer station, public distribution network, independent
source, etc.).
All circuits supplied from a power point constitute an installation and it is important that different installations be clearly
differentiated and, in particular, the same distribution point, the same box or the same panel must only include elements
belonging to a single installation. The following are not covered: - signaling and control circuits, - replacement or safety sources.
H
32 (Available)
33 COMPATIBILITY
Appropriate measures must be taken when the equipment is likely to have harmful effects on other electrical equipment, other
installations, or to hinder the operation of the power source and disrupt public distribution networks.
The disturbances are in particular: - voltage

disturbances;
• rapid voltage variations, • voltage dips, • brief
voltage outages, • long
voltage outages, • temporary overvoltages
between phases and earth, • transient
overvoltages between phases and earth, • voltage unbalance, •
voltages harmonics/harmonic currents, • voltage of information
signals on the power conductors,
- continuous components;
- high frequency oscillations;

- leakage currents.
The power and communication networks must be built according to the requirements and recommendations of article 444, part
5-54 and guide UTE C 15-900.
The characteristics of the voltage supplied to users by public distribution networks are defined in NF EN 50160.
The other installations to which the Standard refers are the various installations distributed in buildings, such as telephone
installations, television distribution, computer networks, teletransmissions, and generally information transmission installations. ,
for example the control and command of buildings.
This article 33 deals in particular with electromagnetic compatibility which is defined as the ability of a device, equipment or
system to operate satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without itself producing intolerable electromagnetic
disturbances for everything found in it. this environment.
- 56 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
The main electromagnetic disturbances can be classified into two families:

a) low frequency disturbances, less than a few tens of kHz, which
include: -
frequency fluctuations, - voltage
variations (voltage dips, flicker, etc.), - changes in the voltage
waveform (harmonics), - voltage imbalances, - overvoltages transients at
industrial frequency.
b) high frequency disturbances, greater than a few tens of kHz, which

include: -
voltages and currents in impulse form, - voltages and
currents in damped oscillatory form, - radiated electromagnetic
fields, - discharges of an electrostatic nature.
The creation of additional functional earth connections is a means of limiting certain disturbances.
330.1.1 Low frequency disturbances
a) Frequency fluctuations
This type of fluctuations is practically non-existent on public distribution networks.

On the other hand, in installations powered by autonomous sources, the provision of information relating
to the frequency is recommended and regulation devices are necessary to maintain the frequency within
admissible tolerance limits.
b) Voltage variations
Rapid voltage variations are mainly due to the operation of certain devices, such as arc furnaces,
welding devices, starting of high power motors, etc.
Protection consists of either increasing the short-circuit power of the source, or reducing the amplitude
of variations in reactive power absorbed by the disturbing device (for example using static compensators).
Micro-cuts are only a particular case of voltage dips, due either to the operation of certain machines
with high current demands, or to faults affecting the power supply network.
The protection consists either of making the receivers insensitive to voltage dips, or of powering them
via devices compensating for the lack of energy during the duration of the voltage dips (for example,
direct current power supplies equipped with rectifiers associated with capacitors, rotating motor-
alternator groups with flywheel, rectifier-battery assemblies of accumulators-inverters, etc.).
c) Starting currents
The intensities of the starting currents of the devices must be taken into consideration in determining
the conductor sections and in the choice of protection devices against overcurrents, in order to avoid
excessive voltage drops during the starting period and untimely operations protective devices.
Power limits are set for motors connected to installations supplied directly by a public distribution
network (559.6.1).
- 57 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
d) Harmonic currents
Harmonic currents are generated mainly by devices whose power supply, designed based on power
electronics, absorbs non-sinusoidal currents. The main devices affected are:
• Power electronics equipment (rectifiers, inverters, speed variators, dimmers),
• discharge lamp fixtures including fluorescent tubes, • welding machines,

• office equipment, computer
equipment and their peripherals, • household appliances (microwaves, TV, Hi-fi, etc.).
In this case, the absorbed currents are broken down into sinusoidal currents of rank n even or odd
multiples of the fundamental frequency. The current distortion is characterized by an intensity distortion
rate (THDi).
The devices mentioned above mainly generate harmonic currents of odd ranks. Zero-sequence
harmonic currents (rank 3 and multiples of 3) can cause a significant current to flow in the neutral
conductor.
Harmonic voltage distortion Harmonic

currents can be a source of disturbance locally, but also increase the level of voltage distortion
(characterized by a voltage distortion rate (THDu)) throughout the installation and possibly on other
installations via the public distribution network.
Harmonic voltage distortion is likely to: • accelerate the aging of

equipment (motor windings, transformers) through abnormal heating, • reduce performance and disrupt
sensitive equipment
(automations,
computer science...),
• generate resonances in the presence of correction factor capacitors
power, possibly leading to overvoltage breakdowns.
Technical solutions against harmonics in current and voltage The calculation

of the cross-section of the conductors and in particular the neutral conductor as described in 523.5.2
and 524.3 takes into account zero-sequence harmonic currents.
International standards limit the individual harmonic injection of large-scale devices; in general there is
no need to take other measures for domestic installations.
With regard to industrial or tertiary installations, the overall injections of harmonic currents into the
network may be subject to contractual rules with the distributor.
To limit disruptions in the installation and comply with connection rules, the technical solutions consist
of:
• supply the polluting loads by circuits whose origin is closest to the

source,
• supply sensitive loads and polluting loads via separate circuits, • use special coupled
transformers, • avoid the TNC scheme, which presents
risks of disruption to sensitive equipment, • reduce injected currents by using active filters , passive or
hybrid and/ or twelve-phase bridges, • reduce the harmonic voltage by reducing the source impedance
(increasing the
Short circuit power (Pcc)).
- 58 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
Harmonics monitoring and control devices can assess voltage and current distortion and trigger corrective
actions if necessary. The orders of magnitude of the distortion rates and the predictable effects are given
in the table below.
Harmonic rate Predictable effects
THDu<5% and THDi<10% None

5%<THDu<8% or 10%<THDi<50% Significant pollution, possible harmful effects
THDu>8% or THDi>50% Heavy pollution, probable malfunctions
Current harmonic rate 3>15% Significant current in the neutral conductor
e) Industrial frequency surges
These overvoltages are due either to insulation faults on the high voltage impacting on the low voltage
installations, or to faults on the low voltage side.
Protection is ensured by limiting the grounding resistance of the masses, as indicated in 442 and in the
NF C 13-100 and NF C 13-200 standards and, in certain cases, by the use of overvoltage limiters. .
f) Voltage imbalances
Voltage imbalances are due in particular to poorly balanced loads and non-symmetrical faults.
Protection consists either of rebalancing the phases, or of increasing the short-circuit power of the
source, or by using an appropriate compensating circuit.
330.1.2 High frequency disturbances
a) Transient overvoltages in impulse form
Transient overvoltages are: - either

due to overvoltages of atmospheric origin transmitted by the network
power;
- either produced when certain equipment is put into service or switched off (known as
"maneuvering overvoltages").
Protection against such overvoltages is defined in 443.
Powering up certain equipment can cause transient overvoltages likely to cause unintended operation of
the protection devices of the corresponding circuits.
b) High frequency oscillations
When the operation of equipment is likely to cause high frequency oscillations in the power supply circuit
or induced in other circuits, it must be verified that these oscillations do not cause defective operation or
other harmful effects on other equipment, otherwise arrangements must be made to reduce these
oscillations to a non-hazardous level.
c) Other high frequency disturbances
(such as electromagnetic fields, electrostatic discharges, etc.)

Protection consists of using filters or shielding adapted to the equipment to be protected.
- 59 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
330.1.3 Other causes of disturbances
a) Continuous components
When equipment is likely to cause the circulation of direct current in the alternating current installation which supplies it in
operation, it must be verified that this cannot result in defective operation or harmful effects on other equipment. of the
installation, otherwise arrangements must be made to separate the equipment in question from the source.
DC components can, under certain conditions, disrupt the operation of residual current protection devices, unless these
devices include provisions to limit their effects (see 532.2.1.4).
b) Leakage currents
When equipment is likely to produce significant leakage currents in normal operation, these leakage currents must be taken
into account in the choice of protection measures to ensure safety (Title 4) (see also 532.2.1.3, 544.4 and 555.5 .2). This is
the case, for example, for information processing or automatic control equipment comprising a large number of filters for
reducing radio interference, or high-power heating appliances.
It is possible to limit the consequences of the circulation of such leakage currents by supplying the equipment with a
transformer with two windings and by creating a TN circuit at the secondary level.
c) Devices capable of supplying current to the supply network
Any device powered by an installation directly connected to a public electrical energy distribution network and capable of
being re-supplied by an independent source must include a device preventing the re-supply of the distribution network unless
this situation has, before its installation, is the subject of a prior agreement with the distributor, relating in particular to the
control, safety and metering devices to be adopted.
H 34 MAINTENANCE
340.1 It is necessary to estimate the frequency and quality of maintenance of the installation which can reasonably be
expected during its expected lifespan. Where an authority is responsible for the operation of the installation, that authority
must be consulted. These characteristics must be taken into consideration when applying the requirements of sections 4 to
6 of this standard, so that, taking into account the planned frequency and quality of maintenance:
- any periodic checks, tests, maintenance and repairs necessary during the expected lifespan can be carried out easily and
safely; the effectiveness of protective measures to ensure safety is ensured; the reliability of the equipment
- allowing the correct operation of the installation is appropriate to the expected lifespan.
-
The characteristics given in Part 34 may vary from one part of an installation to another, and depend for example on the
presence of qualified persons to operate the equipment in normal service. Access to certain parts of the installation may be
limited to such people, and this must be involved in the choice of protective measures to ensure the safety of these parts (title
4).
The presence of informed permanent maintenance personnel can have an influence on the choice of protective measures to
ensure safety.
- 60 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
H
35 SAFETY FACILITIES
351 General
NOTE – The need for safety installations and their nature are often defined by regulatory authorities whose requirements must
be observed.
The following sources for security installations can be used: - storage batteries; -
generators independent of normal
power supply; - separate connections from the distribution
network effectively independent of the normal power supply (see 551.1.1).
The rules relating to power supplies for security services are given in part 56.
352 (Available)
353 Safety or replacement sources Where

replacement sources meet the requirements for safety sources, they may be used as safety
sources. The regulatory texts specify the terms and conditions.
36 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
361 General conditions

Temporary installations include emergency, works and semi-permanent installations.
It is recalled that temporary installations (213.1) are those which only have a duration limited to the
circumstances which motivate them.
H 361.1 Emergency, work and semi-permanent installations may be subject to exemptions from the rules
of this standard set out in 362, 363 and 364 respectively.
However, no exemption is permitted either in premises (or locations) presenting a fire risk (BE2), nor in
premises (or locations) presenting a risk of explosion (BE3).
361.2 Exemptions are only permitted from the requirements of Title 4 for emergency installations and
subject to the reservations set out in 362.
Any emergency, work or semi-permanent installation must be protected at its origin against overcurrents,
this protection must meet the conditions set out in Part 43.
361.3 Temporary installations must not obstruct or obstruct the movement of people.
361.4 If extensions are used, all precautions must be taken to prevent their elements from being
accidentally separated.
This rule does not necessarily imply the use of a locking device.
It is essential that the assembled elements of the extenders have the same electrical and dimensional
characteristics for interchangeability.
- 61 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
H
362 Emergency installations
For emergency installations, it may be permissible not to comply with the requirements of this standard,
provided that their duration is as limited as possible and that, if certain measures are no longer
respected, compensatory measures or appropriate precautions are taken. are taken.
Emergency installations are those necessary to compensate for an operating incident.
H 363 Work installations
Work installations may be subject to exemptions from the following rules:
- fixing of devices (530.4) ; - voltage

drop limits (525) ; - vicinity of electrical
pipelines and other pipelines (528) ; - pipe laying conditions; - installation of flexible
cables fixed to the walls.
Work installations are those carried out to allow repairs or transformations of existing installations without
interrupting their operation.
Attention is drawn to the advantage of the use of differential devices associated with earth connections
to ensure protection against indirect contacts, the operating threshold of the differential devices having
to satisfy the conditions set out in 413 and 531.2 .
Work facilities may be subject to different protective measures against indirect contact than those used
for the facilities affected by this work, for example, use of a protective measure of paragraphs 413.2 or
413.5, while neighboring facilities are subject to the measure in paragraph 413.1.
Fixing devices (530.4) :

The conditions for fixing the devices may not be respected, but the devices must be placed on stable
supports.
Voltage drops (525) :

Voltage drop limits do not apply, provided the devices are operating correctly.
Neighborhood of electrical pipes and other pipes (528) :

Separation between electrical conduits and other conduits may be achieved by any appropriate means.
Fixed pipes (52) :

In addition to the types of pipes described in 52, it is permitted to use: - flexible
cables such as those of the H 07 RN-F, H 05 VV-F, H 05 RR-F series fixed to the walls by any means
not not risk damaging the insulating casing or sheath of these cables.
However, if the locations where these conductors and cables are installed present mechanical risks
(AG3), they must be adequately protected, for example by placing them in a section of conduit classified
X4XX (ICTA, ICTL, MRL, CSA and certain IRL) .
- 62 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
Cables laid in the open air

The fixing conditions must not damage the outer sheath of the cables.
Flexible cables attached to the walls

Flexible cables such as those of the H 05 VV-F series are permitted attached to walls in conditions AD1,
AD2, AD3, AD4, AD5, AF1 and AF3.
Buried pipes
Cables without armor such as those of the U-1000 R 12N and H 07 RN-F series may not be provided
with mechanical protection provided that the necessary precautions are taken to prevent the cables from
being damaged.
Airlines
Overhead lines can be fixed by any appropriate means but the regulatory distances must always be
observed.
364 Semi-permanent installations
Semi-permanent installations are intended for developments of limited duration, outside the scope of the
usual activities of the premises or recurring periodically.
H 364.1 Semi-permanent installations may be subject to the exemptions set out in 363.
364.2 If semi-permanent installations are renewed periodically, they must be completely dismantled
between each period of use. In addition, the protection devices of these installations must be placed on
stable panels.
____________
- 63 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3
(Blank page)
- 64 -
TITLE 4 – Protection to ensure security
Part 4-41 – Protection against electric shock
Part 4-42 – Protection against fire, burns and explosion
Part 4-43 – Overcurrent Protection
Part 4-44 – Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic disturbances
Part 4-46 – Sectioning and control

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
Part 4-41 – Protection against electric shock
411 Protection measure by automatic power cut-off .........................................67 412 Measurement of

protection by double or reinforced insulation ................................................ .....78 413 Protection measure
by electrical separation ..................................... .........................80 414 Extra-low voltage protection
measure ............................... .................................................. 82 415 Supplementary
protection................................................ .............................................86
Annex A – (normative) – Provisions for protection against direct contact ............88
Annex B – (normative) – Protective measures against direct contact, under surveillance

conditions.............................. .................................................. .................90
Annex C – (normative) – Protective measures in installations under surveillance

conditions.................................. .................................................. ....................92
Annex D – (normative) – Compatibility between various earthing schemes and their

connection to the public distribution network .............................. .............................94

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS 410.1 Scope of application

This part deals with protection against electric shock in electrical installations. It is based on standard NF
C 20-030, a fundamental safety standard applicable to the protection of people and domestic animals,
intended to provide the essential principles and requirements common to installations and equipment or
necessary for their coordination.
The essential rule for protection against electric shock, as defined in standard NF C 20-030, is that
dangerous active parts are not accessible and that accessible conductive parts are not dangerous, both
under normal and normal conditions. under single fault conditions.
Protection against electric shock therefore requires the application of at least one provision for protection
against direct contact, in normal operation and at least one provision for protection against indirect
contact, in the event of a fault.
The combination of these two protective provisions constitutes a protective measure. Alternatively,
protection against electric shock is provided by a reinforced protection provision providing protection during
normal operation and in the event of a fault.
In standard NF C 20-030, protection against direct contacts is called main protection and protection
against indirect contacts is called protection in the event of a fault.
This part specifies the essential requirements and deals with the application and coordination of these
requirements, including their application in connection with the classes of external influences, in alternating
current installations and in direct current installations.
It also indicates, in 415, the requirements relating to additional protection by differential devices or by
additional equipotential bonding, which may be required in certain cases.
This new part replaces chapter 41 of standard NF C 15-100: 1991, as well as partially the old sections 471
and 481.
410.2 (available)
VS
410.3 General
410.3.1 One or more of the following protective measures, each consisting of a direct contact protection
provision and an indirect contact protection provision, shall be applied, unless otherwise specified in
410.3.2 and 410.3 .4, in each installation or part of an installation, taking into account the conditions of
external influences and must be considered when choosing and implementing the equipment: - protection
measure by automatic cut-off of the power supply, - protection measure by double or reinforced insulation,
- protection measure by
electrical separation for the power supply of a single device, - protection
measure by very low voltage.
In practice, most installations are subject to a fundamental protection measure by automatic power cut-off,
certain parts of the installations may be subject to one of the other protection measures.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS 410.3.2 For particular installations and locations, the protective measures prescribed in Part 7 must be applied.
410.3.3 The protective measures, specified in Appendix B, by implementing obstacles or by placing them out of reach may
only be implemented under the supervision of a qualified or knowledgeable person.
In France, only people authorized within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to work under conditions BA4
and BA5 (see also 512.2.16).
VS 410.3.4 Protection measures, specified in appendix C : - non-conductive premises

or locations; - equipotential connections not connected to earth;
- electrical separation for the power supply of more than one user
equipment; are only applicable if the installation is under the supervision of a competent person, so that
modifications not permitted by these protective measures cannot be made.
410.3.5 If a protective measure is not completely satisfied, additional arrangements must be made to ensure that the resulting
combination provides the same degree of protection as complete compliance with that measure.
NOTE – An example application is given in 411.7.
410.3.6 It must be ensured that different protection measures applied in the same installation or the same part of an installation,
or in the equipment, cannot influence or cancel each other out.
410.3.7 It is permitted to dispense with protection provisions against indirect contact for electrical equipment and their supports
in the following cases:
- metal conduits or trunking, or other metal protection envelopes

equipment with double or reinforced insulation;
- posts and metal parts in electrical connection with them when these parts are not
not in the volume of accessibility to touch;
- reinforced concrete posts whose reinforcements are not accessible; - masses which, due to
their small dimensions (approximately 50 mm would be difficult to achieve or unreliable.
NOTE – This requirement is only applicable, for example, to nuts, rivets, identification plates and cable fasteners.
This exemption is not permitted in France by the regulations concerning workers.
VS
411 Protection measure by automatic power cut-off
411.1 General
Protection by automatic power cut-off is a protective measure in which: protection against direct contact is ensured either by
the main
- insulation of the live parts, or by barriers or enclosures, in accordance with Annex A, And
- 67 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS
- protection against indirect contact is provided by protective connections associated with automatic power cutoff in
accordance with 411.3 to 411.6.
The protection measure by automatic power cut-off is intended to prevent a person from being subjected to a contact
voltage greater than 50 V in alternating current (rms value) following an insulation fault. or at 120 V smooth direct current
for such a time that organic damage may result.
To comply with this rule, any fault occurring in electrical equipment causes the circulation of a current which must be
interrupted within a time compatible with personal safety.
As a result, this protective measure is based on the combination of two conditions:
a) the creation or existence of a circuit - called "fault loop" - to allow the circulation of the fault current. The constitution of
this fault loop depends on the earth connection scheme (TN, TT or IT)
This condition implies the implementation of protective conductors connecting the masses of all electrical equipment
powered by the installation so as to constitute a fault loop.
b) the cutting of the fault current by an appropriate protection device in a time depending on certain parameters such as
the contact voltage to which a person may be subjected, the probability of faults and of contact with the faulty parts.
Determination of the cut-off time is based on knowledge of the effects of electric current on the human body and the
conditions of external influences.
This condition implies the presence of an automatic cut-off device whose characteristics are defined according to the TT,
TN or IT earth connection diagram.
If specified, additional protection against direct contact is provided by a differential-residual current device rated at not more
VS
than 30 mA in accordance with 415.1.
411.2 Requirements for protection against direct contact Electrical equipment must be
subject to one of the protection provisions given in appendix A.
411.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact 411.3.1 Protective connections
411.3.1.1 Main equipotential bond In each building, the

main protective conductor, the main earth terminal and the following conductive elements must be connected to the main
equipotential bond: - metal pipes, for example water, gas, central heating pipes and of
air conditioning ;
- metal construction elements and reinforced concrete reinforcements; - metal sheaths or braids
of communication cables.
When such conductive elements come from outside the building, they must be connected to the main equipotential bond as
close as possible to their point of entry into the building.
- 68 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
The conductors of the main equipotential connection must meet the requirements
of part 5-54.
The main equipotential connection makes it possible in particular to prevent a conductive element from
propagates either a potential with respect to earth resulting from a fault of external origin to the
building, or the potential of the distant earth.
411.3.1.2 Grounding of masses

VS
The masses must be connected to a protective conductor depending on the conditions
particulars of the various grounding diagrams as specified in 411.4 to 411.6.
Simultaneously accessible masses must be connected to the same earth socket.
NOTE – For grounding arrangements and protective conductors, see Part 5-54.
411.3.2 Automatic power cutoff
411.3.2.1 Except in the case indicated in 411.3.2.5, a protective device must separate
automatically power the circuit or equipment concerned in the event of a fault between
a live part and a ground or protective conductor in the circuit or
hardware, within a maximum time given in 411.3.2.2 or 411.3.2.3.
NOTES -
1 - Lower cut-off time and voltage values may be prescribed for installations or
special premises in accordance with the corresponding sections of Part 7.
2 - In the IT diagram, automatic cut-off is not generally prescribed during a first fault (see
411.6.1).
411.3.2.2 Depending on the nominal voltage between phase and neutral U0, the maximum breaking time
of Table 41A must be applied to all terminal circuits.
Table 41A - Maximum breaking time (in seconds) for terminal circuits
50 V < U0 ÿ 120 V 120 V < U0 ÿ 230 V 230 V < U0 ÿ 400 V U0 > 400 V
Cutoff time alternating continuous alternating continuous continuous alternating continuous alternating
(s)
TN or IT scheme 0.8 5 0.4 0.2 0.4 0.1 0.1
TT scheme 0.3 5 0.2 5 0.4 0.07 0.2 0.04 0.1
NOTE - Smooth direct current is conventionally defined by a ripple rate not greater than 10%
effective value; the maximum peak value is not more than 140 V for a nominal voltage of 120 V in
smooth direct current and 70 V for a nominal voltage of 60 V in smooth direct current.
These times derive from a curve defining the cut-off time of the protection device
depending on the assumed contact voltage. This curve was established taking into account
international studies on the effects of electric current on the human body
collected in the UTE C 15-110 guide.
The above cutting times are satisfied in particular by differential devices not
deliberately delayed or, when U0 is less than or equal to 230 V, type S.
In practice, the cut-off times of the protection devices need not be taken into account
consideration only if these devices are fuses or circuit breakers whose
triggering is delayed. When protection is provided by other types of
circuit breakers, simply check that the fault current is at least equal to the smallest
current ensuring instantaneous operation of the circuit breaker.
The breaking times in the TT scheme are lower than in the TN or IT scheme, the voltages
presumed contact points in this diagram which can be close to the simple voltage U0.
VS 411.3.2.3 A conventional breaking time not greater than 5 s is permitted for circuits
of distribution.
However, it is recommended to achieve the selectivity of the protections as soon as possible.

short compatible with normal use.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS
411.3.2.4 (available)
411.3.2.5 If automatic cut-off in accordance with 411.3.2.1 cannot be achieved within the time prescribed
in 411.3.2.2 or 411.3.2.3 either by an overcurrent protection device or by a RCD, an additional equipotential
connection must be provided in accordance with 415.2.
411.3.3 Additional protection In

alternating current, the terminal circuits must be provided with additional protection by a differential-residual
current device rated at most equal to 30 mA in accordance with 415.1 when they supply:
- socket outlets with a rated current of at most 32 A; - power sockets installed in

classroom premises or locations
external influences AD4, whatever their rated current;
- socket outlets in temporary installations, such as
site installations, whatever their rated current.
Other situations, where the use of residual current devices (RDC) with a rated current of at most 30 mA is
prescribed, are indicated in Title 7 .
NOTE - If an installation is planned for the use of portable equipment outdoors, it is recommended to install one or two power
sockets outside.
The use of high sensitivity RCDs is particularly justified to ensure the protection of flexible cables supplying
mobile or portable devices, as wear or aging of these cables can lead to deterioration of the insulation or
breakage of the protective conductor, without such defects being able to be detected.
This provision does not apply to power sockets provided by manufacturers on machines bearing the CE
marking, as the European machinery directive does not provide for this requirement. The Ministry
responsible for labor considers that, in this case, the use of such power outlets must be reserved, under
the responsibility of the head of the establishment, for personnel who have received training and operating
instructions.
411.4 TN scheme
The creation of a TN diagram in an installation supplied by the low-voltage public distribution network is
covered in appendix D.
VS 411.4.1 The grounds of the installation must be connected by protective conductors to the main earth
terminal of the installation, which must be connected to the earthed point of the power supply.
The grounded point of the power supply is usually the neutral point. If the neutral point is not available, or
is not accessible, a phase conductor must be grounded. Under no circumstances should the phase
conductor serve as a protective conductor (see 411.4.2).
NOTES -
1 - If effective earthing possibilities exist, it is recommended to connect the protective conductor to them at as many points as
possible. Multiple earthing, at regularly distributed points, may be necessary to ensure that the potential of the protective conductor
remains, in the event of a fault, as close as possible to that of the earth.
In large buildings, such as high-rise buildings, additional earthing of the protective conductors is not possible for practical reasons.
Equipotential connections between protective conductors and conductive elements, however, have a similar function in such cases.
2 - For the same reason, it is recommended to connect the protective conductors to earth at their point of entry into a building or
establishment.
The TN diagram can be: TN-
C - Neutral conductor and protective conductor combined, TN-S - Neutral
conductor and protective conductor separate, TN-CS - Neutral conductor
and protective conductor combined in part of the installation and separate in the rest of the installation.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS Both TN-C and TN-S schemes can be used in the same installation without implementing galvanic separation
provided that the TN-C scheme is used upstream of the TN-S scheme (TN-CS scheme).
L2 L2
L1 L1
L3 L3
NOT
PEN
PE
Yew
Yew
Default
Default
R.B.
R.B.
Figure 411A – Fault loops in TN-C and TN-S schemes
The fault loop consists exclusively of galvanic elements because it only includes active conductors and
protective conductors. The direct phase-to-ground fault current is therefore a short-circuit current.
Certain power conditions can, however, lead to impedance values of the phase-neutral fault loop that are too
high to allow the application of the TN scheme.
This can be the case for example when star-star transformers are used, due to (1) the high value of their
zero-sequence impedance .
The use of this measure in installations supplied directly by a low-voltage public distribution network is subject
to authorization from the electrical energy distributor, due to the fact that the effectiveness of this protection
measure may not be compatible with the operating conditions of its network (see appendix D).
VS
411.4.2 In fixed installations, a single conductor may be used as both a protective conductor and a neutral
conductor (PEN conductor), provided that the requirements of 543.4 are met. The PEN conductor must not
be severed or cut.
The installation is carried out in such a way as to avoid any risk of breakage of the PEN conductor; in
particular, it is necessary to give this conductor a sufficient section from the point of view of mechanical
resistance, to make it from a corrosion-resistant material and to avoid overhead lines exposed to mechanical
risks.
Flexible cables used as mobile conduits must have a protective conductor separate from the neutral conductor.
Socket sockets supplied by a pipeline comprising a PEN conductor have, in addition to the phase contacts, a
contact for the neutral conductor and an earth contact, the connection between the protective conductor and
the neutral conductor being made in the basement.
VS
411.4.3 The characteristics of the protection devices (see 411.4.4) and the impedances of the circuits must
be such that the fault current is greater than or equal to the current Ia :
Uo / Zs ÿ Ia
(1) See appendix to part 3 of standard NF C 13-200

- 71 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
Or
Zs is the impedance, in ohm, of the fault loop including the source, the active conductor up to the fault
point and the protective conductor between the fault point and the source. is the current ensuring
the
Ia operation of the automatic cut-off device over the time defined in 411.3.2.2 and 411.3.2.3. In
alternating current, if the protection device is a differential device, this current is the rated residual
current of this device.
Uo is the nominal voltage between phase and neutral, effective value in alternating current or
smooth in direct current.
If the above relationship cannot be satisfied, 411.3.2.5 should be applied.
Determining the protection conditions by calculation is only possible if the protective conductor - PEN in
the TN-C diagram and PE in the TN-S diagram - is, throughout the installation, placed close to the
conductors active of the corresponding circuit without interposition of ferromagnetic elements.
Indeed, the distance from the protective conductor and/ or the interposition of ferromagnetic elements
significantly increases the value of the impedance of the fault loop, without this value being able to be
predetermined. This is the case if the fault current path consists of metal frames.
In addition, it is recalled (see part 4-44) that the separate routing of the protective conductor and the active
conductors leads, in the event of a fault, to disturbing electromagnetic radiation in installations containing
sensitive equipment.
VS 411.4.4 In the TN scheme, the following protective devices may be used for protection against indirect
contact:
- overcurrent protection devices; - residual current protection
devices
NOTE – The circuit is also protected by an overcurrent protective device in accordance with Part 4-43.
A differential current device must not be used in a TN-C scheme.
When a residual-current protection device is used in a TN-CS scheme, a PEN conductor must not be used
downstream. The connection of the protective conductor to the PEN conductor must be carried out
upstream of the residual current protection device.
NOTE – If selectivity between differential devices is necessary, see 535.4.
411.5 TT scheme
411.5.1 All masses protected by the same protection device must be connected to protective conductors
connected to the same earth connection. If several protection devices are installed in series, this
requirement applies separately to all masses protected by the same device.
Generally, the grounded point of the power supply is the neutral point. If neutral does not exist or is not
accessible, a live conductor must be grounded.
Installations supplied directly by a low-voltage public distribution network are carried out according to the
TT scheme. It is however possible to carry out an installation in TN diagram according to the indications in
appendix D.
- 72 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

L1
VS L2
L3
NOT
Mass
Default
PE
R.B. AR
Yew
Figure 411B – Fault loop in TT diagram
The impedance of the fault loop is that of the loop made up of the phase conductor, the protective conductor
ensuring the connection of the mass to the earth connection of the masses, the earth connection of the masses,
the earth connection of the neutral and the secondary winding of the power transformer. In general, the sum of
the resistances of the earth connections of the masses and the neutral point (RA + RB) is preponderant
compared to the impedance of the other elements of the loop, so that the total impedance of the loop differs little
from the sum (RA + RB). The impedance of this fault loop therefore limits the value of the fault current.
When the earth connections of the neutral and the masses are combined or interconnected, the diagram remains
a TT diagram if all the conditions of the TN diagram are not respected (see 411.4), but the phase-to-ground fault
current is a short current -circuit as in the TN-S diagram and, in this case, the section of the protective
conductors is calculated as in the TN-S diagram.
In practice, the TT scheme is not used in direct current.
411.5.2 In TT scheme, the protection devices are differential devices
The neutral conductor must not be connected to earth downstream of a differential device.
The previous edition of the NF C 15-100 standard provided for the possibility of using overcurrent protection
devices, while explaining in the comments that this mode of protection was generally not suitable. The
introduction into this standard of maximum breaking times for the TT scheme (see 411.3.2.2) has made this
mode of protection definitively impossible, the operation within the maximum time of protection devices against
overcurrents almost systematically leading to values earth connection less than 1 ohm, therefore very difficult to
achieve and not measurable.
VS
411.5.3 In alternating current, the following condition must be satisfied:
RA x Iÿn ÿ 50 V
Or
RA is the resistance of the earth connection of the masses
Iÿn is the rated residual current of the protection device
NOTE - If selectivity between differential devices is necessary, see 535.4.
When several differential devices are used to protect masses connected to the same earth connection, the value
of Iÿn to be taken into consideration is the largest residual differential current of the devices concerned.
- 73 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
This condition determines the maximum value of the grounding resistance of the masses according to the operating characteristics
of the automatic cut-off devices.
For the application of the condition, the impedance of the fault loop can be taken into consideration instead of the resistance RA
of the mass earth connection.
This practice, which is in the direction of safety, leads to requirements that are little different from those based on the resistance of
the grounding of the masses, due to the fact that this resistance generally constitutes the most important part of the impedance of
the loop. fault. Furthermore, it is most often this condition which is effectively verified, particularly when it is not possible, if not very
difficult, to measure the resistance of the earth connection of the masses, whereas it is possible to measure the impedance of the
fault loop by a simple method.
The conditions for using differential devices are indicated in 531.2.
VS
411.6 IT diagram
411.6.1 In the IT diagram, the installation must be isolated from earth or connected to earth through an impedance of sufficiently
high value. This connection is made either to the neutral point of the installation, or failing that to an artificial neutral point which
can be connected directly to earth if the corresponding zero sequence impedance has a sufficient value.
When no neutral point exists, a phase conductor can be connected to earth through an impedance.
In the event of an insulation fault on the same active conductor, the fault current is low and automatic cut-off in accordance with
411.3.2 is not mandatory if the condition of 411.6.2 is satisfied. However, measures must be taken to avoid a risk of dangerous
pathophysiological effects for a person in contact with simultaneously accessible conductive parts in the event of two simultaneous
faults involving two different active conductors.
NOTE - In order to reduce overvoltages and dampen oscillations, earthing via impedance or artificial neutral point may be
necessary; their characteristics should be appropriate to those of the installation. In general, the value of the impedance is taken
of the order of 4 to 6 times the simple voltage of the installation, for example of the order of 1,000 ohms for 230/400 V installations
at industrial frequency.
L1
L2
L3
lf
C3 C2 C1
PE
AR
lf
Figure 411C – First fault loop in IT circuit isolated from earth
- 74 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
When the installation is isolated from earth, the first fault current is closed by the capacities of the other
two phases in relation to earth.
L1
VS
L2
NOT
L3
lf
lf
C3 C2 C1
Zs
PE
R.B. AR
lf
Figure 411D – First fault loop in IT diagram with neutral connected to earth by an
impedance
When the installation is connected to earth by an impedance, the intensity of the first fault current is limited
by the value of the impedance resulting from the paralleling of Zs and the capacities of the two other
phases in relation to earth .
VS 411.6.2 Grounds must be connected to earth, either individually, in groups or together.
NOTE - In large buildings, such as high-rise buildings, additional earthing of protective conductors is not possible for practical
reasons. Equipotential connections between protective conductors and conductive elements, however, have a similar function in
such cases.
Additionally, the following condition must be met:
For alternating current networks RA x If ÿ 50 V
For direct current networks RA x If ÿ 120 V
Or
RA is the grounding resistance of the masses. is the fault

current in the event of a first clear fault of low impedance between an If phase conductor and a
ground. The value of If takes into account leakage currents and the overall earthing impedance of the
electrical installation.
Compliance with the condition guarantees that when a first insulation fault appears, no dangerous contact
voltage appears in the installation.
This makes it possible to avoid any outage at the first fault and to continue operating the installation. For
this possibility to be valid, it is important that the fault be quickly searched for and eliminated.
- 75 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS 411.6.3 A permanent insulation monitor must be provided to indicate the appearance of a first fault of an
active part to mass or earth. This device must activate an audible signal or a visual signal.
If both audible and visual signals exist, it is permitted to cancel the audible signal, but the visual signal must
persist as long as the fault exists.
The conditions relating to the choice and implementation of permanent insulation monitors are indicated in
532.4.
VS 411.6.4 After the occurrence of a first fault, the conditions for automatic power cut-off at the second fault
shall be as follows:
a) When the masses are interconnected by a protective conductor, and collectively earthed, the conditions of
the TN scheme apply and the following condition must be satisfied when the neutral is not distributed in
alternating current networks and in direct current networks where the central conductor is not distributed:
0.5 U / Zs ÿ Ia
or, when the neutral or middle conductor is distributed:
0.5 Uo / Z's ÿ Ia
Or
Uo is the nominal voltage between phase and neutral, effective value in alternating current or
smooth DC
U is the voltage between phases, effective value in alternating current or smooth in current
continuous
ZS is the impedance of the fault loop made up of the phase conductor and the protective conductor of the
circuit Z'S is the impedance of the fault
loop made up of the neutral conductor and the protective conductor of the circuit is the current ensuring the
operation of the protection device in time
Ia t prescribed in Table 41A.
b) When masses are earthed in groups or individually, the protection conditions are those of 411.5 as for the
TT diagram, with the exception of the second paragraph of 411.5.1 which does not apply.
NOTES -
1 – A rated differential-residual current device greater than 30 mA can only protect one circuit.
2 – If a rated differential-residual current device less than or equal to 30 mA is used under conditions a), it can trip on the first fault.
The conditions for eliminating the double fault current depend on the situation of the earth connections: a)
When in
the same installation, all the masses are not connected to the same earth connection, protection is ensured if
two faults occur. produced in different groups of interconnected masses, by respecting the conditions of
the TT scheme.
b) Within a group of interconnected masses, protection is ensured, if two faults occur in this group, by
compliance with the conditions of the TN diagram.
This is the case in an installation if all the masses, including those of the source or the transformer station,
are connected to the same earth connection.
- 76 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
Double fault current (Ifab)

0
ZO ZO
L1
L2
L3
PE
m1 Za Za Ifab Zb
m2 Zf
Ifab : double fault current
Figure 411E – Double fault loop in IT diagram when the masses are connected to the same
earth connection
The figure applies whether the IT diagram is isolated from earth or connected to earth by an impedance.
If the first fault is not eliminated and a second insulation fault occurs affecting another active conductor, a
double fault current, which is a short-circuit current between phases (or between phase and neutral), will
be established, but whose intensity is significantly lower than a short-circuit current in a circuit, due to the
fact that it involves two circuits as shown in the figure.
Determining the protection conditions by calculation is only possible if the protective conductor is located,
throughout the installation, close to the active conductors of the corresponding circuit without the
interposition of ferromagnetic elements.
Indeed, the distance from the protective conductor and/ or the interposition of ferromagnetic elements
significantly increases the value of the impedance of the fault loop, without this value being able to be
predetermined. This is the case if the fault current path only consists of metal frames.
VS 411.6.5 In IT diagram, the following control and protection devices can be used: - permanent insulation
monitors;
- fault finding devices; - overcurrent protection
devices; - residual current protection devices.
The conditions which the protective devices must satisfy are defined by article 531.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
411.7 Very low functional voltage (TBTF)

VS
411.7.1 General
When, for functional reasons, use is made of a nominal voltage not exceeding 50 V rms in alternating current or 120 V in
smooth direct current, but all the requirements of 414.4 relating to SELV or PELV are not not complied with, and when a SELV
or SELV is not necessary, additional protective measures described in 411.7.2 and 411.7.3 must be taken to ensure both
protection against direct contact and protection against contact indirect.
This combination of measures is called TBTF.
NOTE - Such conditions can, for example, be encountered when the circuit includes equipment (transformers, relays, remote
switches, contactors) that do not have sufficient insulation compared to higher voltage circuits.
411.7.2 Requirements for protection against direct contact
Protection against direct contact must be ensured: - either by means of
insulation in accordance with appendix A.1 corresponding to the voltage

minimum test required for the primary circuit;
- either by means of barriers or envelopes meeting the conditions of appendix A.2.
411.7.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact
The grounds of the TBTF equipment must be connected to the protective conductor of the primary circuit.
In the event of an insulation fault between the primary and secondary circuits, protection is ensured by the primary circuit
protection measure, but only in the event of a second fault in the secondary circuit.
411.7.4 Sources
VS
The source of a TBTF circuit is either a transformer with single winding separation or a source conforming to 414.3.
411.7.5 Power outlets
Power sockets for TBTF circuits must meet the following requirements: - the plugs must not be able to enter sockets supplied
with other voltages; - the bases must prevent the insertion of plugs designed for other voltages; - the bases must have a
protective contact.
412 Protective measure by double or reinforced insulation
412.1 General
412.1.1 Double or reinforced insulation is a protective measure in which:

- protection against direct contact is ensured by main insulation and protection against indirect contact is ensured by
additional insulation, or protection against direct contact and against indirect contact is ensured by reinforced insulation
- between the active parts and the accessible parts.
NOTE - This measure is intended to prevent the appearance of dangerous voltages on accessible parts of electrical equipment
during a fault in the main insulation.
Class II is recognized by the standards relating to a certain number of equipment and in particular domestic electrical appliances,
portable hand tools, small transformers (safety, separation, etc.).

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
The standard relating to "series or series derivative assemblies" (previously called factory-mounted equipment
assemblies) (2) recognizes, under the term "totally insulated equipment", equipment presenting safety
equivalent to class II.
Subparagraph 412.2.2 describes the measures to be taken when installing equipment to achieve protection
by insulation equivalent to class II.
VS 412.1.2 The protective measure by double or reinforced insulation is applicable in all situations, unless
limitations given in Part 7 .
412.2 Requirements for protection against direct contact and for protection against indirect contact
412.2.1 Protection must be ensured by the use of:
a) electrical equipment of the following types having undergone type testing and having been
identified according to the rules applicable to them:
- equipment with double or reinforced insulation (class II equipment); (2) - series assemblies
and series derivatives and having total insulation .
NOTE - These materials are marked with the symbol
b) pipelines made up of cables considered to be class II;
Cables that do not have any metallic coating and are used under a voltage not more than half their rated
voltage are considered to be class II. These cables are listed in Table 52A.
A cable containing a protective conductor can be considered a class II cable, provided that the protective
conductor is insulated under the same conditions as the active conductors. This condition complies with the
rule in this paragraph concerning protection by additional insulation during installation, for the crossing of
enclosures by protective conductors.
VS c) additional insulation covering electrical equipment having only main insulation and fitted during the
electrical installation; it ensures safety equivalent to that of equipment conforming to 412.2.1 and meets
the conditions specified in 412.2.2.
For example, a pipeline made up of insulated conductors laid under insulating conduits or insulating trunking
can be considered to satisfy this protection measure.
VS
d) reinforced insulation covering the bare active parts and installed during the electrical installation; it ensures
safety equivalent to that of electrical equipment complying with 412.2.1 and meets the conditions
specified in subparagraphs 412.2.2 and 412.2.3 ; such insulation is only permitted when construction
reasons do not allow double insulation to be achieved.
412.2.2 Enclosures
The electrical equipment being in operating condition, all conductive parts separated from the active parts
by main insulation only must be enclosed in an insulating enclosure having at least the degree of protection
IP2X or IPXXB.
(2) NF EN 60439-1 (C 63-421)
- 79 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS The insulating envelope must not be crossed by conductive parts likely to propagate a potential. The envelope must not
include screws made of insulating material whose replacement with a metal screw could compromise the insulation provided
by the envelope.
NOTE - When it is imperative that the insulating envelope is crossed by mechanical connections (for example control elements of
incorporated devices), these must be arranged in such a way that protection against electric shock is not compromised .
When the enclosure has doors or covers which can be opened without the aid of a tool or key, all conductive parts which are
accessible when the door or cover is open must be protected by an insulating barrier having at least least the degree of
protection IP2X or IPXXB, so as to prevent people from accidentally touching these parts. This insulating barrier must only be
able to be removed using a tool.
The protective barrier against accidental contact must provide insulation equivalent to double insulation.
VS Conductive parts enclosed in an insulating envelope must not be connected to a protective conductor. However, arrangements
can be made for the connection of protective conductors which necessarily pass through the enclosure to connect other
electrical equipment whose power circuit passes through the enclosure. Inside the enclosure, such conductors and their
terminals must be insulated as live parts, and the terminals must be marked appropriately.
Earthing of intermediate parts may be necessary, for example to prevent unintended operation.
Accessible conductive parts and intermediate parts must not be connected to a protective conductor unless this is provided
VS
for by the construction rules of the corresponding equipment.
The envelope must not harm the operating conditions of the equipment thus protected.
412.2.3 The installation of the equipment set out in 412.1.1 (fixing, connection of conductors, etc.) must be carried out in such
a way as not to harm the protection provided in accordance with the construction rules for this equipment.
412.2.4 A circuit supplying Class II equipment must include a protective conductor throughout its route.
NOTE – This requirement is intended to take into account the replacement by the user of class II equipment by class I equipment.
413 Protection measure by electrical separation
413.1 General
413.1.1 Electrical separation is a protective measure in which:

- protection against direct contact is ensured either by main insulation of the active parts, or by barriers or enclosures, in
accordance with Annex A ; and protection against indirect contact is ensured by a protective separation between the
- separate circuit and the other circuits.
- 80 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS NOTE - The electrical separation protection measure consists of separating the use circuit from the power supply installation in
such a way that in the event of an insulation fault in the separated circuit, no dangerous contact voltage can appear.
413.1.2 The electrical separation protection measure is applicable in all situations, but is limited to the power supply of a single
user equipment from a separate source isolated from earth.
This protective measure is not intended to power devices with a low level of insulation.
The safety of this measure relies on the good insulation of the circuits thus separated and the state of the insulation must be
able to be verified by a simple visual inspection.
VS 413.2 Requirements for protection against direct contact
413.2.1 All electrical equipment must be subject to one of the provisions for protection against direct contact in Appendix A or
to the protection measure given in 412.
413.2.2 The provision for protection against direct contact relating to the insulation of active parts (A.1 of Annex A) or by
barriers or enclosures (A.2 of Annex A) is applicable regardless of the conditions of external influences.
413.2.3 If more than one user equipment is supplied by a separate source isolated from earth, the requirements of 411.6.1 (IT
diagram) or Annex C3 must be met.
413.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact
413.3.1 Protection by electrical separation must be provided in accordance with the requirements set out in subparagraphs
413.3.2 to 413.3.6.
413.3.2 The circuit must be supplied via a separation source, that is to say:
- a separation transformer, or - a current source

ensuring safety equivalent to that of the separation transformer specified above, for example a motor-generator having windings
providing equivalent separation.
The standard relating to isolation transformers to be considered for the application of the rule set out in 511.1 is standard NF
EN 61558-2-4 (C 52-558-2-4).
The use of transformers with equivalent safety is necessary for devices whose characteristics (power, etc.) are outside the
scope of application of the aforementioned standard.
The current source ensuring equivalent safety can be obtained by applying construction rules similar to those of separation
transformers.
The conditions relating to engine-generator groups are under study. The groups targeted are those whose motor is electric.
VS Mobile separation sources connected to a power supply network must be chosen or installed in accordance with the
requirements of article 412.
Fixed separation sources must be:

- either chosen or installed in accordance with the requirements of article 412 ; either such that the
- secondary circuit is separated from the primary circuit and the enclosure by insulation satisfying the conditions of article
412 ; if such a source supplies several devices, the masses of these must not be connected to the metal enclosure of
the source.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS 413.3.3 The live parts of the separate circuit must not have any point in common with any other circuit or
any point connected to earth.
The arrangements made must ensure a separation at least equivalent to that which exists between the
primary and secondary circuits of a circuit separation transformer.
NOTE - In particular, if an auxiliary circuit is a separate circuit, electrical separation is necessary between the power parts and the
auxiliary parts of electrical equipment such as relays, contactors, control auxiliaries.
413.3.4 Flexible cables must be visible over their entire length susceptible to mechanical damage.
413.3.5 It is recommended to use a dedicated pipeline for the separate circuit. If it is not possible to avoid
using the conductors of the same pipe for the separate circuit and other circuits, use must be made of
multi-conductor cables without any metallic covering or of insulated conductors laid in trunking or insulating
conduits, under provided that these cables and conductors are specified for a voltage at least equal to the
highest voltage involved and that each circuit is protected against overcurrents.
The protection of circuits against overloads at their origin meets the conditions of 434.2.
413.3.6 The grounds of the separate circuit must not be connected either to a protective conductor or to
VS
the grounds of other circuits.
NOTE - If the masses of the separated circuit are likely to come into contact, either de facto or fortuitously, with the masses of other
circuits, the safety of people no longer relies on the sole measure of protection by electrical separation, but on the protective
measures to which these latter masses are subject.
414 Very low voltage protection measure
414.1 General
414.1.1 Extra-low voltage protection is a protection measure made up of two different types of very low
voltage circuits: - Extra Low Voltage Safety (SELV, circuits
not connected to earth), - Very Low Voltage Protection ( PELV, earthed circuits),
for which protection is ensured by:

- a limitation of the SELV or SELV voltage to 50 V in alternating current and 120 V in
direct current;
- a protective separation between the SELV or SELV circuits and all other circuits other than SELV or
SELV, and a main isolation between the SELV and SELV circuits,
For SELV circuits only, main insulation is ensured between the SELV circuit and earth.
414.1.2 The use of SELV or SELV is considered a protective measure in all situations.
NOTE – In certain cases, Part 7 limits the value of the very low voltage to values lower than 50 V in alternating current or 120 V in
smooth direct current.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
The different very low voltages are designated by the following abbreviations:
- SELV: very low safety voltage;
- PELV: very low safety voltage having a point of the secondary circuit connected to earth
but satisfying all other conditions of the TBTS;
- TBTF: functional very low voltage, that is to say very low voltage not responding
to the TBTS rules nor to the TBTP rules (see 411.7).
The equipment used in SELV and PELV circuits can be class III.
VS 414.2 Requirements for protection against direct contact and for protection against indirect contact
Protection against direct contact and protection against indirect contact for circuits whose nominal voltage cannot exceed 50 V
in alternating current and
120 V direct current, are considered assured when:
- the power source is a source meeting the terms of paragraph 414.3, - all the conditions of paragraph 414.4 are met.
NOTES -
1 - When the circuit is supplied from a higher voltage circuit through other equipment, such as autotransformers, potentiometers,
semiconductor devices, etc., the secondary circuit thus formed is considered as forming part of the primary circuit and must be
included in the protection measure for this circuit.
2 - If the circuit is supplied by a higher voltage circuit having only a simple separation between the very low voltage circuit and the
higher voltage circuit and not satisfying the requirements relating to SELV or PELV sources of 414.3, the requirements for TBTF
are applicable, see 411.7.
3 - The direct voltages of TBT circuits generated by a semiconductor converter (see NF EN 61146-2 [C 97-186]) require an internal
alternating current circuit to power the rectifier.
This internal AC voltage can be higher than the DC voltage for physical reasons. This internal alternating circuit is not considered
a higher voltage circuit within the meaning of this paragraph. Between internal circuits and an external circuit at higher voltage,
protective separation in accordance with 3.24 of standard NF EN 61140 (C 20-030) is required.
4 - In direct current networks with batteries, the charging and floating voltages may exceed the nominal voltage, depending on the
type of battery. This does not require additional protective measures. It is recommended that the charging voltage does not exceed
a maximum value of 75 V for alternating current and 150 V for direct current.
The actual voltage value may differ from the nominal value within the permitted tolerance limits, generally + 10%.
When very low voltage circuits are supplied with alternating current, the voltage in these circuits must not be higher, in no-load
operation, than 50 volts when the voltage of the primary circuit of the safety source is at its nominal value.
VS 414.3 Sources for SELV and SELV
These sources are:
414.3.1 A safety transformer conforming to NF EN 61558-2-6 (C 52-558-2-6).
414.3.2 A current source ensuring a degree of safety equivalent to that of a safety transformer described in 414.3.1 (for
example motor-generator with windings having equivalent separation).

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS 414.3.3 An electrochemical source (batteries or accumulators) or another source that does not depend
on higher voltage circuits (for example thermal engine-generator group).
414.3.4 Certain electronic devices conforming to appropriate standards, in which measures have been
taken to ensure that, even in the event of an internal fault in that device, the voltage at the output terminals
cannot exceed the limits given in 414.2. Higher values may be permitted if, in the event of contact, direct
or indirect, the voltage at the output terminals is immediately reduced to these limits or below.
NOTES -
1 - Insulation test equipment are examples of such devices.
2 - When the voltage at the output terminals is higher, compliance with this provision may be considered satisfied if the voltage at
the output terminals is within the limits specified in 414.2 when measured with a voltmeter having a internal resistance of at least
3000 ohms.
414.3.5 Mobile sources, such as safety transformers or motor-generator groups, must be chosen or
installed in accordance with the requirements of the protection measure by using Class II equipment or by
equivalent insulation (see article 412 ).
The standards relating to safety transformers and electronic converters to be considered for the application
of the rule set out in 511.1 are respectively the standards NF EN 61558-1 (C 52-558-1) and NF EN 61046
(C 71-240) .
The use of transformers and converters presenting equivalent safety is necessary for devices whose
characteristics (power, primary voltage) are outside the scope of application of the aforementioned
standards.
VS 414.4 Requirements for SELV and SELV circuits
414.4.1 SELV and SELV circuits must have:

- a protective separation between their active parts and those of other circuits, with the exception of the
active parts of other SELV or PELV circuits, constituted by double insulation or reinforced insulation
dimensioned for the highest voltage or by insulation main and a protective screen sized for the highest
voltage present;
- main insulation between their active parts and the active parts of other circuits
SELV or PELV.
NOTE – Earthing of PELV circuits can be achieved by a suitable connection to earth in the source itself.
SELV circuits must have main insulation between their active parts and earth.
414.4.2 Protective separation between the pipelines of SELV and PELV circuits and the active parts of
other circuits can be achieved by one of the following arrangements:
- the conductors of the SELV and SELV circuits are provided, in addition to their insulation
main, a non-metallic sheath or envelope;
- the conductors of the SELV and SELV circuits are separated from the conductors at different voltages
by a metal screen connected to earth or by a metal sheath connected to earth;

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
- the conductors of SELV and PELV circuits belong to a multi-conductor cable or to a group of conductors
VS
which may contain circuits at different voltages provided that they are insulated, either individually or
collectively, for the highest voltage involved; - a physical separation is achieved.
The diagrams below illustrate the different arrangements provided for above:
The conductors of the SELV or SELV circuit are provided, in addition to their main insulation, with
a non-metallic sheath.
A grounded metal screen separates SELV or SELV circuits from any other circuits.
The SELV or SELV circuit is part of a multi-conductor cable containing other circuits, the
conductors of the SELV or SELV circuit being insulated for the highest voltage involved in the
circuits of the cable.
The TBTS or TBTP circuit is physically separated from any other circuit.
designates the TBTS or TBTP circuit.
designates another circuit.
Figure 414A – Neighborhood rules between a LV circuit and a SELV or SELV circuit
414.4.3 Power sockets for SELV and PELV circuits must meet the following requirements:
VS
- the plugs must not be able to enter sockets powered by other voltages; - the bases must prevent the insertion of plugs
designed for other voltages; - SELV bases must not have a protective contact.
414.4.4 The live parts of SELV circuits must not be electrically connected to earth, nor to live parts, nor to protective conductors
belonging to other circuits.
414.4.5 Grounds shall not be intentionally connected to earth, protective conductors or grounds of other circuits.
NOTE - If SELV circuit grounds are likely to come into contact, either de facto or fortuitously, with the grounds of other circuits,
protection against electric shock no longer relies on the SELV protection measure alone, but on the protective measures to which
these latter masses are subject.
414.4.6 When the nominal voltage of the SELV circuit is greater than 25 V effective value in alternating current or 60 V in
smooth direct current, protection against direct contact must be ensured: either by insulation conforming to A.1 of the Annex
A ; either by barriers or
- enclosures conforming to A.2 of Appendix A.
-
When the nominal voltage of the PELV circuit is greater than 12 V effective value in alternating current or 30 V in smooth direct
current, protection against direct contact must be ensured: either by insulation in accordance with A.1 of appendix A ; either by
barriers or
- enclosures conforming to A.2 of Appendix A.
-
- 85 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
In all other cases, protection against direct contact is not necessary.
Table 41B – Summary of protection against direct contact
AC voltage u ÿ 12V 12 < U ÿ 25 25 <U ÿ 50
DC voltage u ÿ 30V 30 <U ÿ 60 60 <U ÿ 120
TBTS
Protection against Not necessary Not necessary Necessary
direct contacts
TBTP
Protection against Not necessary Necessary Necessary
direct contacts
VS
415 Supplementary protection
415.1 Supplementary protection by residual current devices
NOTE - This protective measure is only intended to complement other protective measures against
direct contact.
415.1.1 The use of residual-differential current devices, whose current value

nominal operating differential is less than or equal to 30 mA, is recognized as
additional protective measure in the event of failure of the protective provision
against direct contact or in the event of carelessness of users.
415.1.2 The use of such devices is not recognized as constituting in itself a

complete protection measure and in no way exempts from the use of one of the protection measures
protections set out in paragraphs 411.1 to 411.4.
Experience proves that traditional protective measures against direct contact, which
are preventive in nature, may prove to be faulty occasionally, by default
maintenance, normal or abnormal wear of the insulation, or carelessness.
One way to eliminate part of the risk of accidents is to use a device

differential-residual current protection of differential-residual current assigned to at most
equal to 30 mA, intended to ensure rapid de-energization of the electrical installation,
or the installation part concerned, the appearance of a very low fault current at the
earth.
415.2 Additional equipotential connection

VS
NOTES -
1 - The use of additional equipotential connections does not relieve the need for power cut-off
power supply for other reasons, such as fire protection, thermal constraints of equipment,
etc.
2 - This additional equipotential connection may concern a part of the installation, a device or a
location.
3 - Additional requirements may be necessary for special locations, see part 7.
415.2.1 The additional equipotential connection must include all parts

conductive conductors simultaneously accessible, whether they are the masses of fixed equipment or
conductive elements, including, as far as possible, the main reinforcements of the
reinforced concrete used in the construction of buildings. To this equipotential system must
be connected to the protective conductors of all equipment, including those of power sockets
fluent.
- 86 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS 415.2.2 If there is any doubt about the effectiveness of the additional equipotential connection, it must be verified by ensuring
that the resistance R between any mass considered and any simultaneously accessible conductive element meets the following
condition:
50V
Rÿ in alternating current
I has
120V
Rÿ in direct current
I has
Or
is the operating current in 5 s at most for Ia overcurrent protection devices.
- 87 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS
Annex A – (normative) – Provisions for protection against
direct contact
NOTE – Provisions for protection against direct contact provide protection under normal conditions and are applied if specified as
part of the chosen protective measure.
A.1 Insulation of active parts

NOTE - The insulation is intended to prevent any contact with live parts of the electrical installation.
Live parts must be completely covered with insulation which can only be removed by destruction.
For equipment manufactured in a factory, the insulation must comply with the corresponding requirements relating to this equipment.
For other equipment, protection must be ensured by insulation capable of withstanding, in a durable manner, the constraints to which
it may be subjected, such as mechanical, chemical, electrical and thermal influences. Paints, varnishes, lacquers and similar products
are generally not considered to provide sufficient insulation for protection against direct contact.
A.2 Barriers or enclosures

NOTE - The barriers or enclosures are intended to prevent any contact with the live parts of the electrical installation.
A.2.1 The active parts must be placed inside enclosures or behind barriers having at least the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB;
however, if larger openings occur during the replacement of parts such as certain sockets, sockets or fuses, or if larger openings are
necessary to allow the proper operation of the equipment in accordance with the rules applicable to this equipment : - Appropriate
precautions must be taken to prevent persons or persons
livestock from accidentally touching the working parts, and

- it must be ensured that, as far as possible, people are aware of the fact that the parts accessible through
the opening are active parts and must not be touched voluntarily.
- the opening must be as small as reasonable to meet the requirements of a

proper operation and replacement of an element.
Protection against direct contact may be designated in the IP code by an additional letter which has the following meaning, in
accordance with standard NF EN 60529 (C 20-010) and product standards.
Additional letter Description of protection
HAS
Protection against access with the back of the hand
B
Protection against access with one finger
VS
Protection against access with a tool
D
Protection against access with a wire
- 88 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
The additional letter is used only:

-
if the actual protection against direct contact is higher than that indicated by the first characteristic number (protection against
the penetration of solid bodies) (example: IP2XC); - or if only one protection against direct contact is mentioned, the first digit
characteristic then being replaced by the sign X (Example: IPXXB).
Openings with dimensions less than 12 mm confer the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB. Openings greater than 12 mm can
meet IPXXB degree if the active parts cannot be reached by the test finger.
Equipment that does not meet these provisions must be protected by additional barriers or enclosures.
VS A.2.2 The upper surfaces of barriers or horizontal enclosures which are easily accessible must meet at least the degree of
protection IP4X or IPXXD.
By upper surfaces, we mean surfaces on which people normally circulate, such as floors, walkways overlooking active parts (for
example busbars).
For cabinet doors and panels, although accessible to unqualified people, the degree of protection IP4X or IPXXD is not imposed,
but only IP2X or IPXXB, people cannot stand above them.
This provision is intended to protect against the dangers that may result from the accidental fall of a tool (screwdriver) whose metal
part would penetrate the mesh of a slatted floor.
This does not preclude the use of barriers with openings provided that they are securely maintained and meet the requirements of
A.2.4.
VS A.2.3 Barriers and enclosures must be securely fixed and of sufficient strength and durability to maintain the required degrees of
protection with sufficient separation of active parts under known normal service conditions, taking into account external influences.
A.2.4 When it is necessary to remove barriers, open envelopes or remove parts of envelopes, this must only be possible: - either
using a wrench or a tool , Examples of arrangement: - screen whose removal requires the use
of a key, - casing requiring the help of a screwdriver
to act as an opening lever.
This does not, however, preclude the use of quick closing devices provided that the effort required for their opening requires
significant manual action. - either after de-energizing the active parts protected by these barriers or these enclosures, the
voltage can only be restored
VS after replacing the barriers or enclosures, Example of arrangement: Locking of the door(s) with the power supply disconnecting
device so that the door(s) can only be opened if the disconnecting device is open, and the latter cannot be closed until the
door(s) ) door(s) remain
open.
When the installation includes large capacity capacitors, their discharge must be ensured, if necessary. - or if a second barrier
having at least the degree of protection
VS IP2X or IPXXB is interposed, which can only be removed using a key or a tool and which prevents any contact with the active parts.
Example of arrangement: Shutter

placed in front of the power supply pins of a withdrawable assembly.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS
Annex B – (normative) – Protective measures against direct contact, under
surveillance conditions
NOTES -
1 – Provisions for protection against direct contact provide protection under normal conditions and are applied if specified as part of
the chosen protective measure.
2 – The monitoring conditions under which the protective provisions of Annex B may apply as part of a protective measure are given
in 410.3.3.
B.1 Obstacles
NOTE - Obstacles are intended to prevent incidental contact with active parts, but not intentional contact by a deliberate attempt to
circumvent the obstacle.
B.1.1 Obstacles must prevent: either an unintentional

- physical approach to the active parts, or unintentional contact with the active parts during
- work on live equipment during operation.
B.1.2 Obstacles can be dismantled without using a tool or wrench; however, they must be secured in such a way as to prevent
any involuntary removal.
Examples of such obstacles are railings (guardrails) or mesh panels.
This protective measure does not ensure complete protection against direct contact, its application is
limited in practice to electrical service premises accessible only to authorized persons or accompanied
by an electrical safety supervisor, as specified in part 7 .
VS B.2 Putting out of range by moving away
NOTE - Moving out of range is only intended to prevent accidental contact with active parts.
B.2.1 Simultaneously accessible parts at different potentials must not be located within the touch-accessible volume
(abbreviated: accessibility volume).
NOTE - Two parts are considered simultaneously accessible if they are less than 2.50 m apart (see figure B1).
The distance of 2.50 meters must be increased depending on the length of the conductive objects that
can be handled or transported in the corresponding premises. The ground is considered one of the
simultaneously accessible parts unless it is insulating (235.2).
This protective measure does not ensure complete protection against direct contact, its application is
limited in practice to electrical service premises accessible only to authorized persons or accompanied
by an electrical safety supervisor, as specified in part 7 .
Regarding overhead power lines, paragraph 529.7 indicates the minimum distances to be respected.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
2.50
VS
m
0.75m
Accessibility Volume
Limit
1.25m
1.25m
S surface likely to be occupied by people.
Figure B1 - Accessibility volume
B.2.2 When the space in which people normally stand and move around is limited in a horizontal direction by an obstacle (for
example guardrail, mesh panel) presenting a degree of protection lower than IP2X or IPXXB, the accessibility volume begins
from this obstacle. In the vertical direction, the accessibility volume is limited to 2.50 m from the surface S on which people stand
or move, without taking into account intermediate obstacles presenting a degree of protection lower than IP2X or IPXXB.
NOTE - The accessibility volume distances assume contact directly with bare hands without an intermediary (e.g. tool or ladder).
B.2.3 In locations where long or bulky conductive objects are commonly handled, the distances
prescribed in paragraphs B.2.1 and B.2.2 must be increased taking into account the dimensions of these
objects.
- 91 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS Annex C – (normative) – Protective measures in installations under

surveillance conditions
NOTES -
1 – Provisions for protection against indirect contact provide protection under fault conditions and are applied if specified as part of
the chosen protective measure.
2 – The monitoring conditions in which the protection measures of this annex may apply are given in 410.3.4.
C.1 Non-conductive premises or locations

NOTE - This protective measure is intended to prevent simultaneous contact with parts likely to be brought to different potentials
during the failure of the main insulation.
C.1.1 The masses must be arranged so that, under normal conditions, people do not come into simultaneous contact:
- either with two masses,

- or with one mass and any conducting element,
if these elements are likely to be at different potentials in the event of a fault in the main insulation of the
active parts.
C.1.2 In such premises (or locations), no protective conductor must be provided.
C.1.3 The requirements of paragraph C.1.1 are considered to be complied with if the location has insulating walls and floor
and if one or more of the following conditions are met: a) Respective distance from masses and conductive elements as well
as masses between them. This distance is
considered sufficient if the distance between two elements is at least 2 m, this distance can be reduced to 1.25 m outside the
accessibility volume.
b) Interposition of effective obstacles between the masses or between the masses and the conductive
elements. These obstacles are considered sufficiently effective if they bring the distance to be
crossed to the values indicated in point a). They must not be connected to earth or to masses;
wherever possible, they should be made of insulating material.
c) Insulation or isolated arrangement of conductive elements. The insulation must have sufficient
mechanical rigidity and be able to withstand a test voltage of at least 2,000 V. The leakage current
must not be greater than 1 mA under normal conditions of use.
C.1.4 The insulating walls and floors must present at each measurement point, under the conditions of part 6, a resistance
not lower than: - 50 kÿ, if the nominal voltage of the installation is not greater than
500 V , and - to 100 kÿ, if the nominal voltage of the installation is greater than 500 V.
NOTE - If the resistance is not greater than or equal to the prescribed value at any point, these walls and floors are considered to
be conductive elements from the point of view of protection against electric shock.
C.1.5 The arrangements made must be sustainable and must not be able to be rendered ineffective. They must also ensure
the protection of mobile equipment when its use is envisaged.
NOTES -
1 - Attention is drawn to the risk of subsequent introduction, into electrical installations not strictly monitored, of other parts (for
example mobile equipment of class I or conductive elements, such as metal water pipes) likely to annihilate compliance with C.1.6.
2 - It is important to ensure that humidity does not risk compromising the insulation of walls and floors.
- 92 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
VS C.1.6 Provisions must be made to prevent conductive elements from being able to propagate potentials
outside the location considered.
C.2 Protection by local equipotential connections not connected to earth

NOTE - The creation of local equipotential connections is intended to prevent the appearance of dangerous contact voltages.
The application of this protective measure is limited in practice to certain small workstations where other
protective measures cannot be implemented.
VS C.2.1 Equipotential conductors must connect all masses and all simultaneously accessible conductive
elements.
These connections are made using protective conductors meeting the same conditions as those provided
for additional equipotential connections (see 544.2).
VS
C.2.2 The local equipotential connection thus created must not be connected to earth either directly or
via masses or conductive elements.
NOTE - If this condition cannot be met, protective measures must be applied by automatically cutting off the power supply (see 411).
C.2.3 Provisions must be made to ensure access for people to the location in question without being
subject to a dangerous difference in potential. This applies in particular to the case where a conductive
floor, but isolated from the ground, is connected to the local equipotential connection.
C.3 Electrical separation for the supply of more than one user equipment
C.3.1 Protection by electrical separation for the power supply of more than one equipment must be
ensured while respecting all the requirements of 413 and C.3.
C.3.2 The masses of the separate circuit must be connected together by insulated equipotential
conductors not connected to earth. Such conductors must not be connected to protective conductors, to
the grounds of other circuits, or to conductive elements.
NOTE - See note to 413.3.6.
C.3.3 The power socket bases must be fitted with an earth contact which must be connected to the
equipotential conductor provided for in C.3.2.
C.3.4 With the exception of those which supply Class II equipment, all flexible cables must include a
protective conductor used as an equipotential conductor.
C.3.5 In the event of two clear faults involving two masses and supplied by two conductors of different
polarity, a protection device must ensure interruption in a time at most equal to that fixed in table 41A.
Verification of this provision is made in case of doubt.
- 93 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
Annex D – (normative) – Compatibility between various earthing schemes and their

connection to the public distribution network
D.1 Compatibility rules

It is possible to supply different installations using the same transformer - or the same transformer station
- using different earthing schemes, provided that the following provisions are respected:
a) the installation diagrams are TT or TN exclusively; b) each installation

is properly protected and carried out in accordance with the rules applicable to the
corresponding diagram;
c) a main equipotential connection is made in each building in accordance with subparagraph 411.3.1.1,
the protective conductors of all installations in the building are connected to this main equipotential
connection;
d) the connection of the PEN conductor of any installation carried out according to the TN diagram to the
neutral point of the transformer, and to the main equipotential connection is carried out downstream of
the general protection device of this installation;
e) the neutral point of the transformer, the substation masses and the protective conductors of the
installations located in the same building are connected to the same earth connection or to a set of
interconnected earth connections;
f) each installation has its own protective conductor to which the masses of the corresponding installation
are connected; when, in the same room, there are devices powered by different installations and
simultaneously accessible, it is recommended to connect their masses by an additional equipotential
connection.
The diagram in Figure D1 illustrates these arrangements

L
M1 M2
L1 L2 L3 P
NOT
NOT
DDR PE
Individual Heating
installation installation
(TT diagram) B
HAS
PEN
PE
Transformer station X XXX

Collective installation
D (TN diagram)
X
X
X
X PEN
Main equipotential bond

M
Building earth
connection
Figure D1 – Example of compatibility between a TT diagram and a TN diagram
- 94 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
MT Connection between the PEN conductor of the TN installation and the equipotential connection
main building and the earth connection.
L Additional equipotential bonding recommended if masses M1 and M2 are simultaneously
accessible.
DR Individual installation connection circuit breaker A.

P Device for protecting the bypass of the collective heating installation serving the same premises
as those supplied by the individual installation A.
D Protection device for the collective installation made according to the TN diagram: this device
can be three-pole or four-pole.
These provisions allow the following to be supplied by a public distribution transformer:

- on the one hand, the individual electrical installations carried out according to the TT diagram and
supplied by the connection installations coming from this transformer;
- on the other hand, the electrical installations of General Services and collective electric heating of the
same buildings carried out according to the TN diagram, or a particular connection coming directly
from the public distribution station.
D.2 Connection of an installation in TN-C and TN-S scheme to a public distribution network
Public distribution networks generally operate according to the TT scheme.

Adaptation to the TN scheme is only possible under certain conditions on part of the underground
networks. Due to the vulnerability of the neutral, it is completely excluded on overhead networks.
Consequently, before undertaking any study or carrying out a connection of a TN scheme installation to a
low voltage public distribution network, you should contact the distributor. If the substation is located in
the building to be connected, the substation masses are connected to the building's earth connection.
In addition, determining the protection conditions requires knowledge of the maximum value of the
impedance from the source to the point of delivery (resistance and reactance).
These values, expressed in ohms, are communicated by the distributor.
The neutral conductor must be connected to the main equipotential connection at the origin of the indoor
installation. The earth connection is carried out by means of a loop at the bottom of the excavation or
equivalent device, in accordance with the provisions provided.
- 95 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
Examples of connecting TN-C and TN-S scheme installations to a public distribution network are given
below.
Delivery point L1 L2 L3 N PE
Use in TNS diagram
L1 D
vs L1
()() X
L2
L2
NETWORK () X
L3
L3
X
Zcc MAX PEN NOT
PE
NF C 14-100 NF C 15-100 THE P
(*)
OTHER PIPES
Main earth terminal
(*) Additional protective conductor

Smin = 25 mm² this conductor is connected to
the installation, as close as possible to
the point of delivery, at a point Loop at the bottom of the dig
permanently accessible to the customer
Figure D2 – Connection of a TN-S scheme installation to a public distribution

network
Use in TNC diagram Delivery point L1 L2 L3 PEN
L1 vs
D
()() X
L2
NETWORK () X
L3
X
Zcc MAX PEN
(*)
PE
NF C 14-100 NF C 15-100
OTHER PIPES THE P
Main earth terminal
(*) Additional protective conductor

Smin = 25 mm² this conductor is connected to the
installation, as close as possible to the point of
delivery, at a point permanently accessible Loop at the bottom of the dig
to the customer
Figure D3 – Connection of an installation in TN-C diagram to a public distribution

network
______________
- 96 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
Part 4-42 – Protection against fire, burns and explosion
421 General rules of fire protection........................................ ................... 98 422 Additional fire protection
rules ..................... ............................. 99 423 Protection against the risk of
burns ............... .................................................. .... 104 424 Locations at risk of explosion (BE3
locations)................................... .......... 104
Appendix - Reaction to fire - Conventional classifications ......................................... .......... 108
____________
- 97 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
H
421 General rules of fire protection
421.1 Electrical equipment must not present a fire danger to neighboring materials.
The corresponding manufacturer's instructions must be observed in addition to the requirements of this standard.
Overcurrent protection is the subject of Part 4-43.
The operating devices must be arranged so as not to hinder their heat dissipation.
H 421.2 When the external temperatures of fixed equipment can reach values likely to cause a fire in neighboring
materials, the equipment must be: - either installed on or inside materials withstanding such
temperatures and of low
thermal conductivity ;
- either separated from the construction elements by materials capable of withstanding such temperatures
and low thermal conductivity.
Non-metallic materials of categories M0, M1 or M2 are suitable for the application of the above provisions. - be
installed at a sufficient
H distance from any material whose conservation could be compromised by such temperatures, allowing safe
dissipation of heat, the supports of the materials having low thermal conductivity.
Category M3, M4 or unclassified materials are covered by this dash.

In France, the classification M0 to M4 is that which results from the amended decree of June 30, 1983 of the
Ministry of the Interior relating to the classification of construction and development materials according to their
reaction to fire and definition of test methods.
The appendix to this part gives a conventional classification of construction materials from the point of view of
their reaction to fire.
H 421.3 Fixed equipment likely to produce arcs or sparks in normal service must be:
- either completely enclosed in arc-resistant materials; - either separated from

construction elements on which the arcs could have effects
harmful, by screens made of arc-resistant material;
- are installed at a sufficient distance from construction elements on which arcs and sparks could have harmful
effects, allowing safe extinction of the arc and sparks.
In the case of arcs, the arc-resistant materials used for this protective measure must be non-combustible, have
low thermal conductivity and have appropriate thickness to provide mechanical stability.
421.4 Fixed equipment presenting a heat focusing or concentration effect must be sufficiently far from any fixed
object and any construction element, such that these objects or elements cannot be subjected, under normal
conditions, to a temperature dangerous.
This rule concerns in particular certain incandescent headlamps with intensive beam.
H 421.5 When electrical equipment installed in the same premises contains a significant quantity of flammable
liquid, measures must be taken to prevent the ignited liquid and the combustion products of the liquid (flame,
smoke, toxic gas) from spreading to other areas. parts of the building.
- 98 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
H NOTES -
1 - As examples of such arrangements, we can cite: - an extinguishing pit collecting
liquid leaks and ensuring their extinction in the event of a fire;
- the installation of equipment in a room made up of fire-resistant walls with thresholds or other means to prevent the spread of ignited liquid in other parts of the building,
this room being ventilated only to the outside.
2 - A quantity of 25 l is generally considered large.

3 - For quantities less than 25 l, it is sufficient to take measures to prevent the liquid from leaking.
4 - It is advisable to turn off the equipment as soon as a fire begins.
The fire risk protection measures to be taken depending on the nature of the liquid dielectric are defined in
standard NF C 17-300.
The NF C 17-300 standard does not impose any protection measures against fire risks when the total volume of
liquid dielectric per tank or tank is not greater than: - 25 l for class O1 and K1 dielectrics, -
50 l for class K2 and K3 dielectrics, - any for class L3
dielectrics.
H 421.6 The materials of the envelopes placed around electrical equipment during their installation must be able to
withstand the highest temperatures likely to be produced by the electrical equipment.
When considering implementing an envelope around electrical equipment, it is generally appropriate to consult
the equipment manufacturer.
H Combustible materials are not suitable for the construction of these enclosures, unless preventive measures
against ignition are taken, such as cladding with a non-combustible or hardly combustible material of low thermal
conductivity.
M3, M4 or unclassified materials are not suitable for the construction of these enclosures, unless preventive
measures against ignition are taken, such as cladding with an M0, M1 or M2 material of low thermal conductivity.
This rule does not apply to the envelopes of materials which form an integral part of it when these materials meet
the standards applicable to them.
It applies to the enclosures of equipment assemblies other than those conforming to (1) specific standards (see
558.2).
421.7 Conduits, exposed trunking and cable trays must meet the characteristics of non-propagation of flame.
H
422 Additional rules for fire protection
422.0 General
NOTE - This part gives minimum requirements. Regulations may prescribe additional rules.
This part covers:
- the choice and implementation of installations in premises at risk of fire due to the nature of the materials
processed or stored such as flammable materials for manufacturing, processing or storage, including in the
form of dust, for example in barns, carpentry workshops, paper factories.
(1) NF C 61-910 and NF EN 60439-1 (C 63-421)

NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
NOTE - The nature, quantities of flammable materials, surfaces and volumes of these premises may be fixed by regulations.
The premises or locations covered by this indent are premises classified BE2.
H - the choice and implementation of installations in premises constructed of materials

combustibles such as wood, certain hollow walls, etc.;
- the choice and implementation of installations in premises containing goods

irreplaceable.
Premises containing irreplaceable goods are museums, collections of art objects, etc.
- installations in fire-propagating structures.

H
Electrical equipment must be chosen and implemented in such a way that, in normal operation, its temperature and the foreseeable
temperature rise in the event of a fault cannot cause a fire, taking into account the conditions of external influences.
This can be achieved by appropriate constructive measures or by additional measures during their installation.
These latter measures are not necessary if the surface temperature of these materials is not likely to cause ignition of nearby combustible
materials.
This part does not deal with the selection and implementation of installations in evacuation routes. These conditions may be specified by
the national authorities responsible, for example, for the construction of buildings, the enactment of rules relating to the public or fire
prevention.
422.1 Premises at risk of fire due to the nature of the materials processed or stored
(BE2 premises)
422.1.1 In premises classified BE2, the installations must be limited to those necessary for the operation of these premises, with the
exception of pipes under the conditions defined in 422.1.5.
These installations must meet the requirements of subparagraphs 422.1.2 to 422.1.18.
422.1.2 When dust can accumulate in sufficient quantities on the enclosures of electrical equipment that could cause a fire risk, measures
must be taken to prevent these enclosures from reaching excessive temperatures.
This comes down to the simple aspect of maintenance.
H 422.1.3 It is recalled that electrical equipment must be appropriate for these premises; in particular, their enclosures must have a degree of
protection of at least IP5X in the event of the presence of dust.
422.1.4 In principle, the general rules relating to pipelines apply. However, when the pipes are not embedded in non-combustible materials
such as plaster, concrete or equivalent material, they must meet the flame propagation characteristics defined in the standards in force.
Conductors and cables, conduit systems, trunking and cable trays must satisfy the flame propagation test (category C2 for cables and
conductors).
H NOTE - Where the risk of fire propagation is high, for example in long vertical runs or in cable groups, it is recommended that the cables
meet the fire prevention (2) characteristics defined in the standard in force
.
Non-fire-propagating cables are category C1.
(2) NF EN 50266 (C 32-072)

NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
H 422.1.5 In addition to 422.1.4, electrical conduits which pass through such premises, but which are not intended to
supply these premises must not include any connection on their route inside these premises, unless that these
connections are placed in an enclosure satisfying the fire tests defined in the appropriate product standards, for
example specific requirements for partition boxes defined in the standard in force (3)
Enclosures containing connections meet the glow wire test in accordance with (4) current standard
at a temperature of 960°C.
(5)
Prefabricated electrical conduits complying with the standard in force are authorized.
Table 52A specifies the C1, C2 and C3 characteristics of the main cables used.
H 422.1.6 The pipes which supply or pass through such premises must be protected against overloads and against
short circuits by devices located upstream of the premises concerned.
The pipes which have their origin in these premises must be protected against overloads and against short circuits
by devices located at the origin of these circuits.
422.1.7 The pipes supplying the terminal circuits of these premises and those which have their origin in these
premises must be protected against insulation faults, with the exception of prefabricated pipes:
a) in a TN or TT scheme, by residual differential current devices with a differential-residual current rated at most
equal to 300 mA in accordance with 531.2.3.3 and the appropriate standards.
If a resistive fault could cause a fire risk, for example ceiling heating by heating films, the rated differential-residual
current must be at most 30 mA.
b) in IT diagram, by a permanent insulation monitor with audible and/or visual alarm.
An appropriate instruction must indicate that in the event of a first fault on one of the circuits in a BE2 room, this
circuit must be manually cut off.
This does not preclude the complementary implementation of differential devices with a residual-differential current
equal to 300 mA.
H NOTE - Metal sheathed cables are recommended. These metal sheaths must be connected to the protective conductor.
422.1.8 PEN conductors are not permitted with the exception of those belonging to pipelines crossing these premises.
In TN scheme installations, the circuits serving these premises are made according to the TN-S scheme. It is
accepted that the main panel of these premises can be supplied with a TN-C scheme.
H
422.1.9 Any neutral conductor must be capable of being disconnected by an associated device in accordance with
536.2.
This rule is specified for countries that do not systematically apply the neutral cutoff. In France, the neutral conductor
is always cut.
H 422.1.10 Naked drivers are not permitted.

It must be ensured that the combustible materials present cannot ignite by the formation of arcs, sparks, burning
particles or other phenomena.
(3) NF EN 60669-2-2 (C 61-112)

(4) NF EN 60695 (C 20-924)
(5) NF EN 60439-2 (C 63-422)

NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
H 422.1.11 For flexible cables it is recommended to choose cables and cords for intensive use, for example type
HO7RN-F or other similar cable.
422.1.12 (available)
422.1.13 Motors controlled automatically or remotely, or not continuously monitored, must be protected against
excessive temperatures by overload protection devices with manual reset or by similar devices.
Motors with star-delta starting, without automatic star-delta switching, must also be protected against excessive
temperatures in the star coupling.
422.1.14 In premises where there is a risk of dust accumulation on lighting fixtures, only lighting fixtures with
limited temperature surfaces must be used.
These luminaires must comply with standard NF EN 60598-2-24 (NF C 71-024) and have the IP6X degree of
protection.
Furthermore, if the luminaires used may overheat the illuminated objects due to for example the type of lamp
used, the shape of the reflector, the setting of the mounting means, or the mounting position, as indicated in the
installation instructions , these luminaires must have the corresponding marking indicating the minimum distance
from the illuminated objects.
m
The symbol for the minimum distance to illuminated objects (meters) is
H 422.1.15 (available)
422.1.16 If electric heating or ventilation systems are used, the presence of dust and the air temperature must be
such that there is no risk of fire in this room.
Temperature limiting devices must be manually reset.
422.1.17 Electric heating equipment must be placed on non-combustible supports.
422.1.18 Heating equipment located near combustible materials must be provided with appropriate barriers
preventing the ignition of these materials.
Storage heaters must be such that they prevent air from carrying dust and/or fibers to the heating element.
422.2 Premises constructed of combustible materials

Condition CA2 according to 512.2.21.
422.2.1 Precautions must be taken to prevent electrical equipment from causing ignition of walls, floors and
ceilings. This can be achieved by:
- the prevention of fire due to insulation defects in accordance with 422.1.7, the choice
- and implementation of electrical equipment.
Cables must be at least category C2.
Only conduits, conduit systems, trunking, cable trays, which do not propagate flame are used.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
422.2.2 Choice and implementation of materials in hollow walls
NOTE - Hollow walls are generally made up of frames covered with sheets of plywood, plaster, wood or metal. Hollow walls can also be
prefabricated. Electrical equipment is installed in these walls. The pipes can be fixed or not in these walls.
422.2.2.1 Electrical equipment, for example boxes, distribution boards, installed in combustible hollow walls
must comply with the requirements of the appropriate standards.
422.2.2.2 If electrical equipment is installed in hollow walls and does not meet the requirements of 422.2.2.1, it
must be wrapped with a thickness of 12 mm of fibro-silicate or similar non-combustible material or of a thickness
100 mm of glass or rock wool. If such materials are used, their effects on the heat dissipation of electrical
equipment must be taken into account.
422.2.2.3 Electrical equipment such as power sockets and switches must not be fixed with claws.
422.2.2.4 Cables and cords must be non-flame propagating (Category 2).
422.2.2.5 The conduits must comply with NF EN 50086 (C 68-110) and be non-flame propagating.
422.2.2.6 Junction boxes connected to surface-mounted cables shall be equipped with a cable termination
device.
422.3 (available)
422.4 Fire-propagating structures Condition

CB2, according to 512.2.22.
These conditions are normally regulated by texts dealing with fire prevention in different types of buildings.
422.4.1 In structures whose shape and dimensions facilitate the spread of a fire, precautions must be taken to
ensure that electrical installations do not easily propagate a fire (e.g. stack effect).
NOTE - Fire detectors may be provided ensuring the activation of measures preventing the spread of fire, for example the closing of fire
shutters in ducts, gutters or galleries.
When such conditions arise, the following arrangements are generally satisfactory:
Fire barriers are provided as indicated in 527.2, particularly at each level.
In addition, the pipes are made in such a way that they cannot propagate a fire. In particular, conductors and
cables must satisfy a fire non-propagation test, as defined by the standard in force.
(6)
(category C1).
Pipes cannot be placed in ventilation ducts or chimneys and, more generally, in any space that cannot be cut
from place to place by fire barriers.
(6) NF C 32-070
- 103 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
H
423 Protection against the risk of burns
Accessible parts of electrical equipment placed within the touch accessible volume must not reach temperatures
likely to cause burns to persons and must meet the appropriate limits indicated in Table 42A. All parts of the
installation likely to reach, in normal service, even for short periods, temperatures higher than those indicated in
Table 42A must be protected against accidental contact.
However, the values in Table 42A do not apply to equipment that meets the standards applicable to them.
Table 42A - Maximum temperatures in normal service of accessible parts of electrical

equipment inside the volume of accessibility to touch
Accessible parts Materials of Maximum temperatures

accessible parts (°C)
Manual control devices Metallic 55
Non-metallic 65
Intended to be touched but Metallic 70

not intended to be held by Non-metallic 80
hand
Not intended to be touched in Metallic 80
normal service Non-metallic 90
The standards relating to materials set temperature limits (or temperature rises) such that people do not risk
being burned under normal conditions. Of course, these limits do not concern the surfaces of devices intended
to provide a high temperature (such as cooking devices, ovens, welding devices, etc.).
424 Locations at risk of explosion (BE3 locations)

External influence class BE3 corresponds to locations where an explosive atmosphere may occur.
European directive 1999/92/ EC of December 16, 1999 classifies such locations into zones based on the
frequency and duration of the presence of an explosive atmosphere. This classification includes three zones for
explosive atmospheres consisting of a mixture with air of flammable substances in the form of gas, vapor or
mist (zones 0, 1 and 2) and three zones for explosive atmospheres including a cloud of combustible dust ( zones
20, 21 and 22).
The “document relating to protection against explosions” drawn up and kept up to date by the head of the
establishment shows the dangerous locations classified as zones in the establishment in question.
The same directive indicates the criteria for choosing materials characterized by their category, depending on
the nature, gas (G) or dust (D), of the atmosphere, the categories being defined in European directive 94/9/ EC
of March 23, 1994.
When in a provision of this article, no mention of zone is cited, the provision applies to all zones.
Premises or locations where the risk of explosion is exclusively due to the presence of solid explosive substances
such as ammunition, pyrotechnic products, but where explosive atmospheres are not likely to appear, must
comply with the provisions of 422.1 relating to premises to risk of fire (BE2 premises).
- 104 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
424.1 In locations classified BE3, installations must be limited to those

necessary for the operation of these locations. The materials of these latter installations including
implementation is not essential in BE3 locations will preferably be implemented in
non-hazardous locations. If this is not possible, they should be placed in the area
presenting as little danger as possible.
Circuits serving BE3 locations must be reserved exclusively for power supply
of these locations.
424.2 In the case of gaseous explosive atmospheres (G), the materials must be chosen from
those complying with specific standards for protection modes.
Table 42B gives the references of the standards to be considered, as well as the zones in which
Equipment of different protection modes can be installed.
Table 42B – Indications on the use of materials conforming to specific standards

modes of protection in explosive gas atmospheres
Standard Atmosphere zone (G)

Protection mode
Zone 0 Area 1 Zone 2
Explosion-proof enclosure “d” NF EN 50018 x x
Increased security “e” NF EN 50019 x x
Intrinsically safe NF EN 50020

“AI” security mode x x x
“ib” security mode x x
Encapsulation “m” NF EN 50028 x x
Oil immersion “o” NF EN 50015 x x
Internal overpressure “p” NF EN 50016 x x
Powder filling “q” NF EN 50017 x x
Protection mode “n” NF EN 50021 x
x Use possible subject to suitability for the nature of the explosive atmosphere.
Standard NF EN 60079-14 (C 23-579-14) defines the rules to be respected for the implementation of
materials of different modes of protection.
In the case of explosive atmospheres due to the presence of combustible dust (D), the
equipment usable in zones 20, 21 and 22 must comply with standard NF EN 50281-1-
1 (C 23-581-1-1).
Standard NF EN 50281-1-2 (C 23-581-1-2) defines the rules to be respected for the implementation
of said materials.
424.3 In explosive gas atmospheres, in the event of the presence of non-flammable dust
combustibles, the enclosures of electrical equipment must present a degree of protection against
less equal to IP5X.
In explosive atmospheres due to the presence of combustible dust, the degrees of
protection of electrical equipment enclosures are defined in standard NF EN 50281-1-2.
424.4 The admissible current values in the conductors must be reduced by

15%.
424.5 When the pipes are not embedded in non-combustible materials such as
plaster, concrete or equivalent material, they must meet the characteristics of no
flame propagation defined in current standards.
Cables, conduits, trunking and cable trays must meet the test of no
flame propagation (category C2 for cables).
- 105 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
424.6 When an overhead line serves locations classified BE3, the supply must be via a buried pipeline (529.5) with a length of at least 20
m.
Naked drivers are prohibited.
424.7 Gutters, conduits, conduits, etc. receiving cables must be closed to prevent the passage of gases, vapors, dust or flammable liquids
from a hazardous location to a non-hazardous location or from one area to another.
It must be the same for crossing walls.
424.8 Pipelines must be installed, as far as possible, so that they are not exposed to mechanical shock, the action of corrosive substances
(for example, solvents) as well as the effects of heat. If this is not the case, they must be correctly chosen according to the classes of
external influences; in the case of mechanical risk, the protection must be higher than that prescribed according to the external influence
class AG.
Aluminum cores must have a section of at least 16 mm².
1 Except in the case of intrinsic safety circuits for which the cables must be chosen in compliance with the provisions of standard NF EN
60079-14 (C 23-579-14), and except in the two special cases covered by the paragraphs 2 and 3 below, the cables have a nominal
voltage of 1000 volts and their choice must comply with the following provisions:
a) under conditions of external influences AG1, all cables are permitted, including
unarmored cables, in particular U 1000R2V cables.
b) in conditions of external influences AG2, armored cables can be used
admissible under AG3 conditions (see table 52D).
c) in the conditions of external influences AG3, the cables admissible in condition b) can be used with additional protection (for example
screens, sheaths or similar devices) unless special cables with greater armor are used.
In the previous three situations, 07RN-F, 07BB-F and 07BN-4-F series cables can be used when flexible connections are required.
2 Cables with a nominal voltage lower than 1000 volts but at least equal to 250 volts are not
admitted only if the following conditions are simultaneously met:
a) the cables form part of a SELV circuit satisfying all the conditions set out in
414.
b) the maximum intensity of the current likely to flow through them cannot be greater than 40 mA,
even in the event of a fault.
c) the cables are protected by two steel strips having a thickness of at least 0.2 mm or in an equivalent manner.
Such uses are found in signaling and alarm circuits.
3 It is permitted to use, for the circuits of security installations such as emergency lighting, fire-resistant cables (category CR1 according to
the standard in force) with a nominal voltage of 500 volts, armored under the conditions of external influences AG2 and AG3, provided
that the insulation of these circuits is monitored by a permanent insulation monitor, even when the installation is not in service.
4 In the case of explosive atmospheres based on gas, vapor or mist where the protection modes defined in the specific standards are
implemented, the cables must also meet the special implementation provisions of standard NF EN 60079- 14 (C 23-579-14).
- 106 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
5 In conditions AG2 and AG3, armored instrumentation cables complying with standard NF M 87-202 can be
used provided that they are category C2. Under AG1 conditions, these cables may not be armored.
424.9 The pipes which supply such locations must be protected against overloads and against short circuits by
devices located at the origin of these circuits.
424.10 Pipelines must be protected against insulation faults:
a) in TN or TT scheme, by residual differential current devices with a differential-residual current rated at most
equal to 300 mA.
b) in IT diagram, by a permanent insulation monitor with audible and/or visual alarm. An appropriate instruction
must indicate that in the event of a first fault on one of the circuits in a BE3 room, this circuit must be manually
cut off.
424.11 PEN drivers are not permitted.
424.12 Equipotential connections must be made between the masses and conductive elements foreign to
electrical installations (metallic construction elements, concrete reinforcements, metal pipes, non-electrical
devices, etc.).
The connections between masses can be made by their grounding conductors, if the routing of these conductors
is close to the shortest distance between the masses.
Metallic elements under cathodic protection and the enclosures of intrinsically safe equipment may not be
connected to the equipotential bond.
424.13 Apart from any emergency switching devices provided in dangerous areas, there must be one or more
emergency switching devices outside the dangerous location.
424.14 Flexible cables must be chosen from heavy-duty cables and cords, for example type H07RN-F, H07BB-F
or H07BN4-F.
424.15 Rotating machines and transformers must be protected against overloads and short circuits, for example
by an overcurrent device or a thermal probe.
The protection devices must be such that automatic reset is impossible.
Precautions to prevent operation of a three-phase motor when a phase is lost should be taken.
424.16 Replaceable elements such as lamps must be of assigned types and characteristics as specified in the
manufacturers' instructions.
424.17 Certain installations must be protected against the effects of lightning. A risk assessment can be carried
out in accordance with standards NF C 17-100 and NF C 17-102.
The decree of January 28, 1993 imposes this protection for certain installations classified for environmental
protection as well as the decree of June 25, 1980 for certain establishments open to the public.
When a lightning rod is installed, standard NF C 17-100 gives instructions for creating the equipotentiality
necessary to prevent the formation of sparks.
Protection against overvoltages is the subject of articles 443 and 534.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
Annex (7) – (informative) – Reaction to fire – Conventional classifications
I A priori materials M0
Glass, cellular glass.
Concrete.
Brick.
Plaster, stucco.
Plaster reinforced with glass fibers or with metal frames.
Concrete and cement and lime mortars.
Vermiculite, perlite.
Asbestos-cement.
Sillico-limestone.
Stone, slate.
Iron, cast iron, steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead.
Ceramic products.
II Wood-based materials
1. Solid non-resinous wood.

Thicknesses greater than or equal to 14 mm: M3.
Thicknesses less than 14 mm: M4.
2. Solid softwood.
Thicknesses greater than or equal to 18 mm. M3.
Thicknesses less than 18 mm: M4.
3. Wood-derived panels.
Plywood, slats, particles, fibers. Thicknesses
greater than or equal to 18 mm: M3 Thicknesses less than
18 mm: M4
4. Glued solid wood floors. Thicknesses

greater than or equal to 6 mm before sanding: M3. Thicknesses less than 6
mm before sanding: M4.
The conventional M3 and M4 classifications of wood and wood-based panels are not modified by the following well-
adhered surface coatings:
a) Wood veneer thicknesses less than or equal to 0.5 mm; b) Any other
covering whose surface heat release does not exceed 4.18 MJ/ m2
(1000 kcal/ m2 ).
High-pressure decorative laminate sheets complying with standard NF T 54-301 and with a thickness of less than 1.5 mm
are classified in category M3.
(7) This annex constitutes annex 21 to the amended order of June 30, 1983 of the Ministry of the Interior

NF C 15-100 Part 4-42
III Painted materials

1. Non-insulating supports classified M0 according to paragraph I:
a) Coated with paint applied in quantities less than 0.35 kg/ m2 wet for glossy paints and 0.75 kg/ m2 wet for
matt and satin paints, without taking into account primers, primers or fillers: M1 classification.
b) Coated with thick paint or finishing film coating applied in quantities between 0.5 and 1.5 kg/ m2 wet:
classification M2.
c) Coated with thick plastic coverings, defined by DTU 59.2, used in quantities
between 0.5 and 3.5 kg/ m2 wet: classification M2.
2. Inert supports coated for interior use with glossy paint in a quantity less than 0.10 kg/ m² wet or with matt or
satin paint in a quantity less than 0.40 kg/ m² wet, and for exterior use with glossy paint in a lower quantity
at 0.15 kg/ m² wet or matt or satin paint in quantity less than 0.65 kg/ m² wet: classification M0.
3. Non-insulating supports classified M1 or M2:
Coated with paint applied in quantities less than 0.35 kg/ m2 wet for glossy paints and 0.50 kg/ m2 wet for matt
and satin paints, without taking into account primers, primers, or fillers: classification M2.
In the case not provided for above where a manufacturer wishes to demonstrate that its paint does not
downgrade the substrates designated above, a fire reaction classification test must be carried out.
______________
- 109 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
Part 4-43 – Overcurrent Protection
430 General rule .............................................. .................................................. ........... 112 431 Provisions

depending on the nature of the circuits .............................. ..................................... 112 432 Nature of
protection devices ...... .................................................. ..................... 113 433 Protection against overload
currents ..................... ............................................. 114 434 Protection against currents short
circuit............................................ ............... 120 435 Coordination between overload protection and
protection
against short circuits ............................................. .................................................. 123 436 Limitation
of overcurrents by power supply characteristics ............................... 123
- 111 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
430 General rule

VS
430.1 Active conductors must be protected by one or more automatic cut-off devices against overloads (433) and against short circuits
(434). Additionally, overload protection and short circuit protection must be coordinated in accordance with 435.
NOTES -
1 - Active conductors protected against overloads according to 433 are considered to be protected also against any fault likely to produce
short circuits in the overload current range.
2 - The protection of flexible cables in fixed installations is included in these rules. Flexible cables connected to equipment connected to
fixed installations via power outlets are not necessarily protected against overloads; the protection of such cables against short circuits is
under study.
The installation's circuit protection devices are not designed to ensure the protection of the internal circuits of the user devices.
When an independent protection device is provided to ensure the protection of the internal circuits of a user device, its characteristics are
indicated by the manufacturer of the device to be protected.
The application of the rules of this part to the various protection devices is described in guide UTE C 15-105.
Software for calculating electrical installations subject to a technical opinion from the UTE based on the UTE C 15-500 guide takes into
account the requirements of this part.
The application of overcurrent protection rules in TBT lighting installations is the subject of guide UTE C 15-559.
VS
431 Provisions depending on the nature of the circuits
431.1 Protection of phase conductors
431.1.1 Overcurrent detection must be provided on all phase conductors; it must cause the cutting of the conductor in which the overcurrent
is detected, but does not necessarily cause the cutting of the other active conductors.
431.1.2 However, in TT and TN schemes, on circuits supplied between phases and in which the neutral conductor is not distributed,
overcurrent detection may not be provided on one of the phase conductors, subject to that the following conditions are simultaneously met:
a) there is, upstream or at the same level, a differential protection which must cause the cut-off
of all phase conductors;
b) a neutral conductor must not be distributed from an artificial neutral point on circuits located downstream of the differential protection
device referred to in a).
431.2 Neutral conductor protection
VS 431.2.1 Installations whose neutral point is directly connected to earth (TT or TN schemes)
a) When the section of the neutral conductor is at least equal or equivalent to that of the phase conductors, it is not necessary to provide
overcurrent detection on the neutral conductor.
b) When the section of the neutral conductor is less than that of the phase conductors, it is necessary to provide overcurrent detection on
the neutral conductor, appropriate to the section of this conductor: this detection must result in the cutting of the phase conductors, but
not necessarily that of the neutral conductor.
In the TN-C diagram, an overcurrent detection toroid can be placed on the PEN conductor causing the phase conductors to be cut off and
not the PEN conductor.
- 112 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
VS However, it is accepted not to provide overcurrent detection on the neutral conductor between the source (transformer, generator) and
the general distribution panel (TGBT).
The section of the neutral conductor must be at least equal to the value prescribed in 524.
431.2.2 Installations whose neutral point is not directly connected to earth (IT diagram)
When it is necessary to distribute the neutral conductor in an IT diagram, it is necessary to provide overcurrent detection on the neutral
VS
conductor of any circuit, detection which must result in the cutting of all active conductors of the corresponding circuit, including the
neutral conductor.
However, when the circuit supplies single-phase devices or those comprising elements connected between phase and neutral of low
power (for example, measuring devices) and which are not likely to cause a fire if they are subjected to the voltage between phases ,
but whose deterioration is admissible, the neutral conductor cutting device may not cause the cutting of the phase conductors of the
circuit.
VS This provision is not necessary if:

- the neutral conductor considered is effectively protected against short circuits by a protection device placed upstream, for example
at the origin of the installation, in accordance with the rules set out in 434.5.2.
- or if the circuit in question is protected by a differential-residual current protection device whose rated differential-residual current is
at most equal to 0.15 times the admissible current in the corresponding neutral conductor: this device must cut all the conductors
assets of the corresponding circuit, including the neutral conductor.
A differential device meeting the preceding conditions may be common to a set of terminal circuits and if all the following conditions are
respected:
a) Each of these circuits is protected against indirect contact by the overcurrent protection device placed at its origin, in accordance
with the rules set out in 411.6.4.
b) The characteristics of these terminal circuits are identical: - the pipes are of the same
nature or admit the same admissible currents; - the conductors are of the same section; - and the overcurrent protection
devices are of the same rated current and
with the same triggering characteristic (type B, C or D).
It should be noted that for circuits for which the overcurrent protection device does not provide protection against indirect contacts, this
latter protection can only be provided by differential devices if one device is provided per circuit.
431.3 Breaking of the neutral conductor When

VS
cutting of the neutral conductor is prescribed, the cutting and closing of the conductor must be such that the neutral conductor is never
cut before the phase conductors and that it is closed at the same time or before the conductors phase.
432 Nature of protection devices

VS
The protective devices must be chosen from those indicated in paragraphs 432.1 to 432.3.
- 113 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
VS
432.1 Devices providing both overload protection and short-circuit protection
These protective devices must be capable of interrupting any overcurrent up to the presumed short circuit current at
the point where the device is installed. They must meet the requirements of article 433. Such protective devices
may be:
- thermal-magnetic or electronic circuit breakers, - gG type fuses.
NOTES -
1 - The fuse includes all the parts forming the entire protection device.
2 - The use of a device having a breaking capacity lower than the presumed short-circuit current at the point where it is installed is subject
to the requirements of subparagraph 434.2.1.
3 - This paragraph does not exclude the use of protective devices with different characteristics if the requirements of paragraph 433.1 are
met.
(1)
Type gG fuses comply with current standards (2) .
The circuit breakers comply with one of the standards in force (3) .
The connection, control and protection devices (ACP) comply with the standard in force .
VS
432.2 Devices providing only protection against overloads These are devices generally
having an inverse time operating characteristic and may have a breaking capacity lower than the prospective short-
circuit current at the point where they are installed. They must meet the requirements of article 433.
aM fuses do not protect against overloads.
VS 432.3 Devices ensuring only protection against short circuits These devices can be used
when protection against overloads is achieved by other means or when article 433 allows protection against
overloads to be dispensed with. They must be able to interrupt any short-circuit current less than or equal to the
presumed short-circuit current. They must meet the requirements of article 434.
Such protection devices can be:

- circuit breakers with overcurrent release, - fused circuit breakers, type
gG or aM.
432.4 Characteristics of protection devices The time/current

characteristics of overcurrent protection devices must comply with those specified in the standards in force.
The characteristics of the protection devices are defined in the following standards: NF C 60-200, NF C
61-201, NF C 61-410, NF C 61-440, NF C 63-120, NF C 63-161, NF C 63-210.
NOTE - This does not preclude the use of other protection devices provided that their time/current characteristics ensure a level of protection
equivalent to that specified by this paragraph.
433 Protection against overload currents
433.0 General rule

Protective devices must be provided to interrupt any overload current in the circuit conductors before it can cause
heating harmful to the insulation, connections, ends or environment of the pipes.
For the determination of conductor sections and the choice of overload protection devices, refer to paragraph 533.2.
(1) NF C 61-201, NF EN 60269-2 (C 63-210)

(2) NF EN 60898 (C 61-410), NF EN 61009-1 (C 61-440), NF EN 60947-2 (C 63-120)
(3) NF EN 60947-6-2 (C 63-161)
- 114 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
VS
433.1 Coordination between drivers and protective devices
The operating characteristic of a device protecting a pipeline against
overloads must satisfy the following two conditions:
1) IB ÿ In ÿ Iz
2) I2 ÿ 1.45 Iz
IB Circuit operating current,
Iz Allowable current of the pipeline (see 523),
In Rated current of the protection device; for adjustable protection devices, In is the
chosen setting current (Ir),
NOTE - For adjustable protection devices. The chosen setting current can be In or Ir.
I2 Current effectively ensuring the operation of the protection device: in practice I2 is

taken equal:
- the operating current over the conventional time for circuit breakers;
- to the melting current over conventional time, for gG type fuses.
The current I2 is given in the product standard or can be obtained from the manufacturer.
NOTE - The protection provided by this paragraph does not provide complete protection in certain cases, e.g.
against prolonged overcurrents below I2, and does not necessarily lead to the most economical solution.
It is therefore assumed that the circuit is designed in such a way that small, long-term overloads do not occur.
not produced frequently.
Pipe reference values
IB
Allowable current IZ
Operating current
1.45 Iz
O I
Rated current or I not
adjustment Ir
Conventional current
operating mode I2
Characteristics of the protection device
Figure 433A – References for pipes and protection devices
The rule of 433.2 defines three conditions to be respected for a protective device to ensure the
protection of a pipeline against overloads:
1a) IB ÿ In
1b) In ÿ lz
I.Z.
2) I2 ÿ 1.45.lz which can be written k2.ln ÿ 1.45 lz or k3.ln ÿ lz or In
k3
IB Operating current,
In Rated current of the protection device; for adjustable protection devices, In is
the chosen setting current (Ir),
I2 Operating current of the protection device in conventional time,

NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
Iz Allowable current in the pipeline, taking into account any correction factors,
k2 Current ratio I2 effectively ensuring the operation of the protection device at
its nominal current In or its setting current Ir,
k3 = k2/1.45.
However, the value of the k2 ratio is different depending on the nature of the protection device:
- for gG fuses, this ratio is 1.6 or 1.9; it follows that condition 2) is more severe
than condition 1b),
- for circuit breakers, this ratio is equal to 1.45 for small circuit breakers, and to 1.30 or 1.25
for other circuit breakers according to their rated current; it follows that condition 1b) is
more severe than condition 2).
In practice, it is therefore sufficient in all cases to verify only two conditions:
- for fuses, the two conditions to be respected are as follows:
1a) IB ÿ In
I.Z.
2) I2 ÿ 1.45.lz or In
k3
The factor k3 having the following values:
In < 16A, k3 = 1.31

gG fuses
In ÿ 16A, k3 = 1.10
- for circuit breakers, the two conditions to be respected are as follows:
1a) IB ÿ In 1b) In ÿ lz
433.2 Location of overload protection devices
VS
433.2.1 A device ensuring protection against overloads must be placed where a
change of section, nature, method of installation or constitution leads to a reduction in the
value of the admissible current in the conductors, except for the cases mentioned in 433.2.2 and
433.3.
433.2.2 The device protecting a pipeline against overloads may be placed on the
route of this pipeline if the part of the pipeline included between, on the one hand the change
of section, nature, method of installation or constitution, and the protection device on the other hand,
does not include a branch or outlet and meets one of the following two conditions:
a) It is protected against short circuits in accordance with the rules set out in 434.
Example of production
Figure 433B – Overload protection device placed on the route

of the pipeline
The P1 protection device protects AO and OB
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
VS
b) Its length is not more than 3 meters, it is made in such a way as to minimize the risk of a short circuit and it is
not placed near combustible materials.
Example of production
Figure 433C – Protection device placed along the route of the pipeline Device P1 may
not protect the OB branch against short circuits.
The length of 3 m is fixed for practical convenience of use.
433.3 Exemption from protection against overloads The

VS
various cases set out below are not valid in installations located in premises (or locations) presenting a risk of
fire or explosion (condition BE2 or BE3) and when the special rules at certain premises specify different
conditions.
It is accepted not to provide a protection device against overloads:
a) on a pipeline located downstream of a change in section, nature, method of installation or construction, and
effectively protected against overloads by a protection device placed upstream,
Example of production:
Figure 433D – Example of overload protection device exemption

The P device protects the OB bypass against overloads
VS b) on a pipeline which is not likely to be carried by overload currents, provided that this pipeline is protected
against short circuits in accordance with the rules set out in 434 and that it does not include any branch or
socket outlet fluent.
- 117 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
Example of production:
i) pipeline supplying a user device with its built-in protection against overloads, provided that the device
protection device is appropriate for the pipeline (figure 433E).
Figure 433E – Example of Overload Protection Waiver

The operating device has its built-in protection against overloads
ii) pipeline supplying a permanently connected user device, not likely to produce overloads and not protected
against overloads, the operating current of this device not being greater than the admissible current in the
pipeline (figure 433F).
Figure 433F – Example of overload protection waiver

Since M devices are not likely to give rise to overloads, OB pipes do not need
protection
A motor whose stalled rotor current is not greater than the admissible current in the pipeline is considered not
likely to produce overloads.
iii) pipeline supplying several branches individually protected against overloads, provided that the sum of the
rated currents of the branch protection devices is less than the rated current of the device which would protect
the pipeline in question against overloads (figure 433G).
Figure 433G – Example of exemption from the overload protection device The OB pipelines
cannot be subjected to overload currents, the S2 section being determined according to the sum of the
currents absorbed by the branches at B.
- 118 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
iv) pipeline powered by a source whose maximum current it can supply cannot be greater than the admissible current in the pipeline (for
example, certain ringing transformers, certain welding transformers, certain generators driven by a thermal engine).
VS
c) on the circuits of communications, control, signaling and similar installations.
d) on certain distribution circuits comprising buried cables or overhead lines by

which overloading circuits presents no danger.
e) on the supply pipes of electric motors of certain safety installations
This provision is particularly required for powering smoke extraction motors in establishments open to the public (see 563.3).
433.4 Location or exemption of overload protection in IT diagram The provisions of 433.2.2 for relocation or 433.3 for
VS
exemption of devices for overload protection are not applicable to the IT diagram unless each of the unprotected circuits against overload
is protected against faults by one of the following measures:
a) use of the protective measures indicated in 412 ;
All equipment supplied by such circuits - including pipes - is class II or made according to the “additional insulation during installation”
protection measure described in 412.
VS
b) protection of each circuit by a residual current protection device
operating at the appearance of the second fault;
c) use of a permanent insulation monitor causing the circuit to break as soon as the first fault appears.
In IT installations, the fault current resulting from two insulation faults in two different circuits can have a lower intensity than the minimum
short-circuit current of one of the circuits.
In such cases, the rule stated in 434 cannot be respected, the cut-off time of this double fault current may be too long and the conductors
of one of the circuits could exceed the permitted temperature limit and be damaged. This is why conductors must be effectively protected
against overloads.
VS 433.5 Cases where it is recommended to dispense with overload protection for safety reasons
It is recommended not to place overload protection devices on pipes supplying appliances if opening the circuit could cause danger.
Examples of such cases are:
- excitation circuits of rotating machines;
- induced circuits of alternating current machines;
- power circuits for handling or lifting electromagnets; NOTE - In this case, it is recommended to provide an
overload alarm.
- the secondary circuits of current transformers.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
433.6 Parallel conductor overload protection
VS
If a single protection device is the source of several parallel conductors, there must be no branch circuits or
breaking or sectioning devices in the parallel conductors. This paragraph does not preclude the use of loop
circuits.
When a protective device protects several conductors in parallel, the value of Iz is the sum of the admissible
currents in the different conductors, provided however that the conductors are arranged so as to carry
substantially equal currents.
NOTE - In practice, this arrangement is only acceptable if the pipes have the same electrical characteristics (nature, method of installation,
length, section) and do not include any branching along their route. However, verification may be desirable.
Paragraph 523.6 indicates the methods for implementing single-pole cables in parallel as well as the correction
factors to be applied to the admissible currents.
Methods for protecting conductors in parallel against overloads using fuses are given in publication IEC
60364-4-47 but are not used in France.
434 Protection against short circuit currents
NOTE - This standard only considers cases of short circuits between conductors of the same circuit.
434.0 General rule

Protective devices must be provided to interrupt any short-circuit current before it can become dangerous due
to thermal and mechanical effects produced in the conductors and in the connections.
434.1 Determination of presumed short-circuit currents

VS The presumed short-circuit currents must be determined at the locations of the installation deemed necessary.
This determination can be made either by calculation or by measurement.
The short-circuit current values differ depending on whether they involve two phases, three phases or one
phase and the neutral. The breaking capacity of the protection devices must be ensured for each of these short-
circuit currents.
The short-circuit current values can be determined by one of the following means: - an appropriate calculation
method; - studies on network models; -
measurements carried out in the
installation; - information provided by the electrical
energy distributor.
The UTE C 15-105 guide gives instructions for calculating short-circuit currents.
434.2 Location of short circuit protection devices
VS 434.2.1 General rule
A device providing protection against short circuits must be placed where a reduction in conductor section or
other change results in a modification of the characteristics defined in 433.2.1.
434.2.2 Relocation of the short circuit protection device
It is permissible not to place a short-circuit protection device in a location as defined in the two cases set out
below.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
VS
434.2.2.1 The part of the pipeline included between, on the one hand, the reduction in section or other change,
and the protection device on the other hand, simultaneously meets the following three conditions:
a) its length is not more than 3 meters; b) it is carried

out in such a way as to minimize the risk of a short circuit; (c) it is not placed near
combustible materials.
Condition b) can be obtained for example by reinforcing the protection of the pipeline against external stresses
(mechanical, thermal, humidity, etc.).
VS 434.2.2.2 A protective device placed upstream has an operating characteristic such that it protects against short
circuits in accordance with the rule of 434.5, the pipeline located downstream of the reduction in section or other
change.
The length of the pipe located downstream, of section S2, must not be greater than that determined by the
diagram in Figure 434A in the shape of a right triangle.
Figure 434A – Triangle rule
L1 = PB being the maximum length of pipe with section S1 protected against short circuits by the protection
device placed at P.
L2 = PC being the maximum length of pipe with section S2 protected against short circuits by the protection
device placed at P.
The maximum length of pipe branched at O, of section S2 protected against short circuits by the device placed
at P, is given by the length OV.
434.3 Exemption from protection against short circuits It is

VS
permissible to exempt from protection against short circuits if the following two conditions are simultaneously
met: a) the conduit is constructed
in such a way as to minimize the risk of a short circuit circuit (see
434.2.2.1 b);
b) the pipeline must not be placed near combustible materials.
Examples of cases where protection against short circuits can be dispensed with: - pipelines
connecting generating machines, transformers, rectifiers, storage batteries to the corresponding distribution
panels, the protection devices being placed on these paintings ; - circuits whose interruption could lead to
dangers for the operation of the installations
concerned, such as those cited above;
- certain measurement circuits.
434.4 Protection against short circuits of conductors in parallel A single

protection device can protect several conductors in parallel against short circuits.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

434.5 Characteristics of short-circuit protection devices
VS
Any device ensuring protection against short circuits must meet both conditions
following:
434.5.1 Its breaking capacity must be at least equal to the presumed short-circuit current at
point where it is installed, except in the case admitted in the following paragraph.
A device with a lower breaking capacity is permitted, provided that it is doubled in
upstream by a device having the necessary breaking capacity. In this case, the characteristics
of the two devices must be coordinated in such a way that the energy let through the
devices is not greater than that which can support without damage the device placed
downstream and the pipes protected by these devices.
NOTE - In certain particular cases, it may be necessary to take into consideration other characteristics such as
as dynamic constraints and arc energy for devices placed downstream. The necessary information must
be obtained from the manufacturers of these devices.
In the absence of rules on the correspondence between different protection devices, the
Necessary information must be requested from the manufacturers of these devices.
VS 434.5.2 The cutting time of any current resulting from a short circuit occurring at a point
any part of the circuit must not be greater than the time bringing the temperature of the conductors to
the admissible limit.
For short circuits lasting at most equal to 5 s, the duration necessary for a current of
short circuit raises the temperature of the conductors from the maximum permissible temperature in
normal service at the limit value, can be calculated, as a first approximation, using the
following formula:
S = kt
I
Or
t is the duration in seconds,
S is the section in mm2 ,
I is the effective short-circuit current in A, expressed as an effective value (called Ik in the guide
UTE C 15-105)
k = factor taking into account resistivity, temperature coefficient and withstand
of heating of the conductor material, as well as the final initial temperatures. For
the most common insulations of the conductors, the values of k for the conductors of
phase are shown in Table 43A.
Table 43A - Values of k for an active conductor
Conductor insulation
PVC PVC PVC PVC PR/EPR Rubber
70°C 70°C 90°C 90°C
ÿ 300 mm² > 300 mm² ÿ 300 mm² > 300 mm² 60°C
Initial temperature 70 70 90 90 90 60
°C
Final temperature 160 140 160 140 250 200

°C
Material of
Driver
Copper
115 103 100 86 143 141
Aluminum
76 68 66 57 94 93
Connections soldered to 115 - - -
tin for
copper conductors
NOTES -
1 - For very short durations (< 0.1 s) where the asymmetry is significant and for current limiting devices, k2 S2 must
2
be greater than the value of energy (I t) what the protection device allows to pass, indicated by the manufacturer.
2 - Other values of k are being studied for:
- small section conductors (particularly for sections less than 10 mm2 ),
- short-circuit durations greater than 5 s,
- other types of connections in conductors,
- naked drivers,
- shielded conductors with mineral insulation.
3 - The nominal current of the short-circuit protection device may be greater than the admissible current of the
conductors of the circuit.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
The formula giving the relationship between the breaking time, the short-circuit current and the cross-section of
the conductors assumes that, during the passage time of the short-circuit current, the heating of the conductors
is adiabatic, i.e. -say that the energy dissipated by the Joule effect only serves to heat the conductors without
heat dissipation.
In certain special cases, it may be necessary to reduce the maximum temperatures taking into account the
mechanical characteristics of the conductors and cables, for example for self-supporting cables.
VS
435 Coordination between overload protection and short circuit protection
435.1 Protections provided by the same device If an

overload protection device meeting the requirements in 433 has a breaking capacity at least equal to the
presumed short-circuit current at the point where it is installed, it is considered to also provide protection against
short-circuit currents from the pipeline located downstream of this point.
The breaking capacity may be that of the device alone or that obtained by coordination with another upstream
device as provided in 434.2.1.
NOTE - This may not be valid for the entire range of short-circuit currents for certain types of circuit breakers, particularly for those not
limiting the current. The verification is carried out in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 434.3.
This may also not be valid for very long circuits, such as tunnel circuits, exterior lighting circuits. In such cases,
the cut-off time rule must be systematically checked, as recommended, for example, by the NF C 17-200 standard
for public lighting circuits.
VS 435.2 Protections provided by separate devices The rules in

433 and 434 apply respectively to the overload protection device and the short-circuit protection device.
The characteristics of the devices must be coordinated in such a way that the energy released by the short-
circuit protection device is not greater than that which the overload protection device can withstand without
damage.
436 Limitation of overcurrents by power supply characteristics
Conductors supplied by a source whose impedance is such that the maximum current that it can supply cannot
be greater than the admissible current in the conductors (for example certain ringing transformers, certain
transformers of welding, certain generators driven by thermal engines).
______________
- 123 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
(Blank page)
- 124 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
Part 4-44 – Protection against voltage disturbances and

electromagnetic disturbances
440 Introduction................................................ .................................................. ................ 126 441

(available)................................... .................................................. ................................... 126 442
Protection of low voltage installations against overvoltages
temporary industrial frequency................................................... .............................. 126 443
Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to
to maneuvers.............................................. .................................................. ....... 133 444 Measures
to limit electromagnetic interference .................................. ..... 137 445 Voltage brownout
protection ..................................... ................................. 144
____________
- 125 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
440 Introduction
Part 4-44 provides rules for protection against the effects of conducted and radiated disturbances on electrical installations.
Currents due to lightning, switching, short circuits and other electromagnetic phenomena can generate overvoltages and electromagnetic
disturbances.
Article 442 gives rules intended to ensure the safety of people and equipment in a low voltage installation in the event of a temporary
overvoltage at industrial frequency.
The purpose of article 443 is to describe the means which make it possible to limit transient overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to
maneuvers in order to reduce to an acceptable level the risk of failure in the installation, and in the equipment which is connected to it.
connected. This approach is consistent with the principles of insulation coordination of standard NF C 20-040; this standard requires
technical committees to specify an appropriate overvoltage withstand category for their equipment, which means a minimum voltage wave
withstand for the equipment, depending on their use and their corresponding overvoltage withstand category.
NOTE - According to paragraph 9 of standard NF C 20-040, technical committees should indicate the appropriate information. It is
recommended to indicate the nominal value of the surge resistance supplied with the equipment.
Article 444 describes the fundamental recommendations for limiting the effects of electromagnetic disturbances. Currently electromagnetic
interference (EMI) can disrupt or damage information technology systems or equipment, equipment with electronic components or circuits.
Section 445 deals with precautions to be taken in the event of a voltage drop.
441 (available)
H
442 Protection of low voltage installations against temporary overvoltages at industrial
frequency
442.1 Scope and purpose
The rules in this article are intended to ensure the safety of people and equipment in a low voltage installation in the event of a temporary
overvoltage at industrial frequency.
The following articles only take into consideration four situations generally causing temporary overvoltages, these situations being the most
restrictive: - earth fault of the high voltage installation (442.2); - breakage of the neutral conductor in a
TN or TT system installation (442.5) ; - first earth fault in an IT system installation

(442.6).
442.2 Earth fault overvoltages in high voltage installations
The circulation of a high voltage fault current in the earth connection of the substation masses causes an increase in the potential of these
masses relative to the earth, the value of which depends on:
- the intensity of the fault current, and - the resistance of

the earth connection of the substation masses.
The fault current can cause: - either a general rise
in the potential of the low voltage installation in relation to earth, that is to say voltage constraints which can cause flashovers in low voltage
equipment;
- either a general increase in the potential of the masses of the low voltage installation compared to
to earth which can increase fault and contact voltages.
The following paragraphs should be read in conjunction with Figures 442A to 442G.
- 126 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
442.2.1 Permissible voltage stresses at industrial frequency by the equipment of the low-voltage
installation
Low-voltage equipment includes low-voltage installation equipment and low-voltage transformer station
equipment. This paragraph deals with the voltage constraints of the low-voltage installation equipment.
The admissible voltage constraints at industrial frequency by the LV masses of the transformer station are
specified in standard NF C 13-100, 442.1.
H The industrial frequency voltage stresses experienced by the equipment of low voltage installations in the event
of an earth fault in high voltage installations must not exceed the admissible voltage stresses indicated in Table
44A, depending on the duration of the default.
Table 44A - Voltage stresses as a function of fault duration
Voltage stresses admissible by the

Duration(s) equipment of low voltage installations
(Utb) (V)
>5 U0 + 250
ÿ5 U0 + 1200
NOTE - The first line of the table relates to high voltage power supply networks with long outage
times, for example compensated neutral schemes.
The second line relates to high voltage power supply networks with short outage times, for
example low impedance neutral schemes.
NOTE - Table 44A is based on standard NF C 20-040.
442.2.2 Symbols In
this article, the following symbols are used:
IE is the part of the earth fault current in the high voltage installation which flows through the earth connection
of the transformer station masses.
RP is the earth connection resistance of the transformer station masses.
RA is the resistance of the earth connection of the low voltage installation masses.
RB is the resistance of the earth connection of the neutral of the low voltage installation, for low voltage
installations in which the earth connection of the substation masses and the neutral are electrically
independent.
RAB is the resistance of the interconnected earth connections of the neutral and the installation masses
at low voltage.
RPB is the resistance of the interconnected earth connections of the neutral and the masses of the substation
transformation.
RPAB is the resistance of the interconnected earth connections of the neutral, the masses of the
transformation and masses of the low voltage installation.
An earth connection can be considered electrically independent of another if a rise in potential of this connection
does not lead to an unacceptable rise in potential in the other earth connection.
H U0 is the voltage between phase and neutral of the low voltage installation.
Uf is the voltage appearing in the low voltage installation, between the masses and the earth, during the fault.
U1 is the voltage stress experienced by the low voltage equipment of the transformer station.
U2 is the voltage stress experienced by the equipment of the low voltage installation.
- 127 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H The following complementary symbols are used in an IT diagram in which the masses of
the low voltage installation are connected to an earth socket electrically independent of that
of the masses of the transformer station:
ID is the fault current which flows through the earth connection of the installation masses at low
voltage in the presence of the first fault in the low voltage network (see figures 442F and
442G).
Z is the earthing impedance of the neutral of the low voltage installation.
442.2.3 Grounding in transformer stations

The grounding of the transformer station masses must be carried out in accordance with the
(*)
standards in force .
442.2.4 Requirements applicable according to the earth connection diagram of installations

low tension
If the risk of insulation fault between the high voltage installation and the low voltage installation
exists, the neutral earth connection must meet the condition stated in 442.2.6.1.
The earth connection diagrams are symbolized by the two letters whose definition is
given in 312.2, followed by a third which makes it possible to distinguish, according to possible connections
of the masses of the post:
- stations whose masses are connected to both the neutral earth connection of the LV installation
and to the masses of the LV installation, installations designated by the third letter R;
- stations whose masses are connected to the neutral earth connection of the installation, but not
are not connected to the masses of the LV installation, installations designated by the third letter
NOT ;
- installations whose masses are connected to an earth connection electrically separated from
that of the LV neutral and that of the masses of the LV installation, installations designated by
third letter S.
442.2.4.1 TN scheme
H
TNR diagram : the earth connection common to the neutral and the grounds of the low voltage installation
is connected to the earth connection of the transformer station (figure 442A).
In the zone of influence of the main equipotential connection present in each building,
no dangerous contact voltage appears and no maximum value is prescribed for the
overall resistance of the earth connection. If masses are located outside this zone, the resistance
overall earth connection must not exceed 1 ohm.
If the transformer station is inside a building, due to the provisions in force (*)
for earthing the substation masses, the earth connections of the substation masses and the neutral
of the low voltage installation are in fact electrically confused.
Job LV installation
U2
U1
excluding tax
BT
L1
L2
L3
PEN
UUU= = 210
1 =
UU 0
f =
URI PAB E
Uf
IE
RPAB
Figure 442A – TNR diagram

(*) NF C 13-100 and NF C 13-200.
- 128 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H TNS diagram : if the neutral conductor of the low voltage installation is connected to an earth connection
electrically distinct from that of the masses of the transformer station, the condition in 442.2.5.1
must be applied (figure 442B).
NOTE - TNS diagram should not be confused with TN-S diagram defined in 312.2.1 in which the neutral conductor
is separate from the protective conductor.
Taking into account the comment in the paragraph relating to the TNR diagram, the non-binding of the conductor
neutral of the low voltage installation to the earth connection of the transformer station
can only be considered in cases such as pole-mounted stations, prefabricated simplified stations
or prefabricated semi-buried stations.
Job LV installation
U2
U1
excluding tax
BT
L1
L2
L3
PEN
UU
2
= 0
Uf 0=
Uf
IE
= UPE+
U1 RI 0
RP RAB
Figure 442B – TNS diagram
442.2.4.2 TT diagram
H
TTN diagram: if the neutral conductor of the low voltage installation is connected to the earth connection
of the masses of the transformer station, the voltage constraint U2 = RPB IE + U0 must not
exceed the allowable tension stress defined in Table 44A as a function of
cut-off of the high voltage fault (figure 442C).
Job LV installation
U2
U1
excluding tax
BT
L1
L2
L3
NOT
1 =
UU 0
= UPB+E
U2 RI 0
Uf 0=
Uf
IE
RPB AR
Figure 442C – TTN diagram

NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H TTS diagram : if the neutral conductor of the low voltage installation is connected to an earth connection
electrically distinct from that of the masses of the transformer station, the condition in 442.2.5.1
must be applied (figure 442D).
Job LV installation
U2
U1
excluding tax
BT
L1
L2
L3
NOT
UU =
1 0
Uf
IE
UU2
=
0
RP R.B. AR
= U
U1RI + Uf =0
PE 0
Figure 442D – TTS diagram
H 442.2.4.3 IT diagram
ITR diagram : the masses of the low voltage installation are connected to the earth connection of the
masses of the transformer station and that of the neutral (figure 442E).
In the zone of influence of the main equipotential connection prescribed in each building,
no dangerous contact voltage appears and no maximum value is prescribed for the
overall resistance of the earth connection. If masses are located outside this zone, the resistance
overall earth connection must not exceed 1 ohm.
(*)
If the transformer station is inside a building, due to the provisions in force for the earthing of the substation masses, the earth
connections of the substation masses and the
masses of the low voltage installation are, in fact, electrically confused. It follows that,
as in the TN diagram, the electrical separation between the respective earth connections of the masses of the
post and masses of the low voltage installation can only be considered in the same
cases such as pole-mounted stations, prefabricated simplified stations or semi-buried stations
prefabricated. In these cases, it is desirable to interconnect the ground connections of the
substation and the masses of the low-voltage installation, otherwise the low-voltage masses of the substation
must be subject to a particular protection measure (torus for example) which is extremely difficult
to implement.
(*) NF C 13-100 and NF C 13-200.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
Job LV installation
U2
U1
excluding tax
BT
L1
L2
L3
PE
Uf
IE 1 =
UU 0 3
UU
210 = U
= 3
f =
RPAB
URI PAB E A first LV fault present
Figure 442E – ITR diagram
H ITN diagram : if, exceptionally, the earth connections of the substation masses and the earth masses
low voltage installation are electrically distinct, the neutral impedance (or the terminal
ground of the surge protector) can be connected to the earth ground of the substation
transformation; the voltage constraint U2 = RPB IE + U0 3 must not exceed the constraint of
admissible voltage defined in table 44A as a function of the high fault cut-off time
voltage (figure 442F).
Job LV installation
U2
U1
excluding tax
BT
L1
L2
L3
1 =
UU 0 3
= UPB E +
U2 RI 0 3
UfAd
RI
=
ID Uf
IE
A first LV fault present
RPB AR
Figure 442F – ITN diagram
- 131 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H ITS diagram : if the neutral impedance is connected to an electrically separate earth connection (figure 442G),
the condition in 442.2.5.2 must be applied.
Job LV installation
U2
U1
excluding tax
BT
L1
L2
L3
U1RI = UPE+ 0 3
UU2
= 0 3
UfAd
RI
=
ID Uf
IE
A first LV fault present
RP RB AR
Figure 442G – ITS diagram
442.2.5 Limitation of voltage constraints in low voltage equipment of the substation

transformation
442.2.5.1 TN and TT schemes

When in TN and TT diagrams, the neutral earth connection is electrically distinct from
that of the masses of the transformer station (figures 442B and 442D), the insulation level of the
low voltage equipment of the transformer station must be compatible with the constraint of
voltage (RP IE + U0).
442.2.5.2 IT diagram
When in the IT diagram, the neutral earth connection is electrically distinct from that of the
masses of the transformer station (figure 442G), the insulation level of the equipment at low
voltage of the transformer station must be compatible with the voltage constraint
(RP IE + U0 3 ).
NOTE - The distributor can give indications on the constraints likely to occur.
442.2.6 Insulation faults between high voltage installation and low voltage installation
442.2.6.1 To protect against overvoltages due to direct faults between installations at

high voltage and low voltage installations when the neutral earth connection is separate from the
earth connection of the installation masses (TTS and ITS diagrams), the following condition must be
completed:
UU
tB
ÿ
RB ÿ
IE
UtB being the admissible voltage stress at industrial frequency of the masses of the installation
at low voltage specified in 442.2.1.
U being the nominal voltage of the installation (voltage between phase and neutral in the TT diagram and
voltage between phases in the IT diagram).
- 132 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H 442.2.6.2 In addition, in IT installations, a surge limiting device must be connected at the origin of the installation
between the earth connection of the neutral of the installation and either the neutral or a phase conductor.
The nominal ignition voltage of this device must be less than the value of the voltage UtB reduced by the voltage
between phase and neutral of the installation or the voltage between phases depending on whether it is
connected to the neutral or to a conductor. phase.
The conditions for choosing and implementing surge limiting devices are indicated in 534 and in the UTE C
15-105 guide.
H 442.2.6.3 Low and high voltage electrical conduits must not use the same ducts or gutters, unless provisions
are made so that the low voltage conduits cannot be subjected to a voltage greater than their voltage constraint.
admissible resistance at industrial frequency.
These arrangements may consist of arranging pipes of different voltages on separate supports.
H 442.3 and 442.4 (available)
442.5 Voltage constraints in the event of breakage of the neutral conductor in TN and TT schemes
Attention must be focused on the fact that in the event of breakage of the neutral conductor in three-phase TN
or TT schemes, the main, double and reinforced insulation as well as equipment sized for simple voltage can be
temporarily subjected to compound voltage. The tension stress can reach U = U0 3 .
442.6 Voltage constraints in the event of a first earth fault in an IT scheme Attention
must be paid to the fact that in the event of a first earth fault of a phase conductor in an IT scheme, the main,
double and reinforced as well as equipment sized for simple tension can be temporarily subjected to compound
tension. The tension stress can reach U = U0 3 .
442.7 Voltage constraints in the event of a short circuit between phase and neutral in the low voltage
installation
Attention must be paid to the fact that in the event of a short circuit between phase and neutral, the voltage
constraints can reach the value of 1.45 U0 for a period of not more than 5s.
443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to

maneuvers
Electrical equipment comprising electronic components is today widely used in industrial, tertiary and domestic
installations. In addition, a large number of these devices remain in a permanent standby state and provide
control or security functions. The poor resistance of this equipment to overvoltages has given increased
importance to the protection of low-voltage electrical installations, and in particular to the use of surge arresters
for their protection against induced overvoltages transmitted through the electrical network or communication
networks.
H 443.1 Scope and purpose This article

deals with the protection of electrical installations against transient overvoltages of atmospheric origin transmitted
by distribution networks and against operating overvoltages created by the installation's equipment.
It is necessary to take into consideration the overvoltages which may appear at the origin of an installation, the
presumed keraunic level, the location and the characteristics of the devices.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
protection against overvoltages, so that the probabilities of incidents due to overvoltage stresses are reduced to
H an acceptable level for the safety of people and property, as well as for the desired continuity of service.
The transient overvoltage values depend on the nature of the power supply network (underground or overhead)
and the possible presence of overvoltage protection devices upstream of the origin of the installation and the
nominal voltage of the power supply. at low voltage.
This article contains guidance when overvoltage protection is satisfied by the natural situation or ensured by the
controlled situation. If protection in accordance with this article is not provided, insulation coordination is not
ensured and the risk due to overvoltages must be estimated. The provisions of this article assume that the
equipment meets at least the rated impulse withstand voltage values in Table 44C.
NOTE - The rules in this article do not apply to telecommunications installations.
An informative annex to the UTE C 15-443 guide gives recommendations for the protection of communication installations against
overvoltages of atmospheric origin, as well as for the coordination of this protection with that of power installations.
These rules are intended to describe the means that can limit transient overvoltages in order to reduce to an
acceptable level the risk of failure in the installation and in the electrical equipment connected to it. This
approach is in accordance with the principles of insulation coordination of standard NF C 20-040 “Coordination
of the insulation of equipment in low voltage systems (networks), which requires technical committees to specify
the category appropriate shock withstand voltage (overvoltage category) of their equipment, which means a
minimum shock withstand voltage for the equipment depending on its nature.
Indications on the sizing of surge arresters and additional provisions are given in the UTE C 15-443 guide.
In accordance with 2.1.1.2 of standard NF C 20-040, the technical committees must specify the useful
information to be provided with the equipment.
Furthermore, electrical installations are subject to temporary overvoltages at industrial frequency described in
442 which are taken into account for the choice and implementation of the protection devices given in 534.
For particular applications where the consequences of a defect can be very detrimental, it is recommended to
carry out a risk assessment and take measures accordingly.
Industrial installations equipped with motors and power electronics may be subject to specific overvoltages.
They require specific analysis and treatment within the installation.
The notion of keraunic level Nk used in the AQ classification (number of days per year when thunder is heard)
is supplanted by that of lightning strike density Ng (Number of lightning strikes per km² per year).
H 443.2 Classification of shock resistance categories (overvoltage categories)
443.2.1 Purpose of classification of shock resistance categories (overvoltage categories)
See Table 44C.
H The shock resistance categories are means of distinguishing the various degrees of availability of equipment
according to the continuity of service and the acceptable risk of failure. Using the choices of the preferred series
of impulse withstand voltages, they make it possible to achieve appropriate coordination of insulation throughout
the installation, thus reducing the risk of failure to an acceptable level and giving a foundation for controlling
surges.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
A higher shock resistance category characteristic number (overvoltage category) indicates better shock resistance of the equipment
and offers a wider choice of methods for controlling overvoltages.
The concept of shock resistance categories is used for equipment powered directly by the network.
Atmospheric surges do not experience significant downstream attenuation in most installations.
See guide UTE C 15-443.
H
443.2.2 Description of shock resistance categories (overvoltage categories)
In the classification of equipment by overvoltage categories, only the shock resistance of the main insulation (between the active
conductors and the ground) is taken into account.
The equipment is classified according to 4 overvoltage categories corresponding to the shock resistance of the main insulation (see
NF C 20-040-1).
It is also necessary to take into account the shock resistance of functional insulation (between active conductors). This is particularly
justified for equipment containing electronics.
Category I
Category I shock withstand equipment is equipment or electronic components with a low shock withstand voltage. This impulse
withstand voltage is specified by the manufacturer and protective measures must be taken.
Example: electronic circuits to be protected at the level specified by the manufacturer.
When electronic circuits are integrated by construction inside higher category equipment, protective measures
have been taken by the manufacturer.
The protection of Category I equipment or circuits is not the subject of this standard.
H Category II
Category II shock resistance equipment is user equipment intended to be connected to the building's fixed electrical installation.
Their shock resistance is at least equal to 2.5 kV.
Examples:
- portable tools, household appliances without electronics; - computer

workstations, microcomputers, TV, HiFi, video, alarms, electronically programmed household appliances, etc.
However, these devices may be sensitive to overvoltages between active conductors due to the presence
of filtering components. In the absence of information on the corresponding resistance level of this
equipment, a shock resistance level of 1.5 kV is considered.
H Category III
Category III shock resistance equipment is equipment belonging to the fixed installation and other equipment for which a higher level
of reliability is required.
Their shock resistance is at least equal to 4 kV.
Examples:
- distribution cabinets, equipment (circuit breakers, switches, socket bases
fluent...) ;
- pipes and their accessories (cables, busbars, junction boxes, etc.); - equipment for industrial use and equipment
such as fixed motors with a permanent connection

to the fixed installation.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H Category IV
Category IV shock resistance equipment is used at the origin or near the origin of the installation upstream of
the distribution panel.
Their shock resistance is at least equal to 6 kV.
Examples: -
electric meters; - main
equipment for protection against overcurrents;
- telemetry devices, etc.
H 443.3 Provisions for controlling surges
NOTES -
1 – Direct lightning strikes on low-voltage overhead lines or on the electrical installations of buildings are not taken into consideration
(conditions of external influences AQ 3).
2 – Control of overvoltages due to operations in the installation is generally not necessary; in fact, statistical measurements have shown
that the risk of overvoltages due to operations above overvoltage category II is low.
The risk assessment method applicable in France is given in the UTE C 15-443 guide.
H When a building is equipped with a lightning rod, lightning protection is implemented in accordance with
534.1.4.2.
443.3.1 Natural situation
Situation of an electrical system (distribution network and installation) where, thanks to the very characteristics of
the system (network), the presumed transient overvoltages can be expected to be lower than the impulse
withstand voltage of the equipment.
H 443.3.1.1 When an installation is supplied by an entirely underground low-voltage network and does not include
overhead lines, the impulse withstand voltage of the equipment, given in Table 44C, is sufficient and no
additional protection against overvoltages Atmospheric origin is not required.
NOTE - An overhead line made of insulated conductors with a metal screen connected to earth is considered equivalent to an underground
cable.
H 443.3.1.2 When an installation is supplied by, or includes, a low voltage overhead line and the external influences
condition is AQ 1 (ÿ 25 days per year), no additional protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin n 'is
required.
NOTES -
1 – Additional overvoltage protection may be necessary in situations where a higher level of reliability or a higher risk (e.g. fire) is expected.
2 – In accordance with the UTE C 15-443 guide, 25 days of storm per year are equivalent to a value of 2.5 storms per km² per year. This
is due to the formula:
=
01/NN
Kg 3 –
In some cases, the implementation of overvoltage protection may depend on the risk assessment method chosen in order to replace the
conditions of external influences (see UTE guide C 15-443).
443.3.2 Controlled situation
Situation of an electrical system (distribution network and installation) where, thanks to specific reduction means,
it can be expected that the presumed transient overvoltages are lower than the impulse withstand voltage of the
equipment.
H 443.3.2.1 When an installation is supplied by, or includes, an overhead line, a protection measure against
overvoltages of atmospheric origin must be provided in accordance with 443.3.2.2, if the keraunic level of the
place considered corresponds to the condition of external influences AQ2 (> 25 days per year). The protection
level Up of the protective devices must not be higher than the value of overvoltage category II, given in table
44C.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H The decision to use a controlled situation can be based, replacing the conditions
QA, on the use of a specified risk assessment method.
NOTE – Special protection may be necessary in situations where a higher level of reliability or more
high risk (e.g. fire) is expected and the acceptable risk depending on the use of the installation would be
exceptionally low.
443.3.2.2 Under the conditions of 443.3.2.1, a surge protection measure

of atmospheric origin can be provided for in the installation of buildings by a device for
lightning protection appropriate to the level of protection required in the installation and placed
in accordance with 534.
Other means providing at least equivalent attenuation of overvoltages can be

used.
H NOTES -
1 – The level of surges can be controlled by surge protection devices placed on the
overhead lines or in the installation of buildings.
2 – The coordination of cascade surge arresters is being studied.
In France, this coordination is covered in the UTE C 15-443 guide.
H In conclusion, the choice for the installation designer or installer is:

- either if the AQ condition is greater than AQ1 and if the installation is supplied by or includes
an overhead line, to plan the implementation of lightning arresters;
- or follow the risk analysis approach in the UTE C 15-443 guide.
Table 44B – Conditions for implementing surge arresters
Building characteristics and power supply Lightning strike density (Ng)

Keraunic level (Nk)
Ng ÿ 2.5 Ng > 2.5

Nk ÿ 25 (AQ1) Nk > 25 (AQ2)
(2) (3) (2) (3)
Building equipped with a lightning rod Mandatory Mandatory
BT power supply via a line entirely or (5) (6)
Not required Mandatory
(4) partially aerial
BT power supply via one line entirely (5) (5)
underground Not required Not required
The unavailability of the installation and/or According to analysis of
Mandatory
(1) equipment concerns personal safety risk
(1)
This is the case for example:
- certain installations where home medical care is present;
- installations including fire safety systems, technical alarms,
social alarms, etc.
(2)
In the case of buildings integrating the transformer station, if the earth connection of the neutral
transformer is confused with the earth connection of the masses interconnected to the earth connection
of the lightning rod, the implementation of surge arresters is not obligatory.
(3)
In the case of buildings equipped with lightning rods and comprising several installations
private, the type 1 surge protector cannot be implemented at the origin of the installation is
replaced by type 2 surge protectors (In ÿ 5 kA) placed at the origin of each installation
private.
(4)
Overhead lines made of insulated conductors with metal screen connected to earth
are to be considered equivalent to underground cables.
(5)
The use of surge protectors may also be necessary for the protection of equipment.
electrical or electronic whose cost and unavailability can be critical in the installation
as indicated by the risk analysis.
(6)
However, the absence of a surge protector is permitted if it is justified by the risk analysis.
defined in guide UTE C 15-443 (6.2.2).
- 136A - Updated: June 2005

NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H 443.4 Choice of materials in the installation
443.4.1 The materials are chosen so that their rated shock withstand voltage is not
not less than the impulse withstand voltage prescribed in Table 44C. He is from the
responsibility of product committees to prescribe the rated shock withstand voltage of their
materials in the corresponding standards, as specified in Table 44C.
NOTE - The rated impulse withstand voltage is the impulse withstand voltage value set by the manufacturer at the
equipment or part of them, characterizing the specified withstand capacity of their insulation against overvoltages
transients (in accordance with 1.3.9.2 of standard NF C 20-040).
443.4.2 Equipment having an impulse withstand voltage lower than that specified in the
Table 44C may be used, if a higher risk is accepted. Protective devices
against lightning and their series protection devices must safely withstand the
temporary surges in 442.
Table 44C - Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) prescribed for equipment
Nominal voltage Equipment shock resistance category

of
installation
U0/U (kV)
(V)
(IV) (III) (II) (I)
230/400 6 4 2.5 1.5
400/690 8 6 4 2.5
690/1000 Values proposed by the equipment manufacturers. Otherwise, the values of the
line above can be chosen.
443.5 Characteristics of surge protection devices

Surge protectors in installations must comply with standard NF EN 61643-11 (C 61-
740).
444 Measures to limit electromagnetic interference
H 444.0 General
Lightning currents, switching, short circuits and other phenomena
Electromagnetic devices can cause voltage surges and electromagnetic interference.
These phenomena appear:

- whether there are large metal loops;
- if electrical conduits from different systems follow different paths, for example
example for the power supply and for the signals of processing equipment
information inside the building.
The value of the induced voltage depends on the gradient (di/dt) of the disturbing current and the dimension
of the loop.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H
Power cables which carry large, rapidly growing currents (di/ dt), (for example elevator starting currents or currents controlled by
rectifiers) can induce overvoltages in the cables of information processing equipment which may disrupt or damage this equipment or
similar equipment.
Near or in premises used for medical purposes, electric or magnetic fields linked to the electrical installation can disrupt medical electrical
equipment.
444.1 Scope of application

This article informs architects, designers and electrical installers about installation principles that can limit electromagnetic disturbances.
Fundamental principles are given to mitigate these disturbances. Additional requirements are indicated in other parts or articles (for
example, in 545), standards NF C 17-100 and NF C 17-102. These principles are consistent with those of the standards cited above
(figure 444C).
444.2 (available)
444.3 Provisions to be taken against electrical and magnetic influences on electrical equipment All electrical equipment must
meet the appropriate
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements and comply with the relevant EMC standards.
See also 545.

Specific rules relating to the cohabitation of power and communication networks are given in the UTE C 15-900
guide.
The following points must be taken into consideration when designing and implementing electrical installations.
H 444.3.1 Location of potential sources of disturbance in relation to sensitive equipment.
444.3.2 Location of sensitive equipment in relation to high currents present, for example in distribution bars or equipment such as
elevators.
444.3.3 Implementation of filters and/or surge arresters in circuits supplying sensitive electrical equipment.
444.3.4 Selection of protective devices with appropriate delays to avoid unwanted trips due to transients.
444.3.5 Equipotentiality of metal enclosures and screens.
444.3.6 Appropriate separation (distance or shielding) of power and communication cables including at changes of direction and at wall
crossings, right angle crossings.
444.3.6.1 In the parts between the distributors, the power and communication cables must run on separate metal or insulating supports.
The minimum distance between the walls closest to the supports is 30 cm.
444.3.6.2 In the terminal parts between the distribution frames and the points of use, the cables of the power and communication
networks may run on or in common supports.
The separation distances depend on the installation method concerned:
- exposed cables, in false floors or false ceilings: minimum separation of 5 cm; - method of installation in trunking and
profiled conduits, install the networks in the different compartments in decreasing order of sensitivity in relation to the ground plane (the
most sensitive network being the closest to the ground plane);
- recessed or exposed ducts: separate ducts unless otherwise specified by the

supplier.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H 444.3.7 Appropriate separation (distance or shielding) of power and communication cables, in relation to the
down conductors of lightning protection systems (see NF C 17-100 and figure 444C).
444.3.8 Reduction of induction loops by choosing a common route for the pipes of the various systems (see
also 444.4.4).
444.3.9 Use of shielded and/or twisted pair cables for communications circuits.
444.3.10 Shortest possible equipotential connections.
444.3.11 Implementation under earthed metal enclosures or equivalent of pipelines made up of separate
conductors.
444.3.12 Avoid the TN-C scheme in installations containing sensitive equipment (see 545.4). For buildings
which contain, or are likely to contain, significantly, information processing equipment, the TN-C scheme is only
permitted between the penetration point and the general distribution panel (TGBT). Downstream, the scheme
is TN-S.
Equipotential bonding conductor, if NOT
L
necessary PE
Equipment 1
u 1)
Communication circuit
2)
Equipment 2
1) The voltage drop ÿU is avoided along the PE

2) Restricted surface loop
Figure 444A ÿ Implementation of a TN-S scheme in a building
- 139 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
The TT scheme can lead to higher overvoltages than the TN scheme between the active parts of the equipment and their masses. In fact,
these active parts and the masses can each be connected to separate earth connections whose potentials evolve separately (see 443).
In an IT diagram, a first insulation fault can cause the compound voltage to appear between a phase conductor and the equipment ground.
This constraint is not acceptable for electronic equipment powered directly between phase and neutral and whose design does not provide
for this compound voltage between phase and ground (see the corresponding requirements in EN 60950 for information processing
equipment ).
H 444.3.13 Metallic pipes (e.g. for water, gas or heating) and building supply cables should enter the building at the same location.
Shields, screens, metal pipes and their connections must be connected to each other and to the main equipotential bond (LEP) of the
building (figure 444B), using low impedance conductors.
444.3.14 In the case of separate areas or buildings made with separate main equipotential links, it is recommended to use optical fiber
cables without metal parts or any other non-conductive system for the communication links.
NOTE ÿ The problem of earths carried at different voltages in large public telecommunications networks is the responsibility of the
distributor who can use other methods.
444.4 Measures to protect communication circuits In buildings with a PEN conductor
or where electromagnetic disturbances appear on communication cables due to inappropriate arrangements of the electrical installation (see
545.5), the following methods may be considered to avoid or minimize the phenomenon.
444.4.1 Use of optical fibers for communications links.
444.4.2 Use of Class II equipment.
444.4.3 Local use of two-winding transformers for powering information processing equipment, taking into account the requirements of 411.6
in IT diagram (local IT diagram), or of article 413 for protection by electrical separation.
444.4.4 Use of appropriate routing of pipelines to minimize the areas formed by loops jointly formed by power supply cables and
communications cables.
- 140 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

Power supply
Phone
H Phone Earth connection by bottom
loop of excavation I I
Power supply
I
THE P
THE P • •
I
•
I
• Cable from
••
• • V the antenna
V
Cable from
the antenna
• • •
I
Water, I
Water,
gas, collective gas, collective
heating, wastewater heating, wastewater
IEC 320/96 IEC 321/96
Figure 444B1 Figure 444B2

Common penetration is preferred: Penetrations in various places to be avoided: U ÿ
Uÿ0V 0V
LEP main equipotential connection
I induced current
Figure 444B ÿ Penetration of armored cables and metal pipes in a building

(examples)
- 141 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H
Class II Class I
8
FE
Painting Painting
BT BT
Slab
3 7
PE
Class I Class II Class I
2
FE
Painting Painting
BT BT
Slab
3 7
Telecommunications conductors for telecom or

information processing system Surge protectors PE
1-5
FE
Power supply
Plan
TN-S Main earth terminal
Plan
TN-C
Towards the earth

PEN Neutral PE
connection, for example: the
loop at the bottom of the excavation
FE: Functional grounding conductor (optional), used and grounded according to operator instructions
Reference Description of the measurements represented Article
1) Cables and metal conduits enter the building in the same place 444.3.14
2) Common routing of pipes with suitable separations and avoiding loops 444.3.8
3) Connections as short as possible and use of accompanying conductors (see UTE C 15-900 guide) 444.3.10
4) Shielded communications cables and/or twisted pairs 444.3.9

5) Avoid the TN-C scheme beyond the point of delivery at the entrance 444.3.12
6) Use of transformers with separate windings 444.4.3
7) Equipotential bonding 545.2
8) Use of class II equipment 444.4.2
Figure 444C ÿ Illustration of the measures described by this article in a building
- 142 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
H (Lightning protection
system)
Down
conductor
PE AC socket
bases
Mesh
PE
AC socket
bases
Cabinets
PE
1) Computer science 2)
ASI
3)
metal cable tray

TGBT
Main earth Equipotential connection

according to NF C 17-100
terminal
1) Telephony
2) Home and building Loop at the
bottom of the dig
electronic systems
3) Horizontal local
equipotential bond
AC Power Supply
PE Protective conductor of
an AC power supply
Figure 444D ÿ Basic diagram of grounding of a building
- 143 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
445 Brownout Protection

H
445.1 General requirements

445.1.1 Precautions must be taken when the disappearance of voltage and its restoration can result in danger
to people and property. Likewise, appropriate precautions must be taken when part of the installation or
equipment used may be damaged by a drop in voltage.
A protection device against the effects of voltage drops is not required if the damage suffered by the installation
or by the equipment constitutes an acceptable risk without causing danger to people.
This rule applies in particular to devices containing motors capable of starting automatically after a shutdown
due to a drop in voltage below a certain value.
Machines subject to the decree of July 29, 1992 must meet this requirement.
H 445.1.2 Devices protecting against the effects of voltage drops may be delayed if the operation of the device
they protect can safely accommodate an interruption or short-term voltage drop.
445.1.3 If contactors are used, the delay in opening and reclosing must not prevent instantaneous cut-off by
control or protection devices.
445.1.4 The characteristics of protection devices against the effects of voltage drops must be compatible with
the requirements of the standards relating to the commissioning and use of the equipment.
445.1.5 When the reclosing of a protective device is likely to create a dangerous situation, the reclosing must
not be automatic.
____________
- 144 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-46
Part 4-46 – Sectioning and control
460 Introduction................................................ .................................................. ................ 146 461

General .............................. .................................................. ................................. 146 462
Sectioning .............. .................................................. ............................................. 146 463 Power cut
emergency................................................. .................................................. .... 147 464 Shutdown for
mechanical maintenance ......................................... ...................................148A 465 Functional
control........ .................................................. .................................148A

NF C 15-100 Part 4-46
460 Introduction
This part deals with non-automatic sectioning and control measures, local or remote, which are used to
avoid or eliminate dangers with electrical installations or equipment and machines supplied with electrical
energy.
The rules of this part may be applied to automatic functions provided that all safety provisions are met.
Non-automatic control means manual action.
H 461 General
461.1 Depending on the desired functions, any device provided for sectioning or control must meet the
corresponding requirements of article 536.
461.2 There must be placed at the origin of any installation a control device and a disconnecting device
cutting all active conductors of the entire installation.
The control device and the disconnecting device are generally combined into a single device (see 536.1).
In installations supplied directly by a low-voltage public distribution network, this device can be the general
control and protection device.
461.3 In the TN-C diagram, the PEN conductor must not be severed or cut. In the TN-S diagram, the
neutral conductor must be able to be sectioned and cut.
NOTE - It is recalled that in all diagrams, the protective conductor must not be severed or cut (see also 543.4).
H 462 Sectioning
462.1 Any circuit must be capable of being sectioned on each of the active conductors, with the exception
of the PEN conductor, as prescribed in 461.3
Additional provisions may be made for the sectioning of a set of circuits by the same device, if the service
conditions allow it.
It is specified that the expression “if the service conditions permit” means that the corresponding cut-off is
necessary in operation to allow maintenance or repair work to be carried out without voltage.
In order to protect against any possible return re-supply, it may be necessary to provide sectioning
upstream and downstream of the part to be de-energized.
In the case of supply in TN-C scheme to an electrical cabinet comprising feeders in TN-S scheme, a three-
pole sectioning and control device implemented on the incoming pipe is satisfactory to ensure the
sectioning function , control and emergency shutdown, regardless of the number and distribution of TN-S
and TN-C feeders in the cabinet.
Special circuits of transformer stations

(1)
In installations supplied by a transformer station, the standard in force provides for the supply of a
certain number of circuits between the output terminals of the transformer and the general control and
protection device of the low voltage installation.
These circuits must be equipped with a disconnecting device at their origin and are essentially intended to
power the lighting of the station, the socket outlets, the
———————
(1) NF C 13-100

NF C 15-100 Part 4-46
transformer protection relay, the tripping coil of the possible high voltage circuit breaker, certain relays, etc.
Please note that these circuits are protected by overcurrent protection devices which must have a breaking
capacity at least equal to the short-circuit current at the transformer output terminals.
It is also recalled that protection against indirect contact is ensured by the equipotential connection provided
for in subparagraph 413.1.1 of the standard relating to delivery stations. The materials for these circuits are
(2)
chosen in accordance with the rules of 311.2.2 of the same standard (2).
H 462.2 Appropriate means must be provided to prevent any accidental switching on of the equipment.
NOTE - These provisions may include one or more of the following measures:
- condemnation, -
warning signs, - provision in a
room or in an envelope, lockable.
Short-circuiting and earthing can be used as a complementary measure.
These provisions make it possible to carry out the recording provided for by Publication UTE C 18-510.
It is also possible to comply with this rule by locking or remote locking provided that the devices have the
same degree of security.
H 462.3 When equipment or an enclosure contains active parts connected to several power supplies, a
warning sign must be placed in such a way that any person accessing the active parts is warned of the
need to disconnect these parts from the different power supplies, unless that an interlock ensures that all
affected circuits are disconnected.
462.4 Appropriate means must be provided, if necessary, to ensure the discharge of stored electrical energy.
After sectioning, certain materials (such as capacitors, cables, etc.) can cause risks of electric shock, it is
then necessary to ensure their discharge, for example by closing a switch ensuring the connection of the
conductors to earth .
463 Emergency shutdown

463.1 Emergency switching devices shall be provided to cut off, in the event of an unexpected danger, the
electrical supply to circuits or groups of circuits, so as to meet the requirements set out in 463.1.1 and 463.1
.2.
The unexpected danger may be electric shock, fire or explosion.

Emergency cut-off devices should not be confused with emergency stop devices prescribed by regulations
for certain equipment, particularly for machines, by the decree of July 29, 1992.
463.1.1 It must be possible to cut off the power supply to any terminal circuit, the corresponding devices
being able to control one or more circuits.
The devices are intended in particular to ensure an omnipolar cutoff upstream of single-phase terminal
circuits controlled by switches or single-pole switches, such as lighting circuits.
The control device used to switch a user device on and off, or the emergency stop device, may serve as an
emergency cut-off device if it meets all the conditions corresponding to this function.
———————
(2) NF C 13-100

NF C 15-100 Part 4-46
463.1.2 It must be possible to cut off the power supply to any part of the installation, in
in which the probability of the danger appearing is particularly high.
The parts of the installation for which an emergency cut-off is recommended are by
example :
- pumping flammable liquids;
- electrical laboratories and test platforms;
- boiler rooms;
- large kitchens;
- laboratories of educational establishments;
- discharge lamps powered by high voltage (for example, neon signs).
Regulatory texts or provisions of specific standards designate the
facilities concerned.
The table below summarizes the main emergency cuts prescribed, with the indication
of the regulatory text or standard prescribing them.
APPLICATION REGULATION STANDARDS AND GUIDES
Residential premises NF C 15-100, 771.463

Boiler rooms Order of 06.23.78
Large kitchens ERP security regulations UTE C 15-201
GC4-PE15
BE3 locations NF C 15-100, 424.1.3
High discharge lamps NF C 15-150-1, article 3

tension
Distribution areas of Model Order No. 261 bis (No. of NF C 15-100, 752.46
liquid fuels current nomenclature: 1434)
Barracks, stands NF C 15-100, 711.463
Establishment laboratories NF C 15-100, 463.1.2
teaching
Emergency cut-off devices installed on low-voltage power circuits

discharge lamps powered by high voltage (for example, neon signs)
must also provide the sectioning function (see NF C 15-150-1).
H 463.2 The emergency cutting device must cut all active conductors.
However, in the TN-C scheme, the PEN conductor must not be cut.
463.3 Emergency cutting means must act as directly as possible on the

appropriate power conductors.
The arrangements must be such that a single maneuver is sufficient to cause the
appropriate power disconnection.
Emergency cut-off means means the manual control member acting on
the device comprising devices capable of interrupting the current under the conditions
power supply, either directly or through transmission systems
(mechanical, electrical, electronic, pneumatic, etc.).

NF C 15-100 Part 4-46
H 463.4 The arrangements of the emergency shut-off system shall be such that its operation does not cause
another hazard or interfere with the complete operation necessary to remove the hazard.
463.5 The emergency cut-off device must be located at the level of the user devices, it being understood
that the same device may affect several devices.
The operating device must be easily recognizable and quickly accessible.
An operating device whose action requires the breaking of a window is considered to be quickly accessible.
When the emergency cut-off device must only be able to be operated by operating personnel, the control
device must be accessible only to this personnel; this is the case in establishments open to the public in
the 1st group where the devices must not be accessible to the public (see § 2 of article EL11 of the
security regulations).
However, the maneuver must not require the use of a key, unless it is located under a “break glass”
device, in the immediate vicinity of the lock.
463.6 Emergency cut-off devices must not cut off power to safety circuits.
464 Shutdown for mechanical maintenance

Devices providing both the disconnection function (see 462) and the emergency cut-off function (see 463)
are sometimes prescribed.
These devices are sometimes called proximity disconnect devices.
Examples of equipment for which mechanical maintenance shutoffs are used are pumps and fans.
Cutting off any associated electrical power may not be sufficient in the case of systems powered by other
energies, for example in pneumatic, hydraulic or steam form.
H 465 Functional command
465.1 General
465.1.1 A functional control device shall be provided on any circuit element which may need to be
controlled independently of other parts of the installation.

NF C 15-100 Part 4-46
465.1.2 Functional control devices do not necessarily interrupt all active conductors in a circuit.
H
A single-pole control device should not be placed on the neutral conductor.

This rule may not be applied to control circuits (see UTE guide C15-476, 10.2).
The control device can be: - either a device

incorporated into the device if it includes one; - either a device placed near
each device; - either a device controlling the entire installation and
placed on the distribution board or in the immediate vicinity if the installation concerns only one level; - or
a device controlling all the devices on the same level, when the installation concerns several
levels.
The devices below are defined in Table 53D of this standard.

A thermostat can only constitute the control device if it has a “cut-off” position and if this cut-off affects all
the phase conductors.
H 465.1.3 In general, any operating device requiring control must be controlled by an appropriate functional
control device.
A single functional control device can control several devices intended to operate simultaneously.
H 465.1.4 Power outlets can provide functional control if their rated current is at most equal to 32 A.
465.1.5 Functional control devices ensuring the permutation of power sources must concern all active
conductors and must not be able to put the sources in parallel, unless the installation is specially designed
for this condition.
In these cases, no provision should be made for the sectioning of the PEN conductors.
465.2 Control circuits

The control circuits must be designed, arranged and protected in such a way as to limit the dangers
resulting from a fault between the control circuit and other conductive parts likely to cause malfunction of
the controlled device (for example untimely operation) .
465.3 Motor control

Starting devices can be combined with those ensuring motor protection; they must then comply with the
rules applicable to protection devices.
The different control and adjustment devices of a motor or a set of associated motors must be suitably
grouped (see 514.1).
H 465.3.1 Motor control circuits shall be designed to prevent automatic starting of a motor after a shutdown
due to a drop or lack of voltage, if such starting is likely to cause a hazard.
465.3.2 When counter-current braking of a motor is planned, all precautions must be taken to avoid
reversing the direction of rotation at the end of braking, if such reversal could cause a danger.
465.3.3 When safety depends on the direction of rotation of a motor, arrangements must be made to avoid
operation in the opposite direction, caused, for example, by the disappearance of a phase.
- 149 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-46
(Blank page)
- 150 -
TITLE 5. - Choice and implementation of materials
Part 5-51 – Rules common to all equipment
Part 5-52 – Additional rules for pipelines
Part 5-53 – Equipment (Protection, control, isolation and monitoring)
Part 5-54 – Earthing, protective and equipotential conductors
Part 5-55 – Other equipment
Part 5-56 – Security installations

NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
Part 5-51 – Rules common to all equipment
510 Scope of application............................................ .................................................. ... 152 511

Compliance with standards ......................................... .................................................. .... 152 512
Operating conditions and classification of external influences ....................... 153 513 Accessibility of
electrical equipment ....... .................................................. ................ 184 514 Identification and
tracking ............................. .................................................. .............. 184 515 Hardware
independence .............................. .................................................. ....... 187
Annex A - (informative) - Abbreviated list of external influences ......................................... .188
Appendix B - Identification of protective and earthing conductors in fixed

installations .................................. .................................................. ................ 189
____________
- 151 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
H 510 Scope of application
This part deals with the choice of materials and their implementation. It must make it possible to satisfy the
protective measures to ensure safety, the requirements to ensure satisfactory operation of the installation for
the intended use and the requirements appropriate to the conditions of foreseeable external influences. The
equipment must be chosen and installed so as to comply with the rules set out in this part and, to the extent
that they are applicable, to those of the other parts of this standard.
511 Compliance with standards
511.1 All electrical equipment must comply with the appropriate European standard (EN) or harmonization
document (HD) or with the national standard resulting from the HD. In the absence of EN or HD, the materials
must comply with the appropriate national standards. In all other cases, reference should be made to the
appropriate IEC standard or the appropriate national standard of another country.
The use of equipment conforming to the standards published by the Technical Union of Electricity and
Communication makes it possible to satisfy this rule.
When equipment bears a standard conformity mark, it is considered to comply with these standards without
further verification.
For certain equipment said to be for industrial use, compliance with standards is provided either by a declaration
of conformity from the manufacturer, or by a certificate of conformity established by an accredited body.
An accredited organization is an organization having obtained accreditation issued by COFRAC (French

Accreditation Committee), or by an equivalent committee designated by the multilateral mutual recognition
agreements signed between COFRAC and its European and international counterparts as part of the ECA
(European Cooperation of Accreditation) and IAF (International Accreditation Form).
The CE marking certifies the conformity of the product with the provisions (essential requirements and evaluation
procedures) of the Low Voltage Directive in terms of safety and/ or the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
in terms of the electromagnetic environment. This marking does not prejudge the conformity of the product to
the standards (see 133.1). It does not guarantee, in particular, its level of performance, nor its suitability for the
function.
H 511.2 When for a given electrical equipment there is no standard that can be applied to it, the manufacturer or
importer must be able to present a report drawn up by an accredited body for product certification.
Equipment said to be for industrial use is subject to a declaration issued by the manufacturer or the importer
acting on its behalf, specifying that it meets the safety requirements under the intended conditions of use.
In the event of a dispute, the manufacturer or importer must be able to present a report drawn up by an
accredited body.
511.3 An installation process not described in this standard must be the subject of a study by the Technical
Union of Electricity which will issue, if necessary, an Opinion on the application of this process in as long as it
meets the rules of this standard.
Likewise, certain equipment, although covered by standards, can be used in conditions different from those
provided for in this standard; such applications must be subject to the same procedure.
Commission 07 of the UTE issues technical opinions for new installation processes.
- 152 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
H 512 Operating conditions and classification of external influences
Electrical equipment must be chosen taking into account: - operating conditions (512.1), -
conditions of external influences (512.2).
512.1 Operating conditions
512.1.1 Voltage
Electrical equipment must be adapted to the nominal voltage value (effective alternating current value) of the installation.
If, in an IT installation, the neutral conductor is distributed, the equipment connected between a phase and the neutral must be insulated for
the voltage between phases.
NOTE - For certain equipment, it may be necessary to take into account the lowest voltage likely to occur.
The rated voltage of equipment must be at least equal to the nominal voltage of the installation.
For the application of this rule, it is necessary to distinguish equipment according to whether or not their operation depends on the voltage:
- Case of equipment whose operation depends on voltage.
For this equipment, the rated voltage is chosen taking into account the nature of the equipment and the indications that may be given on this
subject in the standards which concern them as well as variations in the nominal voltage of the installation.
- Case of equipment whose operation does not depend on voltage.
a) Conductors and cables

Three reference voltages are defined for the cables:
Uo Rated effective voltage between phase and earth, used in particular as a basic value
for testing,
U Rated effective voltage between phases used in particular as a base value for
tests,
(U = U03 )
Um Maximum effective voltage between phases for which the cable is designed. It is the highest effective value of the voltage which can be
supported under normal operating conditions, at any time and at any point of the installation.
All of these three values constitute the rated voltage of the product: Uo/ U (Um).
The existing rated voltage values are:
300/300V, 300/500V, 450/750V, 600/1000V.

Conductors and cables with a rated voltage of 600/1000 volts can be used in all Low Voltage electrical installations.
Conductors and cables with a rated voltage of 300/500 or 450/750 V can only be used in installations whose nominal voltage is at most equal
to 500 or 750 V. However, as an exception to the general rule, 07RN- cables F can be used in fixed installations with rated voltage up to 1,000
volts.
Flexible cables with a rated voltage of 300/300 volts can only be used in installation parts where the nominal voltage does not exceed 300
volts in alternating current or direct current.
- 153 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
The cables of the FRN05 WU, FRN05 WR and AR series and the following series: H05W-F and A05 WF (if
permanently fixed) can be used in 230/400 V IT installations, due to the fact that the characteristics of insulation
between the protective conductor and the other conductors on the one hand, and between each conductor and
the external surface on the other hand, is compatible with the presence of the voltage of 400 V between phase
and earth.
b) Equipment
The standards relating to equipment provide for the following values of rated voltages: - for example
250 and up to 440 volts for equipment for domestic and similar installations, - for example 230 V, 400 V, 690 V
and 1,000 V for other devices.
Some equipment is specified by several rated voltages, each characteristic of a particular circuit. It is then
necessary to consider each of these circuits separately by applying the appropriate rule to it.
For equipment other than protection devices, equipment with a rated voltage of 250 V is generally admissible in
230/400 V installations regardless of the diagram, because the dielectric test voltages, creepage distances and
distances in the air between active parts and accessible parts are planned accordingly.
Please note that in the IT diagram, as cutting at the first fault is not required, the installation risks operating with
one phase to earth until this fault is eliminated.
It is therefore advisable to choose equipment whose phase-to-ground insulation is appropriate for the nominal
voltage between phases of the installation.
Consequently, it is up to the manufacturer to indicate the possibility of implementing 250 volt rated voltage
switchgear in 230/400 volt installations in IT diagram, unless the switchgear complies with a standard which
specifies a level of insulation compatible with use in IT diagram.
(1)
This is particularly the case for equipment conforming to one of the following standards: In addition,
for protection devices against overcurrents, the cutting conditions which are defined in 533.3 must be respected .
H 512.1.2 Current
Electrical equipment must be chosen taking into account the operating current (effective value in alternating
current) which flows through it in normal service. It is also necessary to consider the current likely to flow through
them in abnormal conditions, taking into account the duration of the passage of such a current depending on
any protection devices.
There is generally no need to take into account overcurrents that may occur, for example when putting a user
device into service, unless these overcurrents are frequent and prolonged, in which case it may be necessary to
choose equipment with a rated current higher than that which would result from the application of the rule.
(1)
NF EN 60742 (C 52-742) NF EN 60269-1 (C 60-200) NF EN 60269-3 (C 61-202) NF C 61-203
NF EN 60669-1 (C 61-110) NF EN 60669-2-1 (C 61-111) NF EN 60669-2-2 (C 61-112) NF EN 60669-2-3 (C 61-113)
NF C 61-141 NF EN 61008-1 (C 61-150) NF EN 60799 (C61-351) NF C 61-300
NF C 61-303 NF EN 50075 (C 61-304) NF C 61-305 NF C 61-306
NF C 61-320 NF EN 60320-1 (C 61-350) NF C 61-601 NF EN 60320-2-1 (C 61-355)
NF C 61-400 NF C 61-401 NF EN 60934 (C 61-406) NF EN 60898 (C 61-410)
NF EN 61009-1 (C 61-440) NF EN 61184 (C 61-510) NF EN 60238 (C 61-550) NF C 62-911
NF C 61-602 NF C 61-650 NF EN 61242 (C 61-720) NF C 61-740
NF C 61-750 NF C 61-910 NF C 62-411 NF C 62-412
NF EN 60269-2 (C 63-210) NF C 63-213 NF EN 60598-2-8 (C 71-008)
- 154 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
Subparagraph 330.1.1 as well as guide UTE C 15-105, point I, provide information for estimating the employment
current.
The value of the short-circuit current to be considered for determining the thermal and electrodynamic
constraints, and the breaking capacity, takes into account the limiting power of any limiting devices.
This can be obtained either by adequate construction of the equipment, or by incorporated devices. In certain
situations where the intensity of the short-circuit current can be particularly high - for example near a high-power
transformer - devices Limiters can be installed to limit the effects of short-circuit currents.
512.1.3 Frequency
H
If frequency has an influence on the characteristics of electrical equipment, their nominal frequency must
correspond to the frequency likely to occur in the circuit.
512.1.4 Power
Electrical equipment, chosen on the basis of its power characteristics, must be able to be used in operating
conditions taking into account the load factor.
512.1.5 Compatibility
The equipment must be chosen so that it does not generate harmful effects on other equipment and that it does
not disrupt the power supply in normal service, including during maneuvers, unless Appropriate precautions
were taken during their implementation.
Articles 33 and 444 give indications on the different parameters to be taken into consideration.
512.1.6 Rated impulse withstand voltage The

equipment must be chosen so that its rated impulse withstand voltage is at least equal to the value of the
presumed overvoltages at the place of their installation.
The presumed overvoltage values are defined in 443.

When equipment is defined by its overvoltage category, its rated impulse withstand voltage is defined by Table
44B.
Equipment with a rated impulse withstand voltage lower than the presumed overvoltage level may be used if it
is accepted that insulation coordination is not ensured and if the possible consequences have been assessed.
512.1.7 Other characteristics

To determine the equipment power conditions, it may also be necessary to take into account certain
characteristics specific to this equipment such as: - their service, - their power factor, etc.
512.2 External influences

Appendix A provides an abbreviated list of external influences.
H Electrical equipment must be chosen and implemented in accordance with the requirements of Table 51A which
gives the characteristics of the necessary equipment according to the external influences to which they may be
subject.
- 155 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
H The characteristics of the equipment must be determined either by a degree of protection or by

compliance with tests.
If the electrical equipment does not have, by construction, the characteristics appropriate to the
external influences of their location, they can however be used if protection
additional has been planned during their implementation in the installation; Such protection does not
must not affect the operation of the equipment thus protected.
If several external influences can appear simultaneously, they can have effects
independent or mutually influencing each other and the degree of protection must be chosen
result.
The choice of materials according to external influences is necessary not only for a
correct operation, but also to ensure the effectiveness of protective measures to ensure
safety in accordance with this standard. The protective measures provided by the
construction of electrical equipment are only valid for given conditions
external influences if the tests are carried out under these conditions.
Attention is drawn to the fact that the effectiveness of certain protective measures against
indirect contacts can be annihilated if the material does not have, by construction or by
installation, the qualities corresponding to the risks of the premises (or location) where it is used.
This is how, for example, a class II device (marked with the double square) - which exempts from
take other protective measures against him against indirect contact - must be
also protected against splashing water (IPX4) if used in a location
the exterior.
H NOTE 1 – In the context of this standard, the following classes of external influences are conventionally
considered normal:
AA Ambient temperature AA4

AB Atmospheric humidity AB4
AC to AR Other environmental conditions XX1 for each parameter
B and C Use and construction of buildings XX1 for each parameter
XX3 for BC
NOTE 2 – The term “normal” appearing in the characteristics column of the table means that the equipment must
meet applicable standards.
Table 51A establishes a classification and coding of external influences which must be
taken into account for the design and implementation of electrical installations.
Each external influence condition is designated by a code always including a group of

two capital letters and a number as follows:
The first letter relates to the general category of external influences

A = environments.
B = uses.
C = construction of buildings.
The second letter concerns the nature of the external influence : A ..., B ..., VS ...
The number concerns the class of each external influence : 1 ..., 2 ..., 3...
For example, the AC2 code means:
A = environment
AC = environment-altitude
AC2 = environment-altitude > 2,000 m
NOTE – The coding indicated in this part is not intended to be used for marking equipment.
The choice of electrical equipment (including pipes) based on external influences
is covered in guide UTE C 15-103.
Table 52D specifies the conditions of use of cables, and Table 52E those of
conductors under conduit systems or trunking.
- 156 -
-157
Coded
512.2.1
Class
designation
SAGA
Ambient temperature (AA)
Features
Table 51A – Characteristics of external influences
The ambient temperature to be considered

for the equipment is the temperature in
the location where this equipment is to be
installed, resulting from the influence
of all other equipment placed in the same
location and in operation,
without taking into account the thermal
Application and examples Material characteristics and
implementation
For the installation of cables, refer to table
52D.
See definition of ambient temperature in 216.1. For ambient temperatures different
The average value for a 24-hour period must

not exceed the upper limit minus 5°C.
from 20°C in buried installation mode and
30°C in exposed installation mode, tables
52K and 52L are applicable.
References
contribution of the equipment considered. For certain environments, it may be

necessary to combine two ranges from
those defined below (for example between -
Ambient temperature classes are only 25°C and + 40°C, i.e. AA3 + AA5). Facilities
applicable when humidity has no subject to temperatures different from
influence. these ranges must be subject to
special rules.
Lower and upper limits of ambient
temperature ranges:
-
AA1 Refrigerated – 60°C + 5°C Class AA1 corresponds to special In addition, if the temperature is Includes the temperature
conditions, such as refrigerated freezing below -25°C, special precautions should range of class 3K8 of NF C
chambers. be taken - for example insulation, rigid fixing, 20-003-3, the upper air
mechanical protection. temperature being limited to +5°C.
Part of the temperature range of
5-51
class 4K4 of NF C 20-003-4, the
lower air temperature being limited
Part
to – 60 °C and the upper air
temperature to + 5 °C.
-158
Coded
512.2.1
AA2
Designation
classes
SAGA Features
Ambient temperature (AA) (continued)
Very cold – 40°C + 5°C

Application and examples
Class AA2 corresponds to

special conditions, such as pregnant
refrigerated freezers.
Material characteristics
and implementation
For the installation of the cables,
refer to table 52D.
Specially designed material or
appropriate arrangements.*
Furthermore, if the temperature is

below -25°C, precautions
special ones are to be taken - for example
insulation, rigid fixing, protection
mechanical.
References
Part of the beach

class 3K7 temperature
NF C 20-003-3, the temperature
upper air being limited to
+ 5°C. Includes part of the
temperature range of the
class 4K3 of NF C 20-003-4,
the upper air temperature
being limited to +5°C.
AA3 Cold – 25°C + 5°C Specially designed material or Part of the beach
appropriate arrangements.* 3K6 class temperature
NF C 20-003-3, the temperature
When the temperature is lower than upper air being limited to
- 10 °C, pipes comprising + 5°C. Includes the range of
an insulating envelope or sheath class 4K1 temperature
polyvinyl chloride (V) cannot NF C 20-003-4, the temperature
be neither handled nor subjected to upper air being limited to
-
mechanical forces. + 5°C.
AA4 Temperate – 5°C + 40°C In general, facilities located Normal Part of the beach
the interior of the buildings correspond class 3K5 temperature
to class AA4 (ambient temperature NF C 20-003-3, the temperature
5-51
between -5°C and +40°C). upper air being limited to
+ 40°C.
Part
AA5 Hot + 5°C + 40°C Normal Same as the range
3K6 class temperature
NF C 20-003-3.
*
may require some additional precautions (e.g. special lubrication).
-159
Code Description
512.2.1
AA6
classes
Hot
SAGA
Features
Ambient temperature (AA) (continued)

Very + 5°C + 60°C
Application and examples Material characteristics
and implementation
Specially designed material or

appropriate arrangements.*
References
Part of the beach

NF C 20-003-3, the
lower air temperature
being limited to + 5 °C and the
air temperature above
+ 60°C. Includes the range of
NF C 20-003-4, the beach
lower being limited to + 5 °C.
AA7 Outside – 25°C + 55°C Specially designed material or Same as the range
sheltered appropriate arrangements.* 3K6 class temperature
NF C 20-003-3.
When the temperature is lower than
- 10 °C, pipes comprising
an insulating envelope or sheath
polyvinyl chloride (V) cannot
-
be neither handled nor subjected to

mechanical forces.
AA8 Outside – 50°C + 40°C Specially designed material or Same as the range
No appropriate arrangements.* class 4K3 temperature
protected NF C 20-003-4.
Furthermore, if the temperature is
5-51
below -25°C, precautions
special ones are to be taken - for example
Part
insulation, rigid fixing, protection
mechanical.
*
may require some additional precautions (e.g. special lubrication).
-160
Code Description
512.2.2
classes
AB1 Refrigeration – 60
SAGA
Air temperature
a) limit
lower
(°C)
b) limit
superior
+5
Features
Climatic conditions (combined influences of temperature and humidity) (AB)

Relative humidity
a) limit
lower
3
(%)
b) limit
superior
100
Absolute humidity
a) limit
lower
0.003
(g/m3)
b) limit
superior
7
Indoor locations and

exteriors with
ambient temperatures
extremely cold.
Characteristics of
materials and implementation
Special provisions
must be taken.
References
Includes the range of

classroom temperature
3K8 of NF C 20-003-3, the
higher temperature of
the air being limited to +5°C.
Part of the beach
4K4 of NF C 20-003-4, the
lower temperature of
the air being limited to – 60 °C
and the temperature
air above + 5 °C.
AB2 Very cold – 40 +5 10 100 0.1 7 Indoor locations and Special provisions Part of the beach
-
exteriors with must be taken. classroom temperature

ambient temperatures 3K7 of NF C 20-003-3, the
cold. higher temperature of
Includes part of the
temperature range of the
class 4K3 of NF 20-
003-4, temperature
upper air being
5-51
limited to
+ 5°C.
Part
AB3 Cold –5 +5 10 100 0.5 7 Indoor locations and Special provisions Part of the beach
exteriors with must be taken. classroom temperature
cold. higher temperature of
Includes the range of
4K1 of NF C 20-003-4, the
higher temperature of
AB4 Temperate –5 +40 5 95 1 29 Sheltered pitches without Normal. Same as the range
temperature control and classroom temperature
humidity. A heater 3K5 of NF C 20-003-3.
can be used for The upper temperature
increase the temperature air being limited to
ambient. + 40°C.
-161
Code Description
512.2.2
AB5
classes
Hot
lower
+5
SAGA
Air temperature
a) limit
(°C)
b) limit
superior
+40
Features
Climatic conditions (combined influences of temperature and humidity) (AB) (continued)

Relative humidity
lower
5
(%)
a) limit b) limit
superior
85
Absolute humidity
(g/m3)
a) limit
lower
1
b) limit
superior
25
Sheltered locations including

temperature is controlled.
Characteristics of
materials and implementation
Normal.
References
Same as the range

of NF C 20-003-3.
AB6 Very +5 + 60 10 100 1 35 Indoor locations and Special provisions Part of the beach
hot exteriors with must be taken. classroom temperature
extremely hot. lower temperature of
The influence of temperatures the air being limited to + 5°C and
cold ambient is the upper temperature of
prevented. THE air at +60°C. Includes the
solar radiation temperature range of the
class 4K4 of NF C 20-
-
can occur.
003-4, the lower range of
temperature being limited to
+5 C.
AB7 Outside – 25 +55 10 100 0.5 29 Indoor locations and Special provisions Same as the range
sheltered sheltered without control of the must be taken. class 3K6 temperature
5-51
temperature and humidity; of NF C 20-003-3.
they can have
Part
openings to the outside and
be subject to
solar radiation.
AB8 Outside – 50 +40 15 100 0.04 36 Outdoor locations and Special provisions Same as the range
No unprotected, with must be taken. class 4K3 temperature
protected cold temperatures and of NF C 20-003-4.
hot.
NOTES -
1 - All specified values are limit or maximum values which have a low probability of being exceeded.
2 - The relative humidities, lower and higher, are limited by the absolute humidities, lower and higher, so that, for example, the limit values indicated do not
not present simultaneously.
-162
Code Description
512.2.3
AC1
AC2
classes
low
high
Altitude (AC)
ÿ 2000m
SAGA
> 2,000 m
Features Application and examples Material characteristics
Normal.
and implementation
May require precautions

special applications such as application of
downgrading factors.
For certain categories of equipment,

References
special measures can be

necessary from 1,000 m
altitude.
-
5-51
Part
-163
Code Designation of
512.2.4
classes
Presence of water (AD)
SAGA
Features Application and examples Material characteristics and
implementation
The different degrees of protection correspond to tests
whose methods are defined by standard NF C 20-010.
Prefabricated pipelines and trunking or conduit systems are

characterized by their IP degree.
Wooden moldings, plinths and casings authorized

only for renovation in historic monuments can only
be used
under AD1 conditions.
For the installation of cables, refer to table 52D.
References
AD1 Negligible The probability of the Environments in which the walls generally do not IPX0 NF C 20-003-4
presence of water is show traces of humidity, but which may show some for class 4Z6
negligible. short periods, for example in the form of fogging, and
which dry quickly thanks to good ventilation.
AD2 Falling Possibility of vertical Environments in which moisture occasionally condenses into IPX1 or IPX2 NF C 20-003-3
water falls of water drops. water droplets or is occasionally filled with water vapor. class 3Z7
Equipment for domestic and similar installations, which
-
drops
complies with the relevant standards, can be used in domestic
installations under AD2 conditions.
AD3 Sprinkling Possibility of water Environments in which water runs down walls or floors. IPX3 NF C 20-003-3
water falling “as rain” in a direction class 3Z8
forming with the vertical NF C 20-003-4
5-51
an angle at most class 4Z7
equal to 60°.
Part
AD4 Water Possibility of Environments exposed to splashing water; this is the case IPX4 NF C 20-003-3
splashes water projection in all for certain lighting fixtures and construction site cabinets class 3Z9
directions installed outside. NF C 20-003-4
class 4Z7
AD5 Water jets Possibility of water Environments commonly washed with jets (yards, vehicle IPX5 NF C 20-003-3
jets in all directions wash areas). class 3Z10
NF C 20-003-4
class 4Z8
-164
Code Description
512.2.4
AD6
AD7
AD8
classes
Packages
water
Immersion
Submersion
SAGA
Features
Presence of water (AD) (continued)

Possibility of waves
of water.
Possibility of intermittent
recovery,
partial or total, of water.
Possibility of water
Environments located by the sea, such as

piers, beaches, docks, etc.
Environments likely to be flooded and where
water may rise less than 150 mm above the
highest point of the material, the lower part of the
material being at most 1 m below the surface
some water.
Environments in water basins (such as

IPX6
IPX7
and implementation
RVFV, FR-N1, XDV, H07BB, BN and RN-F cables

can be used. However, their immersion duration
cumulative must not be more than two months per
year.
IPX8
References
NF C 20-003-4
class 4Z9
recovery swimming pools) where electrical equipment is completely Cables RGPFV, H07RN8-F or having a
permanent and total. permanently covered with water under a equivalent waterproofness to be able to be submerged
pressure greater than 0.1 bar (1 meter of water). can be used.
-
5-51
Part
-165
Code Designation of
512.2.5
AE1
classes
SAGA
Features
Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE)
Negligible The quantity of dust or foreign bodies is not

appreciable.
Class AE1 is found in domestic

installations or those in which small objects
Material characteristics and
implementation
The different degrees of protection
corresponding to tests whose methods
are defined in standard NF C 20-010.
Prefabricated pipelines and trunking or

conduit systems are characterized by their
IP degree.
52D.
IP2X or IPXXB
Under AE1 conditions, in principle no
References
NF C 20-003-3
class 3S1
are not handled. protection against the penetration of solid NF C 20-003-4
bodies is necessary and the degree of class 4S1
protection IP0X is sufficient, but from the
point of view of protection against direct
contact, at least one degree of protection
equal to IP2X or IPXXB is imposed (see
appendix A of part 4-41), except in
conditions BA4 and BA5.
-
AE2 Small objects Presence of solid bodies whose smallest Class AE2 corresponds to industrial IP3X NF C 20-003-3
dimension is at least equal to 2.5 mm. applications: Tools and small class 3S2
objects are examples of solid bodies NF C 20-003-4
whose smallest dimension is at least equal class 4S2
to 2.5 mm. Under the conditions, there
may be
5-51
dust, but this is such that it has no influence
Part
on electrical equipment.
AE3 Very small Presence of solid bodies whose smallest Class AE3 corresponds to industrial IP4X NF C 20-003-3
objects dimension is at least 1 mm. applications: wires are class 3S3
examples of solid bodies whose smallest NF C 20-003-4
dimension is at least equal to 1 mm. class 4S3
Under the conditions, there may be dust, but

it is such that it has no influence on electrical
equipment.
AE4 Dust Presence of dust Dust deposits are IP5X if dust can penetrate without hindering NF C 20-003-3
significant enough to have an the operation of the equipment. class 3S2
influence on the operation of certain electrical NF C 20-003-4
equipment. class 4S2
IP6X if dust must not penetrate the NF C 20-003-3

equipment. class 3S3 and 4S3
NF C 20-003-4
class 4S3 and 4S4
-166
Coded
512.2.6
AF1
AF2
Class designation
Atmospheric
SAGA
no influence.
Features
Presence of corrosive or polluting substances (AF)
Negligible The quantity or nature of corrosive or polluting agents has
Appreciable presence of corrosive agents

or pollutants of atmospheric origin.
Applications and examples
Installations located near seaside or near industrial

establishments producing significant
Material characteristics and implementation
Normal.
Depending on the nature of the agents (for example compliance with

the salt spray test according to NF C 20-702: Ka test).
References
NF C 20-003-3
class 3C1
NF C 20-003-4
class 4C1
NF C 20-003-3
class 3C2
atmospheric pollution, such as chemical industries, NF C 20-003-4
cement factories; This pollution class 4C2
comes in particular from the production of In particular, the following may be used: -
abrasive, insulating or conductive dust. cables comprising an external sheath of polyvinyl chloride (V) or
polychloroprene (N); the CSA, IRL, ICA, ICTA and ICTL conduits;
cable trays, shelves, cable
- ladders and PVC trunking.
-
-
AF3 Intermittent Intermittent or accidental actions of Premises where certain chemical products Protection against corrosion defined by material specifications. NF C 20-003-3
Or some commonly used corrosive chemicals or are handled in small quantities and class 3C3
accidental pollutants may occur. where these products can only accidentally NF C 20-003-4
come into contact with electrical equipment; such Casings made from unprotected ferrous materials or natural rubber are not class 4C3
conditions are encountered in factory or other suitable.
laboratories or in premises where one
Plastic envelopes are generally suitable.
handles hydrocarbons.
Part
In particular, the following may be used: -
cables comprising an external sheath of polyvinyl chloride (V) or
-51
polychloroprene (N); the CSA, IRL, ICA, ICTA and ICTL conduits;
cable trays, shelves, cable
- ladders and PVC trunking.
-
AF4 Permanent Permanent action of corrosive or polluting chemicals in Chemical industry. Materials specially designed according to the nature of the agents. NF C 20-003-3
class 3C4
5
significant quantities may occur. Certain agricultural establishments, for example pigsties
or dairies. NF C 20-003-4
Swimming pool technical rooms. It is necessary to specify the nature of the chemical agent to allow the class 4C4
manufacturer to define the type of protection for its equipment.
Protection can be provided by special paints, appropriate coatings or

surface treatments or the choice of material.
Coded
512.2.7
512.2.7.1
AG1
Class
designation
Weak
SAGA
Features
Mechanical constraints
Shocks (AG)
Environments that can be subjected to

shocks with an energy of not more than
Applications and examples
Domestic and similar installations. IK02

implementation
The different degrees of protection correspond to tests whose
methods are defined by standard NF C 20-015, the resistance
to mechanical impacts in this standard corresponding to the
term shock
in the installation.
Bare lamps may be admitted.

References
NF C 20-003-3,
classes
3M1/3M2/3M3
0.2 J.
-167
NF C 20-003-4,
classes
4M1/4M2/4M3
AG2 Means Environments that can be subjected to Usual or similar industrial installations. IK07 NF C 20-003-3,
shocks with an energy of not more than classes
2 J. 3M4/3M5/3M6
NF C 20-003-4,
classes
-
4M4/4M5/4M6
AG3 Important Environments that can be subjected to Severe industrial installations or similar. IK08 NF C 20-003-3,
shocks of energy equal to or less than classes
5 days. 3M7/3M8
NF C 20-003-4,
5-51
classes
4M7/4M8
Part
AG4 Very Environments that can be subjected to Very severe industrial installations or IK10
important shocks with an energy of not more than similar.
20 J.
Code Designation of
512.2.7.2
AH1 Weak
classes
AH2 Averages
Vibration (AH)
SAGA Features
Vibrations are taken into account

regardless of their duration.
The effects of vibration can be neglected
in most cases.
Vibrations with frequencies between 10

Domestic and similar installations.
Usual industrial installations.

52D.
implementation
Domestic and similar equipment.
Industrial equipment.
References
NF C 20-003-3, classes
3M1/3M2/3M3
4M1/4M2/4M3
Particular attention must be paid to 3M4/3M5/3M6
-168
and 50 Hz and amplitude at most equal

to 0.15 mm. connections to equipment subject to or NF C 20-003-4, classes
generating vibrations. 4M4/4M5/4M6
Local measures can be adopted, such
as flexible cables.
AH3 Important Vibrations with frequencies between 10 Industrial installations subject to severe conditions. Specially designed materials or special NF C 20-003-3, classes
and 150 Hz and amplitude at most equal arrangements. 3M7/3M8
to 0.35 mm. Particular attention must be paid to NF C 20-003-4, classes
connections to equipment subject to or 4M7/4M8
generating vibrations.
-
Local measures can be adopted, such

as flexible cables.
Only flexible cables or flexible conductors
installed in CSA flexible conduits may be
used.
512.2.7.3 Other mechanical conditions (AJ) (under study) For the installation of cables, refer to table
512.2.8 Presence of flora or mold (AK) 52D.
AK1 Negligible Absence of harmful risks due to flora or mold. Normal. NF C 20-003-3
5-51
class 3B1
NF C 20-003-4
Part
class 4B1
AK2 Risks Harmful risks due to flora or mold. The risks depend on local conditions and Special protection such as: - NF C 20-003-3
the nature of the flora. We can distinguish increased degree of protection (see AE); - class 3B2
whether the risk is due to the harmful NF C 20-003-4
development of vegetation or its special materials or coatings protecting the class 4B2
abundance. envelopes; - provisions to avoid
the presence of flora.
-169
Code Designation of
512.2.9
AL1
classes
AL2 Risks
Presence of wildlife (AL)
wildlife.
SAGA
Features
Negligible Absence of harmful risks due to
Harmful risks due to wildlife (insects,

birds, small animals).
The risks depend on the nature of the

fauna: –
dangers due to insects in harmful
implementation
52D.
Normal.
Protection may include: - a degree

of protection against the penetration
of solid bodies (see AE); - sufficient
class 3B1
References
NF C 20-003-3
NF C 20-003-4
class 4B1
NF C 20-003-3
class 3B2
NF C 20-003-4
quantities or of an aggressive class 4B2
nature, – mechanical strength (see AG); - precautions
the presence of small animals or birds in to avoid
harmful quantities or of an aggressive the presence of this fauna (cleaning,
nature use of pesticides).
If there is a risk due to the presence of

rodents, cables with a metal coating
with a waterproof sheath or waterproof
-
metal conduit systems can be used.

Otherwise, appropriate protection should
be provided.
5-51
Part
-170
Code Designation of
512.2.10
classes
SAGA Features
Electromagnetic, electrostatic or ionizing (AM) influences
materials, see 444).
512.2.10.1 Low frequency electromagnetic phenomena (conducted or radiated)

512.2.10.1.1 Harmonics, interharmonics (AM-1) [see 330.1.1 d]
Application and examples Material characteristics and
implementation
References
Immunity to electromagnetic influences is defined either in the generic standards relating to immunity (NF EN 50082 series of standards) or in product standards. (For the implementation of
512.2.10.1.2 Transmission of signals for remote control, e.g. ripple control modules
512.2.10.1.3 Voltage amplitude variations
512.2.10.1.4 Unbalanced voltage

-
512.2.10.1.5 Variations in fundamental frequency
512.2.10.1.6 Low frequency induced voltages
512.2.10.1.7 DC component in alternative networks
5-51
Part
512.2.10.1.8 Radiated magnetic fields (LF)
512.2.10.1.9 LF electric fields

Coded Designation
classes
SAGA Features Application and examples
512.2.10.2 Conducted, induced or radiated high-frequency electromagnetic phenomena (continuous or transient)
512.2.10.2.1 Oscillatory induced voltages or currents
512.2.10.2.2 Conducted unidirectional transients on the nanosecond scale
512.2.10.2.3 Conducted unidirectional transients on the millisecond or microsecond scale

and implementation
References
512.2.10.2.4 Conducted oscillatory transients

-171
512.2.10.2.5 High frequency radiated phenomena IEC 61000-4-3
512.2.10.3 Electrostatic discharges IEC 61000-4-2
512.2.10.4 Ionization
-
5-51
Part
Coded
512.2.11
AN1/AN2 Low
AN3
Designation
classes
Significant
SAGA Features
Solar radiation (AN)

Normal.
and implementation
Appropriate arrangements must

be taken.
These provisions can be:

- ultraviolet resistant materials;
- special colored layer;
References
NF C 20-003-3
NF C 20-003-4
- interposition of screens.
-172
A correction factor equal to 0.85

can be taken for the calculation of
admissible currents.
It is often possible to subtract the

cables to the action of solar rays by
the interposition, for example, of awnings
judiciously inclined.
-
However, we will ensure that this

does not cause air confinement
around the cables.
5-51
Part
-173
Coded
512.2.12
Designation
classes
SAGA
Seismic effects (AP)
1 gal = 1 cm/s2
Features
The characteristic value (S) of the effects

seismic, expressed in gal, is obtained
by multiplying the seismic acceleration g
by a factor depending on the height
of the building above the ground and whose
value is:
- 2.0 up to the 3rd floor,
- 3.0 from 4th to 8th floor,
and implementation
References
NF P 06013
- 4.0 above the 8th floor.

Vibrations that can cause
destruction of the building does not
part of the classification.
Frequencies are not supported
consideration in classification;
However, if the seismic wave enters
resonance with the building, the effects
seismic factors must be considered. In
general, acceleration frequencies
-
seismic signals are between 0 Hz and

10Hz.
AP1 Negligible S ÿ 30 Gal Normal.
AP2 Weak 30 < S ÿ 300 Gal
5-51
AP3 Means 300 < S ÿ 600 Gal To the extent that the installation
concerned is subject to the rules
Part
earthquake protection (PS 1969), it is appropriate to
reinforce the fixing of materials
electrical:
- electrical panels (for example
fixing to civil engineering by
via rails embedded in the
concrete of the slab of the room in which
they are implanted);
- electrical pipes, in particular
cable trays (e.g.
use of double U hangers
or increase in the number of
supports and the diameter of their
fixings);
- other electrical equipment,
particularly lighting fixtures.
AP4 Forts S > 600 Gal
-174
Coded
512.2.13
Designation
classes
SAGA Features
Lightning, keraunic level (Nk), lightning density (Ng) (AQ)
The keraunic level Nk is the number of days per year when thunder is heard.
The lightning strike density Ng is equal to the number of lightning strikes to the ground per year and per km².
AQ1
AQ2 Indirect
Negligible Nk ÿ 25 days per year, Ng ÿ 2.5
Nk > 25 days per year, Ng > 2.5

Risks from the network
Line-powered installations
aerial.
See 443.
and implementation
References
UTE C 15-443
power supply. A risk analysis method is

given in the UTE C 15-443 guide.
AQ3 Direct Risks arising from exposure to Parts of installations outside located at If lightning protection is NF C 17-100
materials. buildings. necessary, it must be carried out according to NF C 17-102
Cases AQ2 and AQ3 meet the standards in force.
in regions particularly
exposed to the effects of lightning. A risk analysis method is
given in standards NF C 17-100 and
-
NF C 17-102.
512.2.14 Air movements (AR)

Normal.
AR1 Weak Speed ÿ 1 m/s
5-51
AR2 Means 1 m/s < speed ÿ 5 m/s Appropriate arrangements must
be taken.
Part
AR3 Forts 5 m/s < speed ÿ 10 m/s Appropriate arrangements must
be taken.
Coded
512.2.15
AS1
AS2
AS3
Designation
classes
Weak
AVERAGE
Strong
Wind (AS)
SAGA Features
10 m/s < speed ÿ 20 m/s.
20 m/s < speed ÿ 30 m/s.
30 m/s < speed ÿ 50 m/s

Normal
and implementation

be taken.

be taken.
References
Protection against the effects of wind

-175
is obtained by appropriate fixation

material according to effort
exerted by the wind on the equipment. These
conditions mainly concern
overhead lines (see 529.7).
-
5-51
Part
-176
Use
Code Designation of
512.2.16
BA1
classes
Ordinary
BA2 Children
SAGA
Features
People Competence (BA)
Unwary people.
Children in premises intended for them.
This class does not apply to residential

premises.
Nurseries, nursery schools, kindergartens.

Normal.
implementation
Equipment with degree of protection IP3X or

IPXXC.
Inaccessibility of equipment whose accessible
surface temperatures are greater than 60°C.
References
Socket bases, switches and other equipment

installed in rooms accessible to children are
located at least 1.20 m above the finished
floor.
BA3 Disabled People who do not have all their physical capabilities or Hospices, asylums, specialized centers. Depending on the nature of the infirmity.
Inaccessibility of equipment whose accessible

-
intellectuals.
surface temperatures are greater than 60°C.
The height of the operating devices is limited

to 1.30 m.
It is recommended to install electrical buttons
and switches at a maximum height of 1.30 m
5-51
and socket outlets at a height between 0.40 m
and 1.30 m.
Part
BA4 Warnings (*) People sufficiently informed or supervised Closed electrical service premises. Materials not protected against direct See Appendix C of Part 4-41.
by qualified people to enable them contact are only admitted to premises
to avoid the dangers that electricity may accessible to authorized persons.
represent (maintenance or operating Publication UTE C 18-510.
agents).
BA5 Qualified (*) People with technical knowledge or sufficient Closed electrical service premises. Materials not protected against direct Publication UTE C 18-510.
experience to enable them to avoid the contact are only admitted to premises
dangers that electricity can represent accessible to people.
(engineers and technicians). authorized.
(*) In France, only people authorized within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to work under BA4 and BA5 conditions.
-177
Code Description
512.2.17
classes
BB1 Normal
SAGA Features
Electrical resistance of the human body (BB)
Dry or wet conditions.

Circumstances in which the skin

is dry or wet, the soil has
significant resistance,
people wearing shoes
found in premises (or
locations) dry or damp.
and implementation
For the implementation of the
pipes, refer to the tables
52D and 52E.
Normal.
References
BB2 Low Wet conditions. Circumstances in which the skin Class II pipelines or cables 412.2.
is wet, the floor has a with metal coating placed at the
low resistance, and people earth.
found in premises (or
locations) wet and it is not The conventional limit voltage is
taking into account the wearing of shoes. socket equal to 50 V in alternating current.
BB3 Very weak Submerged conditions. Circumstances in which Section 701. 412.2.
people are immersed in water Article 702.
-
(zero skin resistance, resistance

walls of the room or location
nothing).
Class II pipelines.
Premises containing a bathtub or
shower, swimming pools.
5-51
Part
Code Designation of
512.2.18
classes
BC1 Draws
SAGA
Features
Contact of people with the potential of the earth (BC)
People in non-conductive locations.

Locations practically non-existent and not

considered in practice.
Characteristics of equipment and
implementation The
classes of equipment, defined in standard NF
C 20-030 concerning protection against
electric shock, are recalled in 237.
For the implementation of the

pipes, refer to tables 52D and 52E.
References
BC2 Low People not found in the Rare locations.

usual conditions in contact with conductive
-178
elements or not standing on conductive

surfaces.
BC3 Common People who frequently find themselves in Current premises.

contact with conductive elements or standing on
conductive surfaces.
BC4 Continuous People who find themselves in Part 7-706.

-
Metal enclosures such as boilers,

permanent contact with metal or conductive tanks.
walls and for whom the possibilities of
interrupting contact are limited. Locations where freedom of .
5-51
movement is restricted, e.g. crawl spaces,
pits.
Part
Update Code Designation of classes
SAGA Features Application and examples Material characteristics and implementation References
512.2.19 Emergency evacuation conditions (BD)

BD1 Normal Low occupancy density, easy evacuation conditions. The BD1 conditions do not require either a particular design of the installation, nor a specific choice of materials.
-179
2005
BD2 Difficult Conditions BD2, BD3 and BD4 which require a choice of specific materials and a particular design and implementation
June
Low occupancy density, difficult evacuation conditions.
of the installations are mainly encountered in Establishments Receiving the Public (ERP) and High-Rise Buildings
(IGH) (*).
BD3 Cluttered High occupancy density, C 12-201
easy evacuation conditions. C 12-061
The security regulations for ERPs and those for IGHs, drawn up by the Ministry of the Interior, contain the provisions
BD4 Difficult and crowded High occupancy density, difficult evacuation to be respected.
conditions.
Certain residential buildings covered by the decree of January 31, 1986 of the Ministry responsible for construction
-
may also be affected.
(*) According to article R.122.2 of the Construction and Housing Code, constitutes a high-rise building, any body of
building whose bottom floor of the last level is located, in relation to the highest ground level height usable for
public emergency and fire-fighting service machines: - more than 50 meters for residential buildings; - more than
28 meters for other buildings.
5-51
Part
Update Code Designation of
SAGA Features Application and examples Material characteristics and References
classes implementation
512.2.20 Nature of materials processed or stored (BE)
BE1 Negligible Normal.
risks
-180
2005
BE2 Fire risks Presence of flammable materials, including Barns, carpentries, paper factories. For the choice of materials, see 422.1.
June
dust.
Certain regulatory texts indicate,

in a non-exhaustive manner, premises or
locations at risk of fire, premises or
locations not always corresponding to the
definition of influence class BE2.
This is the case with the safety regulations

-
in establishments receiving
public, emanating from the Ministry
of the Interior, and the regulations of the
Ministry of Labor relating to fire
prevention.
BE3 Risks of Presence of explosive or low flash point Examples are refineries, hydrocarbon Directive 1999/92/EC of 16/12/99 defines See 424
explosion materials, including explosive dust. storages, silos and industries. the zones and categories of equipment to
be used according to these zones. Decree
96.1010 of 11/19/96 defines the
Locations subject to BE3 conditions specifications that the different
are classified into zones according to the categories must meet.
5-51
frequency and duration of the presence of
an explosive atmosphere.
Part
It is up to the operator of the establishment to
define these zones.
Code Designation of
512.2.20
classes
BE4 Risks of
contamination
SAGA Features
Nature of materials processed or stored (BE) (Continued)
Presence of food, pharmaceutical

products and the like without protection.
Food industries, kitchens.

implementation
Certain precautions may be necessary

to prevent the treated products from being
contaminated by this electrical equipment in
the event of deterioration of
electrical equipment, for example
broken lamps.
References
Appropriate provisions such as: -

-181
protection preventing broken lamps or

other fragile objects from falling; -
shields
against radiation
harmful such as infrared or ultraviolet rays
The risk due to breakage must only be taken

into account from conditions AG2.
-
5-51
Part
-182
Code Description
512.2.21
CA1 No
classes
fuels
Building materials (CA)
SAGA Features Application and examples
C Construction of buildings
CA Building Materials
and implementation
For the implementation of

52D and 52E.
Normal.
References
CA2 Fuels Buildings constructed primarily of combustible Wooden buildings. Protection is ensured under the
materials. conditions indicated in 422.4.
Only cables classified C1 or C2 are
implemented.
Only conduits, chutes,

non-propagating cable trays
the flame are implemented.
-
5-51
Part
Update Code Designation of
SAGA Features Application and examples Material characteristics and References
classes implementation
512.2.22 Building structures (CB) For the implementation of the
-183
52D and 52E.
CB1 Negligible Normal.
2005
risks
June
CB2 Spread Buildings whose shape and High-rise buildings, forced ventilation systems. Equipment made of materials delaying C 12-201.
fire dimensions facilitate the spread of fire the spread of a fire of non-electrical origin, C 12-061.
(for example, chimney effect). fire barriers. 527.2
Refer to regulatory texts relating to fire

safety.
-
Under CB2 conditions, protection is

provided as indicated in 422.4.
CB3 Movements Risks due to structural movements (for example, Buildings of great length or built on Expansion or expansion joints must be
movements between different parts of a unstabilized land. provided in places in the building where
building or the building and the ground, deformations are possible.
settlement of land and building foundations).
CB4 Flexible or unstable Fragile constructions or those that may be Marquees, inflatable structures. Use is made of flexible cables or flexible
subject to movements (such as oscillations). conductors laid in flexible conduits (CSA).
5-51
Part
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

H 513 Accessibility of electrical equipment
513.1 General provisions

Equipment, including pipes, must be arranged in such a way as to facilitate their operation, inspection,
maintenance and access to their connections. These possibilities must not be significantly reduced by mounting
devices in enclosures or compartments.
513.2 Checking and replacing conductors and cables Electrical

conductors and cables must be arranged so that their insulation can be checked at all times and faults located.
The pipes must be constructed in such a way that damaged conductors can be replaced.
This last condition is not required for embedded mineral insulated armored cables or for buried pipelines.
Cables must not be directly embedded in walls.
H 514 Identification and tracking
514.1 General
Indicator plates or other appropriate means of identification must make it possible to recognize the assignment
of the equipment, unless any possibility of confusion is eliminated.
If the operation of equipment cannot be observed by the operator and this could result in danger, a signaling
device conforming to the extent applicable to NF EN 60073: Coding principles for indicator devices and control
elements and NF EN 60447: Principles of operation, must be placed so as to be seen by the operator.
This is usually achieved by construction or installation.
H
514.2 Identification and marking of pipes Electrical pipes
must be established or marked so as to allow their identification during checks, tests, repairs or transformations
of the installation.
In particular, the route of buried pipes must be noted on a plan which allows their location to be known without
having to resort to an excavation.
Most often the different electrical conduits of an installation are sufficiently differentiated from each other to allow
their identification, either by their nature, or by their dimensions, or finally by their layout. When identification is
difficult, it is necessary to draw up a plan of the installation and place labels indicating the destination of the
circuits from distance to distance. When different installations coexist in the same premises or when it is
necessary to identify the phases or respective polarities of the conductors, appropriate marks and markers should
be used.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
514.3 Marking of insulated conductors The

provisions set out below in a, b, c apply to pipelines made of insulated conductors and to multi-conductor cables,
with circular or sectoral cores:
a) When the circuit includes a protective conductor, this conductor must be identified by the
double green-and-yellow coloring.
When the circuit does not include a protective conductor:
- in the case of multi-conductor cables, cables containing a

conductor identified by the double green-and-yellow coloring.
However, in the case where we only have cables comprising a conductor identified by the double green-and-
yellow coloring for the chosen section, it is permitted to use such a cable provided that we do not use the
conductor identified by the double green-and-yellow coloring:
- in the case of insulated conductors, no conductor identified by the

double green-and-yellow coloring.
b) When the circuit includes a neutral conductor, this conductor must be marked by the color light blue (or for
cables with more than 5 conductors, by the number 1).
When the circuit does not include a neutral conductor: - in the

case of multi-conductor cables, the conductor marked by the light blue color can be
used for any other purpose except as a protective conductor.
- in the case of insulated conductors, no conductor identified by the
light blue color.
c) Conductors marked by colors other than the double green-and-yellow coloring and the light blue color, or by
other means (such as numbers), may be used for all purposes except as a protective conductor or as a
conductor neutral (except for cables with more than 5 conductors) (see b) above).
When the pipeline is made up of insulated conductors, in circuits other than those used exclusively for
telecommunications or measurements, conductors marked with yellow or green colors must not be used.
d) If single-conductor cables are used, the continuous coloring of the

insulation is not necessary.
However, in this case, the ends of the conductors must be permanently marked during installation: - by the
double green-and-
yellow coloring for the protective conductor, - by the light blue color for the neutral
conductor.
However, this marking is not necessary for neutral conductors with a section smaller than that of the corresponding
phase conductors.
These provisions also apply to naked drivers.
e) When non-standardized conductors and cables are used, marking must be carried out by any appropriate
means (such as rings or other colored devices) at any location where the casing of the conductors is visible
and, in any case , near each connection.
The colors used must conform to those defined in paragraphs a, b and c above.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
514.3.1 These requirements essentially concern the choice of means used to identify the protective conductor
and the neutral conductor. These means are: - for the protective conductor,
the double green-and-yellow coloring (appendix B). - for the neutral conductor, the color light
blue (or, for cables with more than 5 conductors, the
figure 1).
The colors chosen have been chosen in such a way that they cannot cause confusion with colors used in certain
countries for different uses.
In the TN diagram: -
the neutral conductor also used as a protective conductor (PEN) must be identified as the protective conductor,
that is to say by the double green-and-yellow coloring. if the neutral conductor and the protective
- conductor are distinct, the neutral conductor is identified by the light blue color and the protective conductor
is identified by the double green-and-yellow coloring.
The different conductors constituting the cables must be used, according to the functions of the circuit conductors,
in accordance with the rules of paragraph 514.3, taking into account the following exception: When the cable is
not
available on the market, for the section considered, and when the circuit includes a protective conductor, it is
permitted to use as protective conductor: - the light blue conductor, if the circuit does not include a neutral
conductor, - a black conductor, if the circuit includes a neutral conductor,
by identifying this conductor by green/ yellow colored rings or markers placed at the ends and along all visible
lengths of the conductor.
In addition, if the same cable has two neutral conductors (for example two single-phase circuits using the same
cable), it is allowed to identify a black conductor by light blue rings or markers.
In the case of three-phase circuits, the use of phase conductor colors should preferably be: - phase 1 (L1):
Brown color;
- phase 2 (L2): Black color; - phase
3 (L3): Gray color.
514.3.2 Exclusivity of marking means The rule of

exclusivity of marking means implies that conductors including one of the defined markings are used exclusively
for the function for which this marking means was intended.
This exclusivity rule must be considered differently depending on whether it applies to the protective conductor
or the neutral conductor.
a) For the protective conductor, due to the safety function provided by this conductor, the means of identifying
this conductor must be exclusive. As a result, the conductor bearing the double green-and-yellow coloring
must be used exclusively as a protective conductor (appendix B).
b) For the neutral conductor its marking is only indicative and the use of the conductor bearing the marking of
the neutral conductor for a phase conductor does not present a serious disadvantage, due to the fact that
these conductors are all active and that the same protective measures against direct contact apply to these
conductors.
It follows that a light blue conductor in a circuit does not imply that it is a neutral conductor, it can be a phase
conductor, the corresponding circuit not having a conductor neutral.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
c) Errors are always possible, the identification of the conductors should only be considered as a presumption
and it is always necessary to check the polarity of the conductors before any intervention.
514.3.3 In the particular case of an installation served by a single-phase connection between phases with two
conductors at a rated voltage at most equal to 250 volts, and supplied directly by a public distribution network,
one of the two conductors of the The installation is identified by the distinctive marking of the neutral conductor.
The conductor thus identified is assimilated to the neutral conductor, particularly with regard to the arrangement
of the protection and control equipment.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
H 514.4 Overcurrent protective devices
The protection devices must be arranged and marked so that it is easy to identify the protected circuits for this purpose; it may be
convenient to group them into tables.
514.5 Schemes
514.5.1 For any electrical installation, drawings, diagrams or tables (2) must be drawn up that comply with standards indicating in
particular:
-
the nature and constitution of the circuits (points of use served, number and section of conductors, nature of the pipes); the
characteristics necessary for the identification of the
-
devices ensuring the protection, isolation and control functions and their location.
The information that must be included in the accompanying diagrams and documents is as follows:
- type and section of the conductors, - length of

the circuit, - nature and type
of the protection devices, - rated current or setting of the
protection devices, - presumed short-circuit currents and breaking powers of the
devices.
These indications must be mentioned for each circuit of the installation.
It is recommended to update them when making any modification to the installation.
Plans must indicate, where applicable, the location of non-visible devices.

(3).
H 514.5.2 The symbols used must be chosen from those of the standards
515 Hardware independence

515.1 Equipment must be chosen and arranged in such a way as to prevent any harmful influence between electrical installations and
non-electrical installations.
Equipment without a rear face must not be installed on the wall of a building unless the following requirements are met: - any
propagation of potential on the wall of the building is prevented; - a fire separation
is provided between the equipment and the combustible wall of the building.
If the wall of the building is not metallic and is non-combustible, no additional provisions are prescribed. Otherwise, these requirements
may be satisfied by one of the following provisions:
- If the mounting surface is metallic, it must be connected to a protective conductor (PE). if the mounting surface is combustible,
- the material must be separated from it by an intermediate layer of insulating material with a flammability category of at least M2
(see the appendix to part 4-42).
515.2 When equipment carrying currents of different types or voltages is grouped in the same assembly (panel, cabinet, control
console, control box, etc.), all equipment belonging to the same type of current or voltage shall be effectively separated from other
materials to the extent necessary to avoid harmful mutual influence.
515.3 Electromagnetic compatibility (Under study).
(2) NF C 03-151 to NF C 03-158

(3) NF C 03-201 - NF EN 60617-13 (C 03-213)
- 187 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
Annex A – (normative) – Identification of protective conductors and

earthing in fixed installations
1. - The double green-and-yellow coloring is intended for identifying a protective conductor

providing a safety function.
By definition (241.1 of NF C 15-100) a protective conductor is a conductor used in
certain protective measures against indirect contact and connecting masses:
- or to other masses;
- either to conductive elements;
- either to earth connections, to a conductor connected to earth or to an active part connected to earth.
Protective conductors meeting this definition must be identified by the double

green-and-yellow coloring.
2. - The double green-and-yellow coloring has been defined to identify a safety function.
Conductors ensuring exclusively earthing for functional reasons or
to avoid disturbances do not have a safety function.
It is therefore appropriate to prohibit the double green-and-yellow coloring for such conductors, in particular
in order to avoid the temptation to subsequently connect a mass to such a conductor for
safety reasons: such a connection could only be the cause of dangerous situations and
disturbances for the equipment connected to this conductor.
Table 51B - Practical application
In practice, it is necessary to distinguish the following different cases:
Protective conductor Spotting Marking

of the
terminals
A. Providing a security function
- connecting a mass to an earth connection as part of the

protection measure against indirect contact by cutting Green-and-yellow E
automatic power supply (413.1).............................................
- connecting two masses together:
• at the secondary level of an isolation transformer (4-41 C3)... Green-and-yellow E
- ensuring an equipotential connection:
• general main (413.1.2 and UTE C 15-106, 2.1.1) ............. Green-and-yellow • local main E
(UTE C 15-106, 2.1.2) .................................. Green-and-yellow • additional E
(413.2)...... .................................................. ... Green-and-yellow • local not connected to E
earth (4-41 C2) ............................. ......... Green-and-yellow B. Not providing a safety E
function
- connecting a conductive part of a material to earth.
• for functional reasons ............................................. • for reasons of (*) YOU
disruption ........................................... . (*) YOU

(*) The double green-and-yellow coloring should not be used. No color is imposed, but the terminals
corresponding symbols must bear the corresponding symbols defined by standard NF C 04-445 and recalled in the
painting. Alternatively, the terminals may bear the symbol
- 188 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
VS
Annex B – (informative) – Abbreviated list of external influences
HAS AA Temperature (°C) AG Impact AP Seismic

AA1 –60 +5 AG1 Weak AP1 Negligible
AA2 –40 +5 AG2 Means AP2 Weak
AA3 –25 +5 AG3 Important AP3 AVERAGE
AA4 –5 +40 AG4 Very important AP4 Strong
AA5 +5 +40
AA6 +5 +60 AH Vibes QA Lightning
AA7 -25 +55 AH1 Weak AQ1 Negligible
AA8 -50 +40 AH2 Indirect
Averages AQ2
AH3 Important AQ3 Direct
AB Temperature and humidity
A.K. Flora AR Air movement
AC Altitude (m)
AK1 Negligible AR1 Weak
AC1 ÿ 2,000 AK2 AR2
Risk Means
stnemnorivnE
AC2 > 2,000 AR3 Forts

A.L. Wildlife
A.D. Water A.S. Wind
AL1 Negligible
AD1 Negligible AL2 AS1 Weak
Risk
AD2 Drops AS2 AVERAGE
AD3 Aspersion A.M. Electromagnetic AS3 Strong
AD4 Screenings influences
AD5 Jets
AM1 Low frequency
AD6 Packages
AD7 to phenomena
Immersion
AD8 AM9
Submersion
AM21 High frequency
AE
HAS
phenomena
Foreign bodies
AM25
AE1 Negligible AM31 Electrostatic
AE2 Small
discharges
AE3 Very small AM41 Ionization
AE4 Light dust
YEAR Sun
A.F. Corrosion
AN1 Weak
AF1 Negligible AN2 Significant
AF2 Atmospheric AN3 Forts
AF3 Intermittent
AF4 Permed
B B.A. Skill B.C. Contacts BE Materials

BA1 Ordinary BC1 Dummies BE1 Negligible
BA2 Children BC2 Weak BE2 Fire
BA3 Disabled BC3 Common BE3 Blast
BA4 Warned BC4 Continuous BE4 Contamination
BA5 Qualified
esU
comics Evacuation
BB Resistance BD1 Normal
BB1 Normal BD2 Difficult
BB2 Weak BD3 Cluttered
BB3 Very weak BD4 Difficult and crowded
C CA Materials CB Structure
CA1 Non-combustible CB1
sgnidliuB
Negligible
CA2 Fuels CB2 Fire spread
CB3 Movements
CB4 Flexible
______________
- 189 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
(Blank page)
- 190 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
Part 5-52 – Additional rules for pipelines
520 General ................................................ .................................................. ................192 521 Installation

methods............................ .................................................. .............................195 522 Selection and
implementation depending on external influences........ ................................203 523 Allowable
currents .............. .................................................. ...................................206 524 Conductor cross-
sections .......... .................................................. ................................220 525 Voltage
drops ............. .................................................. .............................................221 526
Connections ...... .................................................. .................................................. ........222 527 Choice
and implementation to limit the spread of fire ............................. ..............223 528 Neighborhood with
other pipes ............................. .............................................224 529 Special rules to the different
installation methods ......................................... ..........225
_______________
- 191 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H 520 General
520.1 The selection and installation of pipelines must take into account the fundamental principles of Part 1, applicable
to conductors and cables, their connections and their ends, their supports and their envelopes or methods of protection
against external influences.
NOTE - In general, this part also applies to protective conductors, but Part 5-54 contains other requirements for these conductors.
520.2 For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to consider are:
520.2.1 Profiles, conduits and conduit systems

(1)
- Wooden plinths, moldings and architraves: Rules and dimensions;
- Profiles used for routing conductors and cables and their installation accessories:
(2)
Rules ;
(3)
- Profile systems used for routing conductors and cables: Rules;
- Conduit systems for electrical installations – part 2-2: Special rules for
(4) bendable conduit systems – types ICA, ICTA, ICTL;
- Conduit systems for electrical installations – part 2-1: Special rules for rigid conduit systems - types IRL, MRL
(5) ;
- Conduit systems for electrical installations – part 2-3: Particular rules for flexible conduit systems - CSA type
(6) ;
- Conduit systems for electrical installations – part 2-4: Special rules for
(7) conduit systems buried in the ground - TPC type .
520.2.2 Conductors and cables
Profiles include trunking, moldings and profiled conduits.
Table 52A specifies the standards to consider and the characteristics of insulated cables and conductors.
520.2.3 Cable gland
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to consider are the following: - Metric pitch
cable gland (8) ; - Non-metric cable gland -
General rules (9) ; - Non-metric cable gland in plastic material - Special
rules (10) ; - Non-metric metal cable glands - Special rules (11).
(1) NF C 68-091
(2) NF C 68-102
(3) NF C 68-104
(4) NF EN 50086-2-2 (C 68-112)
(5) NF EN 50086-2-1 (C 68-111)
(6) NF EN 50086-2-3 (C 68-113)
(7) NF EN 50086-2-4 (C 68-114)
(8) NF EN 50262 (C 68-302)
(9) UTE C 68-300
(10) UTE C 68-311
(11) UTE C 68-312
- 192 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
Table 52A specifies the standards to be considered, the letters of which have the following meaning:
Column 1: The cables shown in bold are the most commonly used.
Column 2: A Recognized national type.

H Harmonized type.
FR-N National type but with international designation.
u National type with the old designation UTE.
Column 3: Designation of the standard.
Column 4: Reference voltages of Uo / U cables in V (see 512.1.1 a).
Column 5: R Rigid conductor or cable.

S Flexible conductor or cable.
Column 6: A Armor.
P Lead sheath.
R Sheath in reticulated material.
T Thermoplastic sheath.
E Copper screen.
TV Braided.
Column 7: II Cable considered class II (see 413.2) for maximum tension per
relation to earth of 500 V.
II* Cable considered class II (see 413.2) for maximum tension per
250 V earth connection.
Column 8: C 1 Cable does not propagate fire (according to standard NF C 32-070).

# Cable does not propagate fire (according to standard NF C 32-072).
C2 Flame-resistant cable (according to standard NF C 32-070).
C3 No characteristics from the point of view of fire behavior (according to
standard NF C 32-070).
Column 9: CR 1 Fire-resistant cable (according to standard NF C 32-070)

CR 2 No characteristics in terms of fire resistance (according to the
standard NF C 32-070).
Column 10: Y Cable does not emit opaque smoke in the event of fire (according to the
standard NF C 32-073-1 and -2).
Column 11: Y Cable does not emit acid fumes in the event of fire (according to
standard NF C 32-074-22).
Column 12: Minimum and maximum sections: these indications do not imply that
the entire range of sections is carried out regardless of the number
of drivers.
Column 13: Maximum admissible temperatures on the core.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

Table 52A – Insulated conductors and cables
No. Designation Standards Tension Flexibility Assigned coating Class Fire Fumes Temperature Sections
NF C opacity acidity mm2 on core
reduced low 11 °C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Propagation 8 Resistance 9 10 12 13
ELASTOMER-INSULATED CABLES (PR family)

R T II C2/C1a – – – 1.5 - 630 90
U 1000 R2V (6) 32-321 600/1000
1 R TAT C2/C1a – – – 1.5 - 300 90
U 1000 RVFV (6) 32-322 600/1000
2 R PAT C2 – – – 1.5 - 240 90
U 1000 RGPFV (6) 32-111 600/1000
3 FR-N1 X1X2 32-323 600/1000 R R II C1# – O O 1.5 - 630 90
4 FR-N 1 X1G1 32-323 600/1000 R T II C1# – O O 1.5 - 630 90
5 FR-N 1 X1X2Z4X2 32-323 600/1000 R RAR C1# – O O 1.5 - 300 1.5 - 90
6 FR-N 1 X1G1Z4G1 32-323 600/1000 R TAT C1# – – – 300 16 - 90
78 R R C3 – – – 150 90
Cables (6) 33-209 600/1000
21 H 07 BB-F 32-102-12 450/750 S R II C3 – –– 1.5 - 500 – –– 1.5 - 500 1.5 - 16 – –– 1.5 90

22 H 07 BN4-F 32-102-12 450/750 S R II C2 - 500 – –– 1.5 - 300 1.5 - 500 90
23 H 07 BQ-F 32-102-10 450/750 S R II C3 – – – 90
24 H 07 RN-F 32-102-4 450/750 S R II C2 60 (1)
25 A 07 RN-F 32-120 450/750 S R II C2 60 (1)
26 H 07 RN8-F 32-102-16 450/750 S R II C2 – – –
60 (1)
27 FR-N 07 X4X5-F 32-131 450/750 S R II C1 – O O 1.5 - 500 90
28 H 07 ZZ-F 32-102-13 450/750 S R II C2# – O O 1.5 - 500 70
51 H 05 BB-F 32-102-12 300/500 S R II C3 – – – 1.5 - 6 90

52 H 05 GG-F 32-102-11 300/500 S R II C3 – – – 1.5 - 6 110
53 H 05 RR-F 32-102-4 300/500 S R II C3 – – – 1.5 - 6 60 (1)
54 A 05 RR-F 32-120 300/500 S R II C3 – – – 1.5 - 6 60 (1)
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE INSULATED CABLES (PVC family)
101 H 07 VVD3H2-F 32-202 450/750 S C2 – – – 1.5 - 16 70
102 H 07 VVH2-F T 32-202 450/750 S II C2 – – – 1.5 - 16 70
111 FR-N 05 VV-U T 32-207 300/500 R II* C2 – – – 1.5 - 10 70
112 FR-N 05 VV-R T 32-207 300/500 R II* C2 – – – 1.5 - 35 70
113 FR-N 05 VL2V-U T 32-207 300/500 R PT C2 – – – 1.5 - 10 70
114 FR-N 05 VL2V-R 32-207 300/500 R P.T. C2 – – – 1.5 - 25 70
121 H 05 VV-F 32-201-5 300/500 S T II* C2 – – – 1.5 - 4 70

122 A 05 VV-F 32-220 300/500 S T II* C2 – – – 1.5 - 4 70
123 H 05 V2V2-F 32-201-12 300/500 S T II* C2 – – – 1.5 - 4 90 (2)
124 FR-N 05 VV5-F 32-206 300/500 S T II* C2 – – – 4 - 35 70
125 H 05 VV5-F 32-201-13 300/500 S T II* C2 – – – 1.5 - 2.5 70
126 H 05 VVC4V5-K 32-201-13 300/500 S TFW C2 – – – 1.5 - 2.5 70
CONDUCTORS INSULATED WITH POLY VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC family)

201 H 07 SEEN 32-201-3 450/750 R – C2 – – – 1.5 - 10 70
202 H 07 VR 32-201-3 450/750 R – C2 – – – 1.5 - 400 70
203 H 07 VK 32-201-3 450/750 S – C2 – – – 1.5 - 240 70
204 H 07 V2-U 32-201-7 450/750 R – C2 – – – 1.5 - 2.5 90 (2)

205 H 07 V2-R 32-201-7 450/750 R – C2 – – – 1.5 - 35 90 (2)
206 H 07 V2-K 32-201-7 450/750 S – C2 – – – 1.5 - 35 90 (2)
207 H 07 V3-U 32-201-9 450/750 R – C2 – – – 1.5 - 10 70

208 H 07 V3-R 32-201-9 450/750 R – C2 – – – 1.5 - 400 70
209 H 07 V3-K 32-201-9 450/750 S – C2 – – – 1.5 - 240 70
ELASTOMER INSULATED CONDUCTORS (PR family)

221 H 05 SJ-K 32-102-3 300/500 S TV C3 – – – 1.5 - 16 180
224 H 07 GU 32-102-7 450/750 R - C3 – – – 1.5 - 10 110
225 H 07 GR 32-102-7 450/750 R - C3 – – – 1.5 - 240 110
226 H 07 GK 32-102-7 450/750 S - C3 – – – 1.5 - 240 110
227 H 07 ZU 32-102-9 450/750 R - C2 – O O 1.5 -10 90
228 H 07 ZR 32-102-9 450/750 R - C2 – O O 1.5 - 400 90
229 H 07 ZK 32-102-9 450/750 S - C2 – O O 1.5 - 240 90
FIRE-RESISTANT CABLES WITH SYNTHETIC INSULATION (PR family or PVC family depending on the case)
501 – 32-310 R II* C1 CR1 – –
(5) (3) 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
502 – 32-310 R C1 CR1 – –
(5) (3) A (3) 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
503 – 32-310 R II* C1 CR1 O
(5) (3) O 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
504 – 32-310 R C1 CR1 O
(5) (3) A (3) O 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
505 –
506 – 32-310 R II* C2 CR1 – –
(5) (3) 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
507 – 32-310 R C2 CR1 – –
(5) (3) A (3) 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
508 – 32-310 R II C2 CR1 O
(5) (3) O 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
509 – 32-310 R C2 CR1 O
(5) (3) A (3) O 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
a Also exists in category C1 according to standard NF C 32-070, in addition to the corresponding cable standard
(1) Conductors or cables whose admissible core temperature is less than 70°C must be considered from the point of view of the admissible current
as being in the “PVC family”
(2) Conductors or cables whose admissible core temperature is greater than or equal to 90 °C must be considered from the point of view of current
eligible as being in the “PR family”
(3) Sheath made of cross-linked material or thermoplastic material
(4) Depending on the types of covering - see the manufacturer
(5) Available in the following voltage models: 300/500 V, 450/750 V, 600/1000 V - see the manufacturer
(6) Also available in aluminum core for sections greater than or equal to 10 mm2

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H
521.1 General
Examples of installation methods are presented in Table 52C.
NOTE - Other installation methods, not described in this part, can be used provided that the requirements are met.
general requirements of this part.
The specific rules for the different installation methods are specified in 529.
The UTE C 15-520 guide gives information on the conditions of use and implementation
different installation methods.
H 521.2 Selection of pipes
Table 52B – Choice of pipes
Installation methods
sworc
gniknurT
raaCc
Oi
srotalunsn
reeirlb
tuoghntixWif
tnemhtcceartitD
a
,,sserevdledhasl
e,slbyaw
C
smettcsuyD
S
Drivers
and cables
Bare conductors ......................................... N NOT NOT NOT NOT HAS NOT
Insulated conductors ......................................... N NA* A* NOT HAS NOT
Multiconductors....... AAAA HAS 0 HAS

Cables (including
armored cables) Single conductors .... 0 AAA HAS 0 HAS
Admitted
A* Insulated conductors are only permitted if the conduit, profiled conduit or trunking
has the degree of protection IP4X or IPXXD and that the covers of the
chute require the use of a tool to remove.
N Not allowed
0 Not applicable or not used in practice.
- 195 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
521.3 (available)
H
521.4 Prefabricated pipelines
Prefabricated pipelines must comply with the standard in force (12) and be installed following the manufacturer's
instructions. Their installation must meet the requirements of articles 522, 525, 526, 527 and 528.
The UTE C 15-107 guide contains information allowing you to carry out the various calculations intended to
choose prefabricated pipelines allowing them to ensure the different protection conditions defined by the rules of
this standard.
The provisions of this article also apply to electrical distribution systems by prefabricated pipeline equipped with
16A power socket bases complying with the standard in force (12).
H 521.5 Alternating current circuits and ferromagnetic material enclosures The conductors
of alternating current circuits arranged in ferromagnetic material enclosures must be installed in such a way that
the conductors of each circuit are in the same enclosure.
NOTE - If this condition is not met, overheating and excessive voltage drops may occur due to induction phenomena.
This condition particularly concerns metal conduits and cables with a metal coating.
Ferromagnetic collars can also become hot and it is best to use collars made of non-magnetic material.
It is recalled that in the TN and IT diagrams, the protective conductor must also be installed in the same enclosure
as the active conductors. Otherwise, the impedance of the fault loop could be increased to the point that the
protection conditions are not satisfied.
(12) NF EN 60439-2 (C 63-422)

- 196 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H
Table 52C - Examples of installation methods
The figures are not intended to actually represent the installation methods but are intended to explain the principle of
the corresponding installation method.
Example Description Ref.
local Conductors insulated in conduits embedded in thermally insulating 1

walls.
Multi-conductor cables in conduits embedded in thermally

local insulating walls. 2
Insulated conductors in surface-mounted conduits. 3
Single- or multi-conductor cables in surface-mounted conduits. 3A
Conductors insulated in profiled conduits in surface mounting. 4
Single- or multi-conductor cables in surface-mounted profiled 4A

conduits.
Conductors insulated in conduits embedded in a wall. 5
Single- or multi-conductor cables in conduits embedded in a wall.

5A
- 197 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H
Table 52C - Examples of installation methods (continued)
Single- or multi-conductor cables with or without armor:
11
- fixed on a wall,
- fixed to a ceiling, 11A
- on non-perforated cable trays or shelves, (*)

12
- on perforated cable trays or shelves, in 13

horizontal or vertical path, (*)
- on welded mesh or on corbels,

14
- on cable ladders. 16
Single- or multi-conductor cables suspended from a cable 17

carrier or self-supporting.
Bare conductors or insulated on insulators.

18
(*) a cable tray with cover is considered a trunking (installation method 31A).
- 198 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H
Single- or multi-core cables in building spaces. 21
Insulated conductors in conduits in building voids. 22
Single- or multi-core cables in conduits in building spaces. 22A
Conductors insulated in profile conduits in building spaces. 23
Single- or multi-core cables in profiled conduits in building spaces. 23A
Conductors insulated in profiled conduits embedded in construction. 24
Single- or multi-conductor cables in profiled conduits embedded in the construction. 24A
Single- or multi-conductor cables:
- in the space between ceiling and false ceiling,

25
- installed on non-removable suspended false ceilings.
- 199 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H Table 52C - Examples of installation methods (continued)
31 31A
Insulated conductors or single- or multi-conductor cables in
trunking fixed to the walls.
- in a horizontal route, 31
32 32A
- in a vertical route. 32
Conductors insulated in trunking embedded in walls or floors. 33
Single- or multi-conductor cables in trunking embedded in walls 33A

or floors.
Conductors insulated in suspended trunking. 34
Single- or multi-core cables in suspended trunking. 34A
34 34A
41
Insulated conductors in single- or multi-conductor conduits or
cables in closed gutters, in horizontal or vertical runs.
Conductors insulated in conduits in ventilated gutters. 42
Single- or multi-conductor cables in open or ventilated ducts. 43
- 200 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H
Single- or multi-conductor cables in conduits, ducts or buried 61

profiled conduits.
Single or multi-conductor cables buried without additional 62

mechanical protection.
Buried single or multi-conductor cables with additional mechanical 63

protection.
Conductors insulated in wooden baseboards or moldings. 71
Insulated conductors in conduits or multi-conductor cables in 73

frames.
Insulated conductors in conduits or multi-conductor cables in 74

window frames.
Cables submerged in water. 81
- 201 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
521.6 Laying of cables and conductors
521.6.1 Conductors belonging to different circuits may use the same multi-conductor cable, the same conduit or the same trunking
compartment, provided that all the conductors are insulated for the highest rated voltage present.
521.6.2 Single-conductor cables and insulated conductors, belonging to the same circuit, must be laid in close proximity to each other. This
rule also applies to the corresponding protective conductor (see 544.1).
521.6.3 When several single-conductor cables are joined in parallel, they are distributed into as many groups as there are conductors in
parallel, each group comprising a conductor of each phase or polarity. The conductors of each group must be placed close to each other.
These arrangements are intended to reduce loop impedances and ensure the correct distribution of currents in parallel conductors (see 523.6).
521.6.4 Pipelines must be selected and installed in such a way as to prevent, during installation, use and maintenance, any damage to the
sheaths and insulation of insulated conductors and cables.
521.6.5 The interior dimensions of conduits, profiled conduits and connection accessories must allow the conductors or cables to be easily
pulled and removed after installation of the conduits and their accessories.
In the case of conductors, this rule is satisfied if their occupancy section, all protections included, is not greater than a third of the interior
section of the conduit or profiled conduit.
521.6.6 The radius of curvature of a pipeline must be such that the conductors and cables are not damaged.
521.6.7 When conductors and cables are not supported over their entire length by supports or because of their method of installation, they
must be supported by suitable means at sufficient intervals so that the conductors and cables are not not damaged by their own weight.
521.6.8 When pipelines are subject to permanent traction (for example due to their own weight in vertical travel), an appropriate type of cable
or conductor with an appropriate section and method of installation must be chosen, so as to avoid any damage to cables or conductors and
their supports.
521.6.9 Pipelines in which conductors or cables must be pulled must have appropriate means of access to allow them to be pulled.
This requirement applies in particular to the installation of conduits in closed gutters and in construction voids.
521.6.10 Piping embedded in floors shall be adequately protected against damage due to the intended use of the floor.
521.6.11 The routes of exposed pipes which are rigidly fixed must be horizontal or vertical or parallel to the edges of the walls.
This does not preclude oblique courses when such courses are necessary, for example for changes of plan or the avoidance of obstacles.
Pipes embedded or embedded in ceilings or floors can follow the shortest practical route.
For pipes embedded in walls or partitions, see UTE guide C 15-520.
- 202 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
521.6.12 Flexible cables must be installed in such a way as to avoid excessive tensile forces on the conductors; connections and sheath or
other means of protection must be securely attached at both ends.
521.7 Protection against external influences
The protection against external influences conferred by the method of installation must be ensured continuously throughout the entire route of
the pipes, in particular at angles, changes in plane and places of penetration into the devices. The connection must ensure, if necessary,
watertightness, for example using cable glands.
Conditions for protection against external influences are given in 522.
Trunking systems complying with standard NF C 68-104 and conduit systems complying with their standards ensure, after installation, a uniform
degree of IP protection regardless of the system accessory used.
When the pipes include a sheath providing a certain degree of protection, the cable gland is tightened on this sheath.
Cable glands, shutters, grommets, etc. ensure sealing on a sheath and not on the conductor insulation.
When cable glands are used, they can be mounted on the outer sheath of the cables, if this has a sealing function. In the case of armor made
of steel strips or wires, or metal braid, the cable glands do not tighten directly on these protections.
When the sealing sheath is under a metal armor, the armors are carefully cut before entering the stuffing box and stopped by an appropriate
device (collar, flange, strapping, welding, etc.) resistant to internal stresses and external.
521.8 Crossings
In wall crossings, pipes other than those made up of conduits with a degree of mechanical protection at least equal to IK07, must include
additional mechanical protection consisting of a sheath.
H
522 Choice and implementation based on external influences
The essential rules for choosing and implementing materials are given in 512.2. Additional rules for pipes are set out in this article.
Table 52D indicates for each standardized cable series the classes of external influences in which they can be used.
Likewise, Table 52E indicates for each type of conduit or trunking system, the classes of external influences in which they can be used.
The UTE C 15-103 guide indicates for different premises or locations, the series of cables and the types of conduit systems, trunking and
profiles that can be used and the corresponding special conditions.
- 203 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H 522.1 External heat sources
522.1.1 In order to avoid the effects of heat emitted by external sources, the following methods, or other equally
effective methods, shall be used to protect pipelines:
- protective screen; -
sufficient distance from heat sources; - choice of a
pipeline taking into account the harmful effects that may occur; - local reinforcement or modification
of the insulating material.
NOTE - Heat emitted by external sources can be transmitted by radiation, by convection or by conduction, coming from:
- hot water distribution;

- installations, devices and lighting; -
manufacturing processes; -
transmission by heat-conducting materials;
- absorption by channeling heat from the sun or the surrounding environment.
522.2 (available)
522.3 Electromagnetic, electrostatic or ionizing (AM) influences

See 444 and the UTE C 15-900 guide.
- 204 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

Table 52D - Conditions of use of insulated conductors and cables
No. Designation AA AD AE AF AG AH AK AL BB B.C. comics BE CA CB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ELASTOMER-INSULATED CABLES (PR family)
1 U 1000 R2V 4 to 6(a) 7(e) 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1

2 U 1000 RVFV 4 to 6(a) 7(e) 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2(d) 2.3(d) 4 1 to 3 2 1
3 U 1000 RGPFV 4 to 6(a) 8 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2(d) 2.3(d) 4 1 to 3 2 1
4 FR-N1 X1X2 4 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1.2
5 FR-N1 X1G1 4 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1.2
6 FR-N1 X1X2Z4X2 4 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 4 1 1 2 2(d) 2.3(d) 4 1 to 3 2 1.2
7 FR-N1 X1G1Z4G1 4 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 4 1 1 2 2(d) 2.3(d) 4 1 to 3 2 1.2
8 0.6/1 Twists 1 to 6 6 4 1 to 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 4 1 1 1
21 H 07 BB-F 3 to 6 7(e) 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 1 1 1 1,3,4

22 H 07 BN4-F 4 to 6(a) 7(e) 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1,3,4
23 H 07 BQ-F 2 to 6 7 e) 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 1 1 1 1,3,4
24 H 07 RN-F 3 to 5 7(e) 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1,3,4
25 A 07 RN-F 3 to 5 7(e) 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1,3,4
26 H 07 RN8-F 4 to 6(a) 8 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1,3,4
27 FR-N 07 X4X5-F 4 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 2 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1 to 4
28 H 07 ZZ-F 4 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 2 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1 to 4
51 H 05 BB-F 3 to 6 4 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 3(f) 4(f) 1 1 1 1,3,4

52 H 05 GG-F 5 to 6 4 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 3(f) 4(f) 1 1 1 1,3,4
53 H 05 RR-F 3 to 5 4 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 3(f) 4(f) 1 1 1 1,3,4
54 A-05 RR-F 3 to 5 4 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 3(f) 4(f) 1 1 1 1,3,4
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE INSULATED CABLES (PVC family)
101 H 07 VVD3H2-F 5 to 6(a) 6 102 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 3 1 1

2.3(d) 2.3(d) 3 4 4 1.2 2 1
H 07 VVH2-F 5 to 6(a) 6 to 3 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3(b) 3.4(f) 4 1.2 2 1
111 FR-N 05 VV-U 5 to 6(a) 6 1 to 3 4 4 1 2 1 1 1
2.3(b) 3.4(f) 2 (f) 4 1.2 2 1
112 FR-N 05 VV-R 5 to 6(a) 6 1 to 3 4 2 1 1 1
2.3(f) 2 ( f) 2.3(f) 4 1.2 2 1
113 FR-N 05 VL2V-U 5 to 6(a) 6 to 3 2 1 1 4 1.2 2 1
114 FR-N 05 VL2V-R 5 to 6(a) 6 2 11 1 1 4 1.2 2 1
121 H 05 VV-F 5 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3(b) 3.4(f) 4 1.2 2 1

122 A-05 VV-F 5 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3(b) 3.4(f) 4 1.2 2 1
123 H 05 V2V2-F 5 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3(b) 3.4(f) 4 1.2 2 1
124 FR-N 05 VV5-F 5 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3(b) 3.4(f) 4 1.2 2 1
125 H 05 VV5-F 5 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3(b) 3.4(f) 4 1.2 2 1
126 H 05 VVC4V5-K 5 to 6(a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2 F) 2.3(f) 4 1.2 2 1
CONDUCTORS INSULATED WITH POLY VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC family)
201 H 07 SEEN 5 to 6(a) 1 – – – –– – – – – – –
202 H 07 VR 5 to 6(a) 1 – – – –– – – – – – –
203 H 07 VK 5 to 6(a) 1 – – – 113 –– – – – – – –
204 H 07 V2-U – – – – – – – – –
5 to 6(a)
––
1
205 H 07 V2-R – – – – – – – – –
5 to 6(a)
––
1
206 H 07 V2-K – – – – – – – – –
5 to 6(a)
––
1 113
207 H 07 V3-U – – – – – – – – –
5 to 6(a)
––
1
208 H 07 V3-R – – – – – – – – –
5 to 6(a)
––
1
209 H 07 V3-K – – – – – – – – –
5 to 6(a)
––
1 113
ELASTOMER INSULATED CONDUCTORS (PR family)

221 H 05 SJ-K 1 – – – 3 – – – – – – – –
3 to 6(a)
224 H 07 GU 1 – – – 1 – – – – – – – –
3 to 6(a)
225 H 07 GR 1 – – – 1 – – – – – – – –
3 to 6(a)
226 H 07 GK 1 – – – 3 – – – – – – – –
3 to 6(a)
227 H 07 ZU 1 – – – 1 – – – – – – – –
5 to 6(a)
228 H 07 ZR 1 – – – 1 – – – – – – – –
5 to 6(a)
229 H 07 ZK 1 – – – 3 – – – – – – – –
5 to 6(a)
FIRE-RESISTANT CABLES WITH SYNTHETIC INSULATION (PR family or PVC family depending on the case)
501 4 to 6(a) 7(e) 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1, 2
502 4 to 6(a) 7(e) 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2(d) 2.3(d) 4 1 to 3 2 1, 2
503 4 to 6(a) 6(e) 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1, 2
504 4 to 6(a) 6(e) 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2(d) 2.3(d) 4 1 to 3 2 1, 2
505
506 4 to 6(a) 7(e) 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1
507 4 to 6(a) 7(e) 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2(d) 2.3(d) 4 1 to 3 2 1
508 4 to 6(a) 6(e) 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1
509 4 to 6(a) 6(e) 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2(d) 2.3(d) 4 1 to 3 2 1
(a) These cables can be used in other conditions if they are not subject to any mechanical stress.
(b) Cables permanently fixed and supply voltage to earth not more than 250 V.
(vs) Conductors must be H07V-K series.
(d) If grounding metal coverings.
(e) Cumulative immersion duration limited to two months per year.
(f) Nominal supply voltage relative to earth at most equal to 250 volts.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
Table 52E - Conditions of use of wood moldings, conduit systems

and chutes and chute systems
AA AD AE AF AG AH AK AL BB BC BD BE CA CB
Wood moldings 4, 5, 6 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 121 1 1 1
System of
conduits (**)
- MRL 5557 1-6 2* 4* 1 4 122 1 2 4 1, 2, 3 2 1
- CSA 4421 4, 5, 6 2* 4* 1, 2, 3 3 321 1 2 4 1, 2, 3 2 1,3(a),4(a)
- ICTL 3421 4, 5, 6 6* 4* 1, 2, 3 3 1 1 1 344 1, 2 2 1
- ICA 3321 4, 5, 6 6* 4* 1, 2, 3 2 1 1 1 344 1, 2 2 1
- IRL 3321 4, 5, 6 6* 4* 1, 2, 3 2 1 1 1 344 1, 2 2 1
- ICTA 3422 4, 5, 6 6* 4* 1, 2, 3 3 1 1 1 344 1, 2 2 1
Trunking 4, 5, 6 1 1 1, 2,3 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 1, 2 2 1
matter
insulating (**)
Systems 4, 5, 6 1 3 1, 2,3 2 1 1 1 2 3 4 1, 2 2 1
chutes in
matter
insulating (**)
a) The conductors must be of the H07V-K series.
* These values correspond to the degrees of protection of lengths of conduit without
accessory. The accessories ensure at least an IP40 degree of protection.
**
For conditions of external influences different from those given in this table, it
Please refer to the manufacturer's documentation.
523.0 Object
The requirements of this article are intended to ensure a satisfactory lifespan of the
conductors and insulation subject to thermal effects of operation at temperature
maximum operating capacity for extended periods in normal service and for
usual installation conditions. Other considerations come into play in determining
section of conductors, such as rules for protection against electric shock
(see 4-41), protection against thermal effects (see 4-42), protection against overcurrent
(see 4-43), voltage drop (see 525).
This article deals with unarmored cables and conductors, under rated voltages not
greater than 1000 V at 50-60 Hz and up to 100 Hz or 1500 V direct current.
For frequencies from 100 to 400 Hz, see guide UTE C 15-421.
The values in the tables for multi-conductor cables can be used for cables
armed provided that each cable contains all the conductors of the circuit, the errors being in
the sense of security. Table values can also be safely used to
cables with concentric conductor and metal screen or sheath.
The admissible currents indicated in the tables are determined for the types of conductors
and insulated cables and installation methods commonly used in fixed electrical installations.
The admissible current values indicated in table 52H are applicable to cables
flexible to the extent that they are used in fixed installations.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H 523.1 General
523.1.1 The current carried by any conductor for extended periods in normal operation shall be such that the maximum operating
temperature is not higher than the appropriate value specified in Table 52F. The current value shall be chosen in accordance with 523.1.2,
or determined in accordance with 523.1.3.
Table 52F - Maximum operating temperatures for insulation
Maximum operating temperature

Type of insulation (°C)
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Driver: 70
Cross-linked polyethylene (PR) and ethylene-propylene (EPR) Driver: 90
NOTE - The maximum operating temperatures indicated in this table were taken from standards NF C 32-300 and NF C
32-301.
523.1.2 The rule in 523.1.1 is considered satisfied if the current in insulated conductors and unarmored cables is not greater than the
appropriate value chosen in Tables 52H and 52J. For cable types to which this section does not apply, allowable currents shall be
determined in accordance with 523.1.3.
Table 52G indicates for each installation method the installation reference methods (B, C, D, E, F) for which the admissible currents are
indicated in the corresponding tables and the procedure to be used to deduce the admissible current values those of the reference methods.
A tolerance of 5% is allowed on the admissible current values when choosing the conductor section.
The allowable currents for insulated conductors are the same as for single-conductor cables.
H 523.1.3 The values of admissible currents and correction factors satisfying the requirements of 523.1.1 may be determined according to the
methods of IEC 60287 by test or by calculations using a recognized method provided that it is specified. It may be necessary to consider
the characteristics of the load.
- 207 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H
Table 52G - Choice of reference methods for admissible currents depending on installation methods
For each of the installation methods described in Table 52C, the table indicates the reference method - identified by one of the letters: B, C,
D, E or F - to be applied and any correction factors.
Installation Reference Correction

method method factors Remarks
(reference
number in table 52C)
B 0.77
1 B 0.70
23 B -
3A B 0.9
4 B -
4A B 0.9
5 B -
5A B 0.9
11 VS -
11A VS 0.95
12 VS -
13 E, F -
14 E, F -
16 E, F -
17 E, F -
18 VS 1.21
21 B 0.95
22 B 0.95
22A B 0.865
23 B 0.95
23A B 0.865
24 B 0.95
24A B 0.865
25 B 0.95
31 B -
31A B 0.9
32 B -
32A B 0.9
33 B -
33A B 0.9
34 B -
34A B 0.9
41 B 0.95
42 B -
43 B -
61 D 0.80
62 D -
63 D -
71 B -
(*) For the installation of multi-conductor cables, apply
73 B (*) a correction factor of 0.9.
74 B (*)
81 In the study
- 208 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H Use of tables 52H and 52J
The admissible currents indicated in tables 52H and 52J are valid for simple circuits consisting of the following number of conductors:
Reference method B
- two insulated conductors or two single-conductor cables or a two-conductor cable; - three insulated conductors or three single-
conductor cables or one three-conductor cable.
Reference method C
- two single-conductor cables or one two-conductor cable, - three single-conductor cables

or a three-conductor cable.
Reference method D
- two single-conductor cables or one two-conductor cable, - three single-conductor cables

or a three-conductor cable.
Reference method E
- a two or three conductor cable.
Reference method F
- two or three single-conductor cables.
- 209 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H Table 52H - Allowable currents (in amperes) in pipelines for reference methods B, C, E and F
METHOD
OF INSULATION AND NUMBER OF CHARGED CONDUCTORS
REFERENCE
B PVC 3 PVC 2 PR 3 PR 2
VS PVC 3 PVC 2 PR 3 PR 2
E PVC 3 PVC 2 PR 3 PR2
F PVC 3 4 PVC 2 PR 3 6 PR 2
S (mm²) 1 2 3 5 7 8 9
COPPER
1.5 15.5 17.5 18.5 19.5 22 23 24 26
2.5 21 24 25 27 30 31 33 36
28 32 34 36 40 42 45 49
36 41 43 48 51 54 58 63
4 50 57 60 63 70 75 80 86
6 68 76 80 85 94 100 107 115
10 89 96 101 112 119 127 138 149 161
16 110 119 126 138 147 158 169 185 200
25 134 144 153 168 179 192 207 225 242
35 171 184 196 213 229 246 268 289 310
50 207 223 238 258 278 298 328 352 377
70 239 259 276 299 322 346 382 410 437
95 299 319 344 371 395 441 473 504
120 341 364 392 424 450 506 542 575
150 403 430 461 500 538 599 641 679
185 464 497 530 576 621 693 741 783
240 656 754 825 940
300 749 868 946 1083
400 500 630 855 1005 1088 1254
ALUMINUM 10
16 39 44 46 49 54 58 62 67
25 53 59 61 66 73 77 84 91
35 70 73 78 83 90 97 101 108 121
50 86 90 96 103 112 120 126 135 150
70 104 110 117 125 136 146 154 164 184
95 133 140 150 160 174 187 198 211 237
161 170 183 195 211 227 241 257 289
120 186 197 212 226 245 263 280 300 337
150 227 245 261 283 304 324 346 389
185 259 280 298 323 347 371 397 447
240 305 330 352 382 409 439 470 530
300 351 381 406 440 471 508 543 613
400 526 600 663 740
500 610 694 770 856
630 711 808 899 996
NOTES -
1 the admissible current values indicated in this table are applicable to flexible cables used in
fixed installations.
2 conductors and cables whose admissible core temperature is less than 70 °C (for example HO7RN-F, see table 52A) must be
considered from the point of view of the admissible current as being of the "PVC family".
The number 2 after PR (cross-linked polyethylene) or PVC (polyvinyl chloride) relates to a single-phase circuit.
The number 3 after PR or PVC relates to a three-phase circuit.
- 210 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H Table 52J - Allowable currents (in amperes) in buried pipelines (reference method D)
SECTION OF INSULATION AND NUMBER OF LOADED CONDUCTORS
CONDUCTORS (mm²) PVC 3 PVC 2 PR 3 PR 2
COPPER
1.5 26 32 31 37
2.5 34 42 41 48
44 54 53 63
56 67 66 80
4 74 90 87 104
6 96 116 113 136
10 123 148 144 173
16 147 178 174 208
25 174 211 206 247
35 216 261 254 304
50 256 308 301 360
70 290 351 343 410
95 328 397 387 463
120 367 445 434 518
150 424 514 501 598
185 240 300 480 581 565 677
ALUMINUM 10
16 57 68 67 80
25 74 88 87 104
35 94 114 111 133
50 114 137 134 160
70 134 161 160 188
95 167 200 197 233
197 237 234 275
120 224 270 266 314
150 254 304 300 359
185 285 343 337 398
240 328 396 388 458
300 371 447 440 520
- 211 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H 523.2 Ambient temperature

The ambient temperature value to use is the temperature of the surrounding environment when the cable or
conductor in question is not loaded.
The admissible current values indicated in this article are valid for an ambient temperature of:
30°C, for cables in the air, regardless of the installation method; 20°C,
for cables buried directly in the ground or in buried conduits.
For other ambient temperatures, the values in the tables must be multiplied by the appropriate factor from Tables
52K and 52L.
However, for buried cables, correction is not necessary if the ground temperature is only above 25°C for a few
weeks per year.
The correction factors in Table 52K do not take into account the possible increase in temperature due to solar
radiation. When cables or conductors are subjected to such radiation, the admissible currents must be calculated
taking into account the correction factor of 0.85 (see 512.2.11).
When electrical conduits are embedded in walls containing heating elements, it is generally necessary to reduce
the admissible currents by applying the correction factors in Table 52K.
- 212 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H
Table 52K - Correction factors for ambient temperatures different from 30°C to be applied to the
admissible current values in Table 52H
Ambient Insulation
temperature Elastomer
(Rubber) PVC PR / EPR
(°C)
10 1.29 1.22 1.15

15 1.22 1.17 1.12
20 1.15 1.12 1.08
25 1.07 1.06 1.04
35 0.93 0.94 0.96
40 0.82 0.87 0.91
45 0.71 0.79 0.87
50 0.58 0.71 0.82
55 - 0.61 0.76
60 - 0.50 0.71
65 - - 0.65
70 - - 0.58
75 - - 0.50
80 - - 0.41
85 - - -
90 - - -
95 - - -
Table 52L - Correction factors for ground temperatures different from 20°C to apply to the values
in Table 52J
Soil Insulation
temperature (°C) PVC PR / EPR
10 1.10 1.07
15 1.05 1.04
25 0.95 0.96
30 0.89 0.93
35 0.84 0.89
40 0.77 0.85
45 0.71 0.80
50 0.63 0.76
55 0.55 0.71
60 0.45 0.65
65 - 0.60
70 - 0.53
75 - 0.46
80 - 0.38
- 213 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
523.3 Thermal resistivity of the ground

The admissible currents indicated in the tables of this article for buried cables correspond to a thermal resistivity of
the ground of 1 Km/W.
In locations where the thermal resistivity of the ground is different from 1 Km/ W, the admissible currents must be
multiplied by the correction factors in table 52M unless the earth in the immediate vicinity of the cable is replaced
by a more suitable earth. Such cases can be encountered in very dry terrain.
Table 52M - Correction factors for buried cables depending on the thermal
resistivity of the ground
Thermal
resistivity Factor of Comments
of the ground
(Km/W) correction Humidity Nature of the land
0.40 1.25 Submerged installation Swamps
0.50 1.21 Very humid grounds Sand
0.70 1.13 Wetlands Clay

0.85 1.05 Normal terrain
1.00 1 Dry land and limestone
1.20 0.94
1.50 0.86 Very dry ground Ashes
2.00 0.76
2.50 0.70 and clinker
3.00 0.65
H 523.4 Circuit grouping
523.4.1 Grouping of circuits or cables in the air
There is a grouping of circuits if the installation is contiguous, that is to say if the free distance separating two
cables is less than or equal to twice the external diameter of the largest conductor or cable.
In practice the distance to consider is the average value of the cable spacing along their route.
For groups of circuits or cables in the air, the correction factors in Tables 52N and 52O are applicable to the
reference values in Table 52H.
When a circuit is made up of several single-pole cables per phase, the correction factor is determined by considering
that there are as many circuits as there are cables per phase.
- 214 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H
Table 52N - Correction factors for grouping of several circuits
or several multi-conductor cables
REF PROVISION CORRECTION FACTORS

OF CIRCUITS METHODS FASHIONS
OR CABLES Number of circuits or multi-conductor cables OF DEPOSIT
REFERENCE
JOINTS 1 2 345 678 9 12 16 20
1 Locked up B, C, 1, 2, 3, 3A, 4, 4A, 5,

5A, 21, 22, 22A, 23,
23A, 24, 24A, 25,
31,31A, 32, 32A, 33,
33A,34, 34A, 41, 42,
1.00 0.80 0.70 0.65 0.60 0.55 0.55 0.50 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.40 43.71
2 Single layer on
walls or 11, 12
floors or
tablets no 1.00 0.85 0.79 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.71 0.70 VS
perforated No
factor of
3 Single layer reduction 11A
ceiling 1.00 0.85 0.76 0.72 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.65 0.64
additional
4 Single layer on for more
tablets of 9 cables 13
perforated
1.00 0.88 0.82 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.73 0.72 0.72 E, F
5 Single layer on
ladders to 14, 16, 17
cables, crows,
trellis 1.00 0.88 0.82 0.80 0.80 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.78
welded etc.
The factors in this table are applicable to homogeneous groups of cables, also
loaded.
The same correction factors apply:

- groups of two or three single-conductor cables;
- multi-conductor cables.
H Table 52O - Correction factors for laying in several layers

for references 1 to 5 of table 52N
When cables are arranged in several layers, the following correction factors must
be applied to the admissible current values:
Number of layers 4 or 5 6 to 9 and up

Coefficient 2 0.80 3 0.73 0.70 8 0.68 0.66
These correction factors may be multiplied by those in table 52N.
Correction factors for cable bundling have been calculated assuming bundling
made up of similar equally charged cables. When a group contains cables from
different dimensions, precautions are necessary when loading smaller children.
- 215 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
523.4.2 Groups of conduits in the air or embedded in concrete
When conduits or sheaths are grouped together, the admissible currents in

the conductors placed in these conduits or sheaths are reduced by applying the factors of
correction indicated, as the case may be, in tables 52P or 52Q.
Table 52P - Correction factors depending on the number of conduits

in the air and their arrangement
Number of conduits Number of ducts arranged horizontally

arranged
vertically
123456
1 1 0.94 0.91 0.88 0.87 0.86
2 0.92 0.87 0.84 0.81 0.80 0.79
3 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.75 0.74
4 0.82 0.78 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.72
5 0.80 0.76 0.72 0.71 0.70 0.70
6 0.79 0.75 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.68
Table 52Q - Correction factors depending on the number of conduits

embedded in concrete and their arrangement
Number of conduits Number of ducts arranged horizontally

arranged
vertically
123456
1 1 0.87 0.77 0.72 0.68 0.65
2 0.87 0.71 0.62 0.57 0.53 0.50
3 0.77 0.62 0.53 0.48 0.45 0.42
4 0.72 0.57 0.48 0.44 0.40 0.38
5 0.68 0.53 0.45 0.40 0.37 0.35
6 0.65 0.50 0.42 0.38 0.35 0.32
- 216 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H
523.4.3 Grouping of buried cables and conduits
When conduits or cables are laid in the ground, the allowable currents of the conductors are reduced by applying
the correction factors in Tables 52R, 52S and 52T.
Table 52R - Correction factors for grouping several cables laid directly in the ground. Single-
core or multi-core cables arranged horizontally or vertically
Distance between multi-conductor cables or groups of 3 single-conductor cables (a)

Number of Reference Cable or
circuit laying methods None A cable 0.25m 0.5m 1.0m
(joined diameter method
cables)
2 0.76 0.79 0.84 0.88 0.92
3 0.64 0.67 0.74 0.79 0.85
4 0.57 0.61 0.69 0.75 0.82 D 62, 63
5 0.52 0.56 0.65 0.71 0.80
6 0.49 0.53 0.60 0.69 0.78
Multi- Single-core cables:

conductor cables: has
• •
•• ••
has has
Table 52S - Correction factors for buried conduits arranged horizontally or

vertically for one cable or a group of 3 single-conductor cables per conduit
Distance between ducts (a)

Number Nothing Reference Mode
of (Joint 0.25m 0.5m 1.0m of
conduits conduits) method laid
2 0.87 0.93 0.95 0.97
3 0.77 0.87 0.91 0.95
4 0.72 0.84 0.89 0.94 D 61
5 0.68 0.81 0.87 0.93
6 0.65 0.79 0.86 0.93
Multi- Single-
conductor cables: core cables: • •
•• ••
has
has
Table 52T - Correction factors in the case of several circuits or cables in the same buried
conduit
Correction factors Reference Mode

of
Number of circuits or multi-conductor cables method laid
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 16 20
1 0.71 0.58 0.5 0.45 0.41 0.38 0.35 0.33 0.29 0.25 0.22 D 61
This table is applicable to groups of cables of different sections but having the same maximum admissible
temperature.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
523.4.4 Intermittent and variable loads
The correction factors for cable bundling have been calculated based on continuous operation with a load factor of
100% for all active conductors.
When it results from the operating conditions of the installation that the load for all active conductors is less than
100%, the correction factor may be higher.
523.4.5 Lightly loaded conductors
For the application of table 52N, there is no need to take into account circuits whose operating current is not greater
than:
30% of the admissible current under installation conditions for reference methods B and D
(see also table 52T),
70% of the admissible current under installation conditions for reference methods C, E and F
This is the case, for example, if conductors are designed to carry a current significantly lower than the admissible
current, for example for reasons of voltage drop or protection against indirect contact.
Likewise, conductors used for control, signaling or similar circuits are not taken into account.
523.5 Number of loaded conductors in a circuit
523.5.1 The number of conductors to be considered in a circuit is that of the conductors actually carried by the
current. When in a polyphase circuit the currents are assumed to be balanced, there is no need to take the
corresponding neutral conductor into account.
The admissible current values indicated for three loaded conductors are also valid in a three-phase circuit with
balanced neutral.
523.5.2 Where the neutral conductor carries current without a corresponding reduction in the load on the phase
conductors, the neutral conductor shall be taken into account in determining the number of loaded conductors.
This case is encountered when harmonic currents are present in the neutral conductor of three-phase circuits, in
particular for a rate of harmonics of rank 3 and multiple of 3 in current, greater than 15% in the phase conductors.
The materials and phenomena described in Comment 330.1.1d) are the origin of harmonic currents in the neutral
conductor of three-phase circuits.
When the neutral conductor is loaded, a reduction factor of 0.84 must be applied to the admissible current values
for cables with 3 or 4 conductors.
Paragraph 524.2 deals with the determination of the neutral conductor section.
523.5.3 Conductors used solely as protective conductors are not taken into account. PEN conductors are
considered the same as neutral conductors.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
523.6 Cables in parallel

When several cables are joined in parallel on the same phase, they must be of the same nature, of the same
section, of approximately equal length and must not include any branching along their route.
Generally speaking, it is recommended to use as few parallel cables as possible. In any case, their number must
not exceed four. Beyond that, the implementation of prefabricated pipelines should be preferred. Indeed, placing
numerous cables in parallel results in poor current distribution which can lead to abnormal heating.
An additional factor called symmetry fs, applicable to admissible currents, is introduced for this implementation.
The recommended symmetrical arrangements are:
a) two cables per phase with or without neutral cable
1 1 1 1
Clover
23 NN 3 2
Or
NOT 23 32N fs = 1
Tablecloth 2 1 3 NN 3 1 2 or N213312N fs = 1
b) 4 cables per phase and neutral cable
1 1 1 1 fs = 1
NOT
23 32N NOT 23 32 NOT
N213312N NOT
213312N
fs = 1
Failure to comply with the symmetry conditions indicated in the cases of 2 and 4 cables per phase or the use of 3
cables per phase requires the use of an fs coefficient equal to 0.8.
The application of the symmetry coefficient fs does not exempt the grouping from being taken into account; thus,
when a circuit is made up of several single-conductor cables per phase, it is necessary to take into account as many
circuits as cables per phase.
In the case of multi-conductor cables, their paralleling implies a symmetry factor fs = 1 regardless of the number of
cables in parallel.
H 523.7 Variations in installation conditions on a course

When conductors and cables are installed on a route along which cooling conditions vary, the allowable currents
must be determined for the part of the route presenting the most unfavorable conditions.
When, for reasons of mechanical protection, a cable is placed in a conduit or a trunking over a length not exceeding
one meter, no reduction in admissible current is necessary provided that the conduit or trunking is in the air or
mounted on a vertical surface.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
524 Conductor sections

H 524.1 Section of phase conductors The section
of phase conductors in alternating current circuits and of live conductors in direct current circuits shall not be less
than the appropriate value in Table 52U.
Table 52U - Minimum sections of phase conductors
Nature of pipes Use of the circuit Drivers

Materials Section (mm²)
Facilities Insulated Power and lighting Copper 1.5
cables and Aluminum 2.5 (see note 1)
conductors
Signaling and Copper 0.5 (see note 2)
control
Fixed Bare conductors Power Copper 10
Aluminum 16
Signaling and Copper 4
control
For a specific according to the
device corresponding
Flexible connections using insulated For any other Copper standard 0.75 (see note 3)
cables or conductors application
Extra-low voltage 0.75
circuits for special
applications
NOTES -
- Connectors used for connections of aluminum conductors must be tested and
1 approved for this specific use.
2 - A minimum section of 0.1 mm² is permitted in signaling and control circuits intended for electronic equipment, as well as
communication circuits.
3 - A minimum section of 0.1 mm² is permitted for flexible cables comprising at least seven conductors in signaling and control
circuits intended for electronic equipment.
The sections of the conductors are determined taking into account the following considerations: - the operating current at most equal to
the admissible current in the conductors according to 523, taking into account the information in 311.1 and the simultaneity factors provided for
in 311.2 ;
- protection against overloads ensured according to the rules of articles 433 and 533 ; - protection against short circuits and
thermal stress following the rules of the articles
434 and 533 ;
- protection against indirect contacts in TN and IT schemes following the rules of
articles 413 and 532 ; - the
voltage drop following the rules of article 525.
524.2 Section of neutral conductor

524.2.1 Any neutral conductor must have the same section as the phase conductors: - in single-phase circuits
with two conductors, whatever the section of the conductors, - in polyphase circuits whose phase conductors
have a section at most equal to 16 mm² in copper or 25 mm² in aluminum, - in three-phase circuits likely to be
traversed by harmonic currents of order 3
and multiple of 3 whose harmonic rate is between 15% and 33%.

See also 523.5.2.
These harmonic levels are encountered, for example, in circuits supplying discharge lamp luminaires including fluorescent tubes.
524.2.2 When the rate of harmonics of order 3 and multiple of 3 is greater than 33% in current, the choice of a
neutral section greater than that of the phase conductor may be necessary.
These harmonic rates are encountered for example in circuits dedicated to office automation and computing.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

a) in the case of using multipolar cables, the section of the phases is equal to that of the neutral conductor, the
calculation of this section being made for the current in the neutral taken equal to 1.45 times the current of
use in the sentence.
b) in the case of using single-pole cables, the phase section can be chosen lower
to that of neutral, the calculation being made:
- for the phase: for its operating current; - for

neutral: for the current taken equal to 1.45 times the operating current in the phase.
524.2.3 In polyphase circuits whose phase conductors have a section greater than 16 mm² in copper or 25 mm²
in aluminum, the neutral conductor may have a section smaller than that of the phase conductors if the following
conditions are simultaneously met:
- the load carried by the circuit in normal service is assumed to be balanced and the rate of harmonics of rank
3 and multiples of 3 does not exceed 15% in the phase conductor;
As a general rule, the reduced section of the neutral conductor is not less than half that of the phase conductors.
- the neutral conductor is protected against overcurrents according to the rules of 431.2 ; the
- section of the neutral conductor is at least equal to 16 mm² in copper or 25 mm² in aluminum.
524.2.4 Summary of the rules in paragraphs 524.2.1, 524.2.2 and 524.2.3
Table 52V - Summary table of paragraphs 524.2.1, 524.2.2 and 524.2.3
0 < TH3 ÿ 15% 15% < TH 3ÿ 33 %(1) TH 3> 33 %(2)

Single-phase circuits Sneutral = Sphase Sneutral = Sphase Sneutral = Sphase
Three-phase + neutral circuits Sphase = Sneutral

Multipolar cables Sneutral = Sphase Sneutral = Sphase Sneutral determinant
Factor 0.84 IBneutral = 1.45.IBphase
Sphase ÿ 16 mm² Cu or Factor 0.84
25 mm² Alu
Three-phase + neutral circuits Sphase = Sneutral

Multipolar cables Sneutral = Sphase/2 admitted Sneutral = Sphase Sneutral determinant
Sphase > 16 mm² Cu or Neutral protected Factor 0.84 IBneutral = 1.45.IBphase
25 mm² Alu Factor 0.84
Three-phase + neutral circuits Sneutral > Sphase

Single-core cables Sneutral = Sphase/2 admitted Sneutral = Sphase IBneutral = 1.45.IBphase
Sphase > 16 mm² Cu or Neutral protected Factor 0.84 Factor 0.84
25 mm² Alu
(1) In the absence of information from manufacturers, lighting circuits powering discharge lamps including fluorescent
tubes in offices, workshops, supermarkets, etc.
(2) In the absence of information from manufacturers, circuits dedicated to office automation, computing, electronic
devices in office buildings, computer centers, banks, trading rooms, specialized stores, etc.
In the case of three-phase circuits with neutral and when the third-order current harmonic rate is defined neither by the user nor by the
application, it is recommended that the designer applies at least the following rules: • provide a section of the neutral conductor equal to
that of the phase (factor 0.84); •
protect the neutral conductor against overcurrents; • do not use a PEN conductor.
In the case of distribution board power circuits, the receivers located downstream having various distortion levels, the section of the
neutral conductor or the PEN conductor will be determined according to the current flowing through this conductor.
524.2.5 A neutral conductor cannot be common to several circuits.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H 525 Voltage drops
The voltage drop between the origin of an installation and any point of use must not be
greater than the values in the 52W table expressed in relation to the value of the nominal voltage of
the installation.
Table 52W - Voltage drops in installations
Lighting Other uses

Type A - Installations supplied directly by a
low voltage connection, from a network of 3% 5%
low voltage public distribution
Type B - Installations supplied by a substation

delivery or by a transformation station from
of a high voltage installation and installations of 6% 8%
type A whose delivery point is located in the
LV general panel of a distribution station
public.
When the main pipes of the installation have a length greater than 100 m, these drops of
voltage can be increased by 0.005% per meter of pipe beyond 100 m, without however this
supplement is greater than 0.5%.
The voltage drops are determined according to the powers absorbed by the devices of use, in
applying simultaneity factors where applicable, or, failing that, according to the values of current employment
circuits.
NOTES -
1 - A greater voltage drop can be accepted:
- for engines, during start-up periods;
- for other equipment with significant current draw,
provided that it is ensured that voltage variations remain within the limits specified by the standard
corresponding.
2 - The following temporary conditions are not taken into account:
- transient overvoltages;
- voltage variations due to abnormal operation.
Voltage drops are determined using the formula:
L +
u = b p1 cos Lsin IB
S
u being the voltage drop, in volts,

b being a coefficient equal to 1 for three-phase circuits, and
equal to 2 for single-phase circuits.
NOTE - Completely unbalanced three-phase circuits with neutral (only one phase loaded) are considered to be
single-phase circuits.
ÿ1 being the resistivity of the conductors in normal service, taken equal to the resistivity at
temperature in normal service, i.e. 1.25 times the resistivity at 20 °C, i.e. 0.023 ÿmm²/m for the
copper and 0.037 ÿmm²/m for aluminum;
L being the simple length of the pipe, in meters;
S being the section of the conductors, in mm²;
cos ÿ being the power factor; in the absence of precise indications, the power factor is
taken equal to 0.8 (sinÿ = 0.6);
ÿ being the linear reactance of the conductors, taken equal, in the absence of other indications, to
0.08mÿ / m ;
IB being the operating current, in amperes;

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
The relative voltage drop (in percent) is equal to:

u
u = 100
U0
U0 being the voltage between phase and neutral, in volts.

See also guide UTE C 15-105.
In very low voltage circuits, the voltage drop limits in the 52W table may not be respected for uses other than
lighting (for example, bell, control, door opening, etc.) subject to verification that the devices operate correctly.
Under the same conditions, the minimum section of the conductors used can be reduced to 0.19 mm² when they
are made of copper.
526 Connections
H 526.1 Connections between conductors and between conductors and other equipment must ensure lasting electrical continuity and present
appropriate mechanical strength.
The UTE C 15-520 guide gives detailed instructions for making the connections. The connections are adapted: -
on the one hand to the
intensities allowed in steady state;
- on the other hand to the conductor sections.
If necessary, accessories designed for this purpose are used. The connections made in switchgear assemblies
are established according to the requirements of the relevant standard (13).
The connections must be made in such a way that no loosening or breakage of strands is possible due to heating,
load variations, vibrations of the materials, under service conditions.
H 526.2 The choice of connection means must take into account, - the material of the
conductors and their insulation; - the number and shape of the souls of the
conductors; - the conductors section;
- the number of conductors to connect together.
(13) NF EN 60439-1 (C 63-421) or NF C 61-910.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
NOTE - The use of soldered connections should be avoided in power circuits. If they are used, they must be designed taking into account
creep and mechanical stresses.
The conductors must not have any connection or branching in the penetrations of walls, partitions, ceilings, floors, roofs, nor in
construction spaces.
For heating element and heating cord connections, see 753.
Bar splicing and branching devices are not considered connecting devices.
H 526.3 Connections must be accessible for verification, testing and maintenance, except in the following cases: - junctions of buried
cables; - junctions
embedded in a compound or sealed; -
connections between cold junctions and heating elements of heating
systems
ceilings and floors, and heating cords.
526.4 If necessary, precautions shall be taken so that the temperature reached by connections in normal service does not affect the
insulation of the conductors connected to or supporting them.
526.5 Connections must have a degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB by construction or installation.
526.6 Except in the case of overhead lines and that of contact lines supplying mobile devices, the connections of the conductors between
them and with the devices must not be subjected to any tensile or twisting stress.
526.7 The connections must be able to withstand the stresses caused by the admissible currents and by the short-circuit currents
determined by the characteristics of the protection devices.
The connections must also not undergo unacceptable modifications, due to their heating, the aging of the
insulators and the vibrations occurring during normal service. In particular, it is necessary to take into account
the influence of the temperatures reached on the mechanical resistance of the materials.
526.8 The patching of conductors - that is to say the connection to the terminals of a device of conductors used
to power other devices - is only permitted on the terminals of power socket bases, luminaires of any type
(including autonomous emergency lighting units) and light paths (559.2.5) and if the following two conditions are
simultaneously met: the terminals are specially designed for this purpose (for example certain socket bases
current) or
- are dimensioned so as to be able to accommodate the total section of the connected conductors;
- their nominal intensity is not lower than the operating current of the upstream circuit.
Reconnecting is not permitted on the terminals of user devices (other than those mentioned above), in particular on heating and cooking
appliances.
527 Choice and implementation to limit the spread of fire
527.1 Precautions inside a closed compartment The international provisions
provided are sometimes different from national regulations and are not suitable.
H 527.2 Fire barriers 527.2.1 When a
pipe passes through construction elements such as floors, walls, roofs, ceilings, partitions, etc., the openings remaining after the passage
of the pipe must be closed according to the degree of fire resistance prescribed for the corresponding element of the construction before
the crossing.
The crossings can be sealed using materials such as plaster, mineral fibers, sand, cement mortar.
- 223 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
These closures are made in such a way as to allow modifications to be made to the installation without damaging
the existing pipes and in such a way that the sealing and non-fire propagation qualities are maintained.
H 527.2.2 Pipes such as conduits, profiles, trunking, prefabricated pipes, which penetrate construction elements
having a specified fire resistance must be closed internally according to the degree of fire resistance prescribed
for the corresponding element before penetration and also sealed externally as prescribed in 527.2.1.
However, there is no need to provide internal closure for ducts and trunking satisfying the flame non-propagation
test, whose internal section is less than or equal to 710 mm², and having the degrees of protection IP33. If these
conduits or trunking open into a compartment separated by the construction element considered, the end must
have IP33 protection degrees.
528 Neighborhood with other pipelines
H 528.1 Neighborhood with other electrical conduits Electrical

conduits in the TBT and LV voltage ranges must not use the same ducts or gutters as electrical conduits with
voltages higher than the upper limit of the LV range, unless arrangements are made so that the pipelines in the
TBT and LV domains cannot be subjected to a voltage greater than their withstand voltage at industrial frequency
(see 4-41).
Special considerations of electrical and/ or electromagnetic disturbances may apply to telecommunications,

information transmission and similar circuits (see UTE C 15-900 guide).
528.2 Neighborhood with non-electrical conduits
H 528.2.1 In the vicinity of heating or hot air pipes and smoke ducts, electrical pipes must not therefore risk being
brought to a harmful temperature and therefore be kept at a sufficient distance or be separated of these pipes by
a heat-insulating screen.
Electrical conduits must not pass through smoke, ventilation or smoke extraction ducts.
Deformable ducts embedded in floors containing heating elements are kept as far away as possible from these
elements. In particular at the intersections of conduits and heating elements, the conduits are fixed so as to leave
a sufficient thickness of concrete with the heating elements.
H 528.2.2 Electrical conduits shall not be placed parallel below conduits which may give rise to condensation (such
as water, steam or gas pipelines, etc.) unless arrangements are made to protect electrical conduits from the
effects of this condensation.
528.2.3 When electrical conduits are installed in the vicinity of non-electric conduits, they must be arranged so
that any foreseeable intervention on one conduit does not risk damaging the others.
This can be achieved by: -

appropriate space between pipes; - the installation of
mechanical or thermal screens.
- 224 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
H 528.2.4 When an electrical conduit is placed in close proximity to non-electrical conduits, it must be suitably
protected against the dangers that may result from the presence of the other conduits.
The dangers which may result from the presence of other pipes concern in particular: - a rise in
temperature which may result from the presence of other steam pipes,
heating or more generally a hot fluid;
- the danger of flooding, in the event of damage to a liquid pipe, all provisions then being
taken to allow liquids to be drained.
529 Special rules for different installation methods
Detailed information on the conditions for implementing the different installation methods are given in the UTE C
15-520 guide.
529.1 Conduits
529.1.1 Surface-mounted installation
Ducts which do not have the quality of non-propagation of flame and which are characterized by the yellow-orange
color are not permitted in surface-mounted installation.
529.1.2 Flush-mounted conduits
529.1.2.1 Ducts with a degree of protection at least equal to IK07 may only be installed before construction of the
masonry if they are protected from any significant mechanical stress during the construction work.
Ducts with a degree of protection greater than IK07 are installed either before construction of the masonry or
after construction of the masonry.
The IK07 protection degree conduits are the ICA 3321 and IRL 3321 conduits.
Ducts with a degree of protection greater than IK07 are ducts with a classification greater than 3321.
529.1.2.2 Ducts which do not have the quality of non-propagation of flame and which are characterized by the
yellow-orange color must be completely coated in non-combustible materials.
529.2 Wooden moldings, plinths and jambs
529.2.1 Wooden moldings are only authorized for renovation in historic monuments under conditions of external
influences AD1.
529.2.2 The grooves of the moldings must have dimensions such that the conductors fit freely there.
In wooden moldings, only one conductor must be passed per groove. However, it is permitted to pass several
conductors in the same groove provided that these conductors belong to one and the same circuit.
In the absence of plinths, the lower part of the moldings must be at least 10 cm above the finished floor.
529.2.3 When use is made of grooved plinths which serve as supports for socket outlets for plinths, it is permitted
to pass conductors belonging to two different circuits in the same groove provided that these conductors are not
not the same polarity.
- 225 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
529.3 Chutes
In the case of trunking installed on a plinth, the class of protection against mechanical shock must correspond to at least a degree of
mechanical protection IK07. The lowest insulated conductor must be at least 1.5 cm above the finished floor.
Insulated conductors are only permitted if the cover requires the use of a tool to be removed and if the trunking has the degree of protection
IP4X or IPXXD.
When the cover can be removed without the use of a tool, connections are only permitted if they have a minimum degree of protection IP2X
or IPXXB, the conductors being in place.
529.4 Construction voids
Shafts, galleries and gutters are not considered construction voids. The same applies to spaces above removable suspended suspended
ceilings for which the installation conditions are those of exposed assembly, the pipes being fixed or supported independently of the
removable panels.
529.4.1 In building spaces, the conduits consist of conductors insulated under conduit or cables (multi-conductors or single-conductors),
provided that the conductors and cables can be installed or removed without intervention on the construction elements of the building.
Conductors, cables and conduits that can be laid directly in construction spaces must meet flame non-propagation tests.
529.4.2 Insulated conductors installed under conduit The

dimensions of the construction spaces must be such that the conduits can penetrate freely.
529.4.3 Cables
Insulated cables (single- or multi-conductor) may be laid directly, that is to say without conduit, in a building space, if the smallest transverse
dimension of the space is at least 1.5 times the outer diameter of the cable of the largest section.
In addition, the overall section of the cables, all protections included, must not be greater than a quarter of the section of the space used.
529.5 Buried pipelines
529.5.1 Only cables are permitted for buried installation under the following conditions:
a) cables reinforced with steel and having a waterproof sheath under the armor can be placed
directly into the ground.
Cables that can be laid directly in the ground are cables with a nominal voltage of at least 1000 volts and having a metal coating, such
as those of the U-1000 RGPFV, U-1000 RVFV, FR-N1X-DV, FR- series. N 1-X1X2Z4X2, FR-N 1-X 1G lZ4G1.
b) cables without armor but with a thick sheath require protection

independent mechanics against the impact of metal hand tools.
Cables which require protection against the impact of metal hand tools are cables with a nominal voltage of at least 1000 volts and not
having a metallic coating, such as those of the U-1000 R 12N, U-1000 R2V, FR-N 1-X 1X2, FR-N 1-X 1G1.
Other cables that can be used in conditions of external influences AD5 (see table 52D) must be placed in conduits or sheaths, such as
conduits for buried pipelines complying with the standard in force (14).
(14) NF EN 50086-2-4 (C 68-114).
- 226 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
c) other cables must be placed in conduits or ducts, or protected by

equivalent devices against mechanical damage.
529.5.2 The cables must be protected against damage caused by soil compaction, contact with hard bodies, the
impact of hand tools in the event of excavations, as well as against chemical actions caused by soil elements.
To counter the effects of land compaction, the cables must be buried in normal terrain, at least 0.50 m from the
ground surface. This depth is increased to 0.85 m when crossing roads accessible to cars and under sidewalks.
These depths can be reduced in rocky terrain. They may not be respected if arrangements are made so that the
cables do not directly bear the effects of land settlement, for example by using ducts.
These values apply from the upper part of the cable after installation.
529.5.3 When a buried pipeline crosses another buried electrical conduit, they must, in principle, be at a minimum
distance of 0.20 m.
When a buried electrical pipeline runs alongside or crosses water, hydrocarbon, gas, compressed air or steam
pipes that are also buried, a minimum distance of 0.20 meters must, in principle, exist between their lowest points.
closer together.
This distance can be reduced provided that the installations are separated by a protection device providing
equivalent safety.
529.5.4 Any buried pipeline must be indicated by a non-corrodible warning device placed at least 0.20 m above it.
It is recommended that the warning device be made of a red plastic mesh. This device is not necessary when the
cables are provided with independent mechanical protection or are placed in red-colored conduits or sheaths.
529.6 Prefabricated pipelines 529.6.1

Prefabricated pipelines must comply with NF EN 60439-2 (C 63-422).
529.6.2 In a TN scheme installation, the implementation of prefabricated pipelines must comply with the following
conditions: In a circuit consisting of a
cable supplying a prefabricated pipeline, the cable and the prefabricated pipeline are both, either in scheme TN-
C, or TN-S scheme.
The combination of a TN-C cable supplying a TN-S prefabricated pipeline would not satisfy the neutral conductor
sectioning rule in article 461.3 of NF C 15-100.
When the cable upstream of the prefabricated pipeline is in TN-C diagram, the PEN conductor of the cable is
connected to the terminal of the prefabricated pipeline intended for connection of the protective conductor.
In a circuit consisting of a prefabricated pipeline in TN-C diagram supplying a cable in TN-S diagram, it is
authorized that the neutral conductor of the branch circuit is neither sectioned nor cut if the prefabricated pipeline
includes, in addition to the PEN conductor , a metal casing used as a protective conductor in parallel with the PEN
conductor. This provision is also valid if the branch circuit consists of a prefabricated pipeline.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-52
529.7 External overhead lines
529.7.1 The rules set out below concern pipelines made of bare conductors or conductors provided with a
weather-resistant coating or of conductors assembled in bundles and mounted on wooden, reinforced concrete,
iron or steel posts or on posts metallic.
It is recommended for safety reasons to make overhead lines for low-voltage electrical installations, using insulated
conductors assembled in bundles complying with standard NF C 33-209.
These rules do not apply to electric fence lines.
529.7.2 Naked drivers must be out of reach. When crossing courtyards, their lowest point must be at least 6 m
above the ground; this height can be reduced to 4 m in courtyards inaccessible to vehicles and to 3 m along
buildings and walls or above terrace roofs.
In the vicinity of buildings, bare conductors must be at least a horizontal distance of 1 m from windows, bays or
openings or a vertical distance of 2 m above or 1 m below them.
529.7.3 Insulated conductors assembled in a bundle must be fixed by accessories whose parts in contact with
the insulating coating of the conductors must be made of insulating material.
These drivers must be at a height above the ground of at least 4 m when crossing courtyards and 2 m in
courtyards inaccessible to vehicles and along walls. In the vicinity of buildings, they must be at least a distance
of 0.50 m from windows, bays or openings, unless they are equipped with additional mechanical protection.
______________

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
Part 5-53 – Apparatus

(Protection, control, sectioning and monitoring)
530 General ................................................ .................................................. ................ 230 531 Fault

current protection devices ......................... ......................... 231 532
(available)................... .................................................. ............................................. 238 533 Protection
devices against overcurrents.................................................. ......... 238 534 Protective devices against
voltage disturbances.............................. ......... 242 535 Coordination between the different protection
devices ................................ ............ 250 536 Control and sectioning
devices.............................. ............................... 257 537 Monitoring
devices .............. .................................................. ........................... 262

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
530 General
VS 530.1 Scope The requirements

of this part supplement the common rules of part 5-51.
Part 5-53 deals with the choice and implementation of equipment relating to protection, control, sectioning and
monitoring.
530.2 (Available)
530.3 Common requirements
530.3.1 The movable contacts of all poles of multipole devices shall be mechanically coupled so that they open
or close practically together; however, contacts intended for neutral may close before and open after the other
contacts.
530.3.2 In polyphase circuits, single-pole devices shall not be installed in the neutral conductor.
In single-phase circuits, single-pole control and protection devices should not be installed in the neutral conductor.
530.3.3 Devices providing multiple functions must meet all the requirements of this part corresponding to each
of these functions.
530.4 Fixing equipment
530.4.1 With the exception of equipment which is specially designed to be connected to mobile pipelines, the
equipment must be fixed in such a way that the connections of the pipes with the equipment are not subject to
any tensile or twisting stress, despite the stresses resulting normal use of the equipment.
530.4.2 Insulated conductors (for example H07 VU or R) must be arranged in such a way that they are not in
contact with the wall.
530.4.3 When the equipment is embedded in a wall, it must be housed in a flush-mounting box, fixed in the wall
and chosen according to the nature of the wall, taking into account the possible presence of flammable materials.
In France, the classification M0 to M4 is that which results from the decree of June 30, 1983 of the Ministry of the
Interior relating to the classification of construction and development materials according to their reaction to fire
and definition of test methods.
The Appendix to Part 4-42 gives a conventional classification of building materials from the point of view of their
reaction to fire.
However, it is permitted not to provide a flush-mounting box if the rear part of the equipment is located in a
construction space, provided that this space does not contain combustible materials or likely to cause significant
dust.
The use of a flush-mounting box is necessary when there is a need to protect against any accumulation of dust
on the connections, which could lead to excessive heating or even ignition of the dust if it is combustible.
The complete absence of a flush-mounted box is only possible if the wall can constitute a flush-mounted box.
This is particularly the case if the partition is made of dry and insulating material (for example wood).
Table 53A summarizes the conditions under which the installation of the equipment must be carried out
depending on the nature of the partitions.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
Table 53A – Installation conditions for the equipment

NATURE OF THE PARTITION BOX
BUILT-IN
Masonry (stones, rubble, bricks, concrete). Required
Wood or insulating material. Not required
Composite partition comprising a construction void but not containing combustible or conductive Not required
materials.
Other composite partitions. Required
530.4.4 When the devices are fixed on or in trunking, plinths or moldings, they must be integral with the base of
these trunking, plinths or moldings.
530.4.5 The equipment must not, in use, separate from its support and make the connection terminals for conductors
and power cables accessible.
Screw-fixing equipment, for use in boxes built into walls, ensures this requirement.
Given the constraints of use and the nature of the walls receiving the recessed boxes in which the socket outlets
are installed, fixing with claws is strongly discouraged. It will no longer be authorized from June 1 , 2004 for buildings
subject to a building permit filed after this date.
531 Fault current protection devices
531.1 Overcurrent protection devices
VS 531.1.1 TN scheme (411.4)

In the TN scheme, overcurrent protection devices shall be selected and implemented under the conditions given in
434.2, 431 and 533.3 for protection against short circuits and shall meet the requirements of 413.1.3.3 for protection
against electric shocks.
531.1.2 TT diagram (411.5)

The use of overcurrent protection devices in the TT scheme is not permitted for protection against electric shock.
The use of overcurrent protection devices in the TT system requires earth connection resistance values that are
difficult to measure and have no guarantee over time (less than 1 ohm).
VS 531.1.3 IT diagram (411.6)

When the masses are interconnected, the overcurrent protection devices providing protection to the second fault
must be chosen under the conditions indicated in 531.1.1, taking into account the requirements of 413.1.5.5.
531.2 Residual current protection devices (abbreviated DDR)
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to consider are the following:
- Residual current protection devices (DDR) for voltage installations
(1) nominal at most equal to 1,000 V rules .
- Automatic residual current switches for domestic and
(2)
analogs .
———————
(1) UTE C 60-130
(2) NF EN 61008-1 (C 61-150) and NF EN 61008-2-1 (C
61-151) - 231 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
(3)
- Automatic earth switches with differential device with auxiliary source .
(4)
- Differential circuit breakers for control panels of first category installations .
- Automatic differential-residual current switches with overcurrent protection
(5)
incorporated for domestic and similar installations .
(6)
- Circuit breakers with built-in residual current protection .
- Residual differential devices
(7)
(RDD) for domestic and similar uses - Compatibility
electromagnetic .
531.2.1 General installation conditions

VS
531.2.1.1 Residual current protection devices must ensure the cutting of all active conductors in the circuit.
This rule requires in particular that the neutral conductor be cut, including in the TN-S diagram. This requirement is
consistent with the rule in 461.3.
VS
531.2.1.2 The protective conductor associated with the active conductors of a circuit must not pass inside the
magnetic circuit of a residual current protection device.
When the differential-residual device uses a toroid sensor separate from the measurement and detection relay, it is
sometimes impossible to avoid the passage of the PE conductor through the toroid. This is particularly the case for
multi-conductor cables for which there is not enough space to position the toroid on the uncoated part of the outer
protective sheath. The sensor can then be positioned on the coated part of the outer protective sheath, enclosing all
the active conductors and the protective conductor, provided that the protective conductor passes back in the
opposite direction inside the toroid sensor as indicated on the Figure 531A.
Active drivers
PE conductor
Detection core
Figure 531A – Case of double passage of PE
VS
531.2.1.3 Residual current protection devices must be chosen taking into account the division of circuits prescribed
in 314, such that any earth leakage current likely to flow during normal operation of the powered devices, cannot
cause the device to switch off accidentally.
NOTE – Since residual-differential current protection devices can operate for any residual-differential current value greater than 50% of
the rated operating current, it is recommended to limit the sum of the presumed leakage currents to one third of this current. assigned
operation.
———————
(3) NF C 61-141
(4) NF C 62-411
(5) NF EN 61009-1 (C 61-440) and NF EN 61009-2-1 (C 61-441)
(6) NF EN 60947-2 (C 63-120, appendix B)
(7) NF EN 61543 (C 61-443)
- 232 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
When the sum of the leakage currents of the devices powered by the part of the installation protected by a RCD
is likely to be greater than half of the rated differential current (I n) for this device, certain user devicesÿ can be
powered in the conditions of the TN scheme via a transformer with two windings. The masses of the user devices
are then connected to the neutral or middle point of the secondary of the transformer and this connection is
connected to an earth connection. Protection is provided by overcurrent protection devices on the active
conductors of the secondary circuit.
VS 531.2.1.4 Residual current protection devices must be chosen so as to limit the risk of unwanted triggering due
to electromagnetic disturbances.
NOTE - RCDs conforming to their standards meet the majority of installation cases.
In cases where the disturbances are particularly significant or when continuity of service is particularly necessary,
it is recommended to install RCDs with enhanced immunity to be defined, case by case, between the user and
the manufacturer.
These RCDs meet basic standards and also benefit from high performance immunity to electromagnetic
disturbances.
Examples of disruptive equipment: -
Microcomputers, electronic ballasts, power electronics, etc.
Examples of installations requiring specific continuity of service: - Hospitals,
continuous industrial processes, instrumentation, etc.
531.2.1.5 Influence of continuous components

There are different types of RCD depending on their behavior in the presence of DC components: AC type RCD:
RCD for which triggering is ensured for sinusoidal alternating differential currents, whether they are suddenly
applied or increase slowly.
Type A RCD: RCD for which triggering is ensured for sinusoidal alternating differential currents and also for
pulsating direct differential currents, whether they are suddenly applied or increase slowly.
Type B RCD: RCD for which triggering is ensured for sinusoidal alternating differential currents, for pulsating
direct differential currents, whether abruptly applied or slowly increasing, and also for smooth direct differential
currents.
Generally, AC type RCDs can be used.
For example, before:

- devices controlled by triacs such as light or speed dimmers because triacs do not
do not generate a continuous component;
- parts of equipment or materials producing and using direct current made according to the rules applicable to
class II such as microcomputers, TV , HIFI, Video;
- equipment producing direct current powered via a transformer
separation or safety such as halogen dimmers.
When class I electrical equipment installed downstream of a RCD is likely to produce DC component fault
currents, this RCD must be type A for single-phase applications or type B for three-phase applications.
However, if the part of this equipment likely to produce DC component fault currents is made according to the
rules applicable to class II, an AC type RCD is suitable regardless of the type of power supply.
Example:
Class I equipment which integrates a diode power supply (or diode bridge) or a switching power supply such as:
- power supplies for direct current
circuits; - speed variators with frequency converter; -
ASI.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
In the particular case of installations in residential premises, this rule results in the indication of the type of RCDs in the differential switch
selection table. (table 771E).
531.2.1.6 The same RCD, if it is high sensitivity (Iÿn ÿ 30mA), ensures both protection against the risks of indirect contact and
complementary protection against the risks of direct contact. (see 531.2.5).
531.2.2 Choice of devices according to their mode of operation
VS 531.2.2.1 Residual-differential current protection devices may be either voltage-independent or voltage-dependent, taking into account the
requirements of 531.2.2.2.
For devices with voltage-dependent operation, this voltage can be supplied either by the power supply network or by an auxiliary source.
531.2.2.2 The use of residual current protection devices with voltage-dependent operation that do not open automatically in the event of a
power supply failure is permitted only if the devices are implemented in operated installations and maintained by knowledgeable (BA4) or
qualified (BA5) people.
Consequently, they must not be used in residential premises. However, in the case where such premises are supplied from a monitored
power connection, a general control and protection device depending on the supply voltage and not opening automatically in the event of
failure of the power supply, can be implemented provided that downstream, the entire installation is protected by RCDs whose operation is
independent of the voltage.
531.2.3 Choice of devices according to the nature of the protection to be provided
531.2.3.1 Protection against indirect contact The use of RCDs

ensures protection against the risks of indirect contact in accordance with 411.3.
Their implementation depends on the grounding diagram (see 531.2.4.1, 531.2.4.2 and 531.2.4.3).
531.2.3.2 Additional protection against the risks of direct contact The use of high sensitivity RCDs (Iÿn
ÿ 30mA) ensures additional protection against the risks of direct contact in compliance with 415.1.
Their implementation does not depend on the earth connection scheme except for the installation parts in the TN-C scheme where the use
of RCD is incompatible.
531.2.3.3 Protection against fire risks The use of medium sensitivity

RCDs (Iÿn ÿ 300mA) ensures protection against fire risks generated by earthing currents.
This measure is particularly required in premises at risk of fire (BE2, see 422.1.7) and in locations at risk of explosion (BE3, see 424.10).
Their implementation does not depend on the earth connection diagram.
531.2.4 Implementation according to the earth connection diagram
VS 531.2.4.1 TN diagram If, for

certain terminal circuits, the maximum breaking times in table 41A cannot be respected by the overcurrent protection devices of these
circuits, the latter can be protected by a differential current protection device -residual. Unless there is a particular selectivity constraint,
several circuits can be protected by the same device.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
If certain masses of an installation are connected to a local earth connection electrically distinct from that of the TN scheme, the
VS
corresponding part of the installation must be considered as an installation in the TT scheme, and protection in the event of a fault must be
ensured by differential-residual current devices, according to the rules applying to the TT diagram.
The value of the resistance of the local earth connection and the largest rated differential-residual current of the installed devices must
satisfy the condition of 411.5.3.
531.2.4.2 TT diagram
531.2.4.2.1 Location of RCDs
A residual current protection device must be placed at the origin of the installation, unless the part of the installation between the origin
and the device(s) meets the protection measure by use of protective equipment. class II or by equivalent insulation (412).
NOTES -
1 - When the installation has several origins, this requirement applies to each origin.
2 - When the installation includes several residual current protection devices, their coordination can be carried out in accordance with 535.4.
When a single DDR is placed at the origin of the installation, the entire installation is de-energized in the event of a fault. (figure 531B)
Figure 531B – A single RCD at the origin of the installation Depending on
the characteristics of the installation and the risks considered, it may be necessary to provide RCDs of different sensitivities to protect
different parts of the installation.
On the other hand, it may be desirable to obtain a certain selectivity between the operation of devices located at different levels of the
installation.
When the general protection device implemented at the origin of the installation includes a differential protection function provided by an
independent relay acting on a current emission or undervoltage trigger and sensitive to the measured zero sequence component, this
homopolar component can be measured:
-
either using one or more toroids placed on the active conductors, downstream of the general control device when possible. This
arrangement can be adopted when the number and section of the conductors are compatible with the passage orifices in the toroids;
-
either using a toroid placed on the conductor connecting the neutral point of the transformer to its earth connection (whether or not
the neutral is distributed).
- 235 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
531.2.4.2.2 Choice of DDR characteristics

The value of the rated differential-residual current Iÿn of a RCD must not be greater than that corresponding to
the maximum value of the earthing resistance of the masses of the part of the installation protected by this
device.
Table 53B indicates for the different normal values of rated differential operating current of the RCDs, the
maximum value of the grounding resistance of the masses.
In practice, the value to be taken into consideration for the resistance of the earth connection must take into
account possible seasonal variations.
When it is not possible in practice to measure the resistance of the earth connection of the masses, it must be
ensured that the impedance of the fault loop is not greater than the value indicated in the table 53B.
Table 53B – Maximum value of the earth connection according to the rated current of the RCD
MAXIMUM DIFFERENTIAL-RESIDUAL CURRENT MAXIMUM RESISTANCE VALUE

ASSIGNED TO THE DDR GROUND GROUND (ohms)
(Iÿn)
Low sensitivity 20A 2.5

10A 5
5A 10
3A 17
Medium 1 50
sensitivity A 500 100
mA 300 167
mA 100 mA 500
High ÿ 30mA > 500

sensitivity
The use of type “S” residual current devices is considered to meet the requirements of 411.3.2.2, if the simple
voltage is less than or equal to 230 V.
531.2.4.3 IT diagram
VS 531.2.4.3.1 Case of the first fault If

medium sensitivity differential devices are implemented and if the cutoff at the first fault is not accepted, the
value of the rated differential-residual current Iÿn of the RCD must be greater than the double the value of the
current which flows during a first fault (If).
2×> II ÿnf
The use of high sensitivity RCDs is required for terminal circuits (for example those supplying power sockets
with a rated current less than or equal to 32 A). This RCD generally triggers as soon as a first fault appears
downstream of this device.
- 236 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
531.2.4.3.2 Case of the second fault affecting interconnected masses When RCDs are
used under the conditions of 411.6.4a), one RCD per circuit must be provided.
The operating characteristics of this DR device must be chosen in accordance with Table 41A.
531.2.4.3.3 Case of the second fault affecting non-interconnected masses When, in an

installation, all the masses are not interconnected, a RCD must protect each group of interconnected masses.
The conditions for determining the characteristics of the DDR are those of the TT scheme defined in 411.5.
ÿ 50 RI ÿn HAS
In addition, protection against the risks of indirect contact of each of the circuits placed downstream of this RCD must
be ensured in accordance with the rules of 411.6.4.
531.2.4.3.4 Case of protection of the neutral conductor during the second fault As indicated
in 431.2.2, it is permitted to protect the neutral conductor using a RCD per circuit concerned while respecting the
following conditions: the current rated residual differential is at
- most equal to 0.15 times the admissible current in the corresponding neutral conductor;
- this device must cut all active conductors of the corresponding circuit, including the
neutral conductor.
A differential device meeting the preceding conditions may be common to a set of terminal circuits if all the following
conditions are respected: a) Each of these circuits is protected against indirect
contacts by the overcurrent protection device placed at its origin, in accordance with to the rules set out in 411.6.4.
b) The characteristics of these terminal circuits are identical:

- the pipes are of the same nature or admit the same admissible currents;
- the conductors are of the same section; And
- the overcurrent protection devices have the same rated current and the same tripping characteristic (type B, C
or D).
531.2.5 Use of high sensitivity DDR (/ÿn at most equal to 30 mA)
531.2.5.1 The use of differential-residual current RCDs rated at most equal to 30 mA is a complementary protection
measure against electric shock. As such, they must protect the circuits listed in 411.3.3.
In the case of socket outlets, the differential devices can be implemented either at the origin of the circuit or at the base.
Power interruption resulting from the operation of such devices may disrupt the operation of certain appliances, such
as computer equipment and freezers. Special arrangements can then be made, for example: - power supply via
dedicated 30 mA DDR; - direct power supply by a separation transformer.
531.2.5.2 In a TT system, the use of high-sensitivity RCDs is necessary to ensure protection against indirect contacts
when the resistance of the earth connection has a high value, for example greater than 500 ohms.
- 237 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
If during the measurements, the value of the earth connection resistance, although high, is compatible with the use
of medium sensitivity RCDs, it may however be preferable to provide high sensitivity devices in order to guarantee
safety in the event of an increase in the resistance of the earth connection over time.
531.2.5.3 The use of high sensitivity RCDs is required in particular when the conditions of external influences are
particularly severe or the risks of humidity can harm the good insulation of the equipment. These cases are specified
in parts 7 of this standard.
532 (available)
533 Overcurrent protection devices
533.1 General provisions
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to consider are in particular the following:
Circuit breaker :
(8) - cylindrical cartridge circuit breaker; - circuit
breaker with fuses for alternating current with a nominal voltage equal to 500V - Rules
(9) additional for circuit breaker for industrial uses;
- circuit breaker with fuses for alternating current with a nominal voltage equal to 500V - Circuit breaker
(10)
with knives and cartridges;
Circuit breakers:
- overcurrent protection circuit breakers for domestic installations and
analogues (11) ;
(12) - differential circuit breakers for control panels of first category installations;
(13) - low voltage industrial control equipment - Circuit breakers .
VS
533.1.1 Fuses whose replacement elements may be removed or replaced by persons other than knowledgeable
(BA4) or qualified (BA5) persons must be of a model complying with the safety requirements of the standard in force
- Low voltage fused circuit breaker. Part Three: Additional Rules for Fuses Intended for Use by Unqualified Persons
(8).
Fuses or assemblies containing replacement elements capable of being removed or replaced only by knowledgeable
(BA4) or qualified (BA5) persons must be installed in such a way that it is ensured that the replacement elements
can be removed or replaced. implemented without risk of accidental contact with the active parts.
(8)
Cylindrical cartridge fuses complying with the standard in force can be used in TT and TN installations with a nominal
voltage of 230/400V, but not in IT installations with the same nominal voltage.
VS
533.1.2 Circuit breakers whose operation can be carried out by persons other than knowledgeable (BA4) or qualified
(BA5) must be designed or installed in such a way that it is not possible to modify the setting of their overcurrent
relays without a voluntary action requiring the use of a wrench or tool.
———————
(8) NF C 61-203
(9) NF EN 60269-2 (C 63-210)
(10) NF C 63-213
(11) NF EN 60898 (C 61-410). In the remainder of this standard, these circuit breakers are called domestic.
(12) NF C 62-411
(13) NF EN 60947-2 (C 63-120). In the rest of this standard, these circuit breakers are called industrial.
- 238 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
VS 533.2 Selection of overload protection devices The rated (or setting) current of the
protection device shall be chosen in accordance with 433.2.
The overload protection device must be sensitive to the effective value of the current flowing in the protected circuit.
Circuit breakers equipped with bimetallic strips (especially circuit breakers for domestic use) and fuses are naturally sensitive to
the effective value of the current. Circuit breakers for industrial use can be equipped with electronic trip units which must include
a calculation algorithm allowing the effective value of the current to be taken into account. This failure to take the effective value
into account can generate unwanted tripping (overprotection) if the tripping threshold corresponds to a value lower than the actual
effective current, or to a lack of protection in the opposite case.
In certain cases, to avoid untimely operations, temporary variations in load current must be taken into consideration when
choosing the protection curve.
In the case of cyclic loads, the values of In and I2 must be chosen on the basis of the values of IB and Iz for thermally equivalent
VS
constant loads:
Or
IB is the operating current of the pipeline.
Iz is the admissible current of the pipeline.
In is the rated current of the protection device. is the current

I2 effectively ensuring the operation of the protection device.
The rated currents of fuses and circuit breakers protecting the pipelines against overloads are obtained from the tables in the UTE
C 15-105 guide.
533.3 Selection of short-circuit protection devices
Paragraph 434.5 defines a breaking capacity rule in 434.5.1 and a breaking time rule in 434.5.2.
To comply with these rules, the choice of short-circuit protection devices must respect the following conditions.
533.3.1 Breaking capacity

For all short-circuit protective devices, the maximum expected current at the point of installation of the protective device must be
less than the breaking capacity of that device.
The standards relating to circuit breakers specify a breaking capacity (ultimate I for industrial circuit breakers and rated
cu
Icn for
domestic circuit breakers) which must be at least equal to the maximum presumed short-circuit current at the place where the
circuit breaker is installed.
These standards also provide for a service breaking capacity (Ics). The operating conditions of the installation may justify the
choice of the protection device based on the service breaking capacity, for example when the circuit breaker is placed at the origin
of the installation.
When the installation is carried out according to the IT diagram, the protection devices must also be able to cut off the double
fault current on one pole, under the voltage between phases.
These devices can be:
- or devices whose breaking capacity on one pole under line voltage is at least equal to:
• 0.15 times the three-phase short-circuit current at the point considered if the latter is lower or
equal to 10,000 A,
• 0.25 times the three-phase short-circuit current at the point considered if the latter is greater than
10,000 A.
- 239 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
In the absence of more precise information, it can be assumed that the breaking capacity on a single pole under
the voltage between phases of three-pole and four-pole devices is at least equal to the ultimate three-phase
3 of the circuit concerned.
breaking capacity under a voltage equal to times that of the nominal voltage
For single-pole protection devices (small circuit breakers, fuses), the breaking capacity to be taken into
consideration is that indicated for the voltage between phases, i.e. for example 400 V in a 230/400V installation.
- either devices with a maximum rating greater than or equal to 100 A and for which this capacity is explicitly
recognized in the standards concerning them; this is the case for industrial circuit breakers complying with
appendix H of standard (14).
533.3.2 Cut-off time
The application of the rule in 434.5.2 for short circuits lasting no more than 5 s must take into account the minimum
and maximum short circuit conditions.
This results in the following conditions for fuses and circuit breakers taking into account their different characteristics.
a) case of fuses : the minimum short-circuit current Ik must not be less than Ii (figure
533A).
C Intensity/time curve
corresponding to the admissible
thermal stress in the protected
pipeline.
F Fuse blowing curve

(upper limit of the operating
zone).
I
II
Figure 533A – Fuses – breaking time When the

fuse operating time for current Ii is greater than 5 s, current Ii is replaced by the fuse operating current in 5 s.
b) case of circuit breakers : For circuit breakers, two conditions must be met (figure 533B) : - the minimum
short-circuit current must be at least equal to Ii ; - the presumed short-
circuit current at the circuit breaker installation point must be less than Ij.
———————
(14) NF EN 60947-2 (C 63-120)
- 240 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
C Intensity/time curve
corresponding to the admissible
thermal stress in the protected
pipeline.
D Operating curve of the circuit breaker.
Figure 533B – Circuit breakers – breaking time
Ii is the instantaneous or short delay operating current of the circuit breaker.
The second condition is verified by comparing the through energy I²t of the circuit breaker during the short-circuit
breaking time with the maximum thermal stress admissible by the pipeline.
For short-circuit currents whose duration is greater than several periods, the through energy I²t of the protection
device can be calculated by multiplying the square of the effective value of the intensity of the short-circuit current
by the time of operation of the circuit breaker.
For short-circuit currents of shorter duration, reference should be made to the I²t characteristics provided by the
manufacturer.
The minimum short-circuit current is that corresponding to a clear short circuit occurring at the furthest point from
the protected pipeline, between phase and neutral (Ik1) or between two phases (Ik2) if the neutral is not distributed .
The same protection device generally provides both protection against overloads and protection against short
circuits; it is then not necessary to check the minimum short-circuit current condition.
This is the general case for circuit breakers for domestic and industrial use which have detection relays against
overloads and against short circuits. The same goes for type gG fuses which provide protection against both
overloads and short circuits.
This may not be valid for very long circuits, such as tunnel circuits, exterior lighting circuits. In such cases, the cut-
off time rule must be systematically checked, as recommended, for example by the NF C 17-200 standard for
public lighting circuits.
When the same protection device only provides protection against short circuits, it is generally associated with
another protection device against overloads. As these two systems are coordinated, no additional verification is
required.
This is the case, for example, of motor protection where in the same cabinet, a circuit breaker without an overload
relay is associated with a specific motor thermal relay and a contactor. The different types of association of these
devices are described in the standard (15). These types of association are also possible with fuse circuit breakers
(for example aM type).
———————
(15) NF EN 60947-4-1 (C 63-110)
- 241 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
534 Protective devices against voltage disturbances
534.1 Devices for protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to maneuvers
534.1.1 Nature and role of devices
The devices providing protection against transient overvoltages are surge arresters, isolation transformers
specially designed for this purpose, special filters or a combination of these devices.
Only surge arresters are covered in the rest of this article.

Their choice and implementation must not disrupt the operation of the installation and other protection devices.
They must not present a danger to people or property during their operation, as well as during their possible
destruction.
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standard to consider is the following: Equipment
for installations supplied directly by a low-voltage public distribution network. Surge protectors for low voltage
installations (see standard NF C 61-740).
Article 443 contains the rules for protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to maneuvers.
Surge protectors are intended to limit the level of overvoltages of atmospheric origin coming from the distribution
network to a level compatible with the shock withstand voltage of the equipment in the installation and the
equipment supplied by this installation; In practice, they also provide protection against switching overvoltages.
They protect installations against overvoltages induced in electrical conduits but do not generally protect against
direct lightning strikes on distribution network lines or on buildings. The protection of buildings against lightning is
the subject of standard NF C 17-100 and standard NF C 17-102.
The UTE C 15-443 guide gives more complete indications for the choice and implementation of surge arresters
in low-voltage electrical installations supplied directly by a low-voltage public distribution network.
534.1.2 Location and level of protection provided by surge arresters

VS
534.1.2.1 When surge arresters protect an entire installation, according to the rules of 443, they must have a
level of protection corresponding to the impulse withstand voltage of the equipment to be protected and the
discharge currents determined during the assessment of acceptable risk. They are then placed immediately
downstream of the device providing the sectioning function at the head of the installation.
The cases where it is recommended to provide a surge protector at the origin of an installation are indicated in
443.2 of part 4-44. The impulse withstand voltage of the equipment is indicated in Table 44B.
If the installation includes a general protection device, the surge arrester is placed immediately downstream of
this device.
In the case of delivery stations on poles complying with standard NF C 13-103, the surge arresters are connected
immediately downstream of the D2 circuit breaker installed downstream of the metering and the distribution panel
located in the user's property.
534.1.2.2 A surge protector intended to protect particularly sensitive equipment is installed near this equipment,
on its power circuit. It must have a level of protection and a discharge current coordinated, on the one hand with
the other protection devices, in particular those installed upstream, and on the other hand, with the shock
withstand voltage of the equipment used. .
- 242 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
A surge protector intended to protect material or equipment particularly sensitive to overvoltages can also be placed at the origin of the
installation if this equipment is located near this origin; in this case, it is not necessary to install the surge arresters provided for in
534.1.2.1.
534.1.3 Implementation of surge arresters
534.1.3.1 The surge arresters at the origin of the installation must be connected at least between the following points:
VS
-
If the neutral conductor is connected to earth at the origin of the installation or if the neutral is not distributed:
- between each phase conductor and either the main equipotential connection or the
main protective conductor, following the shortest path.
-
If the neutral conductor is not connected to earth at the origin of the installation:
- between each phase conductor and either the main equipotential connection or the
main protective conductor, and
- between the neutral conductor and either the main equipotential connection or the conductor
main protection, following the shortest path.
534.1.3.2 If a surge arrester is installed at the origin of the installation, downstream of a residual-differential device, the latter must be of
a type which does not trip under the effect of shock currents of 5 kA (waveform 8/20).
A type S or delayed residual current device satisfying the 8/20 current wave test, at the level of 5 kA per manufacturer's declaration,
meets this requirement.
534.1.3.3 Surge arresters must not be installed in premises where there is a risk of fire or explosion (premises BE2 and BE3), unless
special precautions are taken.
VS
534.1.3.4 To ensure optimal protection against overvoltages, the connecting conductors of the surge protector must be as short as
possible (preferably not exceeding 0.5 m in total).
See implementation diagrams in guide 15-443 and principle diagrams in Figure 534A of this article.
NOTES -
VS
1 - Increasing the length of the surge arrester connection conductors reduces the effectiveness of protection against overvoltages.
2 - The connection conductors are those connecting the phase to the surge arrester and connecting the surge arrester to the equipotential connection or
to the protective conductor or to the PEN.
2
The earth conductors of the surge arresters must have a minimum section of 4 mm in copper.
NOTE - In the presence of a lightning rod, this minimum section is 10 mm2 .
534.1.4 Choice of surge arresters
VS
534.1.4.1 Surge arresters must comply with standard (16).
———————
(16) NF EN 61643-11 (C 61-7XX)
- 243 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
VS 534.1.4.2 Surge arresters connected between active conductors and earth must be chosen based on:
a) the maximum steady state voltage Uc of the surge arrester equal to or greater than the values
indicated in the table below:
Table 53C – Choice of voltages Uc and UT
Surge protector connected Network grounding scheme

between
TT TN-C TN-S IT with IT without
distributed neutral distributed neutral
Uc UT Uc UT Uc UT Uc UT Uc UT
phase conductor and neutral 1.1 U0 1.45 U0 NA NA 1.1 U0 1.45 U0 1.1 U0 1.45 U0 NA NA
conductor
NA Voltage Voltage
each phase conductor and PE 1.1 U0 NA NA 1.1 U0 1.45 U0
3 U0 3 U0
between between
(see
note phases (see note 2) (see note 2)
phases
2)
neutral conductor and PE U0 (see note NA NA NA U0 (see note 2) NA U0 (see NA NA NA

2) note
2)
each phase conductor and NA NA 1.1 U0 1.45 U0 NA NA NA NA NA NA
PEN
NA: not applicable

NOTES -
1 - U0 is the simple voltage of the low voltage network.
2 - These values relate to the most unfavorable fault conditions, so the 10% tolerance is not taken into account.
This table comes from standard NF EN 61643-11.
The maximum steady state voltage Uc is the admissible specified value of the effective voltage at industrial frequency which can be applied
continuously between the terminals of the surge arrester. UT characterizes the temporary overvoltage at industrial frequency due to faults
on the LV network.
VS The surge protector must withstand a minimum temporary overvoltage UT as defined in Table 53C without modification of its
characteristics or functionality.
b) temporary overvoltages at industrial frequency due to faults on the HV network, the maximum value of which is conventionally
taken equal to 1200 V between neutral and earth and 1200 V + U0 between phase and earth.
Temporary overvoltages are defined in 442. c) of the presumed

VS discharge current: At the origin of an installation
supplied by the public distribution network, the recommended nominal discharge current is 5 kA (waveform 8/20) . More stringent criteria
(very high exposure, presence of lightning rod, low impedance of the discharge circuit, etc.) may lead to the choice of higher values. d) the
level of protection of the surge arrester (Up) coordinated with the impulse withstand voltage of the
material to be protected.
- 244 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
e) the presence of other surge arresters in the same installation.

VS
The manufacturer must indicate the arrangements to be made to ensure their mutual coordination, in particular
for surge arresters with a protection level other than that at the origin of the installation, intended to protect user
equipment comprising sensitive electronic circuits.
NOTE - Overvoltage protection devices incorporated in user equipment are not taken into consideration for this coordination.
f) In the presence of a lightning rod, the study of the lightning protection system makes it possible to evaluate
the additional constraint for the network on which the lightning rod is installed.
In this case, a surge protector must be placed at the origin of the installation.
This surge protector must have the following characteristics:
- Type 1; -
minimum impulse current Iimp = 12.5 kA; -
maximum protection level Up of 2.5 kV.
A type 2 arrester is tested with a lightning current of form 8/20 while a type 1 arrester is tested with a lightning
current of longer duration (generally of form 10/350).
For the sizing and implementation of surge arresters, see the UTE C 15-443 guide.
In the case of buildings incorporating the transformer station, if the neutral earth connection of the transformer
is confused with the earth connection of the masses interconnected to the earth connection of the lightning rod,
the installation of lightning arresters is not obligatory.
When the type 1 surge protector can be implemented at the origin of the installation and if the building is higher
than 10 m, in order to distribute the stresses between the floors, it is recommended to also install type 2 surge
arresters (at the origin of each private installation or on each floor) coordinated with the type 1 surge arrester
originally placed. Information on this coordination is provided by the manufacturers.
When the type 1 surge protector cannot be implemented at the origin of the installation and if the building has
several private installations, the type 1 surge protector is replaced by type 2 surge protectors (In ÿ 5 kA) placed
at the origin of each private installation.
Taking into account the UTE C 15-443 guide.
534.1.4.3 The surge protector installed at the origin of a 230/400 V installation must have a maximum protection
level Up of 2.5 kV at the nominal discharge current.
This level of protection is compatible with the resistance of future equipment using normal shock withstand
voltage.
534.1.5 Protective measures
534.1.5.1 Means must be implemented to indicate that the surge arrester no longer ensures its protective
function.
NOTE - In these circumstances, certain circuits supplying sensitive equipment may need to be opened or rescued.
534.1.5.2 Surge protectors must be arranged so that in the event of failure, there is no risk of fire or explosion.
When necessary, the manufacturer must indicate, in its documentation, the appropriate types of protection for
the surge arrester against these risks.
534.1.5.3 Protective devices against short circuits, thermal runaway and against earth fault currents must be
provided to ensure disconnection of the surge arrester.
These devices must be coordinated with any upstream protection and with the rated discharge current of the
surge arrester. Provisions must be made to avoid risks of unavailability of the electrical supply in the event of
failure of the surge arresters placed at the origin of the installation.
The protection devices are incorporated or placed in series with the surge arresters. When incorporated, they
are called disconnectors.
Refer to the UTE C 15-443 guide in 6.3.1.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
If the general control and protection device of the installation is a connection circuit breaker with the differential
function, this is type “S”. Thus, the operation of the surge protector installed downstream will not cause the
connection circuit breaker to open in the event of operation due to an overvoltage.
534.1.5.4 Once installed, surge arresters and their possible protection devices must not create, at the end of
their life, a connection between neutral and earth.
534.1.5.5 Protection against indirect contacts, in accordance with part 4-41, must remain ensured in the protected
building, even in the event of failure of the surge arresters: - in a TN scheme, this
requirement is generally satisfied by protection devices
against overcurrents upstream of surge arresters;
- in TT and IT schemes, this requirement is generally met by installing the surge protector downstream of a RCD.
534.1.6 Signaling devices The protection

devices defined in 534.1.5.3 must be equipped with a luminous, mechanical or audible signaling device indicating
the disconnection of the surge arrester from the rest of the installation.
In this case, the surge protector will have to be replaced.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
F1
VS
L1
L2
L3
PEN PE
NOT
F2
5b
xx
4
5a 6
3
R.B. AR
Figure 534A – Implementation of surge arresters in TN diagram
F1
L1
L2
Iÿ L3
PE
NOT
NOT
7
F2
x x
4
5b
5a
6
R.B.
3
AR
Figure 534B – Implementation of surge arresters in TT diagram

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
VS
F1
L1
Iÿ L2
L3
PE
7
F2
No connection
5b
to earth or
Z xx
high
impedance 4
5a
6
R.B.
3
AR
Figure 534C – Implementation of surge arresters in IT diagram
Legend for figures 534A to 534C
3 Main earth terminal F1 protection device at the origin of the installation

4 Surge protector ensuring protection of F2 protective device prescribed by the manufacturer
Category 2 surge protectors
5 earth connection of the surge arrester, either 5a or 5b RA earth connection (earth resistance) of the installation
6 Equipment to be protected RB earth connection (earth resistance) of the power supply
7 Differential current protection device

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
534.2 Power frequency surge protection devices
534.2.1 Nature and role of surge protectors
The devices providing protection against power frequency surges are surge limiters.
They are intended to limit the level of industrial frequency overvoltages to a level compatible with the industrial
frequency withstand voltage of the equipment in the installation and the equipment powered by this installation.
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standard to be considered is the following: - Surge limiters, Rules (17).
534.2.2 Selection of surge protectors
The choice of surge protectors must take into account the following criteria:
- nominal voltage of the installation;
- insulation level of the installation;
- connection mode of the surge protector;
- presumed short-circuit current at the origin of the installation.
534.2.3 Effective level of protection provided by a surge protector depending on its connection method
When the surge limiter is connected between the neutral of the low voltage installation and earth, the effective
level of protection provided by the limiter is equal to the sum of the nominal 100% starting voltage at industrial
frequency of the limiter and of the voltage between phase and neutral of the installation.
When the overvoltage limiter is connected between a phase of the low voltage installation and the earth, the level
of protection provided by the limiter is equal to the sum of the nominal 100% starting voltage at industrial
frequency of the limiter and the voltage between phases of the installation.
The conductor connecting the input terminal of the surge protector to the active conductors must be insulated in
the same way as these. The terminal must be protected against direct contact.
534.2.4 Installation of surge protectors
The conductors connecting the surge protector on the one hand to the active conductors and, on the other hand,
either to the earth connection of the installation masses, or to a separate earth connection, must be able to
withstand all the currents likely to occur. to cross the limiter.
The section of these conductors is determined in accordance with the indications given for the section of protective conductors (see 543.1).
The input terminal of the surge protectors must be connected to the appropriate live conductor of the installation
between the output terminal of the transformer and any switching device.
When an installation is supplied by several transformers operating in parallel, a surge limiter must be provided for
each transformer.
If the characteristics of the short-circuit current likely to pass through the surge protector are likely to be greater than those it can withstand, a
low value impedance can be inserted between the earth terminal of the surge protector and earth. This impedance can be inserted into the
ground common to several surge protectors.
Table 53C indicates, for each standardized model of surge protector, the conditions in which three-phase low-voltage installations are protected
when in IT diagram, a surge limiter is installed either between neutral and earth or between a phase and Earth.
———————
(17) NF C 63-150
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
Table 53D – Effective level of protection provided by a surge protector
LIMITER CONNECTED BETWEEN LIMITER CONNECTED BETWEEN
TENSION NEUTRAL AND GROUND PHASE AND EARTH
NOMINAL Constraint Tension Level of Constraint Tension Level of
OF Of voltage nominal protection Of voltage nominal protection
INSTALLATION eligible of effective eligible of effective
limiter limiter
(V) (V) (V) (V) (V) (V) (V)
127/220 1,330 250 880 1,330 250 970
230/400 1,430 440 1,330 1,430 440 1,320
400/690 1,600 440 1,500
534.2.5 Grounding
The ground terminal of the surge protectors must be connected:
a) either to the earth connection of the installation masses;
b) either to a separate earth connection having a resistance RB satisfying the condition of

442.2.6.1.
The provisions of this subparagraph are intended to prevent the appearance of dangerous voltages.
When an insulation fault occurs between the installation circuits and higher voltage circuits, the passage of the corresponding current in the
earth connection of the surge limiter brings the equipment of the installation to a potential that risks compromising their insulation.
534.3 Protective devices against the effects of voltage drops
The protection devices must allow motors to start when the voltage is not less than 85% of the nominal voltage and intervene without failure
when the voltage is less than approximately 80% of the nominal voltage at the nominal frequency and with time delay if necessary.
Voltage brownout protection devices are chosen from the following:
- voltage drop relay acting on a switch or circuit breaker; - contactors comprising a self-powering contact
(called “3 wires”).
Voltage drop protection devices may be delayed if the operation of the device it protects can easily accommodate an interruption or a short
voltage drop, for example 2 seconds.
If contactors are used, delayed opening and reclosing must in no case prevent instantaneous cut-off by control or protection devices.
535 Coordination between different protection devices
535.1 Selectivity between overcurrent protection devices
Selectivity between overcurrent protection devices is the coordination between the operating characteristics of several overcurrent protection
devices of

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
such that when overcurrents appear within given limits, the device intended to operate between these limits
operates, while (the) others do not operate.
Different types of selectivity are possible:
- Partial selectivity: Selectivity during an overcurrent in which, in the presence of two overcurrent protection
devices placed in series, the downstream protection device provides protection up to a given overcurrent
level without causing the operation of the overcurrent other protective device;
- Total selectivity: Selectivity during an overcurrent in which, in the presence of two overcurrent protection
devices placed in series, the downstream protection device provides protection without causing the operation
of the other protection device.
Different means are used to achieve the 2 types of selectivity in the case where the protection devices are circuit
breakers:
- Amperometric selectivity: It is based on a shift in intensity of the protection curves
time/ current;
- Chronometric selectivity: It is based on a temporal shift of the protection curves
time/ current;
- Energy selectivity: It is based on the capacity of the downstream protection device to limit the energy passing
through it to a value lower than that necessary to trigger the upstream device.
Figure 535A – Types of selectivity
When several protection devices are placed in series and when safety or operational requirements justify it, their
operating characteristics must be chosen so as to eliminate only the part of the installation in which the fault is
located.
In practice, the selectivity between two gG type fuses can be considered assured if the ratio of their rated currents
is at least equal to 2.5.
Chronometric selectivity between protection devices can only be obtained by comparing the operating
characteristics of the protection devices concerned and by verifying that for any short-circuit current the non-
operation time of the device placed upstream is greater than the time total operating time of the device placed
downstream.
- 251 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
When the protection devices are circuit breakers, the superposition of the time/ current curves makes it possible
to qualify amperometric and chronometric selectivity up to the instantaneous tripping threshold of the upstream
circuit breaker (if the upstream circuit breaker has an intentional delay greater than that of the downstream
circuit breaker) ; this is then generally obtained as soon as the ratio of the thermal (long delay in the case of
electronic trigger) and magnetic (short delay in the case of electronic trigger) protection settings is greater than
1.6.
If the circuit breakers are instantaneous tripping (without intentional delay), it is necessary to consult the energy
selectivity tables given by the manufacturers and carried out according to the tests prescribed by the product
standards on circuit breakers.
When the protection devices are of a different nature (for example circuit breakers with fuses and circuit
breakers), the search for selectivity requires the comparison of the actual operating characteristic curves
provided by the manufacturers.
535.2 Accompanying Protection Between Overcurrent Protective Devices Accompanying protection of

two overcurrent protective devices is overcurrent protection, in which the protective device, which is usually,
but not necessarily, located on either side source, performs overcurrent protection with or without the aid of the
other protective device and prevents undue stress on it (see 434.5.1).
When several protection devices are placed in series, they can be coordinated so that in the event of a
downstream short circuit, the upstream protection device acts to limit the energy passing through the devices
located downstream to a value lower than that that the downstream devices and the pipelines protected by
these devices can support in accordance with 434-3 .
When the downstream protection device is a circuit breaker and the upstream protection device is a fuse or a
circuit breaker, this technique allows the downstream circuit breaker to have a reinforced ultimate breaking
capacity Icu .
When the series protection devices are circuit breakers, the accompanying protection is called filiation.
- 252 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
II Icu Icu
Figure 535Ba - Time/current curves Figure 535Bb - Energy/current curves

C1 = Non-current limiting circuit breaker (N)
C2 = Current limiting circuit breaker (L)
Ii = Intersection current
The downstream circuit breaker C1, if it were alone, would have an energy limitation curve which would follow
the curve C1 then the phantom curve after the current Ii : its breaking capacity would be Icu..
When it is associated with the upstream circuit breaker C2 up to point Ii, the energy limited by C1 being lower
than the tripping energy of C2 (curve C1 below the curve C2), only C1 opens.
From the intersection point Ii, the energy limited by C1 becomes equal to the tripping energy of C2, the 2 circuit
breakers will open simultaneously and the association will limit the energy more strongly than circuit breaker C1
alone ; therefore its breaking capacity goes from Icu (C1) to Icu (C1 + C2).
To determine the characteristics of the connection, it is not possible to compare the characteristics of the circuit
breakers: it is necessary to request connection tables from the manufacturer established in accordance with the
tests prescribed in the product standards on circuit breakers.
535.3 Association between residual current protection devices and overcurrent protection devices
VS 535.3.1 When a residual current protection device is incorporated or combined with an overcurrent protection
device, the characteristics of the entire device (breaking capacity, operating characteristics as a function of the
rated current) must meet the rules in 433 and 434 and 533.2 and 533.3.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
VS
535.3.2 When a residual current protection device is neither incorporated nor combined with an overcurrent
protection device (differential switch): - The rated current of such a device when placed upstream of
several circuits must be: • either greater than or equal to the sum of the rated currents of the protection devices
placed downstream or at the operating current calculated by the designer;

• is greater than or equal to the rated current of the protection device located directly in
upstream.
In the particular case of installations in residential premises, see table 771E.
- The device must be able to withstand without damage the thermal and mechanical stresses that it is likely to
undergo in the event of a short circuit occurring downstream of the place where it is installed, even if, as a
result of a current imbalance or current flowing to ground, the device opens by itself.
RCDs which are neither incorporated nor combined with an overcurrent protection device, but which have a cut-
off device, are called “differential switches”. In practice, their breaking capacity is most often lower than the
presumed short-circuit current at the installation point. In this case, they must be combined with a short-circuit
protection device determined according to the coordination characteristics provided by the manufacturer.
A RCD can trip when a short-circuit current greater than six times its rated current In passes through it.
535.4 Selectivity between residual current protection devices
The diagrams in Figures 535C to 535F show the possible arrangements, indicating the corresponding advantages
and disadvantages.
VS
535.4.1 When several RCDs are planned in the same installation and if selectivity is required, they can be
arranged according to one of the following methods:
a) either the devices are placed at the head of each part of the installation by subdividing this
last in as many parts as appropriate (535.4.2),
NOTE - The overall selectivity of the installation can be improved by good implementation of 314.1, i.e. by subdividing the RCDs protecting
the divisional and terminal circuits in order to limit the consequences of a fault to a minimum of applications.
b) either the devices are placed in cascade. In the latter case, we must ensure the
selectivity between devices located in series (535.4.3).
535.4.2 Selection of circuits

In this case, the installation does not initially include any RCD but all feeders must be protected (individually or in
groups) by medium or high sensitivity RCDs depending on the risks considered.
In the event of a fault, only the device protecting the corresponding feeder operates.
This scheme is only permitted if appropriate means are implemented to protect against earth faults in the
installation part between the general circuit breaker and the differential devices.
These appropriate means may result from the use of class II equipment or from the application of the “additional
insulation” protection measure against indirect contact (see 412).

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
Figure 535C – Devices at the head of each part of the installation
535.4.3 Selectivity between residual current protection devices The selectivity between residual current
protection devices may be total or partial.
535.4.3.1 Total selectivity
Total selectivity between residual current protection devices arranged in series may be prescribed for safety or
operational reasons, so as to maintain the power supply to the parts of the installation not affected by the
possible fault.
This selectivity can be obtained by the choice and implementation of differential-residual current protection
devices which, while ensuring the required protection to the different parts of the installation, only interrupt the
power supply to the parts of the installation in downstream of the device installed upstream of the fault location
and close to it.
To ensure the total selectivity of two differential-residual current protection devices in series, the time/current
non-operation characteristic of the device placed upstream must be above the time/current operating
characteristic of the device placed downstream .
This is explained by :
a) the rated differential-residual operating current of the device placed upstream must be greater than that of the
device placed downstream,
b) the operating time of the device placed upstream must be greater than that of the device
placed downstream for all fault current values.
Total selectivity can be achieved by using, for example, a delayed device for the one placed upstream, and whose rated differential-
residual current is at least equal to 3 times that of the device placed downstream.
It is necessary to ensure that the maximum breaking time of each device meets the protection conditions defined in 411.3.2.
- 255 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
The examples below show illustrations of the rules of total selectivity.

t
HAS
Figure 535D – Total selectivity
Devices A (downstream) and B (upstream) have operating characteristics such that both
conditions a) and b) are satisfied.
Differential
connection The device located downstream is a RCD with a
circuit breaker (500 rated differential current equal to 30 mA .
mA) type “S” The device upstream is a differential connection
circuit breaker (500 mA) of type “S”.
Figure 535E – Two levels of selectivity
The device located furthest downstream is a 30

Differential mA RCD.
circuit breaker
1 The intermediate device is a RCD with a delay of
Delayed 200 ms
50 ms and a rated differential current of 300 mA.
The
device placed upstream is a RCD with a delay of
200 ms and a rated differential current of 1 A.
Figure 535F – Three levels of selectivity
- 256 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
In all cases, the resistance of the earth connection must be appropriate for the largest rated differential current
RCD, i.e. in practice that placed at the origin of the circuit supplying the protected building.
535.4.3.2 Partial selectivity If

one of the conditions a and b in 535.4.3.1 (total selectivity) is not satisfied, the selectivity is partial.
Selectivity between two non-timed devices, one with medium sensitivity and the other with high sensitivity (for
example 500 mA or 300 mA and 30 mA) is almost zero, the fault currents sufficient to trigger the upstream
device.
Selectivity between an “S” type medium sensitivity device (for example 500 mA) and a non-timed medium
sensitivity device (for example 300 mA) is almost total, the delay of the upstream device generally making it
possible to eliminate the fault by the only downstream device.
536 Control and sectioning devices
536.1 General
Any disconnecting or control device must comply with the rules of Part 4-46.
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are indicated in Table 53E.
Attention is drawn to the fact that for certain applications, such as motor control, the control devices must be
able to withstand starting currents.
Protection or control devices may provide the disconnection function provided that they meet the conditions
set out in 536.2
If a device is used for more than one function, it must meet the requirements for each of these functions.
Table 53E indicates the functions that protection, control and isolation devices can provide.
In some cases, additional requirements may be necessary for combined functions.
For the choice of the rated current of these devices, the requirements of paragraph 535.3.2 apply, except for
devices providing only functional control.
The devices providing only functional control are mainly those installed on the terminal circuits for lighting
control, VMC, etc.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
Table 53E – Functions provided by protection, control and

sectioning
Device Standard Sectioning Cut Order

emergency functional
switches C 63-130 S 00
C 61-150 and C 61-151
C 63-140 to C 63-145
contactors C 63-110, C 63-111 S 0 0
Household circuit breakers C 61-410, C 61-440 0 0 0

Industrial circuit breakers C 63-120 S 0 0
remote switches C 61-800 X X 0
Outlets 0 0(4) 0
(ÿ 32 A)
Outlets 0 X(3) X
(>32A)
ACP (2) C 63-161 S 0 0
Fused circuit breaker C 61-203 0 XX
C 63-213
Semiconductor X X 0
0 Function assured.
X Function not provided.
S Function ensured if the device is recognized as suitable for sectioning by its standard.
(2) Connection, control and protection device.
(3) The joining or separation of the two constituents of rated current sockets greater than 32 A
must only be carried out without load.
(4) If accessible.
536.2 Sectioning devices
536.2.1 Disconnecting devices must effectively cut off all live conductors
VS
power supply of the circuit considered taking into account the provisions in 461.2.
The equipment used for sectioning must comply with subparagraphs 536.2.1.1 to
536.2.5.
The devices providing the sectioning function can be:

- either devices for which the sectioning function is explicitly recognized by the
standards concerning them, in which case compliance with the rules in 536.2.1.1 and 536.2.1.2 is
considered satisfied by compliance with their standard;
- or other devices which must then satisfy all the rules in 536.2.
536.2.1.1 Isolating devices must meet the following two conditions:

VS
a) support when new and in clean and dry conditions, in the open position, between the
terminals of each pole, an impulse voltage whose value is given in table 53F in
function of the nominal voltage of the installation.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
VS
Table 53F – Impulse withstand voltage for disconnecting devices
Rated voltage of the Impulse withstand voltage for

installation disconnecting devices
(V) (kV)
230/400 5
400/690 8
1,000 10
The impulse withstand voltages in Table 53F are equal to 1.25 times those corresponding to the overvoltage
category of distribution and terminal circuits (category ///), as set in Table 44B of 443.
The values in table 53F are valid for both alternating current and direct current.
In practice, shock resistance tests are not carried out if the following minimum contact opening distances are
respected:
- for single-cut devices:
• 4 mm for nominal voltage 230/400 V;
• 8 mm for nominal voltage 400/690 V;
• 11 mm for nominal voltage 1000 V.
- for double-break devices, the sum of the contact opening distances must be at least equal to 1.25 times the
above value.
For voltages other than those in Table 53F, the minimum contact separation distance is that corresponding to the
next higher rated voltage.
b) have a leakage current through the open poles not greater than
VS
- 0.5 mA per pole when new and in clean, dry conditions, and
- 6 mA per pole at the end of their conventional lifespan determined by the corresponding standard,
under a test voltage applied between the terminals of each pole and equal to 110% of the nominal voltage
between phase and neutral of the installation. When the test is carried out with direct current, the value of the
direct current voltage must be equal to the effective value of the test voltage in alternating current.
536.2.1.2 The opening distance between the contacts of the device must be visible or be clearly and reliably
indicated corresponding to the “Off” or “Open” position. Such an indication should only appear when the distance
between the opening contacts has been reached on each pole of the device.
NOTE - The marking prescribed in this paragraph can be carried out by the use of the graphic symbols “O” and “I” indicating respectively the “Open” and
“Closed” positions when the use of these symbols is permitted by the corresponding standard of the material.
Visibility or clear and reliable indication of the position of the contacts corresponds to the requirement regarding
fully visible disconnection prescribed in certain texts.
Switches and circuit breakers for domestic use that comply with their standards are accepted as suitable for the
isolation function. The indication of the standard therefore acts as a marking for sectioning.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
For devices for industrial use, the ability to disconnect is an optional function.
It is for this reason that specific marking is provided for devices performing the sectioning function:
In the case of devices capable of disconnecting, the position indicated by “O” corresponds to the “open-
disconnected” position while this same indication corresponds to the “open” position for non-disconnecting devices.
536.2.1.3 Semiconductor devices shall not be used as disconnecting devices.

VS
536.2.2 Isolating devices must be designed or installed to prevent unintentional closing.
NOTE - Such a closure could be caused, for example, by shocks or vibrations or by untimely maneuvers.
536.2.3 Provisions must be made to protect disconnecting devices against accidental or unauthorized opening
under load.
NOTE - This can be achieved by placing the device in a lockable location or enclosure or by locking it up. Another solution may consist of
interlocking the off-load device with an on-load operating device (opening or closing).
536.2.4 The means of sectioning must preferably be provided by a multi-pole breaking device cutting off all the
poles of the corresponding power supply.
NOTE - Sectioning of a circuit can be ensured for example by means of: - disconnectors,
switch-disconnectors; - circuit breakers recognized
as suitable for isolation by their standard; - outlets ; - fuse replacement
elements; - barrettes; -
specially designed terminals not requiring the
movement of a
conductor; - ACP recognized as suitable for sectioning by their standard.
Section 530.3.2 prohibits the installation of single-pole devices in the neutral conductor of polyphase circuits.
VS 536.2.5 Devices used for sectioning shall be clearly identified, for example by marking, to indicate the circuit
which they section.
The single-pole disconnecting devices of each circuit are separated from the disconnecting devices of other
circuits by sufficient space to avoid any error.
536.3 Emergency cutting devices

VS
536.3.1 The devices ensuring emergency cut-off must be able to cut off the full load current of the corresponding
part of the installation, taking into account, possibly, stalled motor currents.
For stalled rotor currents, the risks of motors not starting should be taken into account.
In practice, the starting current of the most powerful motor must be taken into account in addition to the full load
currents of the other motors.
VS 536.3.2 Emergency cutting means may consist of:
- either a cutting device capable of directly cutting off the appropriate power supply; - either a
combination of devices implemented by a single action for cutting the
the appropriate diet.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
VS Power sockets with a rated rating greater than 32 A must not be used to provide emergency disconnection.
NOTE - The emergency cut-off can, for example, be carried out by means of: - switches in the main
circuit; - push buttons and the like in control circuits.
536.3.3 Emergency cut-off devices must ensure the cut-off of the main circuit. They can be :
- either with direct manual control;

- either electrically controlled, such as circuit breakers, contactors, ACP; in this case, they open due to lack
of voltage or current emission.
536.3.4 The control means (handles, push buttons, etc.) of emergency cut-off devices must be clearly identified.
536.3.5 The control means of an emergency cut-off device must be able to be locked or immobilized in the cut-
off position, unless the control means for the emergency cut-off and for re-powering are all two under the
supervision of the same person.
After releasing the control member of the emergency cut-off device, re-powering the corresponding part of the
installation must require intentional action.
The operation of the emergency device takes priority over any other function not relating to safety and must not
be inhibited by the normal operation of the installation.
536.3.6 When it is necessary to act on several switching devices, the action on a single control device must
cause the opening of all these devices.
536.4 Cutting devices for mechanical maintenance
Switching devices for mechanical maintenance must perform the sectioning function and the emergency cutting
function.
536.5 Functional control devices
VS
536.5.1 Functional control devices must be suitable for the most severe conditions in which they may be
required to operate.
NOTE - The functional control can, for example, be carried out by means of:
- switches;
- semiconductor control devices; - circuit breakers; - contactors;
- remote switches; rated
current sockets at most
equal to 32 A; -
- connection, control and protection devices (ACP).
536.5.2 Functional control devices can interrupt the current without necessarily opening the corresponding
poles.
NOTE - Semiconductor control devices and certain control auxiliaries are examples of devices capable of interrupting current in the circuit but not necessarily cutting
the corresponding poles.
536.5.3 Disconnectors, fuses and strips must not be used for functional control.
- 261 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
537 Monitoring devices
537.1 Permanent insulation monitors (PIC)
VS 537.1.1 In accordance with the rule set out in 411.6.5, a permanent insulation monitor must be installed in
installations in IT diagram.
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standard to be considered is the following: -
Permanent insulation monitoring devices (18).
Please note that protection against indirect contact is only ensured if protection in the event of a double fault has
been implemented.
Arrangements are made for the investigation and elimination of the first fault as soon as the operating conditions
of the installation allow it.
537.1.2 Installation of permanent insulation monitors When the

neutral conductor is distributed, the “network” terminal of the CPI is connected to the neutral conductor as close
as possible to the origin of the installation whose insulation it monitors, without interposition no overcurrent
protection equipment.
When the neutral conductor is not distributed, the “network” terminal of the CPI can be connected:
- either to an artificial neutral point of three impedances connected to the phase conductors at
proximity to the origin of the installation;
- or to a phase conductor.
In the case where the CPI is connected between a phase and earth, it must have a voltage withstand between its
“network” terminal and its “earth” terminal at least equal to the voltage between phases. This voltage appears at
these terminals in the event of a first insulation fault on another phase.
For direct current installations, the “network” terminal of the CPI is connected either directly to the compensator if
it exists, or to one of the poles of the source.
The “earth” terminal of the CPI must be connected to the nearest earth connection to the installation grounds.
The CPI power supply circuit is connected either to the installation on the same circuit as the connection point of
the “network” terminal and as close as possible to the origin of the installation, or to an auxiliary source at high
reliability.
In the first case, this circuit must be protected against overcurrents by appropriate protection devices whose
breaking capacity is at least equal to the presumed short-circuit current at its installation point.
———————
(18) NF EN 61557-8 (C 42-198-8)
- 262 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
The connection point to the installation must be

chosen so that the CPI is able to monitor the
insulation of the installation under all operating
conditions.
In installations where the transformer station is far
from the use, it is permitted to connect the CPI to the
neutral earth connection of the installation.
When the CPI power circuit is connected between

phase and neutral, protective devices must be
installed as indicated in 431.2.2.
Attention is drawn to the fact that due to their

proximity to the origin of the installation, it may be
necessary to provide protection devices with
significant breaking capacity.
When an installation is supplied by several power Figure 537A – Connection of a CPI

sources in parallel, a permanent insulation controller Example of connection of a permanent insulation
is necessary per power source, provided that they monitor in an installation where no point is directly
are interlocked so that only one CPI remains connected to earth (insulated neutral): the CPI is
connected to the installation. Each permanent inserted between the neutral point of the transformer
insulation controller monitors the disconnected and the nearest earth ground.
power source, thus allowing the reconnection of this
source without prior insulation fault.
537.1.3 Adjustment of permanent insulation monitors
A permanent insulation monitor provided in accordance with 411.6.5 is a device which continuously monitors
the insulation of an electrical installation. It is intended to signal any significant reduction in the insulation level
of the installation in order to find the cause before a second fault occurs, thus avoiding cutting off the power
supply.
Consequently, it is set at a value lower than that corresponding to the natural insulation of the installation when
it operates normally with the maximum connected loads.
The lower the setting of the permanent insulation controller, the easier the fault search will be because it corresponds
to the maximum earth leakage current and the maximum current injected by the associated fault search system.
Low insulation resistance does not create any danger for the user. Therefore, setting the alarm threshold to a low
value (~ 500 of the CPI) allows the search to be launched only inÿ)the event of a real fault. A second CPI prevention
threshold, set at a lower value of approximately 50% to the insulation resistance of the entire installation, allows
warning in the event of a drop in network insulation requiring a check of the entire installation.
In fact, a drop in insulation resistance can sometimes result not from the existence of a clear insulation fault, but from
a general reduction in the insulation of an installation, a reduction due for example to the presence of humidity
following a prolonged shutdown of all or part of the installation or a user device. In such cases, commissioning the
installation makes it possible to raise the insulation to a value greater than the CPI prevention setting threshold.
Permanent insulation monitors must be designed or installed in such a way that it is only possible to change
their setting using a key or tool or a code.
- 263 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
537.1.4 Choice of permanent insulation monitors The

characteristics involved in the choice of the CPI are:
a) The value of the admissible current in the CPI:
The IPCs are designed so that the current through the device does not exceed 30 mA, even in the event of a clear fault.
For certain applications (operating theater, for example), lower current values may be prescribed; CPIs specially
designed for this purpose must then be used.
b) The nature of the measuring current:
Regarding the nature of the current, the most commonly used CPIs are:
- those which apply direct voltage to the installation;

- those which apply an alternating voltage to the installation.
The first provide an indication of the insulation resistance but their indications risk being disrupted by an insulation fault
occurring downstream of a rectifier element of the monitored installation. They are sufficient for installations with few or
no rectifier elements supplied without the intermediary of transformers.
The second indicate the value of the insulation resistance and the leakage reactances of the installation measured at
the frequency of the measurement source: to reduce the influence of these reactances, the CPIs generally use a
frequency significantly lower than that of the monitored installation. These devices are particularly suitable for alternating
current installations with numerous rectifier elements and for direct current installations.
Devices of simplified design, the principle of which is to detect the appearance of a first fault by a comparison method,
devices which are not covered by the standard in force (19), and which do not monitor the insulation of the artificial
midpoint, are permitted in certain special cases of direct current installation with 2 conductors isolated from earth,
provided that:
- the insulation of all distributed active conductors is monitored; - all the masses of
the installation are connected together;
- the conductors of the circuits are arranged in such a way as to make the risk of an earth fault improbable, for example
made up of cables considered to be class II (table 52A).
537.2 Permanent insulation monitors for monitoring de-energized equipment
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standard to be considered is the following: Permanent
insulation monitoring devices (19).
In TT or TN system installations, when safety equipment is only called upon in the event of a disaster, that is to say
when the safety equipment is normally in a standby state, a permanent controller de-energized insulation must
continuously monitor this equipment during periods of non-operation.
The reduction in insulation will be signaled by a light or sound device with the possibility of sending the information
remotely.
The permanent de-energized insulation monitor must be connected between earth and a live conductor of the
equipment to be monitored. The measuring circuit will be cut off automatically when the equipment is powered on.
———————
(19) NF EN 61557-8 (C 42-198-8)

- 264 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
As the equipment is separated from the network when measuring insulation without voltage, the insulation levels
to be measured are generally very high: the alarm threshold will generally have a value greater than 300 kÿ.
537.3 Fault location device
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standard to be considered is the following:
Permanent insulation monitoring devices (20).
In cases where the IT diagram has been chosen for reasons of continuity of service, it is strongly recommended
to associate with permanent insulation controllers devices allowing the localization of insulation faults under
voltage. Their function is to detect the faulty feeder when the permanent insulation controller has detected its
presence.
The time spent searching for the faulty feeder is thus significantly reduced because it avoids cutting the circuits
one by one when the installation no longer supplies the priority circuits.
Residual current devices having only detection and measurement functions (such as toroids installed at a fixed
position on the various circuits of the installation or mobile clamps associated with measuring devices) can be
used for more precise location of the insulation faults.
________________
———————
(20) NF EN 61557-8 (C 42-198-8)
- 265 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53
(Blank page)
- 266 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
Part 5-54 – Earthing, protective and equipotential conductors
541 General ................................................ .................................................. .................268 542 Earthing

installations ......................... .................................................. ...........268 543 Protective
conductors ........................................ .................................................. ........271 544 Equipotential
conductors .................................. .................................................. 276 545 Earthing arrangements and
functional equipotential connections..............................277
Annex A – (normative) – Method for calculating the factor k in 543.1.2 .................................. ..279
Annex B – (normative) – Example of earthing installation .................................. ....283
Appendix C – (informative) – Earth connections ........................................ ...................................284
- 267 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
541 General
VS 541.1 Scope and purpose
This part deals with earthing arrangements, protective conductors and equipotential connections in order to meet the safety requirements
and functional requirements of the electrical installation.
541.2 Definitions
The definitions used for earthing, protective conductors and equipotential bonding conductors are illustrated in Appendix B.
542 Earthing installations
542.1 General requirements
542.1.1 Earthing arrangements may be used both or separately for protective reasons and functional reasons depending on the needs
of the electrical installation. Protection requirements must be given priority.
542.1.2 All earth connections in the same building must be interconnected (grounding of low-voltage masses, functional earth, lightning
conductor earth).
In the case of several buildings of the same installation, it is recommended to interconnect the earth connections of the different buildings.
542.1.3 Attention must be paid to the provisions relating to earthing connections used at high and low voltage (see 442).
VS
542.1.4 The choice and implementation of equipment ensuring earthing must be such
that :
-
the value of the earthing resistance complies with the protection and operating rules of the installation and is assumed to be
maintained such that the earth fault currents and leakage currents can circulate
-
without danger, particularly from the point of view thermal, thermomechanical and electromechanical constraints, solidity or
mechanical protection is ensured according to the estimated conditions of external influences (see 512).
and, if necessary, appropriate to the functional requirements.
542.2 Earth connections
The resistance value of the earth connection must satisfy the protection and operating conditions of the electrical installation.
The maximum resistance values of the earth connections are indicated, depending on the case, in 411.5.3, 411.6.2.
The resistance values of the earth connections of high voltage substations are defined in standards NF C 13-100 and NF C 13-200 and
those of the neutral earth connection in 442.
- 268 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
Table 54A – Maximum earth connection resistance values
Diagram of RP RPB RPAB R.B. AR

connections to the
land according to
442
TNR / / NF C 15-100 / /
442.2.4.1
NF C 13-100
Appendix 4.1
TTN / NF C 15-100 / / NF C 15-100
442.2.4.2 411.5.3
NF C 13-100
442.2.4.2
NF C 13-200
442.2
TTS NF C 13-100 / / NFC 15-100 NF C 15-100
442.1 442.2.6.1 411.5.3
NFC 13-200
442.3
ITR / / NF C 15-100 / /
442.2.4.3
NF C 13-100
Appendix 4.1
ITN / NF C15-100 / / NF C 15-100
442.2.4.3 411.6.2
NF C 13-100
442.2
NF C 13-200
442.2
STI NF C 13-100 / / NF C 15-100 NF C 15-100
442.1 442.2.6.1 411.6.2
NF C13-200
442.3
RA is the resistance of the earth connection of the low voltage installation masses
RB is the resistance of the neutral earth connection of the low voltage installation
RP is the resistance of the earth connection of the transformer station masses
When earth connections are interconnected, the indices are grouped together.
The resistance values of the lightning rod earth connections are defined in the standard
NF C 17-100.
VS
542.2.1 The materials and dimensions of earth connections must be chosen so as to
resist corrosion and have appropriate mechanical strength.
542.2.2 The effectiveness of an earth connection depends on local soil conditions. One or more
earth connections appropriate to the ground conditions and the prescribed resistance value
must be chosen.
Appendix C gives means of calculating earth connection resistances.

- 269 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
542.2.3 Creation of earth connections
542.2.3.1 Loop at the bottom of the

excavation The creation of the earth connection by a loop at the bottom of the excavation or by an equivalent
arrangement such as the use of de facto earth connections constituted in particular by the metal posts of the
exterior walls of the buildings to metal frame, is made compulsory by the decree of August 4, 1992 for any building
intended to house workplaces (including collective residential buildings).
The loop at the bottom of the excavation may consist of a bare copper conductor with a section of at least 25 mm²,
in good contact with the ground,
Creating a loop at the bottom of the excavation during the construction of buildings is the best solution to obtain
good grounding. Indeed :
- it does not require any additional earthworks; - it is established at a depth

which generally allows constraints due to seasonal conditions to be overcome;
- it ensures good contact with the ground;

- it practically achieves maximum use of the building surface and gives the minimum value of earth connection
resistance that can be obtained with this surface;
- it can be used, from the start of building construction, as an earth connection
for construction site installations.
It is appropriate to connect the conductive elements of the construction, both the metal elements and the
reinforcements of the reinforced concrete, to the earth connection-protective conductors assembly, with the
exception of those of the prestressed concrete.
These connections make it possible, on the one hand, to reduce the value of the overall earthing resistance of the
masses and, on the other hand, to ensure the equipotentiality of all the masses and all the simultaneously
accessible conductive elements.
542.2.3.2 Other methods of making earth connections

When the loop at the bottom of the excavation is not obligatory, the following methods of creating earth connections
can be used:
- strip or cable embedded in the concrete; - plates;
- stakes or tubes;
- ribbons or threads.
Annex C gives indications for the dimensions of these elements.

Earth connections must never consist of a metal part simply immersed in water. They must not be established in
bodies of water or rivers.
This ban is not justified so much by the poor conductivity of the water as by the risk of drying out and by the
danger to which people coming into contact with the water could be exposed while a fault occurs.
542.2.4 The type and depth of burial of earth electrodes must be such that drying out and freezing do not increase
VS
the resistance of the earth electrode above the value prescribed in Part 4-41 and in 442.
542.2.5 Attention shall be paid to electrolytic corrosion when using dissimilar materials in a grounding installation.
- 270 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
542.2.6 Metallic liquid or gas distribution pipes shall not be used as earth connections.
NOTE - This requirement does not exclude the connection of these networks to the main equipotential bonding in accordance with
VS part 4-41.
542.3 Grounding conductors
542.3.1 Earthing conductors must meet the requirements of 543.1 and, when buried, their cross-section must conform to the
values in Table 54B.
Table 54B – Minimum sections of buried earth conductors
Nature of drivers Minimum sections
Insulated conductors 16 mm2 in copper

Bare conductors 25 mm2 in copper
50 mm2 in galvanized steel or stainless steel
542.3.2 The connection of an earthing conductor to an earthing socket must be carefully carried out and electrically satisfactory.
This connection must be made by exothermic welding, pressure connectors or other fasteners. If a clamp is used, it must not
damage the earth electrode or earth conductor.
NOTE - Connection or fixing devices by non-exothermic welding do not provide appropriate mechanical strength.
542.4 Main earth terminals or bars
542.4.1 In any installation, a main earth terminal or bar must be provided and the following conductors must be connected to it:
- earth conductors;
- protective conductors; the main
- equipotential connection conductors;
- functional grounding conductors, if necessary.
A device may be provided on the earth conductors in an accessible location, enabling the resistance of the corresponding earth
connection to be measured (see also 612.6.2).
542.4.2 Each conductor connected to the main earth terminal must be capable of being disconnected individually and only using
VS
a tool.
543 Protective conductors
543.1 Minimum sections
543.1.1 The section of the protective conductors must meet the conditions for automatic power cut-off prescribed in 411.3.2 and
be capable of withstanding the presumed fault currents.
It is either calculated in accordance with 543.1.2 or chosen in accordance with Table 54C.
In both cases, 543.1.3 must be applied.
For equipotential bonding conductors, see 544.
- 271 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
VS
Table 54C - Minimum section of the protective conductor linked to the section of the
associated phase conductor
MINIMUM SECTION OF CONDUCTORS

PHASE CONDUCTOR SECTION PROTECTION
OF INSTALLATION
(mm²)
S(mm²)
If the protective If the protective conductor is not
conductor is of the same of the same nature as the phase
nature as the phase conductor
conductor
k1
_
Sx
S ÿ 16 S k2
_
k1
_
16x
(*) k
16 < S ÿ 35 16
2
k1
_
S
S x
(*)
k2
_
2
S > 35 2
(*) For the PEN conductor, a reduction in section is only permitted in accordance with the rules of
neutral conductor sizing of Part 5-52.
k1 is the value of k of the phase conductor chosen in table A.54D or in the tables in part
4-43 in accordance with the material of the conductor and its insulation.
k2 is the value of k of the protective conductor chosen according to the appropriate table in tables A.54B to
A.54F.
In the TT scheme, the section of the protective conductor can be limited to:
25 mm² in copper,
35 mm² in aluminum,
provided that the neutral and earth earth connections are separate, otherwise the conditions of the TN diagram are applicable.
The equipment of the installation must be designed so that their terminals dedicated to the protective conductors can accept the sections
VS
prescribed in this subparagraph.
543.1.2 The section of the protective conductors must be at least equal to that determined by the following formula (applicable only for
breaking times not greater than 5 s):
2
It
S=
k
in which S is
the section of the protective conductor, in square millimeters.
I is the effective value of the fault current which can pass through the protection device for
a negligible impedance fault, in amperes.
t is the operating time of the cutting device, in seconds. k is the factor whose value
depends on the nature of the metal of the protective conductor, its insulation and its initial and final temperatures
(the values of k are given in appendix A).
The above formula is used like that in Article 434.5.2 relating to short-circuit currents. See also guide UTE C 15-105. - 272 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
VS
If application of the formula leads to non-standardized sections, the nearest higher section should be used.
In flexible cables, the protective conductor has the same section as the phase conductors.
VS 543.1.3 Protective conductors which are not part of the supply pipeline must have a section of at least:
- 2.5 mm² Cu or 35 mm² Alu if the protective conductors include protection

mechanical ;
- 4 mm² Cu or 35 mm² Alu if the protective conductors do not include protection
mechanical.
543.1.4 When a protective conductor is common to several circuits, the section of this protective conductor
must be sized according to the largest section of the phase conductors.
This rule is not applicable to the PEN conductor in the TN-C diagram, the neutral conductor cannot be
common to several circuits.
In TN-S and IT diagrams, the common protective conductor must remain close to the active conductors of
the circuits concerned (see 411.4.3 and 411.6.4).
543.2 Types of protective conductors
543.2.1 May be used as protective conductors:

VS
- conductors in multi-conductor cables;

- insulated or bare conductors passing in a common envelope with the conductors
assets ;
- separate insulated or bare conductors;
- certain conductive elements, according to the conditions set out in 543.2.2 a) and b).
543.2.2 When the installation includes factory-assembled enclosures or frames of assemblies or metal-
encased prefabricated pipelines, these enclosures or frames may be used as protective conductors if they
simultaneously satisfy the following three conditions:
a) their electrical continuity must be achieved in such a way as to be protected against mechanical, chemical
or electrochemical damage; b) they comply with
the requirements of 543.1 ; c) they must allow the
connection of other protective conductors at any predetermined branch location.
543.2.3 The use of the following metallic elements as protective or equipotential conductors is not permitted:
- cable trays and similar systems; - all
metal pipes (water, gas, flammable liquids, heating,
etc.); - conductive elements belonging to the building structure;
- self-supporting cables.
- 273 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
VS
543.3 Conservation of electrical continuity of protective conductors
543.3.1 Protective conductors must be suitably protected against mechanical and chemical damage and
electrodynamic stress.
543.3.2 Connections must be accessible for verification and testing, except:
- connections with filling material;

- welds;
- connections of prefabricated pipelines whose envelope constitutes a conductor of
protection.
543.3.3 No equipment shall be inserted into the protective conductor, but connections which can be
dismantled with a tool may be used for testing.
543.3.4 When a ground continuity monitoring device is used, the windings shall not be inserted into the
protective conductors.
543.3.5 The masses of equipment to be connected to the protective conductors must not be connected in
series in a protection circuit, except in the case referred to in 543.2.2.
The connection of each conductor must be independent.
543.4 PEN conductors

VS
543.4.1 A PEN conductor may only be used in fixed installations and, for mechanical reasons, must have a
section at least equal to 10 mm2 in copper or 16 mm2 in
aluminum.
The section of the PEN conductor meets the conditions imposed in 524 for the neutral conductor.
VS 543.4.2 The PEN conductor must be insulated.
The casings of metal pipes must not be used as PEN conductors, with the exception of prefabricated pipes
complying with NF C 63-422.
Certain cables comprising a non-insulated conductor (assembled with phase conductors or concentric
conductor arranged in meanders), which have been designed for underground low-voltage public distribution
networks with directly earthed neutral as well as branch connections on these networks, can only be used
in connections covered by NF C 14-100.
VS
543.4.3 If, from any point in the installation, the neutral conductor and the protective conductor are
separated, it is not permitted to connect them together downstream of this point.
The PEN conductor must be connected to the terminal or bar provided for the protective conductor.
This requirement does not prohibit the installation of a common bar for PEN, PE and neutral.
- 274 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
Arrival TNC
PEN
PE N PEN
Distribution TNS TNC

channels
Figure 543A – Example of production
VS
543.4.4 Conductive elements shall not be used as PEN conductors.
543.5 Protective conductor used for functional grounding purposes
If such a conductor is used, it must meet the requirements for protective conductors. In addition, it must
also satisfy those relating to earthing and functional equipotential connections (see 545).
A direct current return conductor of a power supply of information processing equipment can be used as
an associated protective and functional grounding conductor.
543.6 Arrangement of protective conductors
If overcurrent protection devices are used for protection against indirect contact, the protective conductor
must be incorporated in the same conduit as that containing the active conductors or must be located in
close proximity.
543.7 Reinforced protective conductors for leakage currents greater than 10 mA
For user equipment with indicated leakage currents greater than 10 mA intended to be permanently
connected, protective conductors must be designed as follows:
- either the protective conductor must have a section of at least 10 mm2 in copper or 16 mm2 in
aluminum, for its entire route NOTE - The PEN conductor
conforming to 543.4 meets this requirement.
- either a second protective conductor with a section at least equal to that required for protection against
indirect contacts must be implemented up to the point where the protective conductor or the PEN
conductor has a section of at least 10 mm2 in copper or 16 mm2 in aluminum.
This assumes that the device has either a 10 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Alu capacity terminal , or a separate
terminal for a second protective conductor.
If these provisions are not provided, it is considered that the leakage current is less than 10 mA.
NOTE - Equipment normally exhibiting high leakage currents may not be compatible with installations including residual current protection devices. The
VS
possibility of untimely tripping due to capacitive load currents during power-up, as well as residual current due to leakage current, must be considered.
- 275 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
544 Equipotential conductors
544.1 Main equipotential bonding conductors

VS
The main equipotential conductors must have a section not less than half that of the protective conductor of the
largest section of the installation, with a minimum of 6 mm². However, their section may be limited to 25 mm² if they
are made of copper or to the equivalent value if they are made of another metal.
In TN or IT diagram, in large buildings, either because of their height or because of their surface area, it is
recommended, to reduce contact voltages, to complete the main equipotential connection, with a main
equipotential connection additional (sometimes called local), at each level for a tall building, at the level of
each large divisional panel for a large building.
VS
544.2 Additional equipotential conductors
544.2.1 An additional equipotential conductor connecting two masses must have a section not less than
the smallest of that of the protective conductors connected to these
masses.
544.2.2 An additional equipotential conductor connecting a mass to a conductive element must have a
section not less than half that of the protective conductor connected to this mass.
544.2.3 These drivers must meet the conditions of 543.1.3.
- Between two masses: - Between a mass and a structure:

EPS
If SPE1 ÿ SPE2 SLS (*)
SLS = SPE1 2
EPS 1 EPS 2 EPS
SLS SLS
Metal structure
(pipes, frames, etc.)
(*) with minimum of 2.5 mm² Cu if the conductors are mechanically protected, 4 mm² Cu
if the conductors are not mechanically protected.
Figure 544A – Sections of additional equipotential conductors
Conductors not incorporated in a cable are mechanically protected when laid in conduits, trunking, moldings
or similarly protected.
- 276 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
545 Earthing arrangements and functional equipotential connections
545.1 General
This paragraph deals with requirements relating to earthing and functional equipotential bonds of information processing and
similar equipment requiring interconnections for data transmission.
NOTES -
1 - Examples of equipment and installations for which this paragraph may be applicable:
- communication and data transmission equipment or information processing equipment or installations using signal transmission with
return to earth in the interior or exterior installation of a building;
- direct current power supply networks serving data processing equipment

information inside a building;
- equipment or installations of auto-switches;
- local data transmission networks;
- fire alarm and intrusion detection systems;

- technical building management systems; - computer-
assisted machining systems.
2 - In this paragraph, the term "functional" concerns the use of earthing and equipotential connections for reasons of signal transmission and
EMC.
3 - This paragraph does not deal with the possible influence of lightning (see NF C 17-100). Article 443 deals with protection against
overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to operations and protection against electromagnetic disturbances in building installations.
545.2 Equipotential bonding
If equipotential bonding is prescribed for functional reasons, it must be connected, by the shortest practical route possible, to the
main earth terminal of the building.
NOTES -
1 - The equipotential bonding can be bare or insulated.
2 - The equipotential bonding is preferably implemented in such a way that it is accessible throughout its entire route, for example in a chute.
To prevent corrosion, it may be necessary to insulate bare conductors at supports and when passing through partitions.
545.2.1 Section of the equipotential bonding belt
The section of the equipotential bonding belt must be at least equal to 25 mm2 .
545.2.2 Connections to the equipotential bonding belt
The following conductors must be connected to the equipotential bonding belt:
- conductive screens, sheaths and conductive armor of communication cables; the conductive envelopes of communication
- equipment; grounding conductors of surge protection devices; grounding conductors
- for radiocommunication antenna systems; the grounding conductor of the grounded polarity of a direct current
- power supply for information processing equipment; functional grounding conductors;
-
- the down conductors of the lightning rods.
- 277 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
545.3 Functional equipotential connections
If an equipotential connection is made for functional reasons, it includes cable screens, metal elements of construction, metal
elements of electrical pipes, metal pipes for liquids and gases.
Integrating metal parts and building frames into the earthing can be advantageous. The metal reinforcements must then be welded
together and connected to the equipotential bonding. If welding is not permitted, it is recommended to incorporate complementary
steel rods connected to the reinforcing rods using metal wires.
The requirements that functional equipotential connections must meet (e.g. section, shape, position) depend on the frequency range
used by information processing equipment and the like, the assumed conditions of the electromagnetic environment and the
characteristics of immunity/ frequency of equipment (see UTE C 15-900 guide).
545.4 Functional grounding conductors
Functional grounding can be achieved by using the protective conductor of the power supply circuit of the information processing
equipment or by using a specific separate conductor.
545.4.1 Section
The cross-section of the functional earthing conductors must take into account any fault currents that may flow; appropriate data
must be obtained from the manufacturer.
545.4.2 Types of combined protective and functional grounding conductors
Examples of combined protective and functional grounding conductor types are given in 543.2.1.
545.5 Signal transmission and interconnections between separate earth connections
If signal transmission is planned between buildings with separate earth connections, it is appropriate:
- either to interconnect the two earth connections by an accompanying conductor of the signal transmission cable, which
must have a minimum section of 16 mm2 in copper or equivalent;
- or to create a connection using non-metallic fiber optic cables.
NOTE - Faults on high voltage distribution networks and lightning can create excessive potential differences between different
buildings or areas and result in dangerous conditions for equipment.
- 278 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
Annex A – (normative) – Method for calculating the factor k in 543.1.2

VS
The factor k is determined by the formula:
Q20)c(
+ÿ ln(1 ÿÿÿ
k= + if
)
ÿ 20 ÿ+ÿ i
Or
Qc is the volumetric heat capacity of the conductor material, in J°/C mm3 at 20°C
ÿ is the inverse of the temperature coefficient of the resistivity at 0°C of the conductor, in °C
ÿ20 is the resistivity of the conductor at 20°C, in ÿ.mm
ÿi is the initial temperature of the conductor, in °C
ÿf is the final temperature of the conductor, in °C
Table A.54A - Parameter values for various materials

Material ÿ(°C) Qc (J/°C mm3) ÿ20 (ÿ.mm) )20(Qc
+ÿ
ÿ 20
Copper 234.5 3.45X10-3 17.241X10-6 226
Aluminum 228 2.5X10-3 28.264X10-6 148
Steel 202 3.8X10-3 138X10-6 78
The values of the factor k appearing in tables A.54B to A.54F have been established taking into account
takes into account the following principles:
- when the protective conductor is not incorporated in a cable, its temperature at

moment when the fault occurs is taken equal to the ambient temperature (30 °C) (tables
A.54B and A.54C and A.54F) ;
- when the protective conductor is one of the constituent conductors of a cable
multiconductor, it is before the appearance of the fault at the operating temperature of the cable
traversed by its admissible current, that is to say at the maximum temperature admitted by the
table 52F. The conditions are then identical to those concerning protection against
short circuits (434) (table A.54D). The same goes for drivers of
protection constituted by the armor or sheaths of the cables (table A.54E).
Furthermore, for bare conductors, the risk of damaging the

neighboring materials and the maximum allowable temperature is limited depending on the proximity
materials (tables A.54C and A.54F).
- 279 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
VS Table A.54B - Values of k for unincorporated insulated protective conductors

to cables, and not bundled with other cables
Conductor insulation Temperature °C Conductor material

protection
Copper Aluminum Steel

Initial Final Values of k
(1) (1)
70°C PVC 30 (1) 160/140 143/133 (1) 95/88 52/49
(1) (1)
90°C PVC 30 (1) 160/140 143/133 (1) 95/88 52/49
90°C EPR or PR 30 250 176 116 64
60 °C Rubber 30 200 159 105 58
85 °C Rubber 30 220 166 110 60
Silicone rubber 30 350 201 133 73
(1) The lowest value is applicable to insulated conductors with a section greater than 300 mm2
Table A.54C - Values of k for a bare protective conductor in contact with a

cable sheath, but not bundled with other cables
Cable sheath Temperature °C Conductor material

PVC 30 200 159 105 58
PR/EPR 30 150 138 91 50
- 280 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
VS Table A.54D - Values of k for a protective conductor incorporated in a cable,

or bundled with other insulated cables or conductors
Insulation material Temperature °C Conductor material

(1) (1)
70°C PVC 70 (1) 160/140 115/103 (1) 76/68 42/37
(1)
90°C PVC 90 (1) 160/140 (1) 100/86 (1) 66/57 36/31
90°C EPR or PR 90 250 143 94 52
60 °C Rubber 60 200 141 93 51
85 °C Rubber 85 220 134 89 48
(1) The lowest value is applicable to insulated conductors with a section greater than 300 mm2
Table A.54E - Values of k for a protective conductor such as a sheath

metal of a cable, for example armor, concentric conductor, etc.
Insulation material Temperature °C Conductor material

m
Initial Final Value of k
70°C PVC 60 200 141 93 51
90°C PVC 80 200 128 85 46
90°C EPR or PR 80 200 128 85 46

60 °C Rubber 55 200 144 95 52
85 °C Rubber 75 220 140 93 51

NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
VS
Table A.54F - Values of k for bare conductors not likely to damage the
neighboring materials at the indicated temperatures
Conductor material
Tempera Copper Aluminum Steel

-ture
Terms
initial
°C Value Temp Value Temp Value Temp

k max °C k max °C k max °C
Visible and
in
30 228 500 125 300 82 500
areas
restricted
Terms 30 159 200 105 200 58 200

normal
Risk 30 138 150 91 150 50 150

fire
Or
explosion

NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
Annex B – (informative) – Example of earthing installation
Figure B1 - Terminology
M Mass ................................................. .................................................. ...........(232.8)

P Metal pipes for water, gas, heating, etc.
VS Conductive element................................................ .........................................(232.9)
B Main earth terminal .......................................... ...................................(243.2)
F Reinforced concrete reinforcements
T1 Loop at the bottom of the excavation ......................................... ................................. (542.2.3.1)
T2 Lightning rod earth connection............................................ (NF C 17-100 and NF C 17-102)
1 Protective conductor............................................. ...................................(543.1)

2 Main protective conductor........................................................ .................(543.1)
3 Main equipotential bonding conductor ............................................. ...(544.1)
4 Additional equipotential bonding conductor .........................................(544.2)
5 Lightning rod down conductor ............... (NF C 17-100 and NF C 17-102)
6 Functional equipotentiality belt .......................................... ........(545.2.1)
7 Functional grounding conductor ......................................... ........(545.4.1)
8 Functional equipotential bonding conductor ...........................................(545.3 )
9 Main protective and grounding conductor
functional................................................ .................................. (543.1 and 545.4)
10 Earth conductor........................................................ .........................................(542.3.1)
11 Equipotential bonding conductor of the protection installation
against lightning .............................................. ............. (NF C 17-100 and NF C 17-102)
NOTE – Article numbers in parentheses are those of articles relating to the conductor section
correspondents.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
Appendix C – (informative) – Earth connections

1. General
The resistance of an earth connection depends on its dimensions, its shape and the resistivity of the ground
in which it is established. This resistivity often varies from one point of land to another, and it also varies in
depth.
It is recalled that the resistivity of a ground is expressed in ÿ .m: this is numerically the resistance
ohms of a cylinder of ground with a section of 1 m² and a length of 1 m .
The surface appearance of the ground and its vegetation can give indications on the more or less favorable
nature of a land for the establishment of earthworks. Measurements on earth connections already carried
out in similar areas give better indications.
The resistivity of a terrain depends on its humidity level and temperature, which vary according to the
seasons. The humidity level is itself influenced by the granulation of the ground and its porosity. In practice,
the resistivity of a ground increases when the humidity level decreases.
The subsoil layers traversed by water currents, such as those found in the vicinity of rivers, are only rarely
suitable for the establishment of earthworks. These layers are in fact formed of very permeable stony soils,
washed out by water itself purified by natural filtration and presenting high resistivities. It would then be
necessary to cross them using deep stakes to look for better conductive soils underneath if they exist.
Frost considerably increases the resistivity of the land, which can reach several thousand m in the frozen
layer;
ÿ the depth of this layer can go down to one meter in certain regions.
Drought also increases the resistivity of the land, the effects of desiccation being able to be felt in certain
cases up to a depth of more than 2 meters: the values reached by the resistivity are then of the same order
as in the event of frost.
2 – Ground resistivity
Table C.54A gives, for information purposes, resistivity values for a certain number of terrains. These values
have been gathered according to certain documents published in France and abroad.
Table C.54B shows that the resistivity can, for the same type of terrain, vary in large proportions.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
Table C.54A
NATURE OF THE TERRAIN RESISTIVITY

ÿ
(in .m)
Swampy land ................................................ ............... from a few units to 30
Silt................................................. ....................................... 20 to 100
Humus .................................................. ................................... 10 to 150
Wet peat .................................................. ......................... 5 to 100
Plastic clay .................................................. ......................... 50

Marls and compact clays................................................ ...... 100 to 200
Jurassic marls .............................................. ................ 30 to 40
Clayey sand................................................ ........................... 50 to 500

Silica sand................................................ ........................... 200 to 3,000
Bare stony ground .............................................. ......................... 1,500 to 3,000
Stony ground covered with grass............................................. .. 300 to 500
Soft limestones.................................................. ................. 100 to 300

Compact limestones ................................................ ................. 1,000 to 5,000
Cracked limestones ................................................ .................. 500 to 1,000
Shales.............................................. ................................... 50 to 300
Mica schists.............................................. ......................... 800
Granites and sandstone following alteration............................................ . 1,500 to 10,000

Very weathered granites and sandstones ............................................. .......... 100 to 600
To allow a first approximation of the resistance of an earth connection, the calculations

can be carried out using the average values given in Table C.54B.
It is of course understood that the calculations carried out from these values only give a value
very approximate to the resistance of an earth connection. Measuring the resistance of this
earth connection can make it possible, by application of the formulas given in 3, to estimate the value
local average of the resistivity of a terrain, knowledge of this value can be useful for
subsequent work carried out under similar conditions.
Table C.54B
NATURE OF THE TERRAIN AVERAGE VALUE

RESISTIVITY
(in ÿ.m)
Fat arable land, wet compact embankments............................................ 50
Poor arable land, gravel, coarse embankments .................................. 500
Bare stony soils, dry sand, impermeable rocks................................... 3,000
3 - Specially established earth connections

3.1 - Constitutive elements
Specially established earth connections are made using elements buried in the ground
and which are made of suitably hot-dip galvanized steel, of steel coated with copper perfectly
adherent, or bare copper. Connections between metals of different nature must not
be in contact with the ground.
Except for special studies, light metals are not permitted.

The minimum thicknesses and diameters of the elements indicated below take into account the
usual risks of mechanical and chemical deterioration. However, these dimensions can
be insufficient, particularly when significant risks of corrosion are to be feared.
- 285 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
Particularly significant risks of corrosion are to be feared in areas traversed by stray currents, for example
direct current traction return currents. In such cases, special precautions are necessary.
Earth connections are buried wherever possible in the wettest parts of the available land. They must be kept
away from deposits or infiltrations that could corrode them (manure, manure, chemicals, coke, etc.) and be
installed if possible outside very transitory areas.
3.2 - Establishing earth connections
a) Conductors buried horizontally. - These conductors can be: - solid or wired

conductors, in bare copper or covered with a lead sheath, with a section of at least 25 mm² ;
- copper strips of at least 25 mm² section and 2 mm thickness; - galvanized mild steel
strips of at least 100 mm² section and 3 mm thickness embedded in the clean concrete of the building
foundations;
- galvanized steel cables with a section of at least 95 mm² thick embedded in the clean concrete of the
building foundations.
Fine wire cables (braids) are not recommended.
The resistance R (in ohms) of an earth connection made by a horizontally buried conductor can be calculated
approximately by the formula.
2
R=
L
in which ÿ is the resistivity of the ground (in ohms.meters), L the length of the trench
occupied by the driver (in meters).
It should be noted that laying a conductor in a sinuous path in the trench does not significantly improve the
resistance of the earth connection.
In practice, these conductors are arranged in two ways: - loops at the
bottom of buildings: these earth connections are made up of a
girdling at the bottom of the excavation affecting the perimeter of the building.
The length L to take into consideration is the perimeter of the building. -
horizontal trenches: the conductors are buried at a depth of approximately 1 meter in trenches dug for this
purpose.
The trenches must not be filled with stones, clinker or similar materials, but preferably with earth capable of
retaining humidity.
b) Thin buried plates. In practice, rectangular plates of 0.5 m x 1 m or square plates of 1 m side are used,
buried vertically so that the center of the plate is at a depth of approximately 1 meter.
The plates have a thickness of at least 2 mm if they are made of copper and at least 3 mm if they are made
of galvanized steel.
To ensure better contact of both sides with the ground, the solid plates are preferably arranged vertically.
The resistance of an earth connection consisting of a plate buried at a sufficient depth is approximately
equal to: R = 0.8
Or ÿ is the resistivity of the ground, in ohms.meters, and L is the perimeter of the plate in meters.
c) Vertical stakes - The vertical stakes are made of: - galvanized steel
tubes of at least 25 mm in external diameter; - galvanized mild steel profiles of
at least 60 mm side; - 286 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
- copper or steel bars of at least 15 mm in diameter; in the case of steel bars, they are either covered with
an adherent protective layer of copper of appropriate thickness, or galvanized.
The resistance R (in ohms) of the earth connection constituted by a vertical stake is approximately equal to:
R=
L
Or ÿ is the resistivity of the ground (in ohms.meters), and L is the length of the stake (in meters).
When there is a risk of frost or drought, the lengths of stakes must be increased by 1 m or 2 m.
It is possible to reduce the value of the resistance of the earth connection by arranging several vertical
stakes connected in parallel and separated by at least their length in the case of two stakes and more if there
are more.
Attention is drawn to the fact that, in the case of long stake lengths, the soils are rarely homogeneous; long
stakes can make it possible to reach layers of low resistivity ground where they exist.
4 - De facto earth connections

Metal pillars interconnected by a metal structure and buried at a certain depth in the ground can be used as
earth connections.
The resistance R (in ohms) of the earth connection constituted by a buried metal pillar is equal to:
3L
R = 0.366 log10
L d
L being the buried length of the pillar in meters, d

being the diameter of the cylinder circumscribed by the pillar, in meters,
ÿ being the resistivity of the ground in ohms.meters.
A set of interconnected pillars distributed around the perimeter of a building presents a resistance of the
same order as that of the loop at the bottom of the excavation.
The possible concrete coating does not prevent the use of pillars as earth connections and does not
significantly modify the value of the resistance of the earth connection.
_______________
- 287 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54
(Blank page)
- 288 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
Part 5-55 – Other equipment
551 Electric energy generators ............................................. ..................................... 290 552

Transformers.............................. .................................................. ............................................... 291 553
Equipment static power .............................................. .................................. 292,554 Storage
batteries ...... .................................................. ..................................... 293 555 Installation
materials.............. .................................................. ......................................... 296 556 Measuring
devices ..... .................................................. ............................................. 298 557 Power
capacitors .................................................. ..................................... 300 558 Apparatus
assemblies ....... .................................................. ................................... 302 559 Materials for
use ......... .................................................. ............................................. 307

NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
551 Electric power generators
551.1 General
Electrical energy generators can be rotating machines or machines converting mechanical, chemical or
solar energy into electrical energy, with a static interface.
Their implementation must comply with the regulatory requirements concerning the connection of
installations comprising means of production, which provide, where applicable, the prior agreement of
the local distribution service.
Protection against short circuits and protection against indirect contacts must be ensured both when the
installation is powered by any source (generator or public distribution network) and, where applicable, by
the different sources in parallel.
NOTE – Precautions may be necessary to limit the current flowing in the connections between the neutral points of the sources,
particularly with regard to the effect of harmonic 3.
551.1.1 Additional requirements for electrical power generators constituting an alternative supply
to the public distribution network (standby systems)
Provisions meeting the sectioning requirements of Part 4-46 must be made so that the generator cannot
under any circumstances operate in parallel with the public distribution network. Appropriate arrangements
may be:
– electrical and mechanical interlocking between the operating mechanisms or

reversing device control circuits;
– a blocking system with a single transfer key; – a three-position,
two-direction, non-overlapping switch; – an automatic switching device with appropriate
locking; – any other means providing an equivalent degree of operational safety.
551.1.2 Additional requirements for electrical energy generators capable of operating in parallel
with the public distribution network When choosing an electrical energy generator
intended to operate in parallel with the public distribution network, all arrangements must be made to
avoid harmful effects on the public distribution network or other installations due to power factor, voltage
variations, harmonic distortions, unbalances, starts, voltage fluctuation or synchronization effects. When
synchronization is necessary, it is preferable to use automatic synchronization systems that take into
account frequency, phase and voltage.
Protection, called decoupling, must be provided to disconnect the electrical energy generator, in the event
of loss of power from the public distribution network, or variations in voltage or frequency greater than
those declared for the power supply. normal.
Guide 15-400 (in preparation): “Connection of electrical energy generators in installations supplied by a
public distribution network” provides all the information on the choice of decoupling and sectioning devices.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
The type of protection, its sensitivity and the response time depend on the protection of the public distribution
network and must be approved by the distributor. Its adjustment is made inaccessible to the user by seals or
any other provision. Where applicable, the trigger circuits resulting from this protection as well as the
measurement circuits are also made inaccessible to the user if they are connected upstream of the general
control and protection device.
Means must be provided to avoid the connection of an electrical energy generator to the public distribution
network if the network voltage and frequency are outside the operating limits of the decoupling protection.
Sectioning means must be provided to allow the electrical energy generator or installation to be separated
from the public distribution network. These means must be accessible to the distributor's agents at all times.
Where an electric power generator may also operate as a replacement for the public distribution system, the
installation shall comply with 551.1.1
551.2 Special provisions
551.2.1 Generators
The premises where heat engines are installed, whatever their power, must be widely ventilated to the outside.
All arrangements must be made so that combustion gases are evacuated directly outside and cannot under
any circumstances spread into other premises.
The combustion gas evacuation ducts must be made of non-combustible materials, be watertight and have a
fire rating equal to the fire resistance rating of the building.
Safety regulations relating respectively to establishments open to the public and to high-rise buildings indicate
the conditions of implementation in the building and fuel supply to the groups, as well as the storage
conditions of liquid fuels.
Regulations set limits on sound levels.

The UTE C 15-401 guide defines the conditions for implementation in the installation of generator sets
according to their type and the nature of the installations supplied.
552 Transformers
The choice of transformer protection devices must take into account the inrush currents when the transformers
are energized.
Autotransformer circuits should be rated for the highest voltage that can occur either between conductors or
between conductors and earth. The voltage of the secondary circuits of autotransformers, between conductors
or between conductors and earth, must not be greater than the upper limit of range II.
When the neutral is not connected directly to earth, a medium sensitivity RCD must be installed immediately
upstream or downstream of an autotransformer.
For the application of the requirements set out in 511.1, the standards to consider are the following:
(1)
- Power transformers. Rules ; (2)
- Low power transformers for various applications. Rules ; (3)
- Circuit separation transformers and safety transformers .
———————
(1) NF EN 60076-1 (C 52-176-1)
(2) NF C 52-200
(3) NF EN 61558-2-6 (C 52-558-2-6)

NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
553 Static power equipment
553.1 Rectifiers and converters
The conversion is done with or without galvanic isolation between the input and the output, depending on the technology used. a)
power supply Indications
relating to technical
solutions against current and voltage harmonics are given in 330.1.1.
b) downstream circuits
The protection of circuits located downstream of rectifiers or inverters, particularly concerning protection against electric shocks,
against overcurrents and possibly selectivity, must take into account the operating characteristics of the rectifiers and converters
indicated by the manufacturer .
(4)
- Semiconductor converters;
(5)
- Self-commutated semiconductor converters; (6)
- Stabilized power supplies with direct current output;

(7)
- Direct semiconductor DC converters;
(8)
- Stabilized power supplies with alternating current output .
Powering converters via transformers with separate windings makes it possible to avoid the circulation of DC components which could
disrupt the operation of differential-residual current devices and insulation monitors.
553.2 Electronic contactors or starters and speed variators
553.2.1 General
These devices do not provide the sectioning function.
You should contact the manufacturer to determine the protection conditions and calculate the voltage drops.
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to consider are the following:
(9)
- AC motor solid state dimmers and starters;
- Solid-state alternating current dimmers and contactors for loads

(10) other than engines;
(11) ;
- Electric power drives with variable speed
(12)
- Electronic equipment used in power installations .
The implementation of these products is carried out according to the following standard:
- Implementation and cohabitation of power and communication networks in
installations of residential, tertiary and similar premises.
———————
(4) NF EN 60146-1-1 (C 53-211)
(5) NF C 53-221
(6) NF C 53-222
(7) NF C 53-223
(8) NF C 53-224
(9) NF EN 60947-4-2 (C 63-112)
(10) NF EN 60947-4-3 (C 63-113)
(11) NF EN 61800-1 (C 53-240-1)
(12) EN 50178
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
553.2.2 Solid-state starters
Solid-state starters offer a modern solution to the starting problems of cage induction motors. By controlling the starting and
stopping of motors, they constitute a complementary technology to electronic speed variation. They reduce starting currents.
They make it possible to improve the quality of electric drives for applications that do not require speed variation.
553.2.3 Speed variators
Two essential rules must be considered:

- the variable speed function must be adapted to an application; the drive has an
- influence on its environment and vice versa.
For the installation of a motor-variator unit, the manufacturers' installation recommendations must always be taken into account.
553.3 Static-type uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) A static-type uninterruptible power supply
(UPS) is a set of converters, switches and energy storage devices, for example batteries, capable of ensuring the permanence
of power supply to the load, in the event of a fault in the power source.
The UTE C 15-402 guide deals with the rules for installing uninterruptible static power supplies.
553.4 Static transfer systems These equipment
based on static switches ensure the transfer without interruption from a main source to a secondary source, either in automatic
mode, possibly under conditions (synchronism, voltage value), or in manual mode ( maintenance).
Static switches based on thyristors or based on power semiconductors ensure, during the transfer, the cutting of the phase
conductors and possibly the neutral conductor according to the diagram of the earth connections upstream and downstream of
the equipment , and the distribution or not of neutral.
554 Storage batteries
554.1 Portable or mobile batteries
Charging of portable or mobile batteries must be carried out in a place where seepage and splashes of electrolyte and its
vapors are not harmful, sufficient ventilation must be ensured and no open flame must be nearby.
Battery charging workshops, whose maximum direct current power usable for this operation is greater than 10 kW, constitute
installations classified for environmental protection subject to declaration under heading No. 2925, and must therefore complies
with the provisions of the decree relating to this section.
No special provisions are required for the ventilation of installations ensuring so-called normal charging of electric vehicles
(decree of May 29, 2000).
- 293 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
554.2 Fixed batteries
For the application of the rules in 511.1, the standard to consider is the following:
(13)
Stationary “Planté” type lead-acid accumulator batteries. Rules .
554.2.1 Accumulator batteries installed in a fixed position must be located in an electrical service room to which access is
authorized only to personnel responsible for their maintenance and monitoring.
However, they can be placed in a room which does not have electrical service:
- if they are locked in a cabinet which can only be opened (using a key for example) by personnel responsible for their
maintenance and supervision or,
- if the product CU of the capacity in ampere-hours and the nominal voltage in volts of the batteries is less than or equal to
1,000.
In all cases, the room, and where applicable the cabinet, must be ventilated under the conditions defined in 554.2.3.
Regulations may impose more severe installation conditions if the storage batteries are intended to power security installations.
This is particularly the case for establishments open to the public and for high-rise buildings.
554.2.2 When the nominal voltage of the batteries is greater than 150 volts, a non-slippery service floor must be provided,
insulated from the ground and with a minimum width of 1 m around the batteries so that it is not possible to touch both the
ground or a conductive element connected to the ground and one of the battery elements.
554.2.3 The room containing accumulator batteries must receive, by mechanical ventilation, a supply of fresh air at least equal
to 0.05 NI cubic meters per hour, N being the number of elements in the battery and I l the maximum intensity of the current
likely to be delivered into the battery by the charging device; the detection of insufficient air flow at the fan level should cause
the power supply to the charging device to be cut off.
The preceding provisions are not required when using accumulators such that any explosive gas release is avoided, taking into
account the characteristics of the charging device.
Ventilation requirements for premises containing storage batteries depend in particular on gas releases in the storage cells.
Charged accumulator elements are the site of electrolysis phenomena governed by Faraday's law.
The corresponding gas releases can give rise to recombination.
By convention, in the context of this text, when the recombination rate is at least equal to 95%, the accumulator batteries are
called sealed batteries (formerly called recombination batteries); otherwise, they are called open batteries.
1 – CALLED OPEN BATTERIES
These batteries must be installed in a room in which the volume of renewed air must be at least equal to 0.05 NI cubic meters
per hour, N being the number of elements in the battery.
———————
(13) NF EN 60896-1 (C 58-431)
- 294 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
The intensity of the current I to be taken into consideration is:

1.1 - When the charging system includes both regulation and monitoring devices whose independence is
verified in accordance with the provisions of standard NF C 58-311, the maximum value Im of the rectified
battery charging current. 1st case: The electrical and operating characteristics of the storage
battery and the associated rectifier-charger are defined at the time of the qualification tests of the assembly
(example: alternative backup system integrating into a rectifier-charger assembly, battery, inverter).
A monitoring threshold UdS, such that the maximum rectified load current Im is not exceeded, must be
determined.
The charging system is then equipped with both: - a
device for limiting the charging current, set to the maximum value IbL, - and a device for
monitoring the voltage at the battery terminals, independent of the voltage regulation, causing the charging
device to be turned off when the voltage reaches that corresponding to the end of charging under the
maximum rectified charging current / bL.
The value I is then taken equal to IbL as defined in the NF C 58-311 testing standard.
This value is declared by the manufacturer of the charging system. 2nd case:
The electrical and operating characteristics of the storage battery are not known at the time of the
qualification tests of the rectifier-charger.
A monitoring threshold IdS, such that the maximum rectified load current Im is not exceeded, can be
determined.
The charging system is then equipped with both: - a
device for monitoring the voltage at the battery terminals, independent of voltage regulation, causing the
charging device to be taken out of service when the voltage exceeds the normal voltage on duty,
- a device for limiting the charging current set to the maximum value / bL, - and a device for
monitoring the charging current, independent of the current limitation, set at the value IbS causing the
deactivation of the charging device when the current exceeds that corresponding to the maximum
rectified current IbL.
The Im value is then taken equal to IbS as defined in the NF C 58-311 testing standard.
This value is declared by the manufacturer of the charging system.
1.2 - When the charging system does not include the regulation and monitoring devices provided for in 1.1,
the value of the rectified charging current corresponding to the operation of the charging system power
supply protection device, whatever the characteristics of the charging system possible regulatory device,
i.e.:
I2
I = Ic
In
In being the nominal current of the charging system power supply device, being the
Ic rectified charging current corresponding to the current In, this current being generally higher than
the nominal current delivered by the rectifier in normal service, being the current effectively ensuring
the
I2 operation of the charging system power protection device (see 433.2).
The power protection device of the charging system to be considered is the built-in protection device, if
one exists or, failing that, the device protecting the power supply circuit of this charging system against
overloads.
- 295 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
Verification of the requirements in 1.1 and 1.2 is carried out by an approved laboratory, according to the
terms of standard NF C 58-311.
Open batteries must not be installed in premises where air conditioning is carried out in a completely closed
circuit.
2 – CALLED WATERPROOF BATTERIES
2.1 - So-called sealed batteries are usually associated with a specific rectifier-charger, the assembly meeting
the requirements of the second part of standard NF C 58-311.
Under these conditions, the volume of air to be renewed is 0.0025 N IbL, IbL being defined in standard NF
C 58-311. This value is declared by the manufacturer of the charging system.
When such batteries are installed in a general purpose premises, the provisions applicable to pollution
premises defined in Decree 84-1093 of December 7, 1984 (decree establishing the rules relating to the
ventilation and sanitation of premises of work) are considered to meet this requirement.
2.2 - If, on the other hand, the rectifier-charger does not have the specific operating characteristics of the
sealed battery to which it is connected and, consequently, they do not constitute an association meeting the
requirements of the second part of the standard NF C 58-311, the volume of air to be renewed must be
calculated according to the provisions applicable to open batteries.
Verification of the requirements for sealed batteries and for sealed battery rectifier-charger assemblies is
carried out in accordance with the terms of standard NF C 58-311.
When the cabinet containing the battery has ventilation holes in the upper and lower positions, natural air
circulation is considered sufficient.
554.2.4 The starting batteries of thermal engine-generator groups, as well as their charging devices, may
be installed in the same room as the group, provided that the room is permanently ventilated under the
conditions prescribed in 554.2.3.
554.2.5 Battery connections may be made with bare conductors, but the elements must be arranged so that
two bare conductive parts having a potential difference between them exceeding 150 volts cannot be
touched simultaneously inadvertently.
In accordance with the rules of Part 4-46, a device must allow all poles of the battery to be separated from
the installation.
555 Installation materials
This article only concerns installation equipment other than that covered by Part 5-53 (Apparatus).
The provisions in 531.1 and 531.2 are applicable to the installation equipment covered by this article.
555.1 Power socket bases 555.1.1 An

appropriate number of power socket bases must be installed in order to meet the needs of users in complete
safety, and to limit the use of multiple socket bases.
555.1.2 The power socket bases must include as many electrically distinct and mechanically integral contact
members as the pipes have conductors.
- 296 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to consider are the following: a) equipment for
domestic and similar installations:
(14)
- Sockets and extenders rated at 20 A and 32 A. Rules; (15)
- 16 A 250V power sockets and extenders; - 16 A 250V power
socket bases for grooved plinths or jambs in
(16)
wood;
- Sockets and extenders(17)

rated at 20 A and 32 A.
Features ;
b) low voltage industrial equipment:
(18)
- Power sockets, extensions and connectors. Rules ; - Power sockets,
extensions and connectors using pin and pin contacts
(19) alveoli. Interchangeability Ratings .
555.1.3 When the pipelines include a protective conductor, single socket outlets must be used for the active
conductors and the protective conductor. The power sockets have an earthing contact which must not come
into contact with the main components; this contact must ensure the connection before the establishment of
the main contacts and break this connection after their separation.
555.1.4 Rated current sockets greater than 32 A must be mechanically or electrically controlled by a device
ensuring on-load cut-off in such a way that the separation of their constituents can only be carried out off-load.
555.1.5 When voltages or currents of different types are used, it is necessary to use devices of distinct and
non-interchangeable models.
555.1.6 When it is necessary to prevent the permutation of poles or phases, so-called “irreversible” devices
must be used.
555.1.7 Power socket bases must be arranged so that the dangerous active parts are not accessible to the
touch, both when their elements are assembled and when they are separated.
555.1.8 Power socket bases up to and including 32 A must be of the shutter type.
The shutter type consists of a system integrated into the socket outlet and intended to prevent the introduction
of an object into a single socket, thus ensuring the protection of children. This type
(20) is defined in the standard
in force .
Industrial sockets are not affected by this measure.
555.1.9 Socket sockets fixed to the walls of premises must be arranged in such a way that the axis of their
sockets is at a height of at least 50 mm above the finished floor for a lower rated current or equal to 20 A.
This height is increased to 120 mm for socket bases with a rated current greater than 20 A.
These minimum heights of 50 and 120 mm are applicable whatever the installation method and whatever the
AD external influence class.
555.1.10 Socket sockets installed in floors must have degrees of protection IP24 and IK08.
———————
(14) NF C 61-300
(15) NF C 61-303
(16) NF C 61-305
(17) NF C 61-316
(18) NF EN 60309-1 (C 63-300)
(19) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)
(20) NF C 61-314

NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
555.2 Carrier current devices The NF C

90-201-1 standard concerning the transmission of low voltage electrical signals applies to the choice and
implementation of these devices.
In residential or similar premises, only differential mode injection devices are authorized.
In other cases, differential mode injection devices are strongly recommended. However, in special cases,
common mode injection devices can be installed as indicated in standard NF C 90-201-1.
The manufacturer must provide the following characteristics at 50 Hz for the filters:
- resistance, -
reactance, -
resistance to short circuits.
556 Measuring devices
556.1 General
The nature of the current measurement (fundamental or effective value) must be indicated.
Electronic type measuring devices must take into account the real effective value of currents and voltages
by considering harmonic currents at least up to order 15.
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to consider are the following: - Safety rules
for electrical measuring and electrical measuring devices
(21) indicators and recorders and their accessories;
- Direct-acting analog indicator electrical measuring devices and their accessories - Second part: Special
requirements for ammeters and (22) voltmeters;
(23)
- Single-phase voltage transformers. Features ; (24)
- Current transformers. Features ;
Except for special applications, measurement transformers are of the single-phase type; their role is to
supply:
- measuring and counting devices; - protection
relays.
Accuracy class of measuring devices. - In the choice of accuracy class, the following indications are given
in the absence of more precise information.
- class 0.1 corresponds to devices intended for the most precise power measurements carried out in the
laboratory;
- classes 0.2 and 0.5 correspond to devices intended for power measurements
and energy;
- classes 1 and 1.5 correspond to industrial devices for measuring power, energy or power factor in the
context of energy management; - classes 2.5 and 5 correspond to devices indicating current intensity,
voltage and frequency.
———————
(21) NF EN 61010-1 (C 42-020)
(22) NF EN 60051-1 (C 42-100)
(23) NF C 42-501
(24) NF C 42-502 and NF EN 60044-1 (C 42-544-1)
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
Precision power of instrument transformers - The precision power is determined taking into account the consumption of the devices
and the circuits of use.
Indeed, if the power required by the measuring circuit is too high, the precision of the measuring devices may be lower than that
corresponding to their class.
556.2 Voltage transformers
The primary of voltage transformers can be fitted with upstream protection whose breaking capacity is adapted to the short-circuit
current of the power supply installation.
The secondary of voltage transformers must be protected against downstream short circuits by circuit breakers, except in special
cases.
Depending on the operating conditions, it may be necessary to provide a disconnecting device on the primary. If operating conditions
permit, this device may be common to other receivers.
556.3 Current transformers
The thermal limit values for the short-term current of a transformer are chosen according to the maximum value of the presumed
short-circuit current at the location where the transformer is installed and its possible limiting nature.
The current transformers intended for measurements (measuring circuit and counting circuit) are chosen such that the measuring
devices they supply are not damaged when the primary current reaches the value of the short-circuit current at the point of the
installation.
Current transformers intended for protection (protective relay circuit) are chosen such that their accuracy limit factor is high enough
so that current errors in the event of a short circuit are not too large. Their precision power is chosen at least for the highest load to
be expected.
556.4 Combined transformers (voltage-current)
Voltage and current transformers can be combined in one device.
556.5 Voltage and current monitoring
a) Harmonic distortion rate The harmonic
distortion rate in current (THDi) or voltage (THDu) is measured at least up to rank 15.
The measuring device may have an alarm threshold allowing control of the THDi or THDu level.
NOTES -
1 - The indications given in the table in 330.1.1 can help in the choice of adjustment thresholds.
2 - For critical installations (group power supply, significant non-linear loads, etc.), it is recommended that this monitoring measure
be integrated into the equipment providing protection for the main feeders.
b) Disturbance monitoring
Monitoring low-frequency disturbances requires simultaneous consideration of several quantities (see 330.1.1) such as frequency
fluctuation, voltage variation (including brownouts), currents and harmonic distortions, etc.
Certain multifunction measuring devices allow the synchronized acquisition of these different quantities. These quantities are used
to detect possible low-frequency disturbances and to verify that the solutions put in place to overcome these problems are effective.
- 299 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
557 Power capacitors

- Self-healing power shunt capacitors for alternating current networks

(25) rated voltage less than or equal to 1000 V ;
- Non-self-regenerating power shunt capacitors for alternating current networks (26) with a rated voltage less
than or equal to 1000 V .
Power capacitors are used, in particular, for power factor correction, harmonic filtering in association with
series inductors, or voltage regulation.
557.1 The rules of this article are applicable to static power capacitors other than those forming part of
equipment or apparatus meeting a specific standard or used in special conditions or systems.
The special cases referred to in the rule are, for example: the
- production of certain antiharmonic filters;
- induction heat generation installations; - association with certain
asynchronous rotating machines; - series capacitors used in alternating current
installations.
557.2 Points to consider for the choice of capacitors They must be

chosen and installed following the manufacturer's instructions on the one hand and general technical
conditions on the other hand. The most important points to consider are:
557.2.1 Harmonic distortion

Harmonic distortions can cause detrimental effects on capacitors.
The use of anti-harmonic inductors in series with each capacitor step avoids resonance problems and
protects the capacitors.
If harmonic distortions are noted, compensation arrangements should be made. The practice is to use anti-
harmonic inductors as soon as the power of the loads generating harmonics exceeds 20% of the power of
the power transformer. If this power exceeds 50%, anti-harmonic filters should be used.
557.2.2 Rated voltage The

value of the rated voltage of capacitors sometimes differs from that of the nominal network voltage.
The rated voltage of the capacitors is at least equal to the maximum operating voltage of the installation,
taking into account the influence of the capacitors, the inductive elements which may be associated with them
in series and the possible presence of harmonic currents. Variations in the installation's load must also be
taken into account (total or partial switching off of capacitors at low load).
However, excessive safety margins should be avoided in the choice of the rated voltage, as they can lead to
a reduction in the reactive power of the capacitor bank.
———————
(25) NF EN 60831-1 (C 54-108), NF EN 60831-2 (C 54-109)
(26) NF EN 60931-1 (C 54-118), NF EN 60931-2, (C 54-119)
- 300 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
557.2.3 Altitude - Capacitors are designed to operate up to 2,000 meters. Beyond that, the choice must
be made in agreement with the manufacturer.
557.2.4 Operating temperature - Capacitors are very sensitive to excessively high temperatures; they
must therefore be chosen and installed in such a way that the ambient air temperature does not exceed
the limit values of the temperature category.
Too high a temperature has a great influence on the lifespan of capacitors. They should therefore be
installed in such a way as to allow good evacuation by radiation and convection of the heat produced by
losses and to protect them against radiation (solar or other). The use of capacitors rated for a higher rated
voltage is sometimes necessary to take into account the harmful effects of excessively high temperatures.
557.2.5 Overvoltages - The selection and installation of capacitors must take into account overvoltages
likely to be encountered at the installation location. Capacitors can operate for extended periods at
voltages not exceeding 1.10 Un, excluding transient overvoltages.
Among transient overvoltages, those resulting from restarts of switching devices at the time of their opening
should be particularly noted. It is appropriate to choose equipment (switches, circuit breakers, contactors)
capable of operating the capacitors.
In the case of large capacitor banks, any surge arresters for protection against transient overvoltages are
chosen to take into account the discharge current of the capacitors.
Regarding temporary power frequency overvoltages, it is necessary to limit the current value of the
capacitors to 90% of the magnetizing current of the motors to which the capacitors are directly connected
(removal of self-excitation).
557.2.6 Overcurrents
Capacitors are normally designed to be able to operate permanently under a permanent current equal to
1.3 times the current generated by the rated sinusoidal voltage under the rated frequency, transients
excluded. They must be protected for any overcurrent of higher value.
Overload currents above allowable values can be caused by excessive voltage at the fundamental
frequency, by harmonics, or by both. The main sources of harmonics are rectifiers, power electronics,
magnetic circuits with saturated cores. To protect the capacitors against overcurrents due to harmonics, it
may be necessary to add anti-harmonic inductors in series with the capacitors. The rated voltage of the
capacitors must then be increased.
557.2.7 Control and protection equipment

Except in special cases (for example filtering of harmonics) the control and protection equipment for the
capacitors must permanently support a maximum of 1.5 times the rated current, in order to take into
account harmonics and tolerances on capacities.
Due to the transient phenomena at the time of power-up, it must withstand the electrodynamic and thermal
forces due to the overcurrents which appear at this moment.
When several batteries or steps are connected in parallel, it is necessary to limit transient overcurrents by
using inductors in series with the capacitors or by energizing the capacitors via a resistor.
557.2.8 Safety rules Each

capacitor must be equipped with a device allowing discharge after disconnection.
- 301 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
558 Equipment sets
558.1 General
A load disconnecting and breaking device must be provided inside or near any equipment assembly.
The equipment assemblies may be: a) either manufactured in
the factory according to a given type, conforming to a specific standard,

- Low voltage switchgear assemblies - Part 1: Rules for assemblies
(27) ;
series and series derived assemblies (28)
- Low voltage motor starters .
The assemblies are installed in accordance with the instructions given by the manufacturer. The conditions under which they are
inserted into an installation are determined by the characteristics at the point of installation. The characteristics of the equipment
assemblies are determined by agreement between the interested parties.
These determine in particular:
- the conditions of selectivity of the different protections; the resistance to short

- circuits of the different elements; - the influence of possible disturbances
of any kind;
- The operating, maintenance and development conditions, for example the performance index
Service (UTE C 63-429).
(b) is manufactured and installed in accordance with the rules of 558.2 to 558.6.
The identification of conductors in factory-mounted assemblies must comply with 7.6.5.1 and 7.6.5.2 of NF EN 60439-1 or comply
with their own standard.
The rules from 558.2 to 558.6 are applicable to equipment assemblies other than those conforming to a specific standard and whose
rated voltage is at most equal to the upper limit of domain II.
558.2 Materials
The materials used must be able to withstand the mechanical stresses, humidity and heat encountered in service.
If the materials of the construction elements are not capable of withstanding the expected stresses, appropriate treatment must be
provided (e.g. painting or galvanic protection of the surface).
The use of untreated natural wood is only permitted under conditions of external influences AD1.
M4 or unclassified materials must not be used.
When degrees of protection greater than IP44 are necessary, protection can only be assumed, taking into account the characteristics
of the enclosures used and the assembly conditions, due to the difficulties of verification on site.
It is always desirable to arrange such a location for external influences that a degree of protection higher than IP44 is not necessary.
———————
(27) NF EN 60439-1 (C 63-421)
(28) NF EN 60947-4-1 (C 63-110)
- 302 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
558.3 Protective measures to ensure safety
558.3.1 General
Equipment assemblies not manufactured in the factory must be designed and constructed so that they
can be used under the conditions defined in Parts 4 and 5, in particular: - 41 : Protection against
electric shock.
- 43 : Protection against overcurrents.
- 543 : Protective conductors.
558.3.2 Protection against electric shock
558.3.2.1 Provision for protection against direct contact (411.2)

Removable panels intended to prevent direct contact with live parts must only be removable using a tool
or wrench.
558.3.2.2 Provisions for protection against indirect contact (411.3)
558.3.2.2.1 Grounding of masses All

masses must be connected directly to each other either by appropriate assemblies or by means of
equipotential conductors. These connections must ensure good conductivity and must be able to
withstand the maximum fault current, taking into account the characteristics of the protection and
switching devices.
The electrical connection between all the masses must be carried out in such a way that the dismantling
of one or more of these parts, for service or maintenance reasons, does not affect the electrical continuity
of the protection circuit.
To connect the external protective conductor, a terminal ensuring effective and durable contact must be
provided; this terminal must be properly identified, either by the double green and yellow coloring, or by
the symbol 417.5019.
For each protective conductor arrival and departure, a separate connection point must be provided.
When the protective conductor is incorporated into a cable, it is recommended to move it away from the
active conductors so as to allow the installation of a zero-sequence current measuring clamp.
The use of the construction elements of the assembly as protective conductors is permitted when the
conditions of the first two paragraphs of this paragraph are respected.
The use of these construction elements as neutral conductor and PEN is prohibited.
When electrical devices not powered by SELV or SELV (see 414) are mounted on doors or covers, the
following conditions must be observed: - the masses of these devices must be in
electrical connection with the doors or
lids;
- doors or covers made of conductive materials must be electrically connected by a protective conductor
to the conductive elements of the installation. The section of this conductor must correspond to the
connection section of the device mounted on the door or cover and having the largest rated current.
In the case of doors and covers not carrying electrical devices or only carrying devices powered by SELV
or SELV, this electrical connection is not necessary. In this case, the usual metal fixing elements (hinges,
latches, etc.) are deemed to provide sufficient connection for the protection circuit.
- 303 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
If the door or cover is made of insulating material and contains electrical devices powered at a voltage
higher than the very low voltage limit, with masses accessible from the outside, these must be connected
to the protective conductor.
558.3.2.2.2 Protective measure by double or reinforced insulation by installation. (See also 412).
558.3.2.2.2.1 enclosure designed to achieve a double or reinforced class II insulation level

assembly: When an enclosure
(box or cabinet) supplied without equipment is declared by the manufacturer capable of achieving the
double or reinforced insulation level reinforced class II, the installation of equipment inside this envelope
and the implementation (fixing, connection of conductors, etc.) must be carried out according to the
manufacturer's instructions so as not to harm initial double insulation in accordance with building
regulations (see 412).
In the case of an insulating envelope:

- Class I equipment located in the enclosure is not connected to earth.
- The materials located on the envelope must be class II or III.
In the case of a metal envelope:

- The metal enclosure must not be connected to earth.
- Equipment located in the enclosure and which is not class II or III must be separated from accessible
metal parts of the enclosure by additional insulation and not connected to earth.
- Class I equipment located in the enclosure is not connected to earth.

- The materials located on the envelope must be class II or III.
558.3.2.2.2.2 other envelopes
a) General rules
When a manufacturer supplies accessories making it possible to create a sub-assembly with a double or
reinforced insulation level inside a class I envelope, the implementation (accessories, plates, fixing,
connection of conductors, etc. ) must be carried out according to the instructions of the manufacturer of
this equipment so as not to harm the protection provided in accordance with construction rules (see 412).
Furthermore, the following rules must be respected:

- In the subassembly, equipment which is not class II or III must be separated from the accessible
metal parts of the enclosure by additional insulation and not connected to earth.
- The materials located on the envelope can be class I, II or III.

- The casing of the metal cabinet must be connected to earth.
Application example:
The preceding provisions find their application in particular when the protection device placed at the origin
of an installation carried out in the TT scheme does not have a differential function.
They must then be applied:

- between the AGCP and the differential devices placed at the origin of the circuits or groups of circuits,
under the conditions specified in subparagraph 535.4.2 which deals with the selection of circuits; - between
the AGCP
and the separation transformer when a transformer is provided, in unsupervised installations, to supply
materials or equipment whose shutdown could have undesirable consequences, in accordance with part
7-773.
- 304 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
AGCP AGCP = General control and protection

device
DDR DDR DDR = Differential device
DP DP DP DP DP = Protection device
(circuit breaker or fuse)
Figure 558A - Example of a metal-encased cabinet equipped with a sub-assembly with

a double or reinforced insulation level
NOTE - In figure 558A above, the equipment located above the dotted line - that is to say the part located upstream of the RCD
output terminals - is made in class II or by additional insulation .
If a control device is placed upstream of the differential devices, it must: - either be class II by construction; - either
have no accessible metal parts and have at least the

degree of protection IP4X or IPXXD; - either satisfy provision 3 below:
b) Special rules for creating a subassembly with a double or reinforced insulation level
For the protection of live parts, the following provisions must be respected:
1. If the active parts belong to class II equipment or deemed equivalent (for example, molded material equipment equipped
with terminal covers, cables considered to be class II (412.2.1), no additional provision is required then necessary.
2. If the active parts are only provided with main insulation (for example, insulated conductors without sheath, insulated
connection terminals), these parts must be separated from the enclosure by additional insulation, carried out for example by
insulating supports at least 3 mm thick or by insulating conduits or conduits capable of withstanding a dielectric test voltage of
2,500 V for one minute.
3. If the active parts are bare (for example busbars, non-insulated connection terminals), these parts must be:
- either covered with double insulation or reinforced insulation capable of withstanding a dielectric test voltage of 4,000
V for one minute, the creepage distances and clearances in the air must be at least twice the values of the Board
53F ;
- 305 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
- is separated from any conductive part by a distance of at least 20 millimeters.

If the enclosure can be opened without the use of a key or tool, the bare active parts accessible after opening the
enclosure must be protected against any accidental contact by obstacles that can be dismantled only with the help
of 'a wrench or tool.
4. In all three cases, the outer sheath of the cables must be maintained up to the vicinity of the connections, securing the
cables along their route so as to avoid any movement, even in the event of loosening of the connections.
The pipes in the class II part of the assembly must not have a common route with the class I pipes, unless the latter have
insulation equivalent to that of class II.
Figure 558B below illustrates examples of implementation of these arrangements
Accessible conductive enclosure
has Rod
Main
insulation
has
b
b b
Additional insulation
b
has ÿ 20mm
b = 2 d (d, distance from 536.2.1.1)
a: smallest distance in the air between an active part and any conductive support or conductive element. b: smallest distance in the
air between an intermediate part and any conductive support or conductive element.
NOTE - The main insulation must meet the standards of the materials used.
Figure 558B - Bare bars in a cabinet with accessible conductive enclosure
558.4 Assembly
558.4.1 The equipment must be installed in accordance with the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer
(conditions of use, distances to be observed for cutting arcs, etc.).
In addition, the provisions of articles 512, 513 and 515 must be respected.
558.4.2 Conductors and cables installed in assemblies must comply with the rules of Part 5-52.
In particular, connections must comply with the rules of Article 526 and conductors and cables must be protected against
external influences as specified in 522.
The power supply conductors of measuring devices and instruments fixed in covers or doors must be installed in such a way
that movements of the cover or door cannot cause damage to these conductors.
Insulated conductors and cables arranged in assemblies are considered to be laid in trunking (laying mode 31 or 32 according
to table 52C).
The conductors and cables are protected against overcurrents in accordance with the rules of part 4-43. The insulated
conductors and cables are arranged in such a way as to exclude their insulation from being injured by sharp edges, the
movement of a cover, vibrations, etc.
When bare conductors are used, the provisions of section 529.7 apply.
- 306 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
558.4.3 The following minimum distances must be respected: - between bare active parts of
different polarities: 10 mm; - between bare active parts and other conductive parts
(masses, external envelopes): 20 mm, this distance being increased to 100 mm when the external envelopes considered include
openings whose smallest dimension is between 12 and 50 mm.
558.5 Marks and indications 558.5.1
Every assembly must be provided with a company plate indicating its manufacturer.
The plates of the built-in devices must not be removed.
558.5.2 In assemblies, the belonging of the equipment (such as protection devices, equipment, terminal strips, etc.) to the
corresponding circuit must be unambiguous.
The designations of the materials must be legible, made in a durable manner and placed in such a way as to avoid any risk of
confusion. Labels and nameplates must be attached in an effective and durable manner and correspond to the designations in the
accompanying documents (such as diagrams, spare parts list, pipe list) which must be attached.
559 Use materials
559.1 Connection of devices to installations
The devices may be connected to the installations, either directly to a fixed pipeline (see 559.1), or via a movable pipeline (see
559.1.2).
Devices powered via a mobile pipeline include portable, mobile and semi-fixed devices as well as those for which this method of
connection is recognized by the relevant standards.
559.1.1 Direct connection of devices to a fixed pipeline The pipelines must be protected
against the damage to which they are exposed. In addition, conductor connections with devices must not be subjected to tensile
and twisting forces.
When entering the devices, the pipes must be protected as provided for in 521.7. Connections of conductors with devices must be
made in accordance with the rules set out in 526.
In all cases, the connection system chosen must not alter either the electrical protection class or the IP degree of the equipment.
The connection of the user equipment is carried out:
- either on the network connection terminals integrated (by construction) into the equipment, - either by a specific adapter, or
by a connector (which can be a set
socket base/ plug), - or using terminals
placed in a box.
The preceding provisions are not applicable to prefabricated pipelines complying with standard NF C 63-411.
Electric heating devices installed in a fixed position are powered by circuits reserved for heating and are connected directly to fixed
pipes, without the interposition of a power outlet or connector.
Any embedded conduit must be terminated with a connection box.
If this box is fixed in a ceiling and is intended to power a lighting point, it must be designed for suspending luminaires; the
suspension means and its attachment to the building structure must ensure the safe suspension of a load of a minimum of 25 kg.
- 307 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
By embedding, we mean total or partial incorporation in the construction or installation in voids such as
slabs, composite partitions, etc.
Holding a load of 25 kg by means of suspending the box from the ceiling requires fixing the box to the
building structure.
In the case of a fixed power supply installed on a surface, the equipment can be connected without the use
of a connection box, provided that the equipment used is, by construction, provided with network connection
terminals or if the pipeline is, by construction, provided with specific connection connectors.
In the case of the presence of a luminaire connection box, said box must be equipped with a luminaire
connection device (DCL) base allowing the connection of the luminaire.
This requirement is applicable for a nominal luminaire current less than or equal to 6A and external
influence conditions at most equal to AD2.
The installation of a DCL base avoids damage caused to the conductors during various changes of
luminaires, which ultimately results in an impossibility of connection.
559.1.2 Connection of devices via a mobile conduit
559.1.2.1 Mobile conduits must include the necessary number of electrically distinct and mechanically
integral conductors, including the protective conductor if this conductor is necessary.
The use of electrically resistant metal conductors is only permitted if authorized by the standard relating to
the corresponding material.
The section of the conductors is chosen according to the nominal current of the device, according to the
indications in tables 52E and 52F.
2
This section must be at least 0.75 mm; devices allow , except when the specific rules for
smaller sections.
The choice of flexible cables is made according to the indications in 522.
Device standards generally specify which series of cables can be used.
When choosing flexible cables, it is necessary to take into account the mechanical stresses to which the
cables may be subjected, either due to the use of the device they power, or due to their length. When there
is a fear of mechanical damage or when significant lengths are required, cables with a particularly resistant
sheath are used (series 07 RN-F, 05 RR-F, 05 WF or 07 X4 X5F). Only 07 RN-F series cables may be
used on construction sites.
Flexible cables connected to a heat-producing device must not be in a series comprising an outer covering
of thermoplastic material when the parts of the device that the cable may touch reach a temperature above
85°C. This excludes in particular in this case the use of cables from the 03 VH-H and 05 WF series.
When the parts of the device that the cable may touch reach a temperature above 85°C, it is recommended
to choose the cable from the series whose insulating casing is made of vulcanized rubber and is protected
either by a textile covering ( series H 03 RT-F) or by a vulcanized sheath (series 07 RN-F or 05 RR-F).
Where power supply conductors may be subjected to high temperatures - for example in continuous lighting
strips - heat-resistant conductors such as those of the H 05 SJ-K series should be used, unless provide
additional protection by wrapping or sheathing in heat-resistant insulating material.
559.1.2.2 Portable pipelines shall comply with the applicable rules of Part 5-52.
- 308 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
559.1.2.3 When the mobile pipeline includes a protective conductor, it must be identified by the double green-and-yellow coloring.
When the mobile conduit does not include a protective conductor, the conductor marked by the double green-and-yellow coloring,
if it exists, must not be used.
When the mobile conduit includes a neutral conductor, this must be identified by the color light blue. In other cases, the conductor
marked by the light blue color can be used for another purpose, except as a protective conductor.
See also 514.3.
559.1.2.4 Connections of mobile pipes must be made using appropriate equipment.
The connections of the mobile pipes to the fixed pipes are made:
- either via power sockets (555), these being able to constitute at the same time
time the control device, - either by connection
boxes.
The connections of the mobile pipes to the devices are made: - either by means of flexible
cables permanently connected to the devices, - or by means of a connector, this must be

arranged in such a way that the active parts of the mobile socket and base are not accessible to the touch when powered on.
A connector is an assembly intended to electrically connect a flexible cable and a user device at will. It is made up of two parts: -
a mobile socket forming part of
the flexible power cable or intended to be

used for it
connected.
- a connector base incorporated or attached to the device of use.
559.2 Lighting devices – Luminaires

559.2.1 General
This paragraph is applicable to the choice and installation of lighting fixtures in the fixed installation.
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to consider are the following: - Series of lighting standards
(29)
.
This paragraph does not deal with: - public lighting

installations (NF C 17-200) and lighting installations
(NF C 17-202);
- SELV lighting installations (UTE C 15-559); - lighting for furniture products
(C 15-801); - discharge lamps operating at a rated no-load output voltage
greater than 1kV but not exceeding 10 kV (cold cathode lamps) (NF C 15-150-1 and NF C 15-150-2).
559.2.2 General requirements for installation

Luminaires must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Luminaires without transformer/converter, equipped with TBT (Extra Low Voltage) lamps supplied in series, must be considered
as low voltage devices and not as TBT devices. They are therefore class I or II, but not class III.
———————
(29) Series of standards NF EN 60598 (C 71-000 and the rest)
- 309 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
Sockets equipped with pull switches are only permitted if the operation of the switch is ensured by means of either an insulating
cord or a metal chain connected to the mechanism via an insulating part; this chain must not be able to come into contact with
the active parts of the socket.
The installation of lighting fixtures in formwork, curtain boxes and similar arrangements must not adversely affect the operating
conditions of the lighting fixtures.
Indications are given on this subject in guide UTE C 15-801.
559.2.3 Protection against thermal effects
559.2.3.1 The installation of lighting fixtures must take into account their thermal effects on the environment. The following
parameters must be considered:
- the maximum permitted power dissipated by the lamps; the fire resistance
- of nearby materials; the minimum distance between
- luminaires and combustible materials, including the path of the light beam from the spotlights.
559.2.3.2 Luminaires must be installed in accordance with the indications provided by the symbols according to standard NF C
71-000
Use of heat-resistant power cable, interconnection

or external wiring .............................. ....................... t ..... °C (The number of cable cores
is optional)
Luminaires designed for silver-cap

lamps ........................................... ..............
Maximum rated ambient temperature ..... your . . . °C
Warning against the use of cold beam COOL

lamps ......................................... .......
BEAM
Minimum distance from illuminated objects m

(meters) ......................................... .................
Luminaires suitable for direct mounting on normally F

flammable surfaces..........
Luminaires not suitable for direct mounting on normally

flammable surfaces (only suitable for mounting
F
on non-flammable surfaces) .........
Luminaires suitable for installation in/ on normally flammable

surfaces where a thermal insulating material can cover
the luminaire.................................. .......... F
Luminaires for severe conditions of use..
Luminaires for use with high pressure sodium lamp requiring

an external igniter.............................................. ......................... E
- 310 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
Luminaires for use with high-pressure sodium lamp and internal I

igniter........................
Replace any cracked protective shield....... (Rectangular)
Or
(Round)
Luminaires designed for use only with self-protected tungsten

halogen lamps with protective shield.
559.2.4 Fixing and connection
559.2.4.1 The means of fixing suspended luminaires (accessories, connection boxes, couplers for luminaires, etc.) must be capable
of supporting a mass of at least 25 kg.
If the mass of the luminaire is greater than 25 kg, special arrangements must be made.
The luminaire can be suspended by its flexible power cable under the following conditions: - the conditions of external influences
are AD1 or
AD2, the mass of the suspended luminaire does not exceed 5 kg, the fixation of
-
the luminaire by its cable power supply must not exert stress on its
- connection device (DCL plug, terminal block).
The cable or cord between the fixing means and the luminaire must be installed in such a way that any excessive tension and
twisting stress in the conductors is avoided.
Means must be provided to prevent any strain on the electrical connections.
559.2.4.2 Through-wiring may only be carried out in luminaires intended for this purpose and in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
559.2.4.3 The connection cables must be chosen in accordance with the marking relating to the temperature of the luminaire, as
follows: - for luminaires complying with NF C 71-000, without
temperature marking,
heat-resistant cables are not prescribed;
- for luminaires complying with NF C71-000, with temperature marking,
Cables suitable for the indicated temperature must be used.
559.2.5 Auxiliary equipment independent of the luminaire Only independent

auxiliary equipment provided by the manufacturer may be used.
When the independent power supply equipment includes an igniter and is located outside the luminaire, particular attention must be
paid to the type of conductors connecting the igniter to the lamp socket(s). It is through these conductors that the voltage pulse
travels. The manufacturer must indicate the characteristics of the conductors to be used.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
559.2.6 Capacitors In the case

where capacitors with a total value greater than 0.5µF are used, apart from those included in the luminaire by the manufacturer,
a discharge resistor must be provided.
(30)
NOTE - Capacitors used in the field of lighting must comply with NF C 71-242 .
559.2.7 Protection against electric shock on lighting stands Lighting stands means stands of sales
outlets or parts thereof, used for the presentation of lighting fixtures.
Protection against electric shock must be ensured:

- either by a SELV power supply; or by
- automatic power cut-off using a 30 mA DDR.
559.2.8 Stroboscopic effect For the

lighting of premises containing machines with moving parts, account must be taken of stroboscopic effects which could lead to
ambiguities in an impression of the stationary effect of the moving parts. These effects can be avoided by choosing a luminaire
equipped with suitable equipment.
559.2.9 Recessed lighting fixtures in ceilings and false ceilings (suspended ceilings)
559.2.9.1 Implementation The

equipment, including equipment, must be arranged in such a way as to facilitate their operation, inspection, maintenance,
access to their connections and replacement.
Only devices equipped with fixed network connection terminals as well as those equipped with connectors with anti-tearing
devices are permitted.
When lighting fixtures require removal for changing the lamp(s), they must be equipped with traction stopping devices such
that the conductors are protected against traction or twisting forces.
559.2.9.2 Fixing lighting fixtures The weight

of the lighting fixtures and their possible equipment must be compatible with the mechanical resistance of the ceiling or
suspended ceiling on which they are installed.
Under these conditions, ceiling and suspended ceiling can be considered as stable elements of the construction and,
accordingly, the luminaires can be fixed on them.
It is commonly accepted that for lighting fixtures and their possible equipment weighing less than 200 g, ceilings and suspended
ceilings are automatically considered stable elements of the construction.
Concerning the possible independent equipment of the luminaire, in the case of a non-removable suspended ceiling the
equipment must be accessible for maintenance. Its introduction through the hole intended for mounting the luminaire is not
authorized, unless it is a device supplying a single lighting device.
559.2.9.3 Thermal effects To avoid

calling into question the thermal tests carried out by the manufacturer, the space receiving the rear part of the luminaire should
be suitably ventilated and not cause external heating. In case of uncertainty, the use of luminaires which can be covered with
a thermal insulating material bearing the symbol
must be considered.
F
———————
(30) Capacitors intended for use in circuits of tubular fluorescent lamps and other discharge lamps -
General safety requirements. - 312 -
Updated: June 2005
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
559.2.9.4 Very Low Voltage Luminaires The

requirements of the UTE C 15.559 guide apply.
559.2.10 Light paths The power

conductors of lighting devices placed in light paths are installed under the same conditions as installation in
trunking.
However, for light paths located more than 3 m above the floor of the premises, conductors are permitted if
the cover has the minimum degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB.
With regard to the connections, the patching of the power supply conductors is permitted under the conditions
specified in article (526.8).
The connections must either have a minimum degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB by construction, or be
placed in a connection box with a degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB.
The degree of protection can be ensured by the light path cover as long as it cannot be removed without the
help of a tool.
Where connectors are used, they must be arranged so that dangerous live parts are not accessible to the
touch (see 555.1.5).
559.3 Household electrical appliances

Appliances comprising bare electrodes or non-insulated resistances, immersed in water (for example water
heaters, steam humidifiers, etc.) are admitted under the following conditions:
- their tanks are made of non-conductive material; - their

power supplies must be protected by current differential devices
residual-differential assigned at most equal to 30 mA.
559.4 Electronic devices for domestic and similar uses

(31)
The receiving antennas must be installed in accordance with the standard in force. For the .
application of the requirements set out in 511.1, the standard to be considered is the following:
(32)
- Audio, video and similar electronic devices - Safety requirements .
559.5 Industrial heating devices For the

application of the requirements set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are the following:
(33) ;
- Industrial electric heating: Resistance ovens. Rules (34)
- Infrared radiation emitters - Characteristics; - Safety in electrothermal
(35)
installations .
Industrial heating devices with low insulation are generally powered via two-winding transformers or by motor-
generator groups with separate windings when the leakage currents of these devices can interfere with the
operation of the installations which supply them.
———————
(31) UTE C 90-122
(32) NF EN 60065 (C 92-130)
(33) C 79-600
(34) NF EN 60240-1 (C 79-651)
(35) NF EN 60519 (C79-63X).
- 313 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
559.5.1 Cooking appliances and ovens
Accessible parts of ovens which can be brought to a dangerous temperature must be surrounded by a guard or brought to the
attention of personnel by a visible inscription.
When ovens have significant leakage currents - such as resistance ovens - they must be powered according to the TN diagram.
559.5.2 Liquid heating devices
559.5.2.1 Devices for heating or reheating combustible or flammable liquids must either be equipped with a temperature limiter
interrupting or reducing heating before a dangerous temperature is reached or be constructed so as not to constitute a cause of
danger for people or damage to nearby objects in the event of excessive heating.
The provisions of this subparagraph do not concern devices whose use requires the presence of an operator monitoring their
operation.
559.5.2.2 Devices comprising bare electrodes or non-insulated resistances, immersed in water (for example, steam humidifiers,
clothing cleaning devices, etc.) are permitted in TN scheme installations.
They can be admitted to the TT or IT scheme under one of the following conditions: a) either, their tanks are
made of non-conductive material and their power supplies must be protected by differential-residual current devices rated at most
equal to 30 mA ;
b) or, the power supply of such devices must be carried out via a transformer with two windings, a transformer supplying only one
device.
559.5.2.3 Heating cords Heating cords

placed around fluid pipes must be protected by differential current devices with a differential-residual current rated at most equal to
30 mA.
When the pipes are made of conductive material, they must be earthed by the protective conductor of the power cable.
559.6 Engines
The rated power of a motor is the mechanical power available on the shaft; this means that the power supply of a motor is always
greater than its rated power.
For the calculation of the cross-section of elevator power conductors, reference should be made to 772.3.2.3c).
559.6.1 Limitation of problems due to engine starting
The current absorbed by any motor when starting must remain limited to a value which is not detrimental to the installation which
supplies it and does not cause unacceptable disruption to the operation of other devices connected to the same source.
- 314 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
In the case of motors supplied directly by a public distribution network, their

starts do not generally cause excessive disturbances if the intensity of
start-up is not greater than the values in table 55A.
Table 55A – Maximum motor starting currents
LOCAL MAXIMUM STARTING CURRENT
Air network Underground network
Motor connected residential (connection 45A 45A

with limited power)
in single phase others (connection to 100A 200A

monitored power)
Motor connected residential (connection 60A 60A

with limited power)
in three phase others (connection to 125A 250 A

monitored power)
Beyond these intensities, power supply to the motors is subject to the prior agreement of the
energy distributor so that arrangements are made for their use to remain
compatible with the conservation of distribution installations and trouble-free service
serious problems of users.
For the preservation of the installation, any significant heating of the
pipes, while ensuring that the protection devices do not intervene during
the start.
Troubles caused to the operation of other devices connected to the same source are
due to the voltage drop caused by the current draw which, at start-up, can be a
significant multiple of the current absorbed by the motor at full load.
The values in table 55A allow, with the most commonly used motors, the
following rated power values from Table 55B.
Table 55B – Maximum power of directly powered motors (kVA)
ENGINE TYPES Single phase 230 V Three-phase 400 V
direct start other modes
full power starting

LOCAL
Residential premises 1.4 5.5 11

Others ÿ air network 3 11 22
ÿ
Premises ÿ underground network 5.5 22 45
Other premises include premises such as those in the tertiary sector, the sector
industrial, general services of residential buildings, the agricultural sector, etc.
Prior examination by the energy distributor is necessary in the case of motors
driving a machine with high inertia, slow starting motors, braking motors
or counter-current reverser.
______________
- 315 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55
(Blank page)
- 316 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-56
Part 5-56 – Security installations
561 General ................................................ .................................................. .................317 562 Security

sources ............................ .................................................. .........................318 563
Circuits ......................... .................................................. .................................................. 319,564 Materials
for use .............................................. .................................................. ....320 565 Specific requirements
for security sources that cannot operate in
parallel with normal sources ............................................. .................................320
566 Special requirements for security sources that can operate in parallel
with normal sources .......................................... .............................................320
- 317 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-56
561 General
VS
This part deals with the general requirements relating to safety installations, the choice and implementation
of power supplies for installations and safety sources.
A safety power supply includes a safety source that allows it to maintain the operation of devices essential
to personal safety in the event of failure of the normal-replacement source.
The normal source generally consists of a connection to the high or low voltage public distribution network.
The replacement source makes it possible to maintain operation in the event of failure of the normal
source, of all or part of an installation for reasons other than personal safety.
In France, security installations are generally defined in regulatory texts. They include, for example:
- in all types of establishments:

• the necessary installations in the event of a fire to ensure the evacuation of people and facilitate
emergency response; • safety lighting
installations also necessary for the evacuation of people in the event of fire, but also, and most often,
in the event of failure of normal lighting.
- in establishments covered by labor legislation:

• installations whose unexpected shutdown or continued shutdown would result in risks for
the workers.
- in healthcare establishments:
• installations whose power failure would cause a risk for the
people undergoing care.
- in covered parking lots:
• toxic gas evacuation installations.
These installations sometimes concern all categories of people, sometimes a particular category such as
the public, workers, patients, occupants of a residential building, etc.
The provisions with which they must comply are contained in the regulatory texts drawn up by the
ministries responsible for the security of different categories of people.
When these installations are powered by a safety generator, this group may be common to all the
installations subject to:
- that the group complies with standard NF E 37-312; - that its
power and the energy reserve are determined in such a way that they allow the start-up and operation of
all safety installations in the most unfavorable conditions; that it is implemented in accordance with
the strictest rules of the various applicable
- texts;
- that the various security installations are supplied, from the general security panel, by separate circuits
and that the protections are selective in such a way that any fault occurring on one of the circuits has
no impact on the power supply to other safety circuits.
- 318 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-56
A safety power supply is:

VS
- either non-automatic when activation is initiated by an operator; or automatic when activation is independent
- of an operator.
An automatic power supply is classified according to switching time as follows:
- no shutdown: automatic power supply capable of ensuring permanent power supply under specified conditions during switching, for example
with respect to voltage and frequency variations;
- short stop: automatic power supply resumes in 0.5 s; - medium stop: automatic
power supply resumes in 10 s;
- long stop: automatic power supply resumes in more than 10 s.
Switching times can be specified in regulatory texts, for example 10 s for establishments open to the public.
561.1 A safety installation must operate in the event of fire, the materials which constitute it must present, by construction or by installation,
VS
a fire resistance of appropriate duration.
561.2 Protection provisions against indirect contacts not involving automatic cut-off at the first fault are preferably chosen. In the IT diagram,
a permanent insulation monitor must give an audible and visual signal during a first fault.
The usual arrangement is the power supply in IT scheme (411.6).
This does not exclude the use of TN or TT schemes when the regulatory texts allow it. Please note that in this case, if safety equipment only
operates in the event of a disaster (case of smoke extraction fans), regulatory texts generally require that its insulation from earth be
permanently monitored during periods of non-use by a CPI associated with a signaling device.
Locally, the following measures can be taken: - protection by using equipment with
double or reinforced insulation (412) ; - protection by electrical separation (413).
VS 561.3 Safety installation equipment, including pipes, must be arranged in such a way as to facilitate their operation, inspection, maintenance
and access to their connections.
562 Security Sources
562.1 Generators must comply with NF E 37-312.
Centralized safety storage batteries and the equipment accompanying them in power systems must comply with NF EN 50171.
562.2 Safety sources must be installed in a fixed position and in such a way that they cannot be affected by the failure of the normal
VS
replacement source.
Additional information is given in part 5-55 :
- 551.2.1 : Generators;
- 553.3 : Static uninterruptible power supplies;

- 554 : Accumulator batteries.

NF C 15-100 Part 5-56
VS
562.3 Safety sources must be installed in an appropriate location and be accessible only to people responsible
for maintaining and monitoring the equipment.
562.4 The location of safety sources must be suitably ventilated so that the gases and fumes they produce cannot
propagate into premises accessible to people.
562.5 Separate, independent connections supplied by a public distribution network are not permitted.
562.6 Security sources must be chosen to ensure appropriate autonomy.
562.7 A security source may be used for installations other than security installations as long as its availability for
the latter is not compromised.
In addition to the requirements of 562.2, a fault appearing in a circuit not intended for supplying security
installations must not result in the opening of any circuit supplying security installations. This requires selectivity
between protection devices and may require automatic load shedding of circuits supplying installations other than
safety.
A building or establishment may include one or more replacement generators to power, for reasons other than
safety, according to the decision of the project owner or the head of the establishment all or part of the electrical
, this establishment.
installations of this building or establishment.
This replacement group(s) can be used as security source(s) under the following conditions:
- the group(s) meets the rules applying to security groups;

- when there are several generators, in the event of failure of one of them, the power still available must remain
sufficient to ensure the start-up and operation of all safety installations;
- when the replacement generator is unique:

• its power must be such that it allows the starting and operation of all the
safety installations in the most adverse conditions;
• emergency lighting must be powered by one or more specific safety sources (storage batteries, stand-alone
units), which is generally the case, because generators are poorly suited to powering emergency lighting .

NF C 15-100 Part 5-56
562.8 In an installation supplied by the low-voltage public distribution network, when a safety circuit, such as a
smoke extraction circuit, comes from the general panel of the installation, the emergency cut-off function must
be carried out under the following conditions:
Case of a limited power connection: (see figure 562A)

The AGCP cannot be used as an emergency cut-off device. An additional device must therefore be provided,
downstream of the AGCP, to allow emergency cutting of all circuits other than that supplying the safety circuit.
AGCP
Emergency
cut-off device
(Additional device)
Safety circuit
Figure 562A – Power limited connection
Case of a monitored power connection:

- 1st case: The disconnecting device with visible cut-off is distinct from the general cut-off and protection
device (figure 562B)
The general switching and protection device can be used as an emergency switching device.
The safety circuit protection device will be connected upstream of the general control and protection device
which will ensure the emergency cutting of all other circuits in the installation (see figure 562B)
Disconnect
device with
visible cut-off
Emergency
cut-off device
(General
switching and
protection device)
Safety circuit
Figure 562B – Monitored power connection

Disconnecting device with visible cut-off distinct from the
general cut-off and protection device

NF C 15-100 Part 5-56
- 2nd case: Switching device with visible cut-off combined with the general cut-off and protection device (figure
562C) or general disconnectable cut-off and protection device (figure 562D)
The general cutting and protection device cannot be used as an emergency cutting device.
An additional device must therefore be provided, downstream of the general switching and protection
device, to allow the emergency cutting of all circuits other than that supplying the safety circuit.
Disconnector
with visible cutoff Withdrawable circuit breaker
combined with a circuit breaker
Emergency Emergency
cut-off device cut-off device
(Additional device) (Additional device)
Safety circuit Safety circuit
Figure 562C – Monitored power connection Figure 562D – Monitored power connection
Disconnecting device with visible cut-off General disconnectable switching and protection
combined with the general cut-off and protection device
device
NOTE – In Figures 562B, 562C and 562D the protective devices against indirect contact are not shown »
VS 562.9 Paragraphs 562.1 to 562.7 do not apply to stand-alone blocks.
563 Tours
563.1 The cables of safety installations must be different from the cables of normal installations, that is to say,
contain only safety circuit conductors.
This does not exclude the routing of these different cables on the same support.
563.2 The circuits of safety installations must not pass through locations presenting a fire risk (BE2), and
VS
locations presenting a risk of explosion (BE3).
563.3 For the power circuits of electric motors of certain safety installations if, for safety reasons, it is necessary
that a motor can ensure its service even under conditions of mechanical or other fault, protection against
overloads, prescribed by paragraph 433.2.1, must not be implemented. The motor supply pipeline shall not be
protected against overloads but only against short circuits, provided that the pipeline and the control and
protection equipment can withstand the overload currents resulting from such faults.
Unless precisely indicated by the motor manufacturer, this last condition can be considered to be satisfied if the
rated current of the equipment and the admissible current of the pipeline are determined for an operating current
equal to 1.5 times the current rated motor.
This provision is particularly required for powering smoke extraction motors in establishments open to the public.
- 320B - Updated: June 2005

NF C 15-100 Part 5-56
The regulatory texts specify these cases targeting circuits supplying motors, circuits whose conductors
have a cross-section that must comply with 433.3 e).
563.4 Each circuit must be protected in such a way that any electrical incident affecting it, by overcurrent,
VS
rupture or ground fault, does not interrupt the power supply to other safety circuits powered by the same
source.
563.5 Protection, control and alarm devices must be clearly identified. Protection and control devices must
be grouped in locations accessible only to people responsible for maintaining and monitoring the equipment.
564 Use materials
564.1 In lighting installations, the types of lamps must be compatible with the switching duration so as to
VS
maintain the specified illuminance level.
The rule in this article prohibits the use for emergency lighting of discharge lamps of a type such that their
priming requires a time greater than 15 seconds.
VS
564.2 In equipment powered by two different circuits, a fault occurring in one circuit must not affect the
protection against electric shock and the correct operation of the other circuit. The earthing of this equipment
must be carried out by the two protective conductors.
565 Special requirements for security sources that cannot operate in parallel with normal
sources
565.1 All precautions must be taken to avoid paralleling of sources, for example using mechanical
interlocking.
In the case of a source operating as a replacement for the public distribution network, appropriate provisions
are given in 551.1.1
VS 565.2 Protection against short circuits and protection against indirect contacts must be ensured regardless
of the source powering the installations.
566 Special requirements for security sources that can operate in parallel with normal
sources
In the case of a source that can operate in parallel with the public distribution network, the requirements of
551.1.2 apply.
VS Protection against short circuits and protection against indirect contacts must be ensured both when the
installation is supplied separately by any of the two sources and by the two sources in parallel.
NOTE – Precautions may be necessary to limit the current flowing in the connections between the neutral points of the sources,
particularly with regard to the effect of harmonic 3.
See the UTE C 15-401 guide for the compatibility of the different earth connection schemes.
––––––––––––
- 321 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-56
(Blank page)
- 322 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6
Title 6 – Verifications and maintenance of installations
600 Introduction ................................................ .................................................. ................323

Part 6-61 - Checks and commissioning........................................ .............................323
610.1 General ................................................ .................................................. .......323

610.2 (available) ............................................. .................................................. .........323 610.3
Definitions........................................ .................................................. ...................323
611 Visual inspection........................................................ .................................................. .......324
612 Tests ................................................ .................................................. .........................325
612.1 General ................................................ .................................................. .......325
612.2 Continuity of protective conductors and equipotential connections
main and additional................................................ .............................325 612.3 Insulation
resistance of the electrical installation .......... .....................................326 612.4 Protection by SELV
or PELV or by separation of circuits. .............................327 612.4.1 Protection by
SELV.............. .................................................. .........................327 612.4.2 Protection by
PELV.................. .................................................. .....................327 612.4.3 Protection by electrical
separation ..................... ..................................................327 612.5 Resistance of soils and
walls ................................................ .........................327 612.6 Verification of protection conditions
by automatic cut-off
food .............................................. .................................................. ..327
612.6.1 General .............................................. .................................................. ......328
612.6.2 Measuring the resistance of earth connections ....................................... ..............329 612.6.3
Measurement of fault loop impedance .................................. .............................330 612.6.4 Measuring
the resistance of protective conductors........... .........................330 612.7 Functional
tests .......................... .................................................. .................331
Part 6-62 - Periodic checks........................................................ .................................331
620.1 General ................................................ .................................................. .......331
620.2 Frequency of periodic checks............................................ .................331 620.3 Area of periodic
verifications ............................. .....................................331 620.4
Report............... .................................................. .................................................. .332 Part 6-63 -
Facilities maintenance ......................................... .......................................332
- 323 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6
VS 600 Introduction
Part 6-61 concerns commissioning checks and Part 6-62 concerns periodic checks.
These checks, upon commissioning and periodic, should be compared to the initial check of the electrical
installations, when they are put into service or after they have undergone a structural modification, and to
the periodic checks, provided for in article 53 of the decree of November 14, 1988, verifications being the
subject of the decree of October 10, 2000. This decree defines, in particular, in detail the scope of the
verifications and the content of the reports relating to said verifications. The verifications relate to the
measures taken to meet the requirements of the decree of November 14, 1988 and the orders taken for its
application. These provisions are assessed by reference to the corresponding rules of the art, in particular
the provisions relating to the prevention of risks of electric shock, burns, fire or explosion of electrical origin
contained in the installation standards, in low voltage in particular this standard and its application guides.
The testing methodology is that described in this part.
Part 6-61 - Checks and commissioning
610.1 General
610.1.1 Any installation must, during implementation or when it is completed and before it is made available
VS
to the user, be verified.
610.1.2 The information requested in 514.5 must be made available to those carrying out the verifications.
Please note that the diagrams are part of the documents requested in Annex III (point 4) of the decree of
October 10, 2000.
VS
610.1.3 Precautions must be taken during verification and testing to avoid danger to people and damage to
property and installed equipment.
610.1.4 When extending or modifying existing installations, it must be verified that the extensions or
modifications to the installation meet the requirements of this standard and do not compromise the safety of
the existing installation.
610.1.5 Verifications must be carried out by a qualified person, competent in the field of verifications, with in-
depth knowledge of the provisions of this standard and those of national regulations.
The regulatory texts may specify the conditions which must be met by the persons authorized to carry out
these checks, where applicable, the need for approval.
VS 610.1.6 Following verification in accordance with the requirements of this part, a report must be prepared.
This report must include observations relating to the visual inspection and the tests carried out.
NOTE - Information relating to periodic checks is given in part 6-62.
610.2 (available)
610.3 Definitions
610.3.1
verification
verification integrates all methods by means of which the conformity of the entire electrical installation with
this standard is proven. It includes visual inspection and testing.
- 324 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6
VS 610.3.2
visual inspection
visual inspection consists of examining electrical installations to ensure their appropriate implementation.
610.3.3
tests
the aim of the tests is to ensure, by measurements made using appropriate measuring and testing devices,
the effectiveness of the implementation of the provisions prescribed by the standard, when it is not possible to
do this by visual inspection.
611 Visual inspection
611.1 The visual inspection must precede the tests and be normally carried out with the entire installation de-
energized.
611.2 The visual inspection is intended to verify whether the electrical equipment permanently connected:
- complies with the safety requirements of the applicable equipment standards;

NOTE - This can be verified by examination of the marking or certificate.
- is chosen correctly and installed in accordance with this standard and the instructions of
builders;
- has no visible damage that could affect safety.
611.3 The visual inspection must include at least verification of the following conditions, to the extent they
apply:
- protective measures against electric shock, including the measurement of distances, for example with regard
to protection by barriers or by enclosures, by obstacles or by distancing (see Annexes A and B of Part
4-41) ;
NOTE - The rule in appendix C1 in part 4-41 “Protection by non-conductive premises” is verifiable only when the installation
only supplies permanently connected equipment.
- presence of fire barriers and other provisions preventing the spread of fire and
protection against thermal effects (see parts 4-42, 4-43 and 527) ;
- choice of materials and implementation in locations at risk of explosion
(see 424) ;
- choice of conductors for admissible currents and voltage drop (see 523) ; - choice and adjustment of
protection and monitoring devices (see part 5-53) ;
The choice of conductor sections and the adjustment of the protection devices are checked according to the
calculation notes established by the designer in accordance with the rules of this standard, and in particular
parts 4-41, 4-43, 5-53 and 5-54. For residential premises, reference should be made to Part 7-771. - presence
of appropriate sectioning and control devices
VS (see part 4-46 and
537) ;
- compliance with the rules prohibiting the installation of single-pole breaking devices on the neutral conductor;
- choice of materials and protective measures appropriate to external influences (see

512.2 and 522) ;
- identification of neutral conductors and protective conductors (see 514.3) ; - presence of diagrams,
warning notices and similar information (see 514.5) ; - identification of circuits, fuses, switches,
terminals, etc. (see 514) ; - making conductor connections (see 526) ;
- 325 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6
The aim of this check is to check that the fixing means are suitable for the conductors concerned and that these connections are
correctly made.
If there is any doubt about the effectiveness of a connection, the contact resistance should be measured at the connection. This
resistance must not be greater than the resistance of a conductor one meter long and having the smallest section of the connected
conductors; in no case should this resistance be greater than 0.02 ohm.
- accessibility and identification for ease of operation and maintenance of emergency cut-off devices (see 536.3) and cut-off devices
VS
for mechanical maintenance (see 536.4).
It must be verified that the conditions of use of these devices are not modified by their implementation.
612 Essays
612.1 General
VS
The following tests shall be carried out where applicable and preferably in the following order:
- continuity of protective conductors and main equipotential connections and

additional (see 612.2) ;
- insulation resistance of the electrical installation (see 612.3) ; - protection by SELV or
SELV and by separation of circuits (see 612.4) ; - resistance of floors and walls (see 612.5) ; - automatic
power cut-off (see article 612.6) ; - polarity test (see 612.7) ; -
functional tests (see 612.8).
When a test gives a negative result, this test and all the tests which preceded it, the results of which may be influenced by the test in
question, must be repeated after the elimination of the defect.
The test methods described in this part are reference methods; other methods are not excluded provided they give equally reliable
results.
Measuring devices must comply with the relevant standards of the NF EN 61557 (1) series. If other measuring devices are used, they
must provide an equivalent degree of performance and safety.
Tests for circuit separation protection are carried out when the following protective measures are used:
- protection by use of SELV or SELV (see 414) ; - protection by electrical separation
(see 413).
612.2 Continuity of protective conductors and main and additional equipotential connections
A continuity test must be carried out.
It is recommended that the test be carried out with a source with a no-load voltage of 4 V to 24 V, direct or alternating current, and
with a current of at least 0.2 A.
Attention is drawn to the fact that the current used for the continuity test must be compatible with the fire or explosion risks of the
location considered.
———————
(1) NF EN 61557 series (C 42-198)
- 326 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6
VS This test is requested as part of the verification of the protection conditions by cutting
automatic feeding (see 612.6). It is considered satisfactory if the device
used for the test gives a stable indication and complies with the indications of the UTE C 15 guide-
105.
612.3 Insulation resistance of the electrical installation
The insulation resistance must be measured between each live conductor and earth.
NOTES -
1 - In the TN-C diagram, the PEN conductor is considered as part of the earth.
2 - During this measurement, the phase conductors and the neutral conductor can be connected together.
Table 61A – Minimum insulation resistance values
Rated circuit voltage Test voltage Resistance

while running isolation
continuous
V Mÿ
V
SELV and PELV 250 ÿ 0.25
Less than or equal to 500 V, except

of the above cases 500 ÿ 0.5
Greater than 500 V 1,000 ÿ 1.0
The measurements are carried out with the installation de-energized.
It is generally carried out by measuring the insulation resistance of an entire

installation at its origin. If the measured value is lower than that specified in the table
61A, the installation can be divided into several groups of circuits and the insulation resistance
of each group is measured.
If, for a group of circuits, the measured value is lower than that specified in the table
61A, the insulation resistance of each circuit is measured.
When circuits or parts of circuits are disconnected by devices with a minimum of

voltage (e.g. contactors) cutting all active conductors, the resistance
insulation of these circuits or parts of circuits is measured separately.
If certain user devices are connected and if in this case the measured value is
lower than that specified in Table 61A, these devices are then disconnected.
With regard to the devices used, it is necessary to ensure that their resistance
insulation is not lower than the value prescribed by the standard concerning them or, failing that,
0.5M ÿ .
Regarding the insulation resistance of heating cables embedded in the walls of the
buildings, it is appropriate to apply the values concerning the insulation resistance of
pipes, namely:
The insulation resistance measured after installation in concrete must be at least equal
at 1000 ohms per volt of rated voltage per heating element, with a minimum of
0.25M ÿ .
As a result, taking into account the rated voltage values of the heating elements, the
insulation resistances must be at least equal to:
- 0.25M ÿ ÿ for heating elements with a rated voltage of 230 volts.

- 0.40M for heating elements with a rated voltage of 400 volts.
- 327 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6
Table 61A is applicable for checking insulation resistance between ungrounded protective conductors and earth.
Measurements must be carried out using direct current. The testing apparatus shall be capable of supplying the test voltage
specified in Table 61A with a current of 1 mA.
VS 612.4 Protection by SELV or PELV or by circuit separation
Circuit separation shall be verified in accordance with 612.4.1 in the case of SELV protection, 612.4.2 in the case of PELV
protection and 612.4.3 in the case of electrical separation protection .
The measurement of the insulation resistance of the separate circuit is carried out relative to earth.
VS 612.4.1 Protection by SELV
The separation of the live parts from those of other circuits as well as from earth, in accordance with 414, must be verified by
measuring the insulation resistance. The insulation resistance values obtained shall be in accordance with Table 61A.
612.4.2 Protection by PELV
612.4.3 Protection by electrical separation
The separation required in 413.3.3 between a separate circuit and any other circuit is verified by examination. When a device
includes both a separate circuit and another circuit, this separation is achieved by constructing the equipment in accordance with
the safety requirements of the relevant standard.
In the case of fixed separation sources, it is verified that the secondary circuit has double or reinforced insulation in relation to the
enclosure.
Mobile sources must be double or reinforced insulation.
VS
612.5 Resistance of floors and walls
It may be necessary to measure: the minimum

- resistance of floors and walls to meet the requirements of Annex C1 of Part 4-41 or, the maximum resistance of floors in
medical premises
- where there is a risk of ignition to meet to the requirements of paragraph 14.1.3 of standard NF C 15-211.
The measurements are made in at least five different locations in the room, located near the four corners and the center. At each
of these locations, five measurements are taken in a circle of 50 cm in diameter, from which the average value will be taken.
If we want to ensure a minimum resistance, we will use as the resistance of the room the lowest value of the average measurements
taken, the measurements having been made on a damp floor.
- 328 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6
VS If we want to ensure maximum resistance, we will use as the resistance of the room the highest value of the average measurements
taken, the measurements having been made on a floor in a dry state, i.e. i.e. not having been washed for at least four hours.
Appendix A of this part gives, by way of example, a method for measuring the resistance of floors and walls.
612.6 Verification of protection conditions by automatic power cut-off
612.6.1 General
The effectiveness of protective measures against indirect contact by automatic power cutoff is checked as follows:
Verification of the effectiveness of the protection measure against indirect contact depends on the earth connection diagram.
VS
a) For the TN scheme
Verification of compliance with the rules of 411.3.2 and 411.4.3 must include:
1) measuring the impedance of the fault loop (see 612.6.3). Alternatively, compliance may be verified by measuring the
resistance of protective conductors (see 612.6.4)
These measurements are not necessary when calculations of fault loop impedances or protective conductor resistances are
available, and when the installation arrangements make it possible to check the length and section of the conductors, in which
case the verification of the continuity of the protective conductors (see 612.2) is sufficient.
2) verification of the characteristics of the associated cutting device:
- by test for residual-differential current devices.
The automatic cut-off of the power supply by differential device must be verified by injection of a residual-differential current Iÿn
generated by appropriate test equipment; the cut-off time is not verified.
- by visual inspection of the setting current for the circuit breakers or the rated current
for fuses;
Verification consists of ensuring that the minimum clear fault current between a phase conductor and the protective conductor is at
least equal to the current ensuring the operation of the protection device within the time prescribed in 411.3.2.2 or 411.3.2.3.
The minimum clear fault current can be determined by calculation if the phase conductors and the protective conductor are installed
in close proximity without the interposition of ferromagnetic elements. In accordance with the provisions in 411.3, this minimum
fault current must be at least equal to:
- if protection is provided by a circuit breaker, to the current ensuring instantaneous or short delay operation of the circuit
breaker; if protection is provided by fuses, to the current
- ensuring the fuse blows in a time at most equal to that fixed in table 41A depending on the rated voltage of the installation.
It is therefore sufficient to check that the installation complies with the calculation note provided by the designer, by examination:
- sections and lengths of circuits; - rated currents (for

fuses) and setting currents (for circuit breakers) of the devices
automatic cut-off.
Calculations carried out by computer programs having received technical advice from the UTE following the award procedures of
the UTE C 15-500 guide are deemed to ensure compliance with the rules of this standard.
- 329 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6
When the condition of proximity of the active conductors and the protective conductor is not respected, the verification in principle
requires the measurement of the impedance of the fault loop and the calculation, based on this impedance, of the minimum fault
current franc.
VS b) For the TT diagram
Compliance with the rules of 411.5.3 must include:
1) measuring the resistance of the RA earth connection of the installation masses (see 612.6.2) ;
2) visual examination and testing of residual current devices; The automatic cut-off of the power
supply by differential device must be verified by injection of a residual-differential current Iÿn generated by appropriate test
equipment; the cut-off time is not verified.
3) Checking the continuity of protective conductors (see 612.2).
Test methods for differential-residual current devices are given in Appendix B as examples.
c) For the IT diagram

VS
The first fault current must be calculated or measured.

NOTES -
1 - This measurement is not necessary if all the masses of the installation are connected to the earth connection of the power supply
(see 312.2.3) when the installation is connected to earth through an impedance ( see 411.6.1).
2 - The measurement is carried out only if the calculation is not possible because all the parameters are not known. Care should be
taken when carrying out measurements to avoid the dangers resulting from a double fault.
When at the second fault, the conditions are similar to those of the TN diagram (see 411.6.4a), the checks are carried out in
accordance with point a) above.
When at the second fault, the conditions are similar to those of the TT diagram (see 411.6.4b), the checks are carried out in
accordance with point b) above.
NOTE - Measuring the impedance of the fault loop requires establishing, during the measurements, a connection of negligible impedance
between the neutral point of the power supply and the protective conductor at the origin of the installation.
When the masses are interconnected, the verification of the protection conditions is carried out as indicated in 612.6.1.1, taking
into account the following details:
- the current to be taken into consideration is equal to half of the minimum direct fault current between an active conductor and
the protective conductor of the circuit considered, the active conductor being a phase conductor if the neutral is not distributed
and the neutral conductor whether it is distributed; the operating time of the protection device is that specified in Table 41A.
612.6.2 Measuring the resistance of earth connections
Measuring the resistance of an earth connection is carried out using an appropriate method.
NOTES -
1 - Appendix C describes, by way of example, a measurement method using two auxiliary earth connections and specifies the conditions
to be met.
2 - When, in the TT diagram, the location of the installation (for example in towns) does not allow in practice two auxiliary earth
connections, measuring the resistance of the fault loop gives a value by excess.
It may be useful to measure the "open strip" and "closed strip" earth connections in order to know whether the "closed strip" value
is due to the specially established earth connection or to de facto earth connections.
It is not always necessary to disconnect the earth terminal to measure the resistance of the earth connection.
The earthing resistance can be measured "closed strip" when it is certain that the measured value does not come from the
connection of the earthing installation to a de facto earthing which could be removed without notice (for example, water or gas
distribution network in the event of replacement of a metal pipe with an insulating pipe).
- 330 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Title 6
This is generally the case when the earth connection is made by belting at the bottom of the
search. In other cases, the measurement must be made “open bar”.
VS 612.6.3 Measurement of fault loop impedance

The measurement of the fault loop impedance must be carried out at the same frequency as the
nominal frequency of the power supply.
The measured fault loop impedance shall meet the conditions of 411.4.3 for the
TN scheme and 411.6.4 for the IT scheme.
NOTE - When the value of the fault loop impedance can be influenced by fault currents
important, the results of measurements carried out with such currents in the factory or in the laboratory can be taken into account
consideration. This applies in particular to factory-assembled assemblies, including prefabricated pipelines,
metal conduits and cables with metal coating.
612.6.4 Measuring the resistance of protective conductors

612.6.4.1 Verification consists of measuring the resistance between any mass and the most point
close to the main equipotentiality.
NOTE - Protective conductors include metal conduits and other metal enclosures for
drivers under the conditions defined in 543.2.
It is recommended to carry out this measurement under a no-load voltage between 4 and 24 V in
direct or alternating current and with a current of at least 0.2 A.
In circuits protected by a current overload protection device
rated not exceeding 32 A, it is possible to use sources developing
a nominal current lower than 0.2 A.
VS The measured resistance R must meet the following condition:
UK o
Rÿ
I2 has
Uo being the nominal voltage between phase and neutral (V),
Ia being the current ensuring the operation of the protection device over time t
defined by table 41A for TN and lT schemes, or 5 s for distribution circuits.
When the protection device is a circuit breaker, Ia is the minimum current ensuring the
instantaneous or short delay operation of this circuit breaker.
k being a factor equal to 1 in the TN diagram,
3
in the IT diagram when the neutral is not distributed,
2
1
in the IT diagram when the neutral is distributed.
2
The maximum values of resistance R for the different protection devices and for the
different nominal voltages Uo are given in the UTE C 15-105 guide.
- 331 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Title 6
612.6.4.2 When the requirements in 612.6.3 or 612.6.4.1 are not met and an additional connection is made in
VS
accordance with 415.2, its effectiveness shall be verified as specified in 415.2.2.
612.7 Functional tests

The equipment assemblies, motors and their auxiliaries, controls, interlocks, IPCs, must be subjected to a functional
test in order to verify that they are correctly assembled, adjusted and installed in accordance with the requirements
of this standard.
Protective devices must be functionally tested, if necessary, to verify that they are correctly installed and adjusted.
Part 6-62 - Periodic checks
620.1 General
VS
Periodic checks of electrical installations are carried out to determine whether the installations and parts of
installations have not suffered damage making them unsuitable for safe use and that they are maintained in
compliance with installation rules, unless otherwise specified. contrary to national regulations.
In addition, they include the examination of the effects of any change in destination of the premises for which the
installation was planned.
NOTE – The general rules and methodological indications given for the initial verification are valid for periodic verifications.
620.2 Frequency of periodic checks
After the initial check, checks of electrical installations should be carried out with a minimum frequency depending
on the characteristics of the installation, use and environment. The maximum periodicity between inspections may
be indicated in national regulations.
The main texts prescribing verification intervals are as follows:
- decree of October 10, 2000 for establishments receiving workers;
- decree of June 25, 1980 amended for establishments open to the public;
- orders relating to classified installations;
- order of the general regulations for extractive industries.
620.3 Area of periodic verifications It is

recommended that periodic verifications include at least:
- a visual inspection relating to protection against direct and indirect contact and protection against fire and
explosion;
- an insulation resistance test; - a continuity
test of the protective conductors; - a functional test of the differential
devices, see appendix B ; - monitoring of overcurrent protection devices;
- measuring the resistance of the earth connection.
The appropriate regulatory texts, in particular the decree of October 10, 2000, indicate the extent of periodic
verifications.
- 332 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6
620.4 Report
Following periodic checks, a report must be drawn up and must include, in addition to any observations relating
to the visual examination and tests carried out, information relating to modifications and extensions not in
compliance with the requirements, specifying the parts concerned. the installation.
VS Part 6-63 - Facility Maintenance
Facilities must be kept in good condition at all times.
Any defect or anomaly observed in the condition of the electrical equipment or in its operation must be reported
to a person responsible for monitoring the installation.
This is particularly the case when protection devices against overcurrents or against electric shock operate
without a known cause.
It is necessary to pay particular
attention to: - the maintenance of provisions keeping the active parts out of reach, -
the connections and the condition of the protective conductors, - the
condition of the flexible cables supplying the mobile devices as well as to their devices
connection,
- the correct adjustment of the protection devices.
Any installation or part of an installation which appears dangerous must be immediately de-energized and may
only be put back into service after satisfactory repair.
Maintenance and inspection operations on installations must only be entrusted to people qualified to carry
them out.
For the safety conditions in which these operations must be carried out, it is useful to draw inspiration from the
indications contained in the Compendium of general electrical safety instructions (2).
In particular, operations to replace electrical equipment must only be carried out after disconnecting the
corresponding power supply circuit. For certain equipment, it is necessary to check the absence of any voltage
on the power supply terminals of the equipment, this is the case when the power supply mode of the equipment
may give rise to fear of a voltage return by a circuit other than the main power supply circuit of the equipment.
For example, replacing a surge protector (534.2) requires sectioning the high voltage power supply circuits
from the transformer and the feeder to the low voltage installation.
___________
———————
(2) UTE C 18-510
- 333 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6
VS Annex A – (informative) – Method for measuring the insulation resistance of floors

and walls
For these measurements, a magneto ohmmeter or an insulation tester with a built-in battery is used, giving a
no-load voltage of approximately 500 V (or 1,000 V if the rated voltage of the installation is greater than 500
V) in direct current. .
The resistance is measured between the measuring electrode and a protective conductor of the installation.
The electrode may be one of those described below. In case of dispute, the use of electrode 2 is the reference
method.
NOTE - It is recommended to carry out the test before applying the surface treatment (varnishes, paints and
similar
products). Measuring electrode 1
750N
Wooden tray
I L
Metal tray
Damp laundry
UI
Flooring
Ground
Figure A1 – Measuring electrode 1
The floor and/ or wall must be covered with a damp cloth of approximately 270 mm A metal tray of
approximately 250 mm X 250 mm a wall. The load does not really influence the measured resistance. In the
case of floors or walls likely to be damp such as carpets or wallpaper, it is recommended to do without damp
cloth.
In the case of presence of humidity, different values can be obtained.
Measuring electrode 2
The measuring electrode consists of a metal tripod whose parts bearing on the self are distributed at the vertices
of an equilateral triangle. Each supporting part is provided with a flexible sole, ensuring, when loaded, intimate
direct contact with the surface to be tested over an area of approximately 900 mm² and representing a resistance
of less than 5,000 ohms.
Before carrying out the measurements, the part to be tested is wet or covered with a damp cloth.
During the measurements, a force of approximately 750 N or 250 N is applied to the tripod depending on
whether it is a floor or a wall.
- 334 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Title 6
VS
Figure A2 – Measuring electrode 2
The resistance of antistatic floors is measured with measuring electrode 2, the floor being at
dry state, that is to say not having been washed for at least four hours.
- 335 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Title 6
VS Annex B – (informative) – Verification of the operation of the safety devices

residual current protection
NOTE - The permanent leakage current of the installation is added vectorially to the test current. In case of
In doubt, operation is checked by disconnecting the load.
The following methods are given as an example.
Method 1
Figure B1 shows the principle of a method in which a variable resistor is

connected between a downstream active conductor and the masses. The current is increased by
reducing the value of the variable resistor RP.
The current I ÿ for which the device operates must not be greater than the current
rated residual differential I ÿ not.
L1
L2
L3
NOT
Rp
NOTE – Method 1 can be used for TN-S and TT schemes; it is not recommended for the IT diagram.
Figure B1 – Example for method 1
- 336 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Title 6
VS
Method 2
Figure B2 shows the principle of a method in which the variable resistor is connected
between an active conductor upstream and another active conductor downstream.
The current is increased by reducing the value of the variable resistor RP.
The current I ÿ for which the device operates must not be greater than I ÿ not. The load must
be disconnected during the test.
NOTE – Method 2 can be used in all TN-S, TT and IT schemes.
Figure B2 – Example for method 2
- 337 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Title 6
VS
Annex C – (informative) – Measuring the resistance of an earth connection
As an example, the following method can be used when measuring the resistance of the earth connection is
prescribed (see figure C1).
An alternating current of constant intensity circulates between the earth connection T and an auxiliary earth
connection T1 placed at a distance of T such that the surfaces of influence of the two earth connections do
not overlap.
A second auxiliary earth connection T2, which may be a metal stake driven into the ground, is then placed
halfway between T and T1, and the voltage drop between T and T2 is measured.
The resistance of the earth electrode is equal to the voltage between T and T2 divided by the current flowing
between T and T1, provided that there is no mutual influence between the earth electrodes.
In order to check that the resistance of the earth connections is correct, two further readings are taken by
moving the earth connection T2 approximately 6 m further, then 6 m closer to the socket T. If the three
results are substantially in agreement, the average of the three readings is taken as the resistance of the
earth connection T. Otherwise, the tests are repeated by increasing the distance between T and T1.
If the test is carried out with a current at industrial frequency, the internal impedance of the voltmeter used
must be at least 200 ÿ / V.
The current source used for the test must be separated from the distribution network (for example by a two-
winding transformer).
T: earth connection under test, disconnected from all other power sources
T1 : auxiliary earth connection
T2 : second auxiliary earth connection
X: other position of T2 for the control measurement
Y: other position of T2 for other control measures
Figure C1 – Measuring earth resistance
______________
- 338 - 2002
TITLE 7. - Rules for special installations and locations
Part 7-701 – Premises containing a bathtub or shower (Washrooms)
Part 7-702 – Swimming pools and other ponds
Part 7-703 – Premises containing sauna heaters
Part 7-704 – Site Facilities
Part 7-705 – Electrical installations in agricultural establishments
Part 7-706 – Cramped conductive enclosures
Part 7-708 – Electrical installations of caravan parks
Part 7-709 – Electrical installations of marinas
Part 7-711 – Temporary electrical installations of structures, huts, stands in fairgrounds, markets, leisure parks, circuses and
exhibition or performance venues
Part 7-717 – Mobile or transportable units
Part 7-752 – Liquid fuel distribution areas
Part 7-753 – Electric space heating equipment
Part 7-771 – Residential premises
Part 7-772 – Special provisions for installations of common areas and general services in collective buildings
Part 7-773 – Protection of unsupervised facilities
Part 7-781 – Electrical service premises or locations

NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
Part 7-701 – Premises containing a bathtub or shower
(Bathroom)
701.1 Scope of application............................................ .............................................339
701.3 Determination of general characteristics ............................................. .........339
701.4 Protection to ensure safety............................................ .............................340 701.41 Protection

against electric shock .............................. .............................................340
701.5 Selection and implementation of electrical equipment............................................. .......341

701.51 Common rules ....................................... .................................................. ....341 701.52
Pipelines............................................ .................................................. ........341 701.53
Apparatus ....................................... .................................................. .............341 701.55 Other
equipment .......................... .................................................. .............342
701.71 Additional rules for shower rooms .......................................... 349
Appendix – (informative) Equipotential connection ......................................... ....................351
The requirements of this part supplement, modify or replace the general requirements of the other parts of
NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-701 are those of the corresponding parts, articles or
paragraphs of this standard.
The absence of reference to a part, article or paragraph means that the corresponding general requirements
apply.
- 339 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
VS
701.1 Scope The special requirements
of this part apply to premises containing bathtubs and/or showers (with or without tray), in which the risk of electric shock is
increased due to the reduction in the electrical resistance of the wet or submerged human body and its contact with the potential
of the earth.
NOTE - For balneotherapy rooms:

- when the installation is individual, the rules of this part are applicable; when the installation is collective, the rules of
- part 7-702 apply.
The rules of this part are based on the following two principles: - limitation of electrical
equipment located near the bathtub or shower tray; - equalization of the potentials of all conductive elements and
masses simultaneously
accessible.
VS
701.3 Determination of general characteristics
701.32 Classification of volumes
701.320.1 These requirements consider four volumes,
- volume 0 is the interior volume of the bathtub or shower tray;

- volume 1 is limited, • on the
one hand, by the cylindrical surface with a vertical generator circumscribed by the bathtub or the shower tray or, for a
shower with a fixed head without a tray, by the cylindrical surface with a vertical generator of radius 0, 60 m and whose
axis passes through the fixed apple, • on the other hand, through the horizontal plane located above volume 0 and that
located at 2.25 m
above the bottom of the bathtub or shower tray.
one hand, by the exterior vertical surface of volume 1 and a parallel surface located
0.60 m from the first,
• on the other hand, by the ground and the horizontal plane located 3.0 m above the ground.
one hand, by the exterior vertical surface of volume 2 and a parallel surface located
2.40 m from the first,
• on the other hand, by the ground and the horizontal plane located 2.25 m above the ground.
The dimensions are measured taking into account the walls and walls (see figures 701A, 701B and 701C).
701.320.2 In the case where there is no shower tray and the shower head is located at the end of a hose, the vertical axis of the
cylindrical surface is considered at the origin of the hose and volume 1 is limited by the cylindrical surface located 1.20 m from
this point, whatever the position of the flow point.
VS 701.320.3 Individual shower stalls shall meet the requirements of Paragraphs 701.1 to 701.5.
701.320.4 The volume located above volume 1 to a height of 3 m above the ground is volume 2.
The volume located above volume 2 for a height greater than 3 m above the ground is excluding volumes.
The volume above volume 3 is out of volume.
See figures 701B.
- 340 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
701.320.5 The space located below the bathtub or shower and on their sides is assimilated to volume 3 if it is
closed and accessible by a hatch provided for this use and which can be opened only using a 'a tool.
Otherwise, the rules of volume 1 apply to this space.
However, in both cases, the minimum degree of protection IPX3 is required.
701.320.6 When a closed false ceiling is placed in volumes 1 and 2, the space located above this false
ceiling is considered to be volume 3 [see figure 701B e)].
If an openwork false ceiling is at a height between 2.25 m and 3 m, the volumes thus defined are indicated in
figure 701B c).
701.4 Protection to ensure safety

VS
701.41 Protection against electric shock
NOTE - For protection of receptacle receptacles, see 701.53.
701.414.1 When SELV is used, protection against direct contact must be ensured, regardless of the nominal
voltage, by means of barriers or enclosures having at least the degree of protection IP2X.
701.414.2 In volume 0, only the protection measure by SELV with a nominal voltage at most equal to 12 V in
alternating current or 30 V in direct current is permitted, the safety source being installed outside volumes 0,
1 and 2.
701.414.3 All electrical equipment located outside volumes 0, 1, 2, 3 in rooms containing a bathtub or shower
are protected by RCD 30mA regardless of the dimensions of this room.
701.415.2 Additional equipotential bonding

An additional equipotential connection must connect all the conductive elements and all the masses of
volumes 1, 2 and 3.
See appendices A and B of this part.
In the case of total renovations, we will consider a door or window frame electrically connected in fact to the
equipotential connection when the continuity, measured according to 612.2, between a conductive element
actually connected to the additional equipotential connection and the frame, is at more equal to 2. In this case,
there is no need to use a conductor connecting the frame toÿ the additional local equipotential connection since
it is considered to be made.
A door or window frame will be considered not likely to propagate a potential when the insulation resistance,
measured according to 612.3, between a conductive element connected to the local additional equipotential
ÿ to the
connection and the frame is at least equal to 50,000. In this case, there is no need to connect the frame
local additional equipotential connection.
- 341 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
VS 701.5 Selection and implementation of electrical equipment
701.51 Common rules
701.512.2 External influences
The external influence conditions are as follows depending on the volumes considered:
Table 701A – External influences

VOLUMES 0 11 2 3
4 4 4 4
Ambient temperature (AA)
Humidity 4 4 4 4
(AB)
Presence of water (AD) 7 4 3 2
Electrical equipment must have at least the following degrees of protection:

• in volume 0: IPX7; • in volume 1: IPX4
or, if this volume can be subjected to jets of water for cleaning
in public baths: IPX5;
• in volume 2: IPX3 or, if this volume can be subjected to water jets for cleaning
in public baths: IPX5;
• in volume 3: IPX1 or, if this volume can be subjected to water jets for cleaning
in public baths: IPX5.
Table 701B summarizes the conditions under which electrical equipment can be used in the different volumes.
701.52 Pipelines
VS
701.520.01 Pipelines must have insulation that meets the rules for protection by double or reinforced insulation and must not have
any metal covering.
These pipes are, for example, made up of insulated conductors in insulating conduits or trunking systems or by multi-conductor cables
with an insulating sheath.
When crossing a bathroom wall requires additional mechanical protection, sections of rigid metal conduits (MRL) can be used, but it
is not necessary to connect them to the equipotential connection of the room of water due to their short length.
VS 701.520.02 In volume 0, no conduit is permitted, except SELV limited to 12 V alternating current or 30 V direct current.
In volumes 1 and 2, the pipes must be limited to those necessary to supply the devices located in these volumes.
701.520.03 Connection boxes are not permitted in volumes 0, 1 and 2.
By way of derogation, in volume 2, connection boxes allowing the connection of user devices are permitted provided they are placed
behind these devices.
701.53 Equipment In
volume 0, no equipment must be installed.

In volumes 1 and 2, no equipment must be installed, with the exception of SELV circuit switches supplied with a voltage not more than
12 V in alternating current or 30 V in direct current, the safety source being installed outside volumes 0, 1 and 2.
NOTE - Insulating cords controlling switches are permitted in volumes 1 and 2 provided that they
(1) meet the requirements of the standard in force .
———————
(1) NF EN 60669-1 (C 61-110)
- 342 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
By way of derogation, in volume 2, a power socket base powered by a separation transformer for shaver with a rated power of between
VS
20 VA and 50 VA conforming to the standard is permitted.
(2)
.
This socket base can have a degree of protection IP20.
In volume 3, socket outlets, switches and other equipment are admitted provided they are:
VS
• either supplied individually by an isolation transformer in accordance with 413.3 ;
• either powered by SELV (414) ; • either
protected by a differential-residual current protection device

residual-differential assigned at most equal to 30 mA.
In bathrooms, socket outlets installed in the floor are prohibited.
701.55 Other materials
In volumes 0 and 1, only devices intended for use in a bathtub powered by SELV limited to 12 V alternating current and 30 V direct
current are authorized, the source being outside volumes 0, 1 and 2.
Project managers must take steps to ensure that semi-fixed Class 1 appliances (such as laundry drying appliances, laundry washing
machines) are under no circumstances located inside the premises. volumes 0, 1 and 2.
If the dimensions of the bathroom do not allow them to be placed outside volume 2 and if it is not possible to place them in another
room, these devices can nevertheless be installed if the part of volume 2 places them receiving is transformed into volume 3, for
example by interposing a fixed and durable separation in non-metallic material (wall, partition, screen etc.) of height equal to that of
volume 1. (See figure 701B).
In volume 2, only lighting fixtures and space heating devices and other equipment may be installed, provided that this equipment is of
class II and is protected by a differential-residual device with differential-residual current assigned to the more equal to 30mA.
These same devices cannot be installed on bathtub aprons and bathtub or shower benches and niches.
Lighting devices may include: - a power socket base without
earthing contact provided that this base is

powered via an isolation transformer;
- a switch if this is provided by construction.
Mirror cabinets comprising a lighting fixture, switch and power socket base can be installed in volume 2 provided they meet the rules
for class II and the power socket base is powered via a separation transformer. Class l cabinets can only be installed in volume 3 or
outside volumes.
Storage water heaters must be installed in volume 3 and outside volumes.
If the dimensions of the bathroom do not allow them to be placed in these volumes, these devices can nevertheless be installed: - in
volume 2; - in volume 1, if they are horizontal and placed as
high as possible; while
respecting, on the other hand, the following two conditions: the water pipes are made of conductive material;
-
———————
(2) NF EN 61558-2-5 (C 52-558-2-5)
- 343 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
-
the water heater is protected by a differential-residual current RCD assigned to the most equal
at 30mA.
Instantaneous water heaters can be installed in volumes 1 and 2 provided that they
are protected by a differential-residual current RCD rated at most equal to 30 mA and
connected to water pipes made of conductive material.
VS In volume 3, user devices are admitted provided they are:

- or supplied individually by an isolation transformer in accordance with 413.3 ;
-
either powered by SELV (414) ;
-
or protected by a differential-residual current RCD rated at most equal to 30 mA.
Pulsed jet agitation equipment meeting the corresponding standards can be

installed in the volume located below the bathtub provided that the rules of
701.415.2 are satisfied and that the volume located below the bathtub is accessible
only using a tool.
Electric heating elements embedded in the ground, intended for heating the premises, can
be installed below volumes 2, 3 and outside volumes provided that they are covered
an earthed metal mesh or have an earthed metal covering,
connected to the equipotential bond defined in 701.415.2.
Table 701B – Materials admitted according to volumes
- 344 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
Due to the fact that the standards relating to household electrical appliances do not take into account the
marking and testing following the IP system, water drop marking and testing
correspondents are admitted with the following equivalences:
Table 701C – Marking of water drops
Degree of NF EN 60598-1 NF EN 60335-1

protection (C 71-000) (C 73-800)
LIGHTING DEVICES
DOMESTIC APPLIANCES
Protected against falls IPX1

vertical water
Protected against rain IPX3
Protected against splashes IPX4

water
Protected against jets of water IPX5
Immersion proof IPX7
NOTE - Double marking (i.e. water drops and IP code) is not permitted as the tests are
different.
- 345 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
a) Bathtub b) Bathtub, with fixed wall
Volume 0
Volume 0
Volume 1 Volume 2
Volume 1 Volume 2 Volume 3 Volume 3
0.60 m 2.40 m
0.60 m 2.40 m
06.m
0
c) Shower d) Shower with fixed wall
Volume 0 Volume 2 Volume 3 Volume 0 Volume 2 Volume 3
0.60 m 2.40 m Volume 1 0.60 m

Volume 1 2.40 m
f) Shower without tray

e) Shower without tray (fixed shower head)
but with fixed wall (fixed shower head)
Fixed shower head Fixed shower head
0.60
m 0.60
m
Volume 1
0.60
m 0.60
m
Volume 2
Volume 2
2.40
m 2.40
m
Volume 3
Volume 3
Volume 0
Volume 1
Volume 2 Volume 3
Figures 701A - Dimensions of volumes (plan)
- 346 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
h) Shower without
g) Shower without tray (mobile shower head)
tray but with fixed wall (mobile shower head)
flexible
flexible
Mobile shower head

1.20
m
1.20
m Mobile shower head
Volume 1
Volume 1
Volume 2
0.60
m 0.60
m
2.40
m Volume 2
Volume 3
2.40
m
Volume 3
Volume 1
Volume 2
Volume 3
Figures 701A (continued) - Dimensions of volumes (plan)

a) Bathtub
Ceiling
Out of volume
3 2 1
00.m
3
m52.2
m52.2
0.60 m
0
Base: bottom of the bathtub
Space under bathtub 1 or 3 (see

2.40 m
701.320.5)
Volume 0
Volume 1
Volume 2
Volume 3
Figures 701B - Dimensions of volumes (elevation view)
- 347 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
b) Shower
Out of volume
Out of volume
m00.3
m52.2
3 2 1
m52.2
Volume 0
2.40 m 0.60 m Space under receiver 1 or 3
Volume 1 (see 701.320.5)
Volume 2
Volume 3
c) Openwork false ceiling at a height of between 2.25 m and 3 m
Out of volume
3 2 1
00.m
3
m52.2
m52.2
0.60 m
0
Base: bottom of the bathtub
Base: bathroom floor
Space under bathtub 1 or 3

2.40 m
(see 701.320.5)
Volume 0
Volume 1
Volume 2
Volume 3
Figures 701B (continued) - Volume dimensions (elevation view)
- 348 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
d) Ceiling closed at a height greater than 3 m
Ceiling
Out of volume
3 2 1
00.m
3
m52.2
0.60 m
2.40 m
e) False ceiling closed at a height of less than 2.25 m
3 2 1
00.m
3
m52.2
h5
gtn igli2iee.tm
C
h
a
2
0.60 m
0
Base: ground
Space under bathtub 1 or 3

2.40 m
(see 701.320.5)
Volume 0
Volume 1
Volume 2
Volume 3
Figures 701B (continued) - Volume dimensions (elevation view)
- 349 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
701.71 Additional rules for shower rooms A shower room is a room containing
several shower stations, separated or not by partitions: We distinguish:
- shower rooms with shower cubicles with individual dressing rooms; - shower rooms with shower cubicles without
individual dressing rooms; - shower rooms in which the shower stations are not separated by
partitions.
A shower cabin has a single shower station.
The rules of this part are applicable to shower rooms taking into account the following additional rules:
VS
701.71.1 Individual shower cabins
An individual shower cubicle, located in a shower room, is a closed room comprising two parts:
- the shower itself which constitutes volume 1; - a dressing gown which

constitutes volume 2.
These two parts are separated by a partition which can be fixed or mobile; the partition must have a height at least equal to that
of the shower head.
701.71.2 Collective showers

VS
When the shower rooms include cubicles without individual dressing rooms (see figure 701D) : volume 1 is made up of the
shower
- cubicles; volume 2 is made up of the part of the shower room outside
- the shower cabins.
Shower cubicle partitions must have a height at least equal to that of the shower heads with a minimum of 2 meters.
When shower rooms do not have shower cubicles (see figure 701E) :
- volume 1 is defined, in the horizontal plane, by the surface intended to ensure the flow of water, possibly limited by a
partition; volume 2 is made up of the part of the shower room
- outside volume 1.
For volume 1, from a reference plane consisting of the floor or the bottom of the shower tray if it is above the floor, the low voltage
lighting devices must be located at a higher height to that of the shower head with a minimum of 2.25 m.
For other volumes, the rules in Table 701B apply.
The supply pipes for lighting devices are made following the additional insulation protection measure (following 412).
An equipotential connection, made in accordance with the indications of 415.2 and 543, must connect all the conductive elements
of the room and the grounds of the electrical equipment.
- 350 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

Examples of production
Cloakrooms
Shower cabins (volume 1)
Strippers (volume 2)
Volume 3
Figure 701C - Shower room with shower cubicles with individual dressing room
Cloakrooms
60cm
Shower cabins (volume 1)

Volume 2
Volume 3
Figure 701D - Shower room with shower cubicles without individual dressing room
NOTE - Any passage from volume 1 to volume 3 must be done via volume 2. If this does not physically exist, it must be entered
in volume 3 (see figure 701E).
Cloakrooms
Showers (volume 1)
Volume 2
Volume 3
Figure 701E – Shower room without shower cubicle

NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
Appendix – (informative) – Equipotential bonding

A – ADDITIONAL EQUIPOTENTIAL CONNECTION
A1 – The purpose of the additional equipotential connection is to equalize the potentials of all the conductive elements and all the
masses of the bathroom and to limit the contact voltage to a non-dangerous value, taking into account the particular conditions
in which are the people (condition of external influences BB3).
A2 – The equipotential connection is made:

- either by a conductor whose section is 2.5 mm² if it is mechanically protected (i.e. installed under conduit, or under a
trunking), 4 mm² if it is not mechanically protected and fixed directly to the walls (for example, fixed above the plinth); either
by a galvanized strip having a section of at least 20 mm² and a thickness of at least 1 mm.
-
The conductors must not be embedded directly in the walls; on the other hand, the straps can be embedded in the walls (floor or
partition).
A3 – It is possible to combine the equipotential bond and the earthing conductor of a mass inside the room in a single green and
yellow conductor (see figure 701F). In this case, the section of this conductor is identical to that of the active conductors of the
corresponding circuit.
A4 – The equipotential connection is made inside the bathroom, which does not imply that it is located throughout its entire route
inside the volume limited by the walls, the essential being that each bathroom has an individual equipotential connection.
For example, if it is not possible to connect certain conductive elements and masses inside the bathroom, this connection can be
made outside in premises as close as possible to the bathroom. . The conductive elements which must be connected to this
equipotential connection are indicated in B2.
A5 – The equipotential connection can be made in recessed mounting, but the recess must be carried out in the walls of the
bathroom. The embedding must then be carried out following the rules of paragraph 529.1.2 for pipes in embedded conduits, it
can be carried out by a 2.5 mm² conductor placed under an insulating conduit.
A6 – There is no need to require that the equipotential connection be visible over its entire route, but it is recommended that the
connections remain accessible; failing this, the electrical continuity of the connection is checked as indicated in article 612.2.
A7 – A metal frame can be used as an element of the equipotential connection provided that its electrical continuity is checked.
On the other hand, the other conductive elements (and in particular the fluid pipes) must not serve as equipotential connection
elements, due to the risks of removing this connection in the event of dismantling of the conductive elements.
A8 – In the case of absence of masses in the bathroom, the additional equipotential connection is only made between the
conductive elements.
A9 – In order to facilitate the creation of the additional equipotential connection and to ensure optimal security, the following
solution is particularly recommended: A connection box specific to all the circuits concerned by the
premises will be installed inside the premises. -this. This box contains a terminal block to which will be connected: - the protective
conductors of all circuits in volumes 1, 2 and 3; - the additional equipotential connection conductors, connected to the
conductive elements of the room.
It is authorized to carry out a patching of the additional equipotential connection from a protective conductor provided that none
of the conductors concerned have a section less than 2.5 mm² (see figures 701F).

NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
Metal
frames
If metal
bathtub
Welded connection, clamp or

connection terminal of the protective If metal
conductor of electrical equipment drain
Figures 701F – Examples of additional equipotential bonding

NF C 15-100 Part 7-701
B – ELEMENTS TO BE CONNECTED TO THE ADDITIONAL EQUIPOTENTIAL CONNECTION
B1 – As a general rule, it is necessary to connect to the equipotential bond all conductive elements under the
conditions of 701.415.2, with the exception of those generally of small dimensions which present no risk of
being brought to a potential defined or different from that of the equipotential connection.
B2 – Must be connected to the equipotential bond
a) metal pipes for hot water, cold water, drains and gas.
There is no need:
- to shunt the threaded connections of exposed metal water pipes, because the thread ensures sufficient
continuity, even when it is fitted with a stuffing element;
- to connect the taps connected to insulating pipes to the equipotential connection. (b) metal drains
and metal bathtub bodies or shower trays; c) one of the inlet or outlet pipes of central heating radiators or
other heating elements (such as towel dryers), regardless of the class of equipment;
When a central heating radiator is connected by insulating pipes, there is no need to connect the radiator and
the distributor with equipotential bonding.
d) the metal frames of doors, windows and openings if they may come into contact with metal elements of the
construction (such as concrete reinforcements). In the case of total rehabilitation, see 701.415.2.
e) the metal reinforcements of the floor. In the case of total rehabilitation, see 701.415.2.
B3 – It is not necessary to connect non-electrical and non-heating metal devices (such as towel rails) because
these devices are not likely to provide a potential different from that of other conductive elements.
B4 – The upper and lower metal grilles for natural ventilation should not be connected to the equipotential
connection because they are not likely to provide a potential different from that of the other conductive
elements.
B5 – For mechanical ventilation ducts and vents, it is only necessary to connect these elements to the
equipotential connection of the bathroom if the main duct, the branch or connection and the vent are metallic.
______________

NF C 15-100 Part 7-702
Part 7-702 – Swimming pools and other ponds
702.1 Scope, purpose and fundamental principles ......................................... .......... 355 702.11 Scope of
application .............................. .................................................. ............... 355
702.2 Definitions ................................................ .................................................. .................... 355
702.3 Determination of general characteristics ............................................. .................... 355 702.32

Classification of volumes ......................... .................................................. ................. 355
702.4 Protection to ensure safety ................................................ .................................. 356 702.41 Protection

against electric shock..... .................................................. ................... 356 702.414 Protection by safety extra-
low voltage (SELV) ................... .............................. 356 702.46 Sectioning and
control .............. .................................................. ......................... 357
702.5 Choice and implementation of electrical equipment ......................................... .................. 357 702.51
Common rules ............................. .................................................. ......................... 357 702.512 Operating
conditions and external influences ............... ............................................... 357 702.52
Pipes .................................................. .................................................. ............ 358 702.522 Selection and
implementation depending on external influences .......................... ............. 358 702.53
Apparatus........................................ .................................................. .............................. 358 702.55 Other
materials................ .................................................. ............................................. 359
The requirements of this part supplement, modify or replace the general requirements of the other parts
of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-702 are those of the corresponding parts, articles
or paragraphs of this standard.
The absence of reference to a part, article or paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.
- 355 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-702
H 702.1 Scope, purpose and fundamental principles
702.11 Scope
The specific requirements of this part apply to swimming pool basins and fountain basins. They are also
applicable to the volumes surrounding them. In these volumes, in normal use, the risk of electric shock is
increased due to the reduction in the resistance of the human body and its contact with the earth potential.
For footbaths, the regulations relating to swimming pools must be applied.
NOTE - For balneotherapy rooms:

- when the installation is individual, the rules of part 7-701 apply; when the installation is collective, the rules of
- this part are applicable.
702.2 Definitions
For the purposes of this Part, the following definition applies.
702.2.21 Fountain basins
Pools not intended to be occupied by people.
702.32 Classification of volumes
These requirements are based on the dimensions of the three volumes (examples are given in Figures
702A, 702B, 702C, 702D and 702E).
a) Volume 0
This volume includes the interior of the pool, its openings in the walls or the bottom, the footbaths, the
internal part of waterfalls or fountains.
b) Volume 1
This volume is limited by:
- volume 0; - the
vertical plane located 2 m from the edges of the pool; -
the ground or surface where people can stand; - a horizontal
plane located 2.5 m above the ground or surface.
When the swimming pool has diving boards, springboards, starting points, a slide or structural elements
intended to be occupied or accessible by people, volume 1 is limited by: - a vertical plane located 1.5 m
around the diving boards,
springboards, starting blocks, slides and structural elements such as accessible sculptures and pools;
- the horizontal plane located 2.5 m above the highest level intended to be occupied by people.
- 356 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-702
H
c) Volume 2
This volume is limited by
- the exterior vertical plane of volume 1 and the parallel plane located 1.5 m from the latter; the
- ground or surface intended to be occupied by people and a horizontal plane located 2.5 m above
the ground or surface.
There is no volume 2 for fountains.
702.411.3 Special requirements relating to various volumes
702.411.3.1 Volumes 0 and 1 of swimming

pools In volumes 0 and 1 of swimming pools, only the protection measure by SELV under a nominal
voltage not greater than 12 V in alternating current or 30 V in direct current is permitted, the safety source
being installed outside volumes 0, 1 and 2 (see also 702.53 and 702.55).
702.411.3.2 Volumes 0 and 1 of fountains

In fountain volumes 0 and 1, one of the following protective measures must be used:
- TBTS (see 414), the security source being installed outside volumes 0 and 1; - automatic power
cut-off (see 415.1) by current differential device
rated residual differential not greater than 30 mA;
- electrical separation (see 413.3), the separation source supplying a single device being
located outside volumes 0 and 1.
702.411.3.3 Volume 2 of swimming pools
NOTE - There is no volume 2 for fountains.

One or more of the following protective measures must be used:
- TBTS (see 414), the security source being installed outside volumes 0, 1 and 2; - automatic power
cut-off (see 415.1) by current differential device
- electrical separation (see 413.3), the separation source supplying a single device being located outside
volumes 0, 1 and 2.
702.414 Safety extra-low voltage (SELV) protection
702.414.1 Requirements for circuits
702.414.1.1 When SELV is used, whatever its nominal voltage, protection against direct contact must be
ensured by barriers or enclosures presenting at least the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB in accordance
with NF C 20-010 .
The rules for sizing and protecting SELV lighting circuits are given in the UTE C 15-559 guide. For voltage
drops, the rules may not be applied for swimming pools for domestic use to the detriment of the lifespan of
equipment and lighting.
- 357 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-702
H 702.415.2 Additional equipotential connection All the

conductive elements of volumes 0, 1 and 2 must be connected by equipotential conductors, themselves
connected to the ground protection conductors of the equipment located in these volumes.
NOTES -
1 – This connection can be provided in the immediate vicinity of the location, for example on a distribution panel, on an accessory
or on any other equipment.
2 – See also 702.55.1.
Examples of elements to be connected to the additional equipotential connection:

- ground reinforcements, if they exist; - metal
pipes; - accessible metal frames;
- the water and air inlet and outlet grilles (unless
the corresponding pipes are made of insulating material).
Examples of elements that may not be connected to the additional equipotential connection: - diving
board ladders; - the ladders and
barriers of the basin; - springboards.
For public swimming pools, under article L131 of the Municipal Code and article L 221-6, paragraph 2, of
the Consumer Code, the addition, near the pool, of a device is required. emergency allowing, if necessary,
the immediate interruption of the "suction cup" effect and the release of a bather pressed against the grid.
H 702.5 Selection and implementation of electrical equipment
702.51 Common rules
702.512 Conditions of service and external influences
702.512.2 External influences

The conditions for external influences are as follows:
Table 702A – External influence conditions
VOLUMES 0 1 2
Ambient temperature (AA) 4 4 4
Humidity 4 4 4
(AB)
Presence of water (AD) 8 5 2 *
Unless otherwise indicated, the class of other conditions of external influences is 1.
- 358 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-702
H Electrical equipment must have at least the following degrees of protection in accordance with NF C 20-010:
- in volume 0: IPX8; - in volume 1: IPX5;

- in volume 2: IPX2 for swimming pools
inside buildings or IPX5 if this volume
can be subjected to jets of water for cleaning;
IPX5 for swimming pools outside buildings.
For the equivalence between IP protection degrees and water drop marking, see Table 702C.
Table 702B summarizes the conditions under which electrical equipment can be used in the different volumes of swimming pools.
H 702.52 Pipelines
702.522 Selection and implementation based on external influences
702.522.21 Implementation according to volumes
In volumes 0, 1 and 2, the pipes must not have a metal sheath.
NOTE – Cables should be arranged in conduits made of insulating material.
702.522.22 Limitation of pipes according to volumes
In volumes 0 and 1, the pipes must be limited to those necessary to supply the devices located in these volumes.
702.522.23 Additional requirements for fountain pipes
For fountains, the following additional requirements must be met:
a) The cables supplying the equipment located in volume 0 must run as far as possible from the edges of the pool and supply the
equipment vertically via the shortest possible route.
H07RN-8F cables are suitable in volume 0.
H b) In volume 1, cables must be protected against mechanical damage

(AG3).
702.522.24 Connection boxes
Connection boxes are not allowed in volumes 0 and 1, with the exception of those located in volume 1 for SELV circuits.
702.53 Equipment In
volumes 0 and 1, no equipment except SELV, including power outlets, must be installed.
In volume 2, power outlets and switches are permitted provided they are protected by one of the following measures: - SELV (see
414), the security source being installed
outside volumes 0, 1 and 2; - automatic power cut-off (see 415.1) by current differential device
- electrical separation (see article 413.3), the separation source supplying only one
device being located outside volumes 0, 1 and 2.
- 359 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-702

702.55.1 Equipment specific to swimming pools
702.55.1.1 General
In volumes 0 and 1, only devices intended for use in swimming pools may be installed, taking into account
the requirements of 702.55.1 to 702.55.4.
Swimming pool cleaning equipment is powered by SELV 12 V alternating current or 30 V direct current.
A supply pump or other electrical equipment specially used in swimming pools placed in a room or location
adjacent to the swimming pool and accessible through a hatch (or door) located on the beach surrounding
the swimming pool, must be protected by one of the measures following:
- SELV limited to 12 V (see 414) ; -

electrical separation (see 413) ; -
automatic power cutoff (411) with the following conditions simultaneously
fulfilled: a)
the pump or other equipment is connected to the pool basin:
- either by electrically insulating water pipes; either by metal water
- pipes connected to the equipotential connection of the swimming pool basin.
b) the equipment located inside the enclosure is class II or, if it is class I and earthed, is
separated from the metal elements by additional insulation; the equipment is only
accessible through the hatch
vs) (or access door) which can only be opened using a key or a tool; when the hatch (or
access door) is open, all the equipment must have a degree
d) of protection at least equal to IPX5; the additional equipotential connection must be made
according to 702.415.2 ; the power supply of this equipment
e) must be protected by a differential-residual current protection device rated at most
f) equal to 30 mA or this equipment is supplied individually by an isolation transformer in
accordance with 413.3 .
The room in which these materials are located is considered to be outside volumes 1 or 2.
702.55.1.2 Special requirements for low-voltage electrical equipment installed in volume 1 of

swimming pools and other basins
Fixed equipment specially intended for use in swimming pools (for example filtration groups, counter-
current swimming) powered at a voltage other than the SELV limited to 12 V alternating or 30 V direct, are
admitted in volume 1 with the following requirements:
a) Electrical equipment must be located in an enclosure whose insulation is equivalent to additional

insulation and presenting IK07 mechanical protection.
(b) The requirements of 702.55.1.1 (a) through (f) apply, and
c) Opening the hatch specified in 702.55.1.1 d) must cause the cutting of all active conductors of the power
supply to the equipment located in the enclosure. The installation of the omnipolar switch as well as
the cable entry must be equivalent to class ll.
- 360 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-702

H
Electric heating elements embedded in the ground are permitted subject to:
- or, they are protected by the SELV protection measure (see 414), the security source
being installed outside volumes 0, 1 and 2; Or
- either, they are covered with a buried metal mesh or a metal sheath placed
earth or connected to the equipotential bond defined in 702.415.2 and that their circuits
power supply are protected by a differential-residual current protection device
at most equal to 30 mA.
Table 702B – Implementation requirements
Due to the fact that the standards relating to household electrical appliances do not take into account the
marking and testing following the IP system, water drop marking and testing
correspondents are admitted with the following equivalences:
Table 702C – Equivalence between IP and Marking
Degree of NF EN 60598-1 NF EN 60335-1

protection (C 71-000) (C 73-800)
LIGHTING DEVICES
DOMESTIC APPLIANCES
Protected against rain IPX3
Protected against splashes IPX4

water
Protected against jets of water IPX5
Immersion proof IPX7
NOTE - Double marking (i.e. water drops and IP code) is not permitted as the tests
are different.
- 361 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-702
H 702.55.2 Underwater lighting devices

(1)
Lighting fixtures placed in water or in contact with water must comply with the standard Lighting devices located behind .
watertight portholes must be installed
way that no contact, intentional or not, can occur between the masses of the
light fixture and a conductive part of the portholes.
702.55.3 Electrical equipment for fountains
Electrical equipment in volumes 0 and 1 must be inaccessible, for example by

use of reinforced glass or grilles that can only be removed using a tool.
(1)
Light fixtures in volumes 0 and 1 must be fixed and comply with the standard .
Electric pumps must meet the conditions for external influences (see
702.512.2).
Table 702D – Use of materials in fountains
–––––––––
(1) NF EN 60598-2-18 (C 71-018)
- 362 - 2002
-363
SAGA 2.5m
1.5m
2.5m
1.5m
Volume 2
7-702
2.0m 2.0m
-
Part
Volume 0
Volume 1
Volume 2
2002
NOTE – The dimensions of the volumes are limited by the walls and fixed partitions.
Figure 702A – Dimensions of volumes for swimming pools and footbaths

-364
SAGA 2.5m
h
Volume 2
2.5m
7-702
h
Part
2.0m 2.0m
Volume 0
Volume 1
2002
Volume 2
NOTE – The dimensions of the volumes are limited by the walls and fixed partitions.
Figure 702B – Dimensions of volumes for pools above ground

-365
SAGA r3
1.5m
Dimensions in meters
r 1= 2
r = r - s1 - s 2 1 2
r 3= 3.5
r = r - s3 - s 4 1 2
2.0m r 34
=r-s-s53
r1
7-702
Volume 0
r5
Volume 1
r4
s1
Part
Volume 2
r1
r1
s3
r3
2002
s4
s2
r5
Figure 702C – Examples of volume dimensions (planar representation) with fixed partitions at least 2.5 m high
-366 SAGA r3
r2
r5
r4
has
r1
1.5m
2.0m
r 1= 2
r 2= r - a 1
r 3=22
r-s
r 4= 3.5
r = r - a45
r 6= r - s5
r 7= r - b4
r 8= r - s7
2
7-702
Volume 0
s1
Volume 1
Volume 2
Part
r1
r1
s3 b
r4
2002
s4
s2
r8
r7
Figure 702D – Examples of volume dimensions (planar representation) with fixed partitions at least 2.5 m high
SAGA
Water volume 0
Volume limit 0
Volume 1
1.5 2
1.5
1.5
2.5
7-702
-367
2.5
2.5
Part
2
2.5
Basin
2.5
Basin
2002
Figure 702E – Example of determining the volumes of a fountain

NF C 15-100 Part 7-702
(Blank page)
- 368 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-703
Part 7-703 – Premises containing sauna heaters
703.1 Scope of application ............................................. .................................................. 369
703.2 Definitions ................................................ .................................................. ...............369
703.414 Very low voltage protection measure............................................. ................369
703.5 Choice and implementation of electrical equipment ......................................... ............369 703.51

Common rules .............................. .................................................. ...............369 703.52
Pipes................................ .................................................. .........................369 703.53
Apparatus ......................... .................................................. ...................................369
NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number in part 7-703 are those of the corresponding parts, articles or
apply.
- 369 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-703
H
The special requirements of this part apply to premises in which hot air sauna equipment is installed in accordance with the
(*)
standard in force. The rules of this part apply to saunas where the humidity is kept high for long periods . .
Turkish baths are examples of premises to which the rules of this Part apply.
H 703.2 Definitions
703.2.09.01 Hot air sauna: A room or location in which the air is heated in use to a high temperature and where the relative
humidity is normally low, rising only for a short time when water is poured over the sauna. radiator.
703.414 Very low voltage protection measure
703.414.4.7 When SELV is used, protection against direct contact must be ensured, regardless of the nominal voltage, by means
of barriers or enclosures having at least the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB.
703.5 Selection and implementation of electrical equipment
703.51 Common rules 703.512.2
Electrical equipment must have at least IP24 degrees of protection.

Four zones are defined as shown in Figure 703A. - in zone 1, only equipment belonging
to sauna heaters is admitted; - in zone 2, no special requirements are necessary from the point of view of
resistance of the material to heat;
- in zone 3, the equipment must be able to withstand a temperature of 125°C; - in zone 4, only:
• lighting fixtures mounted to prevent overheating, control devices for sauna

• radiators (thermostats and temperature limiters), and the pipes connected to them.
Heat resistance shall be as prescribed for zone 3.
703.52 Pipelines
The pipes must have insulation meeting the requirements of Article 412.2 and must not have any metal covering.
703.53 Equipment
Equipment not incorporated into the radiator must be placed outside the room.
(*) NF EN 60335-2-53 (C 73-823)
- 370 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-703
Figure 703A - Ambient Temperature Zones
______________
- 371 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-703
(Blank page)
- 372 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-704
Part 7-704 – Site Facilities
704.3 Determination of general characteristics ............................................. ..............374 704.313 Power

supply .................................. .................................................. .......................374 704.35 Security
installations........................ .................................................. ...................374
704.351 Safety lighting .............................................. .............................................374
704.352 Other safety circuits ............................................. .............................................375
704.41 Protection against electric shock............................................ ..................375 704.43 Overcurrent

protection ......................... .................................................. .....375 704.433 Overload
protection.............................................. .....................................376 704.434 Short circuit
protection ..... .................................................. ................376
704.5 Choice and implementation of materials ......................................... .............................376 704.51

Common rules .............................. .................................................. ..................376 704.512 Operating
conditions and classification of external influences ........ .........376 704.52
Pipes........................................ .................................................. ...................376 704.525 Voltage drops in
installations ......................... .............................................377 704.536 Control and sectioning
devices. .................................................. ....377
NF C 15-100.
apply.
- 373 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-704
Useful information (safety sheets, practical guides, etc.) can be obtained from the OPPBTP (Professional Body for the Prevention of
Building and Public Works).
H 704.1 Scope of application The specific
requirements of this part apply to temporary installations intended:
- construction work on new buildings; - repair, modification, extension or

demolition work on buildings
existing; -
public works; - earthworks; and
similar work.
-
Parts of buildings which undergo transformations such as expansions, major repairs or demolitions are considered construction sites
for the duration of the corresponding work, to the extent that this work requires the creation of a temporary installation.
The requirements of this part are not applicable to electrical installations in open-cast mines and quarries.
The decree of September 23, 1991 supplementing the general regulations for extractive industries (creating a title entitled Electricity)
is applicable to mines and quarries.
H The rules of this part are not applicable to administrative premises on construction sites (e.g. offices, changing rooms, meeting rooms,
canteens, restaurants, dormitories, sanitary premises, etc.) for which the general rules of Titles 1 to 6 of this standard are applicable.
NOTE - For particular situations, more severe requirements are applicable, for example part 7-706 for confined conductive
enclosures.
The operation of construction sites subjects electrical equipment to very severe conditions, and it is important that the equipment used
can withstand the corresponding constraints.
Attention is especially drawn to the importance of protective measures against direct and indirect contact and to the need for frequent
checks.
The materials used in the site installations are chosen so as to satisfy the following conditions:
- flexibility of use allowing their successive use on different sites; easy replacement of elements; ease of implementation, transport
- and storage;
-
- appropriate provisions to ensure that safety remains ensured under the intended conditions of use;
- the access possibilities in normal operation, the operating maneuvers required

be able to be carried out: • for
ordinary operations, such as connecting a user device to a power outlet, by unwary people (BA 1); • for all other operations,
such as replacing fuses, without access to the active parts, by knowledgeable people (BA
4);
• for operations and maneuvers requiring access to active parts, only by qualified people (BA 5).
H 704.1.5 On construction sites, fixed installations are limited to the assembly including the general control device and the main
protection devices (see 704-536).
NOTE - This set of equipment is considered the interface between the power supply and the site installation.
Downstream facilities are considered mobile facilities, except those portions that are designed in accordance with the Part 52 rules.
- 374 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-704
704.312.2 Types of grounding diagrams
The TT and TN-S schemes are preferably used in construction site installations.
The TN-C diagram can be used in the fixed part of the installations, that is to say in the part between the origin of the installation and
the assembly comprising the general control device and the protection devices main.
The IT diagram can be used when it is necessary to avoid cutting at the first earth fault in particular cases and for part of the installation
(for example, supplying a network of groundwater drawdown pumps). water, supply of ventilation fans).
But this scheme entails heavy constraints: protection of the neutral conductor, limitation of pipe lengths for protection against the
second fault; in addition, the insulation must be monitored by a permanent insulation monitor and the signaling of a first fault requires
the search and rapid elimination of this fault.
704.313 Food
H
All equipment must be identified according to the source which powers it and must only include elements belonging to a single
installation, except for replacement power supply, signaling or control circuits.
NOTE - The same site can be served from several supplies, including by generator groups.
704.35 Security facilities
Safety installations are installed whenever the safety of people could be compromised by the possible failure of the normal power
supply to a circuit or device.
704.351 Safety lighting When a text
prescribes it, safety lighting must make it possible to take the safety measures required by the failure of normal lighting, taking into
account the particularities of the site.
It must in particular allow the evacuation of personnel and the implementation of instructions.
It is particularly appropriate to consider installing this lighting in particularly dark areas such as the central core of tall buildings or the
levels of underground car parks.
Emergency lighting must be electric.

It can be ensured: - by
autonomous blocks (highly recommended solution) in accordance with the highest standards
(1) regarding ;
- by an installation powered by a battery of accumulators, the autonomous operating time being at least one hour; - by accumulator or
battery-powered lamps (case of limited personnel), the
operating time being at least one hour; - by thermal motor-generator groups capable of ensuring the correct power supply of the
emergency lighting in a time at most equal to 15 seconds.
Safety lighting can be reinforced by additional elements such as reflectors and reflectorized plates.
Light points must ensure the marking of the traffic routes necessary for the evacuation of personnel. The evacuation route is, if
necessary, indicated by opaque or transparent illuminated signs bearing very visibly in white on a green background the indications
“exit” or “emergency exit” or an arrow indicating the direction of the exit.
(1) NF C 71-800, NF C 71-801 and NF C 71-805
- 375 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-704
704.352 Other safety circuits

VS
Circuits supplying equipment such as lifting or exhaust pumps, ventilation fans, etc. whose continuity of service is essential, their
shutdown posing serious dangers of drowning and asphyxiation to personnel, must be treated as safety circuits.
These circuits are designed in such a way that protection is ensured without automatic cut-off of the power supply at the first fault and
must be able to be powered, in the event of failure of the normal power supply and depending on the power: - by generators capable
of ensuring the power supply of safety circuits in a time at most
equal to 15 seconds;
- by accumulator batteries associated with a rectifier charger (receivers powered by direct current) or an uninterruptible power supply
(UPS) (receivers powered by alternating current).
704.411.1 General
A high sensitivity RCD (Iÿn ÿ 30 mA) must be installed upstream of any circuit intended to power mobile or portable devices (circuits
supplying power outlets).
Whatever the protective measures taken (choice and implementation of equipment, maintenance, servicing, verification), the following
risks cannot be neglected: - direct contact following deterioration of the insulation; - direct contact following a failure of
equipment or carelessness of people; - indirect contact with an earth not connected
to an earth connection following a break or
poor continuity of the protective conductor.
H 704.411.1.1 Protection against direct contact
The protection provisions against direct contact used are: protection by insulation of active parts
- (appendix A.1 in 4-41) ; protection by means of barriers or enclosures (annex A.2 in 4-41).
-
704.411.1.2 Protective measures
a) The SELV (414) can be used in all circumstances and in particular when working conditions are severe, for example in cramped
conductive enclosures for powering portable tools, for grinding in a wet environment or for heating the concrete.
The TBTP (414) can be used for heating concrete.

b) The protection measure by use of class II equipment or by equivalent insulation (412) is used for equipment for which this protection
measure is achieved by construction.
This protective measure is recommended for portable hand tools. Attention is drawn to the fact that portable tools do not always
have a sufficient degree of protection for their use in locations subject to splashing water (IPX4).
c) The electrical separation protection measure (413) is limited to the power supply of a
single device per transformer.
704.43 Overcurrent protection
Overcurrent protection devices are preferably circuit breakers which avoid adjustment and replacement errors and facilitate operation.
- 376 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-704
704.433 Overload protection
In principle, any circuit must be protected against overloads. Special arrangements must be made for the circuits supplying lifting
devices, in order to avoid unwanted triggering.
H 704.434 Short circuit protection
The site assembly chosen must be such that the protective devices of each circuit have a breaking capacity at least equal to the
presumed short-circuit current at the point where it is installed.
In order to cover any eventuality (movement, permutation, various modifications, etc.), it is advisable to choose on the same site, site
assemblies having the same resistance to short-circuit currents, thus allowing them to be installed without regardless of the location of
the construction site.
704.5 Selection and implementation of materials
704.51 Common rules
(2)
704.511.1 Site assemblies must comply with the requirements of the standard or section 558 of this standard.
704.512 Operating conditions and classification of external influences
704.512.2 Selection and implementation of materials based on external influences
Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum conditions of external influences likely to be encountered in site installations are as follows:
AA ambient temperature: - 5, + 40 °C (AA4)

AD presence of water: water splashes (AD4)
AE presence of solid bodies: very small (AE3)
AG mechanical shocks: significant (AG3)
AH vibrations: average (AH2)
The equipment must have the minimum protection degrees IP44 and IK08.
704.52 Pipelines
H
704.522.8.1.8 To avoid damage to the cables, they must not be laid in pedestrian or vehicle crossings. If such installation is necessary,
special protection against mechanical damage and against contact with machinery must be provided.
When flexible cables are used, they must be type 07 RN-F or 07 BN4-F Rigid cables must have equivalent mechanical resistance.
(2) NF EN 60439-4 (C 63-424)
- 377 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-704
H 704.525 Voltage drops in installations
Voltage drops higher than the limits set for building installations may be permitted provided that they do not harm the operation of
the equipment, in particular the starting of motors.
704.536 Control and sectioning devices A set of equipment must be able to
be cut and sectioned by a device located inside the assembly.
Emergency cut-off devices must be provided on the power supply of all user equipment.
Power supply disconnecting devices must be capable of being locked in the open position (see 462.2) (for example by locking or
placing them in a locked enclosure).
The supply of each circuit must be carried out from distribution sets, each set comprising:
- overcurrent protection devices; - protection devices against indirect contact;

- power sockets, if necessary.
Safety and replacement power supplies must be connected by devices so that any interconnection between the different power
supplies is not possible.
704.542.2 Earth connection
When the earth connection of buildings under construction is carried out by a loop at the bottom of the excavation, which is the
mandatory solution for any building intended to house workplaces (including collective residential buildings), this earth connection
must be used by the construction site companies, as soon as it is carried out by the main construction company first intervening on
the site.
It is necessary to create temporary earth connections if electrical appliances are used before the existence of the loop at the bottom
of the excavation.
704.555.1 Power outlets
Socket sockets must comply with either standard NF EN 60309-1 (C 63-300) or standard NF C 61-303.
The power outlets must be: either within the assemblies

- described in 704.511.1 ; either outside on the envelopes (cabinets or
- boxes) of these sets.
In accordance with the decree of 11/14/88, the joining or separation of the two constituents of the sockets of the connectors and
extensions with an admissible intensity greater than 32 A must only be carried out without load.
______________
- 378 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-705
Part 7-705 – Electrical installations in agricultural establishments
705.353 Safety or replacement source ........................................... ....................379
705.4 Protection to ensure safety ................................................ ..................................379 705.41

Protection against electric shock.............................. .................................................. .......379 705.42
Protection against fire, burns and explosion ............................. ...............379 705.422 Additional fire
protection rules ......................... ...............379 705.443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric
origin or due to
to maneuvers.............................................. .................................................. .379
705.5 Choice and implementation of materials ......................................... .............................380 705.51

Common rules .................. .................................................. ..................................380 705.536 Sectioning
and control devices........... .............................................380 705.55 Other
equipment. .................................................. .................................................. .380
NF C 15-100.
apply.
- 379 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-705
H 705.1 Scope of application

The special requirements of this Part apply to all parts of fixed installations of agricultural and horticultural
establishments located outdoors and indoors and to locations where livestock are kept (such as stables,
stables , chicken coops, pigsties, premises for preparing animal feed, attics, barns for hay, straw and
fertilizers, etc.).
The residential accommodation facilities of these establishments are not subject to the rules of this part, but
to part 7-771.
In the event of an incident, it is appropriate to consider the continuity of service of vital functions for the
survival of the animals.
H 705.353 Safety or replacement source

For intensive animal breeding (industrial animal production), the possible need for a replacement source
must be taken into account.
705.414 When SELV or SELV is used, protection against direct contact must be provided by means of
barriers or enclosures having at least the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB, regardless of the nominal
voltage.
705.415.1 Circuits supplying power outlets, whatever their rated current, must be protected by differential
devices whose rated differential-residual current is not greater than 30 mA.
705.415.2 Additional equipotential bonding In premises

where animals are located, an additional equipotential bonding must connect all masses and all conductive
elements that may be touched by the animals. All conductive floors must include metal reinforcements
connected to the additional equipotential bond.
H 705.42 Protection against fire, burns and explosion
705.422 Additional fire protection rules
In premises or locations at risk of fire (BE2), protection must be ensured by RCDs with a differential-residual
current rated at most equal to 300 mA.
These premises or locations are defined in guide UTE C 15-103.
H When continuity of service is required, these devices must be either type S or delayed.
Heating appliances used in animal breeding premises must be fixed and kept at an appropriate distance
from animals and combustible materials to avoid any risk of burns to animals or fire.
For radiant devices, the distance must be at least 0.5 m, unless a greater distance is specified by the device
manufacturer in the instructions for use.
705.443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to

maneuvers
When lightning arrester protection is not required by 443, the implementation of surge arresters is
nevertheless recommended.
- 380 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-705

705.51 Common rules

705.512 Electrical equipment must have at least the degrees of protection as indicated in guide UTE C
15-103.
H 705.536 Sectioning and control devices

Emergency cut-off devices must not be placed in places accessible to animals or to which access would be
prevented by animals.
When electric fences are placed near overhead power lines, appropriate distances must be respected to
limit induced currents.
The rules for implementing electric fences are the subject of standard NF EN 60335-2-76 (C 73-876).
______________
- 381 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-705
(Blank page)
- 382 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-706
Part 7-706 – Cramped conductive enclosures
706.1 Scope of application ............................................. .................................................. 383 706.4

Protection to ensure safety ......................................... ..................................383
______________
NF C 15-100.
apply.
- 383 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-706
H 706.1 Scope of application The

specific requirements of this section apply to the installations of confined conductive enclosures (BC4
locations) and to the power supply of devices inside these enclosures.
A cramped conductive enclosure is a room or work location whose walls are essentially made up of
metallic or conductive parts, inside which a person can come into contact, over a significant part of their
body, with the surrounding conductive parts and whose the cramped conditions limit the possibilities of
interrupting this contact Examples of conductive enclosures are boilers, all metal tanks whose
dimensions are such that the people who enter them for their repair or maintenance are continually in
contact with the walls.
Generally speaking, it is enough for one dimension of the enclosure to be particularly small - for example
a crawl space or a garage pit - for the freedom of movement of people to be restricted and for the rules
relating to conductive enclosures to be applicable.
The requirements of this part do not apply to locations in which people can move freely to work, enter or
exit, without physical constraint.
They apply to the installation of fixed equipment in cramped conductive enclosures and to the power
supply of portable equipment in these enclosures.
H 706.4 Protection to ensure safety
706.410.3 General
Only the following protection measures are permitted: a) for the
power supply of portable tools and portable measuring devices:
- either the TBTS (414) ;
- or the electrical separation of circuits limited to the power supply of a single device
(413).
Electrical equipment is preferably class II; if they are class I, their mass and all of the conductive elements
constituting the conductive enclosure are interconnected.
b) for powering portable lamps:

- the TBTS (414) ;
A fluorescent luminaire with an incorporated step-up transformer powered by SELV is also permitted. c)
For powering fixed
H equipment:
- either automatic power cut-off (411) ; an additional equipotential connection (415.2) must connect
the masses of the fixed equipment and the conductive parts of the enclosure;
- either the TBTS (article 414) ;

- or the electrical separation of circuits limited to the power supply of a single device
(413) ;
- either a differential protection device having an assigned residual current of at most equal to 30
mA protecting class II equipment or having equivalent insulation, provided that this equipment
has an adequate degree of protection.
When electrical equipment includes a drive motor located outside the enclosure, this motor may be
subject to other protection measures, provided that the device is driven by means of a flexible axis or
another means of transmission of driving force meeting the protection by additional insulation according
to article 412.
- 384 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-706
H Safety sources and separation sources must be installed outside the confined conductive enclosure,
unless they form part of the fixed installation inside the confined conductive enclosure under the conditions
of the vs).
706.415.2 Additional equipotential connection If for

certain equipment, such as measuring or control devices, it is necessary to have a functional earth
connection, an equipotential connection must connect all the masses, all the conductive elements to the
interior of the conductive enclosure and the functional earth connection.
_________________
- 385 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-706
(Blank page)
- 386 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-708
Part 7-708 – Electrical installations of caravan parks
708.2 Definitions ................................................ .................................................. ...............387
708.3 General characteristics .............................................. .............................................387 708.31

Standardized voltages ..... .................................................. .......................................387
708.41 Protection against electric shock............................................ .........................388
708.5 Choice and implementation of materials .......................................... .............................388 708.51

External influences .................. .................................................. .............................388 708.52
Pipes.................. .................................................. ..................................388 708.53
Apparatus ....... .................................................. .................................................. .388 708.530 Generalities
and common rules........................................ ..................................388
Appendix - (informative) - Example instruction for connecting the caravan to the caravan park
power supply .................................. .................................................. ........391
of NF C 15-100.
requirements apply.
- 387 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-708
H 708.1 Scope of application
The special requirements of this Part apply to those parts of the electrical installations of caravan parks
which provide power supply to recreational vehicles or tents.
They do not apply to interior electrical installations of mobile leisure residences, recreational vehicles,
mobile or transportable units.
NOTES -
1 - For installations in caravans and motor caravans, operating at 12 V direct current, standards EN 1648-1 and EN 1648-2 apply.
2 - For installations in caravans and motor caravans, operating above 12 V direct current, the NF S 56-200 standard applies.
708.2 Definitions
708.2.1 Recreational vehicle

Unit equipped for housing for temporary or seasonal occupation and able to meet the requirements for the
construction and use of road vehicles.
708.2.1.1 Caravan
Towed leisure vehicle, used for tourism, and capable of meeting the requirements for the construction and
use of road vehicles.
708.2.1.2 Motor caravan (motorhome)

Self-propelled leisure vehicle used for tourism and capable of meeting the requirements for the construction
and use of road vehicles.
NOTE – The motor caravan is either adapted from a production series of vehicles, or designed and built on an existing chassis, with
or without a driver's cab, the housing being fixed or removable.
708.2.1.3 Mobile leisure residence

Transportable recreational vehicle that includes means of movement but does not meet the requirements
for the construction and use of road vehicles.
708.2.2 Caravan site

Ground location intended for the installation of a vehicle equipped for leisure.
708.2.3 Caravan park
Surface area which contains several caravan pitches.
708.2.4 Caravan electrical power point Equipment that

includes the means for connecting and disconnecting the power cables of recreational vehicles with an
electrical supply network.
708.3 General characteristics
708.31 Standardized voltages
The nominal voltage of the power supply system for recreational vehicles must not exceed 230 V in single-
phase alternating current or 400 V in three-phase alternating current.
- 388 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-708
708.411.4 In the case of a TN scheme, only the TN-S scheme shall be used.
The IT diagram is not recommended.
H 708.415.1 Additional protection by residual current devices
The socket outlets must be protected by a residual current device having an rated residual current of at most 30 mA.
Equipment installed in caravan parks must meet the following external influence conditions: - presence of water: AD4 (water
splashes), IPX4; - presence of foreign
bodies: AE2 (small objects), IP3X; - mechanical stresses (shocks):
AG3 (significant), IK08.
708.52 Pipelines
The following pipes are suitable for circuits supplying caravan electrical supply points:
- buried pipes; - airlines.
NOTE – It is recommended that the power supply to the connection points of recreational vehicles be carried out by
buried pipes.
708.529.5 Buried pipelines
Buried pipes must meet the requirements of 529.5.
Buried pipes must, unless they include additional mechanical protection, be placed outside any caravan site or any surface
where tent stakes or anchor hooks can be installed.
708.529.7 Airlines
All overhead conductors must be insulated.
Poles and other overhead line supports must be located or protected so that they cannot be damaged by any foreseeable
movement of vehicles.
Overhead lines must be at a height above the ground greater than or equal to 6 m in all locations where vehicles can move and
3.5 m in other locations.
708.53 Apparatus
708.530 Generalities and common rules
708.530.1 The electrical power point must be placed at the edge of the site and no more than 20 m from the connection point of
the recreational vehicle or tent.
- 389 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-708
H 708.530.2 Socket sockets
708.530.2.1 Each power socket base and its enclosure constituting part of the (1) electrical supply point
must comply with the standard and meet at least the IP44 degree of protection.
708.530.2.2 Power socket bases must be placed at a height between 0.50 m and 1.50 m between the axis
of the sockets and the ground. In special cases due to environmental conditions, the maximum height may
be greater than 1.5 m.
708.530.2.3 The rated current of receptacle sockets shall correspond to the maximum demand and be at
least 16 A.
708.530.2.4 At least one power outlet must be provided for the connection of any recreational vehicle.
708.530.3 A power outlet shall power only one travel trailer.

(1) of
It is necessary to provide at least socket outlets that comply with the following minimum
characteristics standard:
Single-phase power socket bases:

- Rated voltage: 200-250 V
- Rated current: 16 A
- Time position: 6 o'clock
- Number of poles: 2 and one earth contact
- Construction: IP44 and IK08 minimum
In addition, socket bases with the following characteristics can be provided:
- Single-phase power socket bases:

- Three-phase power socket bases:

708.530.4 A maximum of four socket outlets may be grouped in an envelope box.
708.531.1 Each power outlet must be individually protected by a differential current device having an
assigned residual current of no more than 30 mA.
708.533 Overcurrent protection
Each socket outlet must be individually protected against overcurrent.
(1) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)
- 390 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-708
708.559 Use materials
708.559.1 Caravan connection

Caravans are often powered by terminals which have both sockets and water taps.
The risks resulting from the proximity of power sockets and water supplies concern not only the possibility
of simultaneous contact but the possibilities of watering the power sockets and making the ground nearby
wet. In fact, these risks are taken into consideration in the choice of the degree of protection of the socket
outlets (IPX4 corresponding to condition AD4).
However, it is desirable that electrical equipment and water distribution taps be suitably separated so as
to avoid any accidental and simultaneous contact between the former and the latter.
Additionally, it is recommended that the terminals themselves be made of insulating material.

H 708.559.1.1 Elements of the connection device
The means of connection between the power socket of the caravan pitch and the leisure vehicle must
consist of:
(2) - a sheet as specified by the standard; - a flexible

cable of type H07 RN-F or equivalent comprising a conductor of
protection, identified according to HD
308; - a connector as specified by standard (2).
708.559.1.2 Cable length The cable

length must not exceed 25 m. The cable must not have intermediate connections along its entire length.
708.559.1.3 Cable section

For a 16 A socket base, the minimum section is 2.5 mm2. For a 32 A socket socket, the .
minimum section is 6 mm2 .
H 708.559.1.4 Installation of cables
The cables are installed so that they are not damaged by tension or crushing.
708.559.1.5 User information

The campsite operator has the obligation to inform the user of the nature of the current supplied and the
connection possibilities of the caravan (see appendix).
(2) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)
- 391 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-708
Appendix – (informative) – Example of instructions for connecting the

caravan on caravan park power supply
It is recommended that the campsite director provides each caravan user intending to connect to the
campsite's power supply with a clear and up-to-date instruction manual and affixes a copy to each power
point. date of this instruction manual, easily readable and protected against bad weather.
This instruction manual must include, at least, the following information:
INSTRUCTIONS FOR DIRECT CONNECTION TO POWER

FROM THE CARAVAN PARK
This campsite provides you with a direct connection and earthing to the campsite power supply for your
caravan.
General
a) The power supply for this campsite is ....* V, ......* Hz [normally 230 V 50 Hz single phase or 400 V
50 Hz three phase], supplied by sockets complying with standard ( 3) , 6 o'clock position (9 o'clock
for three-phase in the case of an IT system).
b) Only one flexible connection cable must be connected to any outlet.
c) The flexible connection cable must be of a single length and not exceed 25 m.
It is type HO7-RNF: - 3G2.5
for a 16 A power socket; - 3G6 or 5G6 for a 32 A power
socket.
d) Any repair or modification is dangerous for unwary people.

In case of difficulty, call the campsite management.
At the arrival
a) Turn off the power to all devices located in the caravan.
b) Connect the flexible cable first to the caravan connection box, then to the campsite socket.
Before leaving
a) Turn off the power to all appliances in the caravan.
b) First unplug the flexible cable from the campsite socket, then from the power supply box.
caravan.
c) Replace the protective cover of the caravan connection box.
d) Coil the connection cable and store it in a dry location where it will not be
not damaged.
*
To be completed by the campsite director.
(3) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)
- 392 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-709
Part 7-709 – Electrical installations of marinas
709.2 Definitions ................................................ .................................................. ...............393
709.3 Determination of general characteristics ............................................. ..............393 709.313 Nominal

supply voltages ............................. .............................................393
709.41 Protection against electric shock............................................ .........................393
709.5 Choice and implementation of electrical equipment ......................................... ............393 709.51

External influences .............................. .................................................. .............393 709.52 Choice and
implementation of electrical equipment ........................... .......................394 709.53
Apparatus ......................... .................................................. ..................................394 709.530 General
and common rules........ .................................................. ..................394 709.531 Fault current protection
devices .................................. ..................395 709.533 Overcurrent protection
devices........................ ..................395 709,559 Materials for
use ................ .................................................. .............................395
Appendix - (informative) - Example of instructions for connecting the pleasure boat to

the port power supply ......................... .................................................. ...396
of NF C 15-100.
requirements apply.
- 393 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-709
H
The requirements of this section are applicable to the electrical installation of
marinas for supplying pleasure boats of a length less than or equal to
24m.
NOTE - Such installations are characterized by the risk of corrosion, the presence of water, movements of
structures, mechanical damage and increased risk of electric shock due to reduced power
resistance of the human body and the contact of the body with the potential of the earth.
709.2 Definitions
709.2.1 Pleasure boat
Any boat, vessel, yacht, floating house or motorized floating unit used
exclusively for sports and leisure.
709.2.2 Marina
Installation for anchoring pleasure boats with wharves, jetties and

fixed docks or pontoons allowing the mooring of more than one pleasure boat.
709.2.3 Mooring point
Place where a boat can be anchored.
709.313 Rated supply voltages
The nominal voltage of installations supplying pleasure boats must not be

greater than 230 V in single-phase alternating current or 400 V in three-phase alternating current.
709.411.4 In the case of a TN scheme, only the TN-S scheme shall be used.
The IT diagram is not recommended.
H 709.415.1 Supplementary protection by residual current devices

Socket sockets must be protected by a current device
differential-residual having a differential-residual current rated at most equal to 30 mA.
Equipment installed on and above piers, wharves, quays or

pontoons must meet the following conditions of external influences:
Presence of water AD4 (water splashes) IPX4

AD5 (water jets) IPX5
AD6 (Water Packs) IPX6
NOTE - The appropriate code will be chosen according to the actual external influences.
Presence of foreign bodies AE3 (Small objects), IP4X

Presence of corrosive or polluting substances AF3 (Atmospheric)
Mechanical stresses (shocks) AG3 (Important), IK08
- 394 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-709
H
709.52.1 Marina pipelines
The general rules of part 52 of NF C 15-100 are applicable taking into account the conditions of external influences (709.51).
709.52.1.1 The following pipelines shall not be used:
- overhead lines, - conductors

insulated under conduits, - cables with aluminum
conductors.
709.52.1.2 Cables shall be selected and installed so that mechanical damage due to tides and other movements of floating
structures is avoided. Conduits must be installed to allow water to flow through slopes and/or drain holes.
709.53 Apparatus
709.530 Generalities and common rules
709.530.1 Boxes with socket outlets for powering recreational boats shall be located as close as possible to the mooring points
to be supplied.
NOTES -
1 - Power socket bases for boat power can be installed in boxes separate from the distribution panel.
2 - If the power socket bases are installed in a distribution panel, this panel must be located as close as possible to the mooring
points to be supplied.
709.530.2 Distribution panels and socket outlet boxes installed outdoors must have the minimum protection degrees IP44 and
IK08. Enclosures must resist corrosion.
Where distribution boards and associated socket outlets are installed on floating installations or jetties, they must be fixed at
least 0.3 m above the gangway.
709.530.3 A power outlet shall power only one recreational boat. (1)
It is necessary to provide socket outlets that comply with the following minimum characteristics: of
Single-phase power socket bases:

In addition, socket bases with the following characteristics can be provided:
- Single-phase power socket bases:

(1) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)
- 395 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-709
H - Three-phase power socket bases:

709.530.4 A maximum of four power sockets may be grouped in an envelope box.
709.531 Fault current protection devices
709.531.2 Residual-differential current devices
The power socket bases must be individually protected by a differential-residual current device with a
differential-residual current rated at most equal to 30 mA.

Each socket outlet must be individually protected against overcurrent.
709.559 Use materials
709.559.1 Connection of pleasure boat
709.559.1.1 Elements of the connection device
The pleasure boat connection device consists of:
- a plug with a contact connected to the protective conductor having the characteristics indicated in
709.530.2 ;
- a flexible cable of type H07 RN-F or equivalent comprising a protective conductor, connected either
permanently to the pleasure boat, or to a connector having the characteristics indicated in 709.530.3.
709.559.1.2 Cable length The cable

length must not exceed 25 m. The cable must not have intermediate connections along its entire length.
709.559.1.3 Cable section

For a 16 A socket outlet, the minimum section is 2.5 mm2 .
For a 32 A socket base, the minimum section is 6 mm2 .
709.559.1.4 Installation of cables

The cables are installed so that they are not:
- displaced by the movements of the pleasure boat, or - damaged by

friction, tension or crushing.
Unless installed in plastic conduits, ducts, stringers or the like, they must be secured by clamps or clips
at intervals of approximately 0.3 m.
They must be installed away from fuel tanks, exhaust pipes and heat sources.
709.559.1.5 Information to users The marina

operator has the obligation to inform the user about the nature of the current delivered and the connection
possibilities of the pleasure vessel (see appendix).
- 396 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-709
H
Appendix - (informative) - Example of connection instructions
of the pleasure boat on the port supply
It is recommended that the port director provides each boat user intending to connect to the marina's
power supply with a clear and up-to-date instruction manual and affixes a copy to each power point. up to
date with this instruction manual, easily readable and protected against bad weather.
This instruction manual must include, at least, the following information:
MOORING INSTRUCTIONS FOR DIRECT CONNECTION

AT THE DOCK POWER SUPPLY
This marina provides your pleasure boat with a direct connection and grounding to the dock power supply.
General a)
Unless you have an onboard isolation transformer to separate your boat's electrical system from the shore
power, corrosion (electrolysis) can damage your boat or neighboring boats.
b) The power supply to this marina is ....* V, ......* Hz [normally 230 V 50 Hz single phase or 400 V 50 Hz
three phase], supplied by sockets complying with standard ( 2) , 6 o'clock position (9 o'clock for three-
phase in the case of an IT system).
c) Provisions must be made to prevent the connection cable from falling into the
water in case of disconnection.
d) Only one flexible connection cable must be connected to any outlet. e) The flexible
connection cable must be of a single length and not exceed 25 m.
It is type HO7-RNF: - 3G2.5
for a 16 A power socket; - 3G6 or 5G6 for a 32 A power
socket. f) Penetration of humidity, dust or salt into the on-board
connection box may cause danger. Carefully examine, clean and dry the outlet before connecting to shore
power.
g) Any repair or modification is dangerous for unwary people.

In case of difficulty, call the port management.
At the arrival
a) Turn off power to all on-board devices. b) Connect the flexible

cable first to the on-board box, then to the shore socket.
Before fitting
a) Turn off power to all on-board devices. b) First disconnect the

flexible cable from the shore power socket, then from the on-board box.
c) Replace the protective cover of the on-board connection box in order to
prevent water penetration.
d) Coil the connection cable and store it in a dry location where it will not be
damaged.
*
To be completed by the port director.
(2) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)
- 397 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-709
(Blank page)
- 398 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-711
Part 7-711 – Temporary electrical installations of structures, huts,

stands in fairgrounds, markets, leisure parks, circuses and exhibition or
performance venues
711.1 Scope of application ............................................. .................................................. .399
711.3 Determination of general characteristics ............................................. ...............399
711.4 Protection to ensure safety ......................................... ..................................399
711.5 Choice and implementation of electrical equipment ......................................... .............400 711.52

Pipelines .............................. .................................................. .......................400 711.55 Other
materials.............................. .................................................. .............................400
711.6 Verification ................................................ .................................................. ..............401
NF C 15-100.
apply.
- 399 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-711

The specific requirements of this part apply to temporary electrical installations of marquees, tents, structures, huts,
stands found in locations or enclosures such as fairgrounds, markets, leisure parks, circuses, places of exhibitions
or shows.
Unless otherwise specified, this part is not applicable to machines and equipment for which there are requirements
in the appropriate standards, such as the standard relating to the safety of machinery(1) .
This part deals with the electrical installation in stands, marquees, etc., the fixed power supply of this installation
having to comply with the general rules of this standard.
If the temporary installations covered by this part include mobile or transportable units in which an electrical
installation or part of an electrical installation is incorporated, these units must comply with the provisions of part
7-717.
VS 711.3 Determination of general characteristics
711.313 Food
The nominal supply voltage of temporary electrical installations must not exceed 230/400 V alternating current.
711.411 Protective measure by automatic power cut-off
711.411.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact 711.411.3.2 Automatic

cut-off of the power supply At the origin of the installation and
at the head of non-terminal circuits, automatic cut-off is ensured by means of residual current devices. sensitivity,
timed or type S, in order to ensure selectivity with the differential devices protecting the terminal circuits (see
711.415.1).
711.411.4 TN scheme If
the grounding scheme is TN, only the TN-S scheme must be used.
711.411.6 IT diagram
The IT earth connection diagram can only be used if the choice of another diagram is impossible.
However, the IT scheme can be used for DC applications.
———————
(1) NF EN 60204-1 (C 79-130)
- 400 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-711
VS
711.415.1 Supplementary protection Regardless
of the earth connection scheme, all terminal circuits must be protected by a differential-residual current RCD rated at most equal
to 30 mA, with the exception of circuits supplying high-power motors. power which can be protected by medium sensitivity devices
of type S or not deliberately delayed.
In the case of an IT diagram, one DDR must be provided per circuit.
711.415.2 Additional equipotential bonding In locations used for

animals, an additional equipotential bonding must connect all masses and conductive elements that can be touched simultaneously
by animals.
711.421 General fire protection rules Illuminated display cases and display
panels must be made of materials with appropriate heat resistance, mechanical strength, electrical insulation and ventilation, taking
into account the combustibility of the objects exposed to the heat given off by the illumination.
Displays containing a concentration of electrical equipment, lighting or lamps likely to emit excessive heat must be equipped with
roofs made of M0, M1 or M2 materials, suitably ventilated.
711.422.1.13 Motors controlled automatically or remotely, or not continuously monitored, must be protected against excessive
temperatures by overload protection devices with manual reset or by similar devices.
711.462 Sectioning and cut-off under load Each structure,

hut, stand or entity, intended to be occupied by a specific user and each distribution circuit supplying external installations must be
provided with its own sectioning and cut-off under load devices easily accessible and easily identifiable.
711.463 Emergency cut-off An

emergency cut-off device must be provided at the head of the electrical installation of entities such as barracks or stands. This
emergency cutoff function can be provided by the device prescribed in 711.462.
711.5 Choice and implementation of electrical equipment
711.52 Pipelines
711.526 Electrical connections Connections

must be enclosed in enclosures with a minimum degree of protection IP4X or IPXXD.
711.53 Protection devices against indirect contacts and against overcurrents, circuits of entities such as barracks or stands must
be implemented in closed enclosures with a minimum degree of protection IP4X or IPXXD which can only be opened to the using
a wrench or tool.
711.551 Low Voltage Generator Sets Generator sets shall be
located or protected so as to avoid danger and injury to persons from inadvertent contact with high temperature or dangerous parts.
The UTE C 15-401 guide defines the conditions for implementing generator sets in the electrical installation.
- 401 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-711
711.559.2 Lighting devices-Light fixtures

VS
711.559.2.1 Light fixtures
Light fixtures and light patterns must be securely attached to the structure or supports intended to hold them.
See also 559.2.4.
Luminaires and light patterns fixed less than 2.5 m (reach) from the ground or susceptible to accidental
VS
contact must be firmly fixed, and located or protected in such a way as to prevent any risk of injury to people
or ignition of the materials.
Access to the light source must only be possible after removing a barrier or covering using a tool.
711.559.2.2 Sockets
Sockets with insulation penetration for connections shall not be used unless the cable and sockets are
compatible and the sockets are no longer removable after securing the cable.
711.559.2.3 Lamps in shooting galleries Lamps

in shooting galleries and fairground shows in which projectiles are used must be properly located to avoid
any accidental damage.
711.559.2.4 Floodlights If
mobile floodlights are used, they must be implemented so that they are inaccessible. Power cables must be
flexible and must have appropriate mechanical protection. These cables must be type H07RN-F or H07BB-F
711.559.2.5 Risk of fire from luminaires and projectors Luminaires and

projectors must be fixed and protected so that their orientation or a concentration of heat are not likely to
cause the ignition of any material. The minimum distance requirements for illuminated objects given by the
manufacturer must be respected.
711.559.2.6 Discharge signs and light tubes operating at a rated no-load output voltage greater than
1kV Discharge signs and light tubes
operating at a rated no-load output voltage greater than 1kV must be installed in accordance with the
provisions of the NF C standards 15-150-1 and NF C 15-150-2.
If they are enclosed in envelopes, these must be made of at least M3 material or of material satisfying the
glow wire test, the temperature of the glow wire being 750°C.
The material of the rear support surface of the signs or tubes must be M1.
711.559.2.7 SELV lighting installations SELV

lighting installations must meet the requirements of guide UTE C 15-559.
711.6 Verification
National regulations indicate the conditions for verifying temporary installations covered by this part, in
particular the regulations emanating from the Ministry of Labor and those emanating from the Ministry of the
Interior.
_____________
- 402 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
Part 7-717 – Mobile or transportable units
717.1 Scope of application............................................ .................................................. .404
717.3 Determination of general characteristics ............................................. ...............404 717.312 Types

of distribution schemes............................ .............................................404 717.313 Power
supply .................................................. .................................................. .......404
717.411 Protection by automatic power cut-off ......................................... ....404
717.5 Choice and implementation of electrical equipment ......................................... .............405 717.51

Common rules .............................. .................................................. ................405 717.512 External
influences .............................. .................................................. ................405 717.514
Identification .......................... .................................................. .........................406 717.55 Other
materials.............................. .................................................. ................................406 717.555 Installation
materials............ .................................................. .............................406
of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number in part 7-717 are those of the corresponding parts, articles
requirements apply.
- 403 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
The specific requirements of this part are applicable to units:

- either of the mobile type, for example vehicles (self-propelled or towed); either of the transportable
- type, for example containers or cabins installed on site.
Examples of use are radio/ TV transmitters, medical services, advertising, fire fighting, workshops, etc.
VS Multiple units can be electrically interconnected.
These requirements are not applicable:
- to replacement generating groups; - pleasure craft;
(1)
- mobile machines complying with standard NF EN 60204-1 ;
- to caravans;
- electric traction equipment for vehicles.
The additional requirements of the parts of Title 7, if applicable, will be taken into account, for example for showers, locations for
medical uses, etc.
717.312 Types of distribution schemes
717.312.2 Types of grounding diagrams
717.312.2.1 TN scheme
The TN-C scheme is not permitted within a unit.
717.313 Food
The following methods can be used to power a unit: a) power supply from a low voltage generator (see
figures 717A.1 and 717A.2) ; The generating group can be inside a unit or a mobile group.
VS b) direct power supply from a fixed electrical installation (see figure 717B) ; c) power supply from a fixed
electrical installation via a transformer

ensuring simple separation (see figures 717C.1 and 717C.2).
NOTES -
1 - In all cases, an earth connection may be provided for functional reasons.
2 - Simple separation is appropriate, for example if information processing equipment is used in the unit or if reduction of
electromagnetic influences is necessary.
Sources, connection or separation devices can be inside the unit.
717.411 Protection by automatic power cut-off a) for power supplies complying with
717.313 a) and 717.313 c), only TN and IT schemes are authorized and protection by automatic power cut-off must be ensured: -
in TN scheme , in accordance with the provisions of 717.411.4, the protection devices being RCDs;
- in IT diagram, in accordance with the provisions of 717.411.6.

———————
(1) NF EN 60204-1 (C 79-130)
- 404 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
VS
b) for power supplies conforming to 717.313 b), only TN or TT schemes are authorized
and automatic power cut-off must be ensured by a DDR.
All equipment upstream of the devices ensuring automatic cut-off of the power supply in the unit, including
these protection devices themselves, must be protected by using class II equipment or having equivalent
insulation.
717.411.3.1 Equipotential connections
717.411.3.1.1 Main equipotential connection The

accessible conductive parts of the units such as chassis, conductive enclosure, overall or tubular structure
must be interconnected and connected to the main protective conductor of the unit by the main
equipotential connection. This connection must have a flexible core.
717.411.3.1.2 Mass equipotentiality

The grounds of the electrical equipment of the units must be interconnected and connected to the main
protective conductor of the unit, itself connected to the main equipotential connection.
717.411.3.1.3 If several units are electrically interconnected and powered by the same source, the main
equipotential links must also be interconnected.
711.411.3.1.4 If a LV generator set located outside is used, its ground must be connected to the main
equipotential connection.
717.411.4 TN scheme
VS
In the case of supply by a low voltage generator group [717.313 a)] or via a transformer ensuring simple
separation [717.313 c)], if the TN scheme is chosen, the neutral point or, if this is not possible, a phase
conductor must be connected to the main equipotential connection (see figures 717A.1 and 717C.1).
717.411.6 IT diagram
In the case of supply by a low voltage generator group [717.313 a)] or via a transformer ensuring simple
separation [717.313 c)], if the IT diagram is chosen, the “earth” terminal of the CPI must be connected to
the main equipotential link (see figure 717 C.2).
VS
717.415.1 Additional protection by RCD Additional
protection by protection devices with residual differential current rated at most equal to 30 mA is necessary
for equipment used outside the unit and for all socket outlets, with the exception of socket bases powered
by circuits protected by: - SELV, or
- TBTP, or
- electrical separation.
717.51 Common rules

Equipment installed outside mobile units must meet the following external influence conditions: - presence
of water: AD4 (water splashes),
IPX4; - presence of foreign bodies: AE2 (small objects),
IP3X; - mechanical stresses (shocks): AG3 (significant), IK08.
- 405 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
VS 717.514 Identification
An indicator plate must be attached in a location visible to the user of the unit, clearly and unambiguously indicating the types of
power supplies that can be connected to the unit. The descriptions given in 717.313 shall be used.
717.521.2 Pipelines
Flexible copper cables with a minimum section of 2.5 mm2 must be used to connect the unit to the power supply. Cables must
enter the unit through an insulating entry to ensure double insulation. Cable jackets must be securely attached or hooked to the
unit.
717.555 Installation materials

(2)
717.555.1 Plugs and sockets must comply with NF EN 60309-1 .
717.555.2 Power socket bases located outside the unit must be equipped with an enclosure ensuring a degree of protection at
least equal to IP44.
717.559.1 Mobile unit connection
717.559.1.1 Elements of power connection devices
Connection devices connecting the unit to the power supply must comply with (2)
NF EN 60309-1 and the following rules: the plugs must
- have an envelope made of insulating material; the plugs and bases must provide
- a degree of protection at least equal to IP44, if they are exterior;
- device inputs and their enclosures must provide a degree of protection at least equal to IP55; the male part must be located
on the unit.
-
———————
(2) NF EN 60309-1 (C 63-300)
- 406 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
(Blank page)
- 407 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
L1
L2
L3
1a 8
NOT
PE
10b 6
8 9 9 9
6a
M1 M2
M
Iÿn = 30mA 10a 5

4
11 NEWS INFO
2
9 6d 6b 6c
9 9
5
7 7 3
Figure 717A.1 – Example of power supply by a low voltage generator group located inside the
unit, in TN diagram
L1
L2
L3
8
NOT
1a
PE
10b 6
8 9 9 9
6a
Generator group
Low tension M1 M2
M
Iÿn = 30mA 10a
5
4
11
11 NEWS INFO
2
6b 6c
9 6d
9 9
6d
5
6th 6th
7 7 3
Figure 717A.2 – Example of power supply by a low voltage generator group located
outside the unit in TN diagram
- 408 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
VS Legend of figures 717A.1 and 717A.2
1a Power supply of the unit by a LV generator group in accordance with 717.313 a)

2 Class II insulation or equivalent up to the first protection device
ensuring automatic power cut-off
3 Possible driver’s staircase
4 Connection of the neutral point (or, if it does not exist, of a phase conductor) to
the conductive envelope of the unit
5 Power socket bases for use inside the unit
6 Main equipotential bonding conforming to 717.411.3.1.1
6a for the possible antenna;
6b for possible conductive exterior steps in contact with the earth;
6c for a functional earth connection (if necessary);
6d for the conductive envelope of the unit;
6th interconnection of the main equipotential links of two units;
7 Power socket bases for powering equipment used in

outside of the unit
8 Overcurrent protection device, if necessary
9 Overcurrent protection device (e.g. circuit breaker)
10a DDR of differential-residual current rated at most equal to 30 mA for the
protection by automatic cut-off of the power supply to sockets or
circuits used outside the unit
10b RCD for protection by automatic cut-off of circuit power
used inside the unit
11 Main earth terminal or bar
M Engine
M1 and M2 Miscellaneous electrical equipment
- 409 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
L1 L1
L2 L2
1b L3 L3
8
NOT
NOT
PE PE
10b 6
8 9 9 9
6a
M1 M2
M
Iÿn = 30mA
10a
11 NEWS INFO
2
6b6d 6c
9 9
7 7 3
Figure 717B – Example of power supply by a fixed installation in TN or TT diagram
- 410 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
VS Legend for figure 717B
1b Power supply to the unit by a fixed electrical installation in accordance with 717.313 b)
5 Power outlets used inside the unit
6a for the possible antenna
6b for possible conductive exterior steps in contact with earth
6c for a functional earth connection (if necessary)
6d for the conductive envelope of the unit
outside of the unit
9 Overcurrent protection devices (e.g. circuit breaker)
10b RCD for automatic power cut protection
M Engine
- 411 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
L1 L1
L2 L2
1C L3 L3
8
NOT
PE PE
10b 6
8 9 9 9
6a
M1 M2
M
not = 30m A 5
10a
11 NEWS INFO
2
6d 6b 6c
9
9 9
5
7 7 3
Figure 717C.1 - Example of power supply by a fixed installation with any earth connection
diagram, via a transformer ensuring simple separation, the secondary being in TN diagram
L1 L1
L2 L2
1C L3 L3
8
NOT
12 CPI PE
6
9 9 9
PE
6a
8 M1 M2
M
Iÿn = 30mA
5
10a
11 NEWS INFO
2
6b6d 6c
9
9 9
5
7 7 3
Figure 717C.2 - Example of power supply by a fixed installation with any earth
connection diagram, via a transformer ensuring simple separation, the secondary
being in IT diagram
- 412 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
VS Legend of figures 717C.1 and 717C.2
1C Power supply of the unit by a fixed electrical installation, via a

single separation transformer in accordance with 717.313 (c)
4 Connection of the neutral point (or, if it does not exist, of a phase conductor) to
the conductive envelope of the unit
5 Power socket bases for use inside the unit
6a for the possible antenna
6b for possible conductive exterior steps in contact with earth
6c for a functional earth connection (if necessary)
6d for the conductive envelope of the unit
outside of the unit
9 Overcurrent protection devices (e.g. circuit breaker)
10b RCD for automatic power cut protection
12 Permanent insulation monitor
M Engine
______________
- 413 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717
(Blank page)
- 414 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-752
Part 7-752 – Liquid fuel distribution areas
752.1 Scope of application ............................................. .................................................. 415 752.46 Emergency cut-
off ............................................. .................................................. ....415 752.51 Dangerous
locations.............................................. .............................................415
752.52 Pipelines................................................ .................................................. .........415
752.542 Grounding installation........................................................ .................................415
752.55 Other equipment .............................................. .................................................. .....416
The requirements of this part supplement, modify or replace the general requirements of the other parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-752 are those of the corresponding parts, articles or paragraphs of this standard.
The absence of reference to a part, article or paragraph means that the corresponding general requirements apply.
- 415 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-752
The requirements of this part are applicable to electrical installations in liquid fuel distribution areas.
Flammable liquid distribution installations are generally classified installations, most often subject to declaration. As a result, they
must in particular meet the requirements of standard order no. 261 bis (current nomenclature no. 1434) relating to the filling and
distribution of flammable liquids.
An emergency cut-off device must be provided to cut off the supply to the liquid fuel distribution area.
752.51 Hazardous locations
In accordance with European Directive 1999/92/ EC of 16/12/99, the document relating to protection against explosions drawn
up and kept up to date by the head of the establishment mentions dangerous locations classified as zones.
However, volumes above ground and limited are necessarily classified in zone 1:
a) for the openings of the loading mouths of the storage tanks:

- by the spherical surface located 2 m around the vent if it is outside, - by the walls of the room if the vent is located
inside.
b) for vents:
- by the spherical surface located 2 m around the orifice:
c) for dispensing devices:

- by the cylindrical surface located "x" meters around the device "x" being equal to the length of the loading hose increased
by 1 m and by the horizontal plane tangent to the top of the device if it is at outside, and by the horizontal plane located
2 m above the top if it is located inside.
752.52 Pipelines
The pipes must be chosen and implemented in accordance with the provisions of the BE3 locations (see 424).
Buried pipes, with the exception of those essential to the operation of the devices necessary for the operation of the storage,
must run at a distance from the storage tank(s) greater than 0.50 m, counted in projection on the plan horizontal.
752.53 Equipment Protective

devices are installed in cabinets located outside hazardous locations and washing and lubrication areas.
752.542 Grounding installation
For the same establishment, there must be only one earth connection or a set of interconnected earth connections to ensure
the earthing of the tanks and that of the grounds of the electrical installation.
The earth connections are located outside the volumes located below zones 0 and 1; the same applies to the earthing circuits of
the installation masses.
- 416 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-752

Distribution devices must comply with Directive 94/9/EC.
Other equipment installed in dangerous locations must meet the BE3 external influence conditions (see
424).
The equipment and light sources are placed out of reach of vehicles, taking into account the largest
admissible size.
It is recommended that light sources respect a clear height of 2 meters at all points.
This requirement does not exclude the use of foci for marking obstacles or routing traffic areas, provided
that they are adequately protected against mechanical damage (IK07) (512.2.7.1).
______________
- 417 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-752
(Blank page)
- 418 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753
Part 7-753 – Electric space heating equipment
753.1 Scope of application and common rules ......................................... ...................419
753.2 Definition................................................ .................................................. .................419
753.3 Technical file............................................ .................................................. .....420
753.4 Heating elements for radiant floors ................................................ .............420
753.5 Electric heating equipment installed in ceilings .........................................423
753.6 Heating with wall emitters (convector, radiant panel and

storage transmitters)................................................... .............................................424
NF C 15-100.
- 419 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753
753.1 Scope of application and common rules
This part covers installation:
- heating elements for radiant floors;
- electric heating equipment installed in or on the ceiling;
- direct wall heaters and storage heaters.
753.2 Definition
753.2.1 Heating elements for radiant floors

• Heating element
Element composed of a cable or a flexible heating film, and its cold connection(s) intended to connect
this cable or this heating film to the point of connection to the installation of the food.
• Radiant accumulation floor

Electric inertia heating, at low temperature, by the floor composed of a heating element coated in a
thick reinforced slab.
• Direct radiant floor
Direct electric heating, at low temperature, by the floor composed of a heating element above a
thermal insulator and a thin reinforced floating screed.
This type of heating is generally called Electric Radiant Floor (PRE).
753.2.2 Electric heating equipment installed in or on the ceiling

• Radiant plaster ceiling
Specific plasterboard ceiling fitted with heated panels and non-heated panels.
The heating panel includes a heating element glued under a rigid mineral wool panel and equipped
with a cord and a specific socket.
This type of heating is generally called PRP. • Modular
radiant ceiling Suspended ceiling
composed of a combination of radiant modules and non-heating modules prefabricated in the factory:
A radiant module is a prefabricated
heating unit in the form of a sandwich panel assembled by gluing and composed of an insulator
thermal, a decorative underside, a heating element placed between the insulation and the decorative
underside and equipped with a cord and a specific socket.
This type of heating is generally called PRM.

• Radiant suspended cassette
Radiant heating device for horizontal ceiling installation whose constituent parts are enclosed in a
rigid envelope, and intended to be fixed or suspended from the ceiling or to be recessed in a modular
suspended ceiling.
• Reflector device Radiant
heating device comprising a metal frame enclosing one or more medium or high temperature heating
elements, the emitted radiation being returned to the room by one or more reflectors.
- 420 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753
753.2.3 Direct wall transmitter
• Convector Device
fixed to a vertical wall, equipped with an electrical resistance allowing heating of the room by natural convection of the air
through one or more outlets.
• Radiant panel
Device attached to a vertical wall, equipped with an electrical resistance allowing heating of the room, mainly by heating the
visible face of the device.
753.2.4 Accumulation transmitter
• Storage heater
Heating device whose stored heat is obtained by charging an accumulator core, the heat being able to be released at any
time.
753.3 Technical file
In the case of heating by radiant floor or by equipment installed in the ceiling, a technical file must contain, depending on the case,
the following information:
- the type of heating elements; the rated
- voltage; the rated resistance;
- the number of heating elements
- installed; the length/area of the heating elements; -
- characteristics relating to drivers, screens;
- power density per area;

- installed/heated areas;
- the arrangement of the heating elements; - the location
of the heating elements; - the location of the junction boxes;
- the rated current of overcurrent protection devices; the rated current of the differential devices.
-
753.4 Heating elements for radiant floors
753.4.1 Protection against fault currents
753.4.1.1 Electric heating equipment comprising insulated heating elements, with armor, sheath or other grounded metal covering
must be protected by differential-residual current devices rated at most equal to 500 mA. In the case where the installation is carried
out using an IT diagram, the impedance of the permanent insulation controller (CPI) and the characteristics of the residual-differential
current devices must be chosen so as to ensure cutting when the voltage appears. first ground or earth fault.
Whatever the earth connection scheme, the cut-off at the first fault carried out by the protection device having a differential-residual
current rated at most equal to 500 mA aims to avoid the destruction of the metal coverings by the circulation of fault currents of high
value for too long a period.
753.4.1.2 Heating equipment comprising insulated conductors, without armor, sheath or other metallic covering must be protected by
differential-residual current devices with a differential-residual current rated at most equal to 30 mA, each 30 mA RCD being provided
for a rated power of the heating elements at most equal to 13 kW (400 V) or 7.5 kW (230 V).
- 421 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753
In the case of a three-phase installation, it is recommended to implement a differential device per circuit with
two active conductors.
Connection examples:
Circuit breaker
NOT
L1
L2
L3
DDR 30 mADDR 30 mA
DDR 30 mA
Element
Figure 753A – Example of protection of a three-phase

installation: power supply between phases
General circuit breaker
NOT
L1
L2
L3
DDR 30 mA DDR 30 mA DDR 30mA
Heating element
Figure 753B – Example of protection for a three-phase

installation: power supply between phase and neutral
753.4.1.3 The armor, sheath or metal covering of any heating element, where it exists, must be connected
at each end to the protective conductor of the power circuit.
The protective conductor has the same section as the power supply conductors.
753.4.1.4 Electric heating elements embedded in the ground, intended for heating a room or location other
than AD1, may be installed provided that they are covered with an earthed metal mesh or have an earthed
metal covering. To the earth.
753.4.1.5 Bare or lightly insulated conductors incorporated in a material or in the floor, for heating thereof,
are admitted provided that the source is SELV (414.4) and that the greatest voltage between active parts or
between parts active and earth, is not greater than 25 V in alternating current or 60 V in direct current.
By lightly insulated conductors, we mean conductors having a coating of non-conductive material intended
to provide protection against chemical or electrochemical corrosion or mechanical protection, but for which
no electrical characteristics are required. Therefore, from the point of view of protection against electric
shock, such conductors are considered bare conductors.
- 422 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753

753.4.2 Overcurrent protection
If the overcurrent protection of the heating element power circuits is

(1) ensured by fuses, these must be of type gG in accordance with the standard in force and
not household fuses. In residential premises, only circuit breakers are
authorized.
In the case of accumulation or direct floor equipped with self-regulating cables, the
intensities announced by the cable manufacturer must be increased by 30% to keep
mainly counts cold power-ups.
In addition, the rated current of the protection devices must take into account the temperatures
that can be reached both in the heating supply ducts and inside the
cabinets or boxes.
The table below, relating to storage or direct floors equipped with cables
self-regulating, takes into account the previous provisions for the choice of control devices
protection.
Table 753A – Protection against overcurrents in the case of floor to

accumulation or direct equipped with self-regulating cables
Maximum power Minimum section

Rated device current
announced by the protection drivers
constructor power supply
(HAS)
(W) (mm²)
230V 400V gG fuses Circuit breaker Copper
1,700 3,000 16 16 1.5
3,400 6,000 25 25 2.5
4,200 7,300 32 32 4
5,400 9,300 40 40 6
7,500 13,000 50 50 10
The minimum sections indicated in the table above are calculated according to the
operating current corresponding to the maximum power announced by the manufacturer increased
by 30%. The rated currents of the protection devices have been determined taking into account
take into account the conditions set out above the table; therefore, these devices do not protect
power circuits and against short circuits.
In the case of other floors, the rules of Part 43 apply.
753.4.3 Installation of heating elements

(2)
Heating elements must meet current standards .
Heating elements intended to be embedded in a concrete floor or other material

analog must be IPX7.
Their implementation must comply with standard NF P 52-302-1 (ex DTU 65.7), in the Specifications
Common Technical Prescriptions (CPT PRE 06/96 and its additives) and the technical opinion of
process.
(1) NF C 63-213
(2) ) C 32-330; UTE C 73-999
- 423 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753
The installer must inform other trades that no penetrating means of fixing such as door stop screws should be used in areas where
heating systems are being installed.
In the case of establishments open to the public (ERP), the provisions of the ERP security regulations should also be applied.
753.5 Electric heating equipment installed in ceilings
753.5.1 Protection against fault currents
The circuits supplying plaster radiant ceiling (PRP) or modular radiant ceiling (PRM) heating equipment must be: either powered by
SELV or SELV and meet the requirements of paragraph 414.4 ; or
-
protected by differential-residual current devices (see 531.2) with a differential-residual current rated at most equal to
-
30 mA, each 30 mA RCD being designed for a rated power of the heating elements at most equal to 13 kW (400 V) or 7.5 kW
(230 V).
General circuit breaker
NOT
L1
L2
L3
DDR 30 mA DDR 30 mA DDR 30 mA
Heating element
Figure 753C – Example of protection for a three-phase installation: power

supply between phases and neutral
If the heating equipment is protected by a metal screen or grille, and it is not Class II, the metal screen or grille must be grounded.
When reflector devices and radiant cassettes are not class I, the circuits supplying them are protected by RCDs (see 531.2) with a
differential-residual current rated at most equal to 30 mA, each 30 mA RCD being designed for a rated power of the heating elements
not more than 13 kW (400 V) or 7.5 kW (230 V).
753.5.2 Implementation of plaster or modular radiant ceiling equipment

(3)
Issuers must meet current standards and guides .
Their implementation must comply with the common technical requirements (CPT PEC 12/33), the technical requirements (PT PRM
10/97) and the technical opinion of the process.
In the case of establishments open to the public (ERP), the provisions of the ERP regulation should also be applied.
(3) UTE C 73-999 for radiant ceilings (PRP and PRM); NF EN 60335-2 -30 (C 73-830) for reflector
devices and radiant cassettes
- 424 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753
753.6 Heating with wall emitters (convector, radiant panel and storage emitters)
753.6.1 General
Heating appliances or equipment are distributed over specific terminal circuits.
The ERP safety regulations require that heating devices in nursery schools must not be directly accessible
if their surface temperature is above 60°C under normal conditions.
753.6.2 Sectioning
In the case of heating with a pilot wire, sectioning of the pilot wire must be provided.
This sectioning is carried out at the origin of each of the heating circuits by a sectioning device associated
with the protection device.
However, it is allowed to provide a general sectioning of the pilot wire:
- either by a disconnecting device associated with a general heating switch; - either by an independent
disconnecting device, the protection device dedicated to the
energy management that can fulfill this function.
When the cutting of the pilot wire is independent, a marking must be placed on the distribution board and
inside the connection box of the heating equipment “Attention, pilot wire to be cut”.
______________
- 425 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753
(Blank page)
- 426 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
Part 7-771 – Residential premises
771.11 Scope of application ............................................. .................................................427
771.14 Food ................................................ .................................................. ..........427
771.443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin (lightning arrester)..............432
771.46 Sectioning and control............................................ .....................................433 771.462

Sectioning........ .................................................. .............................................433 771.463 Emergency
shutdown . .................................................. .............................................433 771.465
Order .. .................................................. .................................................. ......433
771.514 Circuit identification .............................................. .............................................434
771.524 Conductor section........................................................ .............................................434
771.533 Overcurrent protection devices........................................................ .........437
771.558 Control panels, distribution and communication boards - Duct

housing technology (GTL) ............................................. .......................................438
Appendix A – (normative) – Keraunic levels in France and the French Overseas Departments .........................449
Annex B – (normative) – Electrical installations powered by a low-power autonomous energy source (ÿ 6 kVA), not
connected to the network.............................. .............450
Appendix C – (informative) – Example of a letter to raise awareness among the various stakeholders of their
responsibilities. .................................................. .................................................. ......451
Annex D – (informative) – Management system or equipment using the information delivered on the
remote information circuit of the distributor's electronic
meter............................. .................................................. .................................................452
____________
The requirements of this part supplement, modify or replace the general requirements of the other parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-771 are those of the corresponding parts, articles or paragraphs of this
standard.
The absence of reference to a part, article or paragraph means that the corresponding general requirements apply.
- 427 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
771.11 Scope of application This

part applies to electrical installations in private residential premises.
In addition to the rules of this part, other parts of Title 7 are also applicable to residential premises, such
as:
- part 7-701 for premises containing a bathtub or shower; part 7-702 for private
- swimming pools; part 7-703 for saunas; part
- 7-753 for electric heating equipment.
-
It does not apply to electrical installations of general services and common areas of collective buildings for
residential use to which the rules of titles 1 to 6 of this standard, the rules of part 7-772 and possibly of
other parts of title 7.
Offices and professional premises integrated into housing are in principle subject to the provisions of the
decree of November 14, 1988 relating to the protection of workers in establishments which use electrical
current.
For electrical installations powered by an autonomous energy source (photovoltaic, wind, etc.) of low
power (ÿ 6 kVA) not connected to the network, refer to appendix B.
771.14 Food
Installations in residential premises are generally supplied by a low-voltage public distribution network
according to the TT scheme and at a voltage of 230 volts single-phase or 230/400 volts three-phase.
In certain cases, these installations can be connected to an installation supplied by a private transformer
station according to a scheme which can be TT, TN or IT.
When the installation is connected to an installation carried out in the TN scheme, the installation of
premises for residential use is carried out according to the TN-S scheme.
771.314.2 Terminal circuits

An electrical installation must be able to have a sufficient number of points of use to meet the normal
needs of users, namely at least:
771.314.2.1 Socket sockets

- for a room, three 16 A + T power sockets, distributed around the periphery;
- for the living room, one 16 A + T power socket per 4 m2 of surface area, distributed around the periphery
with a minimum of five sockets;
Thus, for a stay of 27 m2 , It is necessary to provide 7 bases.
- For a kitchen, six non-specialized 16 A + T power sockets, four of which are to be distributed above the
work surface(s). These bases are not installed above a sink tray, nor above fires or hotplates;
However, the exception is allowed for an additional base above the cooking hobs provided that this
base is identified for the hood and that it is placed at least 1.80 m from the finished floor.
In the particular case of kitchens with a surface area of less than or equal to 4 m², it is permitted to
provide only three power sockets.
- 428 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
When the hobs and sink are arranged to allow several

work surfaces, the power socket bases are distributed as best as possible to avoid
circulation of cables from household appliances above the sink or hob
cooking.
- A 16 A + T power socket at least in the other premises of a surface

greater than 4 m2 and circulation. This provision is not obligatory for WCs
and non-adjoining annexes such as garages, garden sheds, etc.
The number of 16 A socket outlets powered by the same circuit is limited to:
- 5 when the section of the circuit conductors is 1.5 mm2 ; Or
- 8 when the section of the circuit conductors is 2.5 mm2 .
When socket outlets are mounted in the same box, they are
counted according to table 771A.
Table 771A – Count of socket outlets
Number of bases per case 1 2 3 4 >4
Number of bases counted 1 1 2 2 3
This table does not apply to power outlets ordered for which
each base is counted as one use point.
771.314.2.2 Specialized circuits

Each high-power household appliance must be powered by a circuit
specialized.
At least four specialized circuits must be planned:
• a specialized circuit for powering the cooker or the hob alone
(connection box or socket base 32 A in single phase or 20 A in
three-phase);
• three specialized 16 A circuits at least for powering devices of the type:

- washing machine,
- dishwasher,
Specialized socket outlets for dishwashers and washing machines should be installed near the
water inlets and outlets necessary for
these devices.
- tumble dryer,
- oven,
- freezer.
When the location of the freezer is defined, a circuit should be provided
specialized is protected by DDR 30 mA, preferably with reinforced immunity (see
531.2.1.4) specific to this circuit, is supplied by an isolation transformer,
in order to alleviate the health consequences on food resulting from
unwanted cuts. In this case, it is recommended to add a system
alarm, especially if the freezer is located outside the living area.
In the particular case of type T1 housing, it is permitted to adapt the number of sockets
specialized according to the specialized equipment provided with the accommodation. If this
equipment is not provided, at least three specialized circuits are provided (a 32 A circuit and
two 16 A circuits).
- 429 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
Other specialized circuits must be implemented, for example for each of the following applications when they are planned: -
electric water heater, - boiler and its auxiliaries, - heat pump, air
conditioning, bathroom heating
appliance , swimming pool, external circuits
(powering one or more uses
- not adjacent to
- the building, for example lighting, automatic gate,
- etc.),
-
In fact, external circuits are subject to greater risks due to more severe environmental conditions; their decommissioning
must not affect the internal circuits with the consequences mentioned above (placed in the dark for example).
- domestic automation functions (alarms, controls, etc.), - VMC when not collective.
771.314.2.3 Lighting
Each room must have at least one lighting point powered by a lighting circuit.
a) In bedrooms, living rooms and kitchens, this lighting point must be placed on the ceiling.
If not used, a lighting point can be completely hidden.
The lighting point can be completed by one or more wall lights or one or more socket outlets ordered, not replacing the
specialized and non-specialized bases.
In the case of total renovation or when technical impossibilities do not allow the creation of lighting points placed on the ceiling,
the lighting of the room can be provided by two surface-mounted points or by two controlled socket bases.
b) In toilets, bathrooms, corridors and other premises, this lighting point must be placed either on the ceiling or on a wall.
Excluded are closets and other locations that are not intended to be entered.
These provisions are not mandatory for non-adjoining annexes such as garages, garden sheds, etc.
The number of lighting points powered by the same circuit is limited to eight.
The number of lighting circuits must be at least two in homes with a surface area greater than 35 m².
In the case of spotlights or light strips, there is one lighting point per 300 VA in the same room.
Each lighting point equipped with a DCL base (Luminaire Connection Device) intended to power a luminaire according to article
559.1.1 must be provided with either a DCL socket fitted with a 2P+E recoverable plug for subsequent connection of a
luminaire, or a luminaire equipped with a DCL plug.
The DCL base and plug assembly prevents damage caused to the conductors during various changes of occupants or lighting
fixtures, which ultimately results in an impossibility of connection, unless harmful traction is exerted on the said conductors or
make splices.
- 430 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
771.314.2.4 Exterior points of use
In order to ensure the normal needs of users, an electrical installation must present a
minimum number of points of use in the private exterior area adjoining the
building, namely:
- one lighting point per main or service entrance;
This lighting point can be powered from an interior lighting circuit.
- power points for electric awnings if provided.
When a 16 A, 2P+E power socket base is installed outside, it is recommended to

place inside the housing a power-off device coupled to a warning light
voltage presence.
771.314.2.5 Heating appliances
Heating appliances or equipment are distributed over separate terminal circuits

in such a way that the power of each circuit is not greater than the given values
in tables 771B and 771C.
The table applies to all heating systems other than underfloor heating.
accumulation or direct equipped with self-regulating cables for which a table is given
in part 7-753.
Table 771B – Protection by circuit breakers
Maximum rated current Minimum section of

Maximum power
of the device drivers
(W) protection (mm²)
(HAS)
230V 400V Circuit breaker Copper
2,250 4,000 10 1.5
4,500 8,000 20 2.5
5,750 25 4
7,250 32 6
Table 771C – Fuse protection
Maximum rated current Minimum section of

Maximum power
of the device drivers
(W) protection (mm²)
(HAS)
230V 400V Fuse Copper
2,250 4,000 10 1.5
3,500 6,400 16 2.5
4,500 8,000 20 4
7,250 25 6
In some buildings, heating is provided by devices powered by the installation

general services electricity. The circuits powering these devices are then made and
protected in accordance with the provisions indicated in guide UTE C 15-755.
- 431 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

771.411.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact
771.411.3.2 Automatic power cutoff
The resistance of the earth connection to which the installation masses are connected must be at most
equal to 100 ohms.
In general, low voltage public distribution is provided in France for installations supplied according to the
TT scheme and the rule in this paragraph is consistent with those in paragraphs 411.5.3 and 531.2.4.2.2.
When the earth connection value, even after improvement testing, remains greater than 100 ohms due for
example to the nature of the ground, it is necessary to protect the installation by rated differential-residual
current devices lower than 500 mA (see table 53B). If in particular, the resistance of the earth connection
is greater than 500 ohms, RCDs with a differential-residual current rated at most equal to 30 mA are
necessary (see 531.2.5.2)
Differential devices with adjustable sensitivity shall not be used in domestic installations unless the highest
differential current meets the conditions of section 531.2.4.2.2
Personal protection would not be ensured for certain settings of the differential device.
When the general control and protection device placed at the origin of the installation includes the medium
sensitivity differential function, this protection is type S and its rated residual current is at most equal to
500 mA in accordance with the rules of NF C 14-100.
When the general control and protection device placed at the origin of the installation does not include a
medium sensitivity differential function, it is recalled that the part of the installation included between the
general control and protection device and the or differential devices ensuring protection against indirect
contacts must be made in class II.
In the particular case where a medium sensitivity RCD is installed between the general control and
protection device not including differential protection, and the 30 mA RCD(s), this RCD must be type S and
differential-residual current assigned at most equal to 500 mA.
Residual-differential current protection devices of 30 mA residual-differential current must protect all

circuits, individually or in groups of circuits.
In the case of a total renovation of an apartment located in a building without an earthing installation (earth
connection, equipotential bonding, main protective conductor) and pending its completion , the following
compensatory measures must be respected:
- Creation of a local equipotential connection in the kitchen.

The implementation rules are those defined for premises receiving a bathtub or shower (see part
7-701).
The local equipotential connections of the kitchen and the bathroom as well as all the protective
conductors of the installation are connected to the distribution board.
- Protection of the entire installation by DR devices with a residual differential current rated at most equal
to 30 mA, the number and rated current of which are defined in table 771E.
The user must be warned of the dangers due to non-continuity of earth (place a self-adhesive label on the
electrical panel), see appendix C.
- 432 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

771.411.3.3 All circuits shall have a protective conductor. These
protective conductors must be connected:
- on the one hand to the main earth terminal of the installation (see 542.4) ;
- on the other hand to the earth contacts of the power socket bases and to the earth terminals
Class I devices.
Power socket outlets must have an earth contact unless they are
powered via an isolation transformer in accordance with the rules of
section 413.
The presence of a protective conductor in all circuits does not prevent the use
of class II user equipment.
For class II fixed equipment, the protective conductor is not connected. For the
other equipment, powered by a power outlet, class II devices are equipped with a
2P plug which escapes the earth contact of the socket outlet.
771.443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin (lightning arrester)
The conditions under which surge arresters must be implemented are defined in
443.
Table 771D below summarizes these conditions.
Table 771D – Conditions for implementing surge arresters
Building power supply Keraunic level (Nk)
Nk ÿ 25 (AQ1) Nk > 25 (AQ2)
Building equipped with a lightning rod Mandatory Mandatory
BT power supply via one line entirely (2)

(1) Not required Mandatory
or partially aerial
BT power supply via one line entirely
underground Not required Not required
(1)
This provision is not applicable when the overhead lines are made up of
insulated conductors with metal shield connected to earth or comprising a conductor connected to
Earth.
(2)
However, the absence of a surge protector is permitted if it is justified by the risk analysis.
defined in guide UTE C 15-443.
When the surge protector is not mandatory, a risk analysis can be carried out which, if
the cost of the materials used and their unavailability are vital in the installation, may
justify it.
When a surge protector is installed on the power circuit, it is recommended to

also install on the communication circuit (see risk analysis in the guide
UTE C 15-443).
When surge arresters are implemented in communications networks, they must

be connected to the earth connection of the installation.
Appendix A gives the lightning strike densities in France and the French Overseas Territories.
- 433 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
771.462 Sectioning
771.462.1 Sectioning at the origin of circuits Every

circuit must have at its origin a sectioning device on all active conductors, including the neutral conductor.
771.462.2 Cutting of the pilot wire of individual electric heating installations
In the case of heating with a pilot wire, sectioning of the pilot wire must be provided.
This sectioning is carried out at the origin of each of the heating circuits by a sectioning device associated
with the protection device.
However, it is allowed to provide a general sectioning of the pilot wire:

- either by a disconnecting device associated with a general heating switch; - either by an independent
disconnection device; the protection device dedicated to
energy management that can fulfill this function.
When the cutting of the pilot wire is independent, a marking must be placed on the distribution board and
inside the connection box of the heating equipment “Attention, pilot wire to be cut”.

The general control and protection device (AGCP) provided at the origin of the installation can provide the
emergency cut-off functions defined in 463 if it is located inside the living quarters.
If it is located in a garage or an annex room, there must be direct access between this room and the
accommodation.
Otherwise, another direct-acting device providing load breaking and sectioning functions must be placed
inside the housing (see 771.558.2.2).
The origin of the installation is defined in 141.

The general control and protection device is generally the connection circuit breaker.
For residential homes, this device is located in each housing unit.
771.465 Order
771.465.1 Controlled power socket bases Electrical

installations in homes often include controlled power socket bases, intended to exclusively power mobile
lighting devices, such as floor lamps or bedside lamps. These socket outlets have a rated current of 16A.
The ordered socket outlets are considered, from the point of view of their use, to be fixed lighting points.
They are then powered by the installation's lighting circuits.
A switch can control a maximum of two power sockets provided that these sockets are in the same room
of the dwelling. Each base ordered is counted as one lighting point.
A remote control switch, contactor or any other similar device can control more than two power sockets.
It is recommended to identify the socket outlets ordered.
- 434 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
771.465.2 Control of controlled mechanical ventilation (VMC) and distributed mechanical

ventilation (VMR)
The VMC or VMR power circuit must include a shutdown device. This device can be placed in the main
distribution board.
The circuit breaker dedicated to protecting this circuit can provide the “Stop” function.
This last provision prevents the user from frequently using the “Stop” function, which is likely to cause
damage due to humidity (condensation, mold).
It is recommended to use the circuit protection device to ensure the “Stop” function.
The speed control device can be placed outside the main distribution board if it does not have the “Off”
function.
If the air extraction from the same home is carried out by several separate extractors, their circuits come
from the same protection device.
In the case of VMC supplied by general services, see UTE guide C 15-755.
771.514 Circuit identification

Each circuit must be marked with an appropriate indication, corresponding to the needs of the user and
the professional. This identification must specify the premises served and the function (for example by
means of pictograms or other appropriate indications).
This marking must be legible, of durable quality and correctly attached and must remain visible after
installation of the panel. It must be understandable without resorting to the documents defined in
771.514.5.
771.514.5 Schemes
For any electrical installation, drawings, diagrams or tables must be drawn up to be given to the user.
The indications that must be included in the accompanying diagrams and documents are as follows: -
nature and
type of protection and control devices (contactors,
programmers, load shedding, etc.); -
adjustment current and sensitivity of protection and control devices; - forecast power; - nature
of pipes for external circuits; -
number and section of conductors; - application (lighting,
sockets, standby point of use, etc.); -
serviced premises (bedroom 1, kitchen, etc.).
A single-line diagram comprising the elements above meets this requirement.

It is necessary to update the drawings, diagrams or tables during creations, modifications and extensions
of the installation and to provide provisions for subsequent interventions (connections, earth measurement,
testing, etc.)
771.524 Conductor section

The values of the minimum sections imposed in tables 771B, 771C and 771F are determined according
to the installed powers and take into account the rules of 771.314.2 concerning the limitation of the points
of use supplied by each terminal circuit.
771.530.4 Fixing of equipment Power

socket bases must not separate from their support in use and make the terminals of the conductors or
power cables accessible.
- 435 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
Screw-fixing equipment, for use in boxes built into walls, ensures this requirement.
Given the constraints of use and the nature of the walls receiving the recessed boxes in which the socket outlets are installed,
fixing with claws is strongly discouraged. It will no longer be authorized from June 1 , 2004.
To ensure good scalability, the use of mixed flush-mounting boxes is recommended.
771.531.2.3.2 Additional protection against direct contact
771.531.2.3.2.1 All circuits in the installation, regardless of the power supply ground connection diagram, must be protected by
differential devices with a residual-differential current rated at most equal to 30 mA, the number of which , type and rated
current are given in table 771E.
These protection devices must be placed at the origin of all circuits except those supplied by an isolation transformer.
The protection of external circuits supplying installations and equipment not attached to the building must be separate from
that of internal circuits.
Protection by 30 mA DDR can be:

- either divisional for a group of circuits; either individual for a
- specialized circuit or not.
The implemented architecture will take into account the desired continuity of use depending on the applications. In particular,
devices combining water and electricity can be a source of triggering. It is therefore desirable to protect them with specific 30
mA DDRs.
Example: washing machine, dishwasher, etc.
Attention is drawn to the following considerations:
To ensure the protection of people, the power cut resulting from the operation of such devices may disrupt the operation of
certain devices, such as computer equipment and freezers.
Special arrangements can then be made:
- direct power supply by a circuit separation transformer; - power supply via a power outlet on a
circuit protected by a dedicated 30 mA DDR,
preferably with enhanced immunity.
- 436 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
Choice of rated current for differential switches:
The number and rated current of 30 mA differential switches not dedicated to certain
specific functions (freezer, computer, etc.) protecting the circuits of the premises
housing, are at least those indicated in the following table:
Table 771E – Choice of differential switches
Single-phase connection of
Area of premises
Power: ÿ 18 kVA, with or without electric heating
residential
Number, type and minimum rated current In
30 mA differential switches
(1)
Area: ÿ 35 m² 1 x 25 A type AC and 1 x 40 A type A
(1)
35 m² < Area ÿ 100 m² 2 x 40 A type AC and 1 x 40 A type A
(2) (1)
Area > 100 m² 3 x 40 A type AC and 1 x 40 A type A
(1)
The 40 A type A differential switch must protect in particular the specialized cooker circuit
or hob and the specialized washing machine circuit.
In fact, these use materials, depending on the technology used, can in the event of a defect
produce currents with direct components. In this case the type A DDRs
designed to detect these currents provide protection.
(2)
In the case of electric heating with a power greater than 8 kVA, replace a switch
40A AC type differential by a 63 A AC type differential switch.
For a three-phase connection, the number and rated current of RCDs to be implemented
is that shown in Table 771E.
If differential circuit breakers are used, their type and number are at least
those indicated in table 771E, their rating being adapted to the circuit(s) to be protected.
In order to balance the load, the circuits are judiciously distributed downstream of the DDRs. For
preserve the use of at least one circuit in the same room, it is recommended to
protect the circuits of the power outlets and lighting in this room with RCDs
different.
In the case of electric heating with a pilot wire, all of the heating circuits (including
including the pilot wire) is placed downstream of the same DDR.
- 437 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

Any circuit must be protected by a protective device which is either a fuse or a
circuit breaker and whose maximum rated current is equal to the value indicated in the table
following :
Table 771F – Rated current of protection devices depending on section

drivers
Minimum section Maximum rated current

drivers of the device
Nature of the circuit
(mm²) protection (A)
Copper Circuit breaker Fuse
Lighting, controlled rolling, taken 1.5 16 10

shutters
(1) - (3)
VMC 1.5 2
- (3)
Tariff control circuit, wire 1.5 2
driver, energy manager, etc.
16 A power sockets:
- - (3)
circuit with 5 bases maximum: or 1.5 16
- circuit with 8 bases maximum: 2.5 20 16
Specialized circuits with power outlet 2.5 20 16

16 A (washing machine, dryer, oven
etc.)
Non-instantaneous electric water heater 2.5 20 16
Stove, hob
- in single phase 6 32 32
- three-phase 2.5 20 16
Other circuits including table

(2)
divisional:
1.5 16 10
2.5 20 16
4 25 20
6 32 32
(1)
Except in special cases where this value can be increased up to 16 A.
(2)
These values do not take voltage drops into account (see 525). (3)
Unauthorized.
771.536.5 Functional control devices

Manual control equipment placed near a door is generally installed on the side
of the opening, within reach, its height above the finished floor being between 0.80 m
and 1.30 m.
- 438 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
The ignition points for lighting in corridors and circulation areas are made as follows:
- either using a manual control device placed less than one meter from each access point if this device does not have an
indicator light; - either using a manual control device placed less than two meters
from
each access if this device includes an indicator light; - either using an automatic
system (presence detection).
To facilitate future installation of such devices, it is recommended that the neutral conductor be available at each control point.
771.555.1.6 Power outlets
Please note that 16 A-250 V socket outlets must be of the shutter type.
The specific “razor” socket with isolation transformer is not affected.
Power sockets with a rated current greater than 16 A are:
- either of a shutter type; is installed

- so that the axis of the cells is placed at a minimum height of 1.40 m from the finished floor; or fitted with a protective
shutter.
-
After June 1 , 2004, only bases with shutters will be admitted.
NOTE - For certain specific applications, bases complying with standard NF EN 60309-1 are permitted (swimming pools, etc.).
The shutter type consists of a system integrated into the socket outlet and intended to prevent the introduction of an object into
a single socket, thus ensuring the protection of children.
771.558 Control panels, distribution and communication panels - Housing technical duct (GTL)
771.558.1 General
The control panel and the distribution and communication boards must be placed in easily accessible locations that do not
adversely affect the operating conditions of the equipment. These premises or locations must not be damp or dusty.
The operating mechanism of the emergency cut-off device must be located at a height of between 1.00 m and 1.80 m above
the finished floor. This height is limited to 1.30 m in premises for disabled or elderly people.
The operating devices of the protection devices of the distribution board are also located at a height of between 1.00 m and
1.80 m except in the case of closed Housing Technical Sheath (GTL) where the axis of the most row low (case of cabinet with
more than three rows) will not be installed at a height less than 0.50 m.
771.558.2 Technical housing duct (GTL)
771.558.2.1 General
GTL is prescribed for all residential premises (individual or collective). For residential homes, it is accepted that it is not planned.
- 439 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

The GTL brings together all the arrivals of the power and communication networks in a single location.
The GTL must make extensions to the electrical installation as easy as possible and facilitate interventions in complete safety.
In rehabilitation, GTL is only required in the case of total rehabilitation with redistribution of partitions of residential premises.
The GTL must be materialized.
A consultation organized by the project manager between the electrical energy distributor and the communication operator and
the installer is essential for the definition of the penetration point and therefore the location of the GTL.
It is exclusively reserved for the electrical and electronic equipment of the installation and its supply (for example monitoring,
command and protection, connection and bypass devices, etc.)
As the GTL is not considered as an envelope for electrical equipment, each of the incorporated equipment must ensure its own
protection against electrical and mechanical shock and against electromagnetic disturbances.
771.558.2.2 Location
The GTL is located:
• either inside the accommodation, preferably near an entrance (main or
service), •
either in a garage or an annex room.
If the GTL includes the emergency cut-off device, it must be directly accessible from inside the dwelling as prescribed in
771.463.
This GTL, comprising numerous departures upwards and downwards, must not be placed in line with the beams.
In collective residential buildings, the GTL must be in communication with the ducts of the building's power and communication
networks.
Each of these communications must have a minimum free section of 300 mm2 (the smallest dimension cannot be less than 10
mm).
771.558.2.3 Destination
The GTL must contain:
- the control panel, if placed inside the accommodation;

Consequently, GTL must guarantee all the required specifications allowing the installation of the control panel (NF C 14-100,
7.4 and 7.5).
- the main distribution table; the communication

- board;
- two 16 A 250 V 2P + T power socket bases, protected by a dedicated circuit to power communication devices placed in the
GTL (digital communication equipment, etc.);
- other communication applications (TV, satellite, interactivity, etc.) when they are
planned.
However, the amplification functions must be located as close as possible to the source, for example on the collective
antenna mast. Furthermore, distribution can be carried out outside the GTL, and as close as possible to the receiving
devices (for example for distribution beyond 15 m).
- 440 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
and possibly: - multi-

service equipment for the home (home automation); - anti-
intrusion protection.
The GTL must allow the implementation of the various systems while satisfying the requirements in force
in terms of insulation, protection against electric shock and immunity to influences of electromagnetic
origin.
771.558.2.4 Production
The GTL can be made of any material authorized for residential premises (wood, PVC, masonry, etc.).
Regarding the thickness of the walls, the material must ensure the mechanical strength of the equipment
fixings or incorporate the appropriate devices. The faces of the internal walls must also be: - flat; - without
excessive roughness; - without detachment;
- without
obstacles.
This GTL can also be prefabricated.
The GTL has the following minimum interior dimensions: - width =

600 mm; - depth = 200
mm; - height = the entire
height from floor to ceiling.
For housing with a surface area of less than or equal to 35 m², the width can be reduced to 450 mm and
the depth to 150 mm.
The dimensions of this GTL must be respected over the entire height.
The GTL can be surface-mounted, recessed or semi-recessed.
200mm 200mm 200mm
600mm 600mm 600mm
Recessed Semi-recessed Projection
Figure 771A - Examples of GTL materialized by walls
- 441 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
In the case of a surface-mounted installation, the materialization of the GTL can be limited to a system consisting of a set of
trunking(s) plus boxes.
The trunking(s) must be easily accessible from floor to ceiling, for the passage of pipes and supplies with a minimum exterior
section of 150 cm2 and a minimum dimension of 6 cm.
This (or these) chute(s) can either accommodate the boxes on top, or be installed above and below the boxes or on the sides.
The volume defined in this subparagraph, even partially occupied, must remain dedicated in its entirety to GTL only. Any other
destination of the remaining volume is prohibited.
g g g
vs vs
200mm 200mm has
600mm 600mm
a: cabinet c:
box g: chute
Figure 771B – Examples of GTL projections materialized by trunking, boxes or cabinets
771.558.2.5 Organization The
position of the different elements constituting the GTL (control panel, distribution board, communication board and routings) is
free in the GTL, but must respect the following constraints.
The monitoring, control and protection devices must be arranged in such a way that there is, between one of them and a
neighboring side wall, a free space, such as:
a) in the case of connection with a single control panel for the electricity meter and the general control and protection device:
- we can have access to the terminals of the general control and protection device and
of the electricity meter without removing them; the possible aesthetic cover
- of the control panel remains removable;
removal of the connection plate is possible without dismantling the distribution panel(s);
- the distance between the terminals of the electricity meter and the adjacent distribution panel is at least 3 cm if the wall is
made of insulating material and 8 cm if it is made of non-insulating material.
b) in order to take into account the presence of the GTL, the distance between the electricity meter and the side walls of the
GTL will be 8 cm if the wall is non-insulating or 3 cm if the wall is made of insulating material.
c) in the case where the control panel is in a prefabricated assembly, it is permitted to have to dismantle the covering parts of
this assembly to have access to the equipment provided that they are not used to hold in place pipes or equipment, that the
number of parts to be dismantled is limited and that the dismantling method is easily identifiable by a qualified person.
- 442 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

The connection between the earth bars of the distribution panel and the communication panel must be as
short as possible (preferably less than 50 cm) and with a minimum section of 6 mm². Provided that the
rules specific to each table are respected, the communication table can be incorporated into the distribution
table.
Equipment corresponding to other communication applications (TV, satellite, interactivity, etc.) is installed
either below 1.10 m or above 1.80 m, with a reservation of 35 cm in width and 18 cm in depth.
The routing of power and communication networks must be done in separate conduits or trunking
compartments. Crossings between these pipes must be avoided as much as possible and be made at 90°.
Be careful not to create loops.
Certain building management products are designed to coexist without operating problems with power
equipment. They can therefore be installed either in the high current or low current part, the routing taking
place in the part where the product is installed.
The arrangement of the distribution panel is made so that the distance between the disturbing products
(for example contactors) and the communication panel is as great as possible.
In order to allow good incorporation of the opening of the GTL to the needs or the interior decoration of the
accommodation, freedom is given as to the design of access to the shaft. Key locking is not permitted.
Some examples of achievements are shown below.
Ceiling
HAS
HAS HAS
B B
HAS HAS
Ground
2 parts A, removable or fixed if A normal door frame at A allowing a 2 parts allowing access to
their height is less than door of identical height and decoration the equipment at A and a
0.30 m, allowing to be opened at B to those of the removable part at B allowing
accessibility from B. 1 part B neighboring doors visible devices (home
allowing automation regulation,
access to the equipment signaling etc.)
Figure 771C - Examples of GTL realizations materialized according to Figure 771A
- 443 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
The dimensions of the removable and mobile parts will be defined in agreement with the installer(s)
concerned. As the GTL is not considered as an enclosure of electrical equipment, each of the incorporated
equipment must ensure its own protection against electric shock: IP2X or IPXXB or SELV 25 V alternating
or 60 V direct.
600 100 350 150
Other app
225
epoiP
p
epoiP
p
noitcenenpoiPc
reilw
reilw
en
en
TV/satellite/
interactivity
oiC
p
oiC
p
ep
ep
nilm
nilm
em
em
1.8m 1.8m
noitacinu
noitacinu
225
(*)
225
250
PC
250 (*)
225
TR
TC
250 250
TR
TC
250 250
PC
1.0m 1.0m
TV/satellite/
interactivity
Other app
epoiP
enreilw p
100 350 150

noitcenenpoiPc
epoiP
reilw
en p
PC: control panel

TR: distribution table
TC: communication board
600
Figure 771D - Example of making Figure 771E - Example of making

Recessed GTL Recessed GTL
Control panel on the left Control panel on the left
Top connection Bottom connection (*) 330
for three-phase distribution
- 444 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
600 150 350 100
Other app
epoiP
p
epoiP
p
noitcenenpoiPc
reilw
reilw
en
en
TV/satellite/
d
interactivity
1.8m 1.8m
522
(*)
250
522
PC (*)
TR
522
250 250
522
TC
250
PC
1.0m 1.0m d
TV/satellite/
interactivity
Other app
epoiP
enreilw p
em
noitacinu epoiC
nilm p
epoiP
p
noitcenenpoiPc
enreilw
em
noitacinu epoiC
nilm p
150 350 100
PC: control panel

d: 8 cm non-insulating wall
(7.5.4 NF C 14-100) 600
Figure 771F - Example of GTL production Figure 771G - Example of recessed construction
Recessed GTL
Control panel on the right Control panel on the right
Top connection Bottom connection (*) 330 for
three-phase distribution
- 445 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
450 100 250 100
Other app
TV/satellite/
interactivity
522
epoiP
enreilw p
epoiC
p
epoiC
p
epoiP
p
noitcenenpoiP
c
nilm
nilm
enreilw
em
em
noitacinu
noitacinu
1.8m 1.8m
522
250
PC TR
250
TR
250
522
250
PC
1.0m 1.0m
522
epoiP
p
epoiP
p
enreilw
enreilw
TV/satellite/
interactivity
noitcenenpoiP
c
Other app
100 250 100 450
PC: control panel

Figure 771H - Example of recessed GTL Figure 771I - Example of making

construction Recessed GTL
Small accommodation Small accommodation
Top connection Bottom connection
- 446 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

771.558.3 Control panel
The control panel supports the general control and protection device (AGCP) and the electric meter.
Its characteristics and implementation rules are defined in standard NF C 14-100 (Low-voltage connection installations).
771.558.4 Distribution boards The protection
and sectioning devices for divisional and terminal circuits must be installed on a main distribution board and, if necessary, on one
or more additional divisional boards distributed throughout the dwelling.
A minimum reserve of 20% must be respected for each table.
These tables comply with the NF C 61-910 standard in force.
771.558.4.1 Main dispatch board The main dispatch board
shall be placed in the GTL. It can be separated or juxtaposed with the control panel.
771.558.4.2 Divisional distribution boards Their installation in bathrooms
is not recommended. It is prohibited in volumes 0, 1, 2 and 3 defined in part 7-701.
They are not placed in cupboards or wardrobes where stored objects can make access difficult, hinder ventilation and cause
abnormal heating or fire (aerosols). Such locations are, however, permitted if arrangements are made to ensure proper ventilation,
do not prevent free access and cannot store objects in front of the devices.
They are not installed above or below the basin of a sink, a washbasin, a water station, a cooking or heating appliance.
771.558.5 Communication board
The communication board must be placed in the GTL.

The communication panel with minimum dimensions 250x225x70 mm is intended to receive the operator's delivery point and must
include at least one earth strip and at least one rail. The functional connection between the earth bars of the distribution panel and
the communication panel must be as short as possible (preferably less than 50 cm) and with a minimum section of 6 mm². Provided
that the rules specific to each table are respected, the communication table can be incorporated into the distribution table. An
Internal Termination Device (DTI) or equivalent materializes the limit of liability between the operator's network and the users'
internal installations.
It allows you to create a cutoff point and test the continuity of the operator's network.
In addition, it may also contain protection modules and more sophisticated test functionalities (remote test, network frequency
response, etc.).
Provided that the rules specific to each table are respected, the communication table can be incorporated into the distribution table.
- 447 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
771.559.6 Local communications networks
771.559.6.1 Communication network equipment 771.559.6.1.1

Communication circuits (telephony included)
The minimum equipment consists of the installation of at least one communications socket base per main
room and in the kitchen with a minimum of two sockets. One of these bases is placed in the living room,
near the television socket, in a location not obscured by a door.
Each of these bases is served by a pipe coming from the communication panel (TC) of the technical
housing duct (GTL).
The cables used are 4 pair cables. They must comply with standard NF C 93-531-12 currently being
developed.
The bases of the communication sockets must comply with the NF EN 60603-7-3 standard currently being
developed.
To take into account the existing telephone equipment, the “T” telephone sockets (connector) can still be
used.
Market documents may refer to a larger or more efficient level of equipment based on guide UTE C 90-483
(under study). This guide proposes different levels of performance depending on the services that are
planned to be distributed. Compliance with this guide will allow users access to existing or emerging
telecom services.
Detailed recommendations regarding the number of circuits, location of communication jacks, and circuit
characteristics are included in this guide.
771.559.6.1.2 Radio broadcasting / Television

When communication networks do not provide the television distribution function (see UTE C 90-483 –
under study), the minimum equipment consists of the installation of at least :
• Two television sockets in surface accommodation up to 100 m²;

• Three television sockets in accommodation of more than 100 m².
One of these sockets must be placed in a suitable location in the living room, near a communications
socket base.
Each of these sockets must be served by a pipe from the housing technical duct (GTL).
In homes up to 35 m², it is allowed to have only one television socket.
In France, television sets are generally designed to be connected to coaxial sockets powered by
coaxial cables complying with the UTE C 90-130 guide.
771.559.6.2 Position and location of communication sockets
At least one 16 A power socket must be placed near each communications or television socket.
The axis of the bases of these communication sockets must be at a minimum height of 50 mm above the
finished floor.
For mixed sockets [BT + communications], whatever the type [surface-mounted or recessed], a partition
must separate the two bases. Intervention on one base must be able to be carried out without intervention
on the other.
Claw fixings are not permitted for communication sockets.

Sockets must not be installed in volumes 0, 1 and 2 of premises containing a bathtub or shower.
The installation of sockets in kitchens is not permitted above cooking appliances and sink basins.
- 448 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
771.559.6.3 Cable routing.

Communication cables must use routes exclusively reserved for them, with a minimum section of 300
mm² (the smallest dimension cannot be less than 10 mm) or a conduit with a minimum internal diameter
of 20 mm.
In trunking systems, cells must be exclusively reserved for them.
The conductors of a communication circuit must preferably be materially separated from those of an
energy circuit.
In order to meet transmission performance requirements and therefore guarantee quality of service, it is
recommended to lay communication cables in accordance with guides UTE C 90-483 (under study) and
UTE C 15-900.
- 449 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
Appendix A – (normative) – Keraunic levels in France and the overseas departments
Note - To obtain the corresponding lightning strike density (Ng), simply divide by Nk 10
Meeting: Nk = 20
Guyana/Martinique/Guadeloupe: Nk = 40
Saint-Pierre and Miquelon: Nk = 1
>25 (AQ2)
25 (AQ1)
- 450 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
Annex B – (normative) – Electrical installations powered by a low-power autonomous

energy source ( ÿ 6 kVA), not connected to the network
The distribution diagram must be TN-S type.
Since such an installation cannot be called upon to increase power, certain rules of this part are not applicable and must be
adapted.
In particular, the
- general circuit breaker (25 A) constitutes the emergency cut-off device and is equipped with a magnetic trigger of a value
adapted to the short-circuit power of the source. This circuit breaker must be placed in a terminal cover box that can be
sealed;
At a minimum, the installation includes: - a rated

differential-residual current RCD equal to at most 30 mA protecting the entire installation; - a 16 A socket circuit with a minimum
section of 1.5 mm² protected by a
maximum rated current circuit breaker 10 A;

- a lighting circuit with a section of 1.5 mm² protected by a rated current circuit breaker
maximum 6 A.
Are not prescribed: GTL; the

- minimum
- number of socket outlets and specialized socket circuits; the possible lightning arrester;
-
- communication circuits.
- 451 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
Appendix C – (informative) – Sample letter to raise awareness

actors to their responsibilities.
Existing home electrical

safety
Address of the co-ownership trustee, or the Owner, or manager:

.................................................. ............ .................................................. ............
.................................................. ............ .................................................. ............
.................................................. ............ Concerns the work to secure the electrical installation
carried out at: M .................................. .........................
.................................................. ............. .................................................. .............
.................................................. ............. Lot number .............. floor .........................
Registered letter with AR
M ..............................................
We are carrying out work on the electrical installation of the apartment mentioned in reference.
One of the fundamental provisions to be respected, to ensure a minimum of safety for people against electrical risks, is the
association, in each dwelling, of a differential device placed at the head of the installation and an earth connection of appropriate
value. .
However, there is no earth connection in the building.
The decision to carry it out is the sole responsibility of the owner (mail addressed to the owner of the manager). If the existence of
the differential device concerns in this specific case the private parts, the presence or absence of the earth connection concerns
the common parts and therefore falls under the sole responsibility of the co-ownership (letter addressed to the Trustee).
For this reason, we cannot recommend enough that you propose the inclusion, on the agenda of the next general meeting of the
co-ownership, of the question of establishing an earth connection, a column of earth and a main equipotential connection so that
the safety of users of this installation is ensured, in compliance with the rules in force (letter addressed to the Trustee).
For this reason, we cannot recommend enough that you kindly take into consideration our request to establish an earth connection,
an earth column and a main equipotential connection so that it is ensured, in compliance with the rules in force, the safety of users
of this installation (mail addressed to the owner or manager).
This is all the more important as the civil code and a number of legislative texts determine security obligations. In the event of an
accident of electrical origin following the negligence of third parties, the responsibilities of each party could be sought,
that of the owner, the Union, the Trustee, the companies, if the electrical installations provided or having been the subject work did
not meet safety regulations.
We remain at your disposal if you require additional information and ask for your approval, Mr.................................... ..........., the
expression of our distinguished feelings.
Company stamp
- 452 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
Appendix D – (informative) – Connection of a management system or

equipment to the control or remote information circuits of the distributor meter
D1 General and descriptions The

metering of the distributor, electromechanical or electronic, can provide the user with information to help
manage their uses in the form of control contacts or digital information.
The distributor's electronic meter delivers digital information in a continuous flow onto a terminal block
available to the user to which a "teleinformation circuit" can be connected. Equipment such as consumption
displays, energy managers or electronic load shedding connected to this circuit decode this information
and translate it into display and/ or control (on, off, comfort, reduced, on, etc.) on the installation of the 'user.
D1.1 Physical characteristics required of the television information cable:

twisted pair consisting of two single-strand bare copper conductors with a diameter of 0.5 mm or
0.8 mm polyethylene insulation, aluminum screen, conductor serving as a continuity drain and
PVC sheath.
In practice, the digital SYT type cable conforming to C 93-529, book 2 meets this requirement.
Only power supplies with maximum voltages of 48 V direct current are authorized for this type of cable.
D1.2 Routing and separation of the NF C 14-100 and NF C 15-100 domains It is

imperative to always preserve electrical separation between the parts of the cables of the control circuits
or the parts of the tele-information circuits installed in the areas NF C 14-100 and NF C 15-100. Compliance
with this requirement must be the subject of particular attention when the planned installation provides for
one of these circuits (control or remote information) to run in part of the installation within the scope of NF
C 14-100.
D2 Case of metering installed inside the housing The

metering panel for electronic meter has a compartmentalized volume separating the areas of the NF C
14-100 and NF C 15-100 standards.
Counter
Circuit breaker
Electronic
circuit breaker NF C 14-100
Servo contacts
“Remote
information” terminals NF C 15-100
- 453 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
D3 Case of metering installed outside the dwelling at the edge of the property When
the envisaged installation provides for the metering to be installed outside the dwelling, the control or
teleinformation circuit must be brought inside that -this.
Two cabling configurations are possible:
• the circuit is separated from the power cable (2 separate sheaths); the
• circuit runs with the power cable (in the same sheath): in this case, the agreement of the local
distribution service is necessary and it is then necessary to install a specific decoupling device to
create an electrical separation between the part of the cable of the control or remote information
circuit installed in the area of NF C 14-100 and the part of this cable installed in the area of NF C
15-100.
D3.1 Connection:
The drain conductor must be connected to the installation earth at a single point in the distribution board.
D3.2 Maximum length of the “tele information circuit”:

Telephone type cable: Digital SYT:
Length developed under optimal operating conditions: 500 m.
Recommended practical length: 100 m.
- 454 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
NF C 14-100
1 - the electronic meter is installed at the property boundary. The cover of the customer terminal block of the meter must be sealed.
2 - The servo link(s) and the teleinformation circuit are in the domain of NF C 14-100, because they run without physical separation
from the power cables. 3
- Single scabbard.
4 - The servo link(s) leads directly to one or more decoupling devices which carry out the separation and materialize(s) between
the domains of the NF C 14-100 and the NF C 15- 100.
5 - The teleinformation circuit leads directly to a decoupling device called “Customer Teleinformation Decoupler” (DTC) which separates
and marks the limit between the areas of NF C 14-100 and NF C 15-100.
Private domain
Public domain
1
NF C 14-100 NF C 14-100
Telereport
Servo contacts
terminals
"teleinformation"
2 Circuit breaker
Painting
of
distribution
3
1 - the electronic meter is installed on the property boundary: the cover of the customer terminal block of the meter is not sealed.
2 - the connection sleeves with the housing are separate: each sleeve is governed by its own standard. 3
- The control link(s) and the teleinformation circuit are in the domain of NF C 15 -100.
4 - The servo link(s) and the teleinformation circuit open directly into the distribution panel without decoupling device and
without Customer Teleinformation Decoupler (DTC).
- 455 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
Private domain
Public domain
1 2
NF C 14-100
Circuit breaker
differential
Telereport 6
C onta cts of enslavement Non-
5
terminals differential circuit breaker
"teleinformation"
Distribution table
3
1 - the electronic meter is installed at the property boundary: the customer terminal block covers are
er th
sealed. 2 - During the journey between the 1 counting panel located in the public domain and the 2 panel receiving the AGCP, the
control link(s) and the teleinformation circuit are in the domain of the NF C 14 -100, because they run without physical separation
from the power cable.
3 - Single sheath or not with connecting cables: they are considered part of the interior electrical installation of the
customer (domain of NF C 15-100).
4 - The control link(s) and the remote information circuit lead directly to one or more of the control relays
decoupling and on the Customer Teleinformation decoupler (DTC) which achieve the separation between NF C 14-100 and NF C 15-100.
- Differential protection at the head of the interior installation.
5 6 - Distribution table where the available controls lead.
In the three examples above the counting can be electromechanical.
Electromechanical meter
with integrated tariff
change or not
Clock
or relay
Circuit breaker
Servo
decoupling
relay
T
Circuit breaker
NF C 14-100
NF C 15-100
D4 Special case of metering transformation In the event of

metering transformation (renovation or other reason), all of the rules set out above must be respected.
Only the following adaptations are possible: If the use of the servo circuits is eliminated and replaced by
a remote
information circuit, it is possible to reuse the cable of the existing servo link to connect the remote
information circuit, for example, a 2x1.5mm² type model. However, if this cable is a model without screen,
proper operation is not guaranteed for the maximum lengths cited in § 3.2. It is recommended to check
the operation of the connected equipment in the event of a length approaching or exceeding 50 meters.
______________
- 456 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
Part 7-772 – Special provisions for installations of common areas and

general services in collective residential buildings
772.1 General................................................ .................................................. ..............457
772.2 Choice and implementation of electrical equipment ......................................... .............458
772.3 Special requirements for technical premises of general services,

elevators, boiler rooms, boosters, etc. .................................................. ...........462
772.4 Installation of alarm and signaling ......................................... ...........................465
Appendix – (normative) – Earthing installation ................................................ ...................466
of NF C 15-100.
requirements apply.
__________
- 457 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
772.1 General
772.1.1 Scope of application This part
applies to electrical installations in common areas and general services in collective buildings.
The special clauses (CCS) part of the old DTU 70.1 is standard NF P 80-201-2.
However, in the case of an individual building of such importance that certain general services exist, the rules of 772.3 are
applicable.
When the building is a high-rise building, the requirements of the amended decree of October 18, 1977 (UTE publication C
12-061) are applicable.
772.1.2 Facility structure
Common areas and general services may, where applicable, include:
- lighting services, - "elevator"
services,
- space heating services, domestic hot water (DHW), - control and command services, Examples:
alarm systems, doormen, home automation, etc.
- “other uses” services.

Examples: water booster rooms, pressure relief station, gas, water lifting, antenna supply, etc.
The premises of the common areas include:
- circulation surfaces: entrance halls, corridors, passageways, stairs, etc.,
(1) - concierge lodges - premises ,

made available collectively to the occupants of buildings, service rooms, storage rooms, sheds for bicycles, mopeds and baby
carriages, collective residential premises, rooms meeting rooms, garbage disposal rooms, collective laundry rooms and
(2)
drying rooms, etc. ,
General services premises include:
- premises used for the operation and maintenance of building services,
- boiler rooms, substations, rooms for elevator machinery, as well as possibly pulley rooms,
- rooms for air conditioning, for water, gas and electricity connections,
the various other technical rooms.
It is recalled that all electrical installations of general services are subject to the provisions of the decree of November 14, 1988
relating to the protection of workers in establishments which use electrical currents.
Each service includes a control and protection device and devices for distribution, protection and sectioning of the different circuits.
———————
(1) The concierge lodge does not include the accommodation part to be treated as a private part.
(2) Collective residential premises, meeting rooms, games rooms, collective premises of residential homes are
subject to the requirements of establishments open to the public generally of the 5th category when their
surface area is greater than 50 m2 (article 9 of the decree of 01/31/1986).
- 458 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
The equipment sets are:
- either placed in a locked room, and accessible only to authorized persons; - either placed in a lockable box or cabinet, housing
the controls, so that they are only accessible to authorized people.
In either case, the service face on which the controls are placed must meet at least the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB.
772.2 Choice and implementation of electrical equipment
772.2.1 Divisional circuits
As many divisional circuits are planned as there are different applications to be supplied.
This concerns, in particular, all the equipment in the common areas.
772.2.2 Pipelines
The requirements of part 5-52 of this standard apply.
In addition, the pipes must not pass through private premises.

You should also refer to the UTE C 15-520 guide.
772.2.3 Lighting
772.2.3.1 Illumination
Table 772A
Average illuminance to maintain (in lux)
Common parts :
Entrance, staircase, 40
landing (shaded areas) 10
Covered garages: 60
Access ramp (shaded 60
areas) 15
Elevators:
Machinery room (on the ground) 200
Pulley room (at the pulley(s)) 100
Landings (on the ground on the threshold of the landing doors) 50
Boiler rooms: 100

Equipment 200
Table (in the table plane) 60
Others
Boosters:
Local 100
Table (in the table plane) 200
The average illuminance on a reference surface is the arithmetic average of the sum of the illuminances at different points on
this surface.
- 459 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
It is recalled that, according to the “recommendation relating to interior lighting in workplaces” (October
1993 edition) of the AFE*, the level of lighting is now expressed in terms of “average lighting to maintain” .
This is the level of lighting, still just acceptable, before maintenance intervention.
772.2.3.2 Light fireplace and lighting devices

The rules of 772.2.3 must be followed, particularly for any change of direction or level. This requirement
must be taken into account for the choice, number and location of these lighting devices.
772.2.3.3 Control devices for lighting fixtures

a) Manual control devices Regardless of the
type of premises, each manual control device must include an indicator light. b) Automatic devices These
devices are arranged so that
detection covers all controlled
traffic access zones.
772.2.3.4 Special equipment
772.2.3.4.1 Building entrance vestibules, staircases, passageways, cellar corridors,

technical rooms
a) Arrangements of control devices
The lighting circuits of building entrances, staircases, passageways and corridors are controlled by timer
with a device allowing permanent operation or by automatic device.
A timer should not control a range of more than five levels.

In addition to the controls installed at the levels of each section, an additional control must be provided at
the levels located on either side of each section, to enable it to be illuminated before approaching it.
The lighting of a passageway or an interior corridor can be controlled by the same timer as that of a
staircase serving it. However, if the number of luminaires required to light a passageway or an interior
corridor is more than three, an independent timer is necessary.
Each control device must have an indicator light.

Devices with shutdown notice are recommended.
b) Location of manual control devices The locations of manual

control devices are chosen such that they are less than 2 m from each apartment entrance door. If there is
an obstacle on the route, the control devices are located between the entrance doors and the obstacles.
By obstacle we mean pillar, change of direction or level, recess, etc.

1 - Vestibules and entrance halls of buildings
A control device is located at each entrance to the vestibule or airlock, the others near each staircase or
each elevator landing door.
2 - Floor landings
One or more control devices are arranged such that at least one is visible from the threshold of any
accommodation.
———————
* French Lighting Association – 17, Rue Hamelin - 75116 PARIS - 460 -
2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
3 - Elevator landings
One of the devices must be placed less than 2 m from any elevator landing door and be visible from the threshold of these doors.
4 - Passages, stairs and corridors
The control devices are located at each end and at each intermediate access in such a way that the distance between two
successive devices does not exceed 6 m.
772.2.3.4.2 Garages and collective covered parks, for motor vehicles

and access ramps
By garages or covered parks, we mean premises used exclusively for parking motor vehicles, that is to say not including a fuel
dispensing station.
For garages, the UTE C 15-103 guide specifies external influences.
For garages whose surface area is greater than 100 m² and whose capacity does not exceed 250 vehicles, the provisions of the
decree of January 31, 1986 relating to the protection against fire of residential buildings must be applied. Those with a capacity of
more than 250 vehicles are classified under section 2935 of the legislation on classified installations and must comply with the
provisions imposed by their classification.
a) Location of lighting fixtures
Lighting devices are placed so as to obtain lighting of circulation areas in accordance with Table 772A.
They are placed out of reach of vehicles.
It is recommended that light sources respect a clear height of 2 m in all respects.
This requirement does not exclude the use of focal points for marking obstacles or routing traffic areas, provided that they are
adequately protected against mechanical damage by construction or installation.
b) Location of control devices and socket outlets
Control devices are placed near access points, distributed so that at least one device is visible from any point in the circulation
areas, and must not be located in parking areas.
It is recommended not to space manual control devices more than 15 m apart.
Control devices and power socket bases are placed out of reach of vehicles.
Socket sockets recessed into walls or pillars, etc. are considered out of reach of vehicles.
The control devices may include people presence detection devices.
772.2.3.4.3 Supply of cellars, boxes or garages, individual By box, we mean a closed location,
generally placed in the basement.
Depending on the specific market conditions, the following arrangements may be taken:
a) Power supply from general services.
An example is the installation of lighting in a cellar or box using a porthole and a switch located outside the cellar or box.
- 461 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
b) Electrical supply (lighting and 16 A + T socket) to a cellar or box via a pipe from a private installation. In
this case, the circuit must be protected by a residual differential current device rated at most equal to 30
mA and must include a voltage presence indicator placed on the distribution board of the housing
installation.
The differential device may be specific or not.

2
The minimum section of such a circuit is 2.5 mm .
No diversion from a private pipe in a common area is permitted.
Accordingly, a bypass is placed either in the apartment, cellar or box.

The pipe(s) from a private installation supplying a cellar or box must be grouped inside the general
services shaft on a specific route. They are identified at the level of penetrations into the accommodation
and the cellar or the box.
These pipes must have double or reinforced insulation, or equivalent, in relation to the electrical circuits
and the masses of other electrical installations.
c) Provisions to enable the power supply of a cellar, a box or a charging station for an electric vehicle with a
remote metering device are being studied.
772.2.3.4.4 Security facilities
The requirements relating to safety installations and in particular safety lighting in common areas of buildings
are indicated in the regulations relating to fire protection in residential buildings.
These requirements are the subject of the decree of January 31, 1986.
772.2.3.5 Circuits from common areas supplying private installations Examples are building
doormen, video surveillance installations, home automation applications, etc., for small powers. Other higher
power applications concern electric heating.
For applications other than electric heating, when a circuit of an installation from common areas enters a
private room, it must be made in SELV or PELV in compliance with paragraph 414.4 of this standard.
For applications relating to electric heating, please refer to the UTE C 15-755 guide.
772.2.3.6 Circuits from private installations supplying electrical appliances in common areas Examples
are water heaters installed in
landing ducts or heating regulation devices, VMC, etc.
When a circuit of an installation having its origin in a private premises serves user devices belonging to the
user of this private premises and located in the common areas, this circuit must have double or reinforced
insulation or equivalent in relation to to the electrical circuits and grounds of the electrical installation of
common areas or other electrical installations.
Refer also to the UTE C 15-755 guide.
- 462 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
772.3 Special requirements for technical rooms for general services, elevators, boiler
rooms, boosters, etc.
772.3.0 Scope of application

The requirements of this paragraph apply to the installations of technical rooms: elevators, boiler rooms,
boosters, in collective buildings.
When there is a gas pressure relief station, the rules relating to external influences BE3 (risk of explosion)
are applicable to the corresponding room (see 424).
The rules imposed by gas distributors do not allow power outlets.
772.3.1 Common provisions
772.3.1.1 Main power supply A

divisional circuit, independent of the other circuits, serves the incoming panel of the premises or service.
This circuit comes from the general distribution table for general services.
772.3.1.2 Lighting power supply

Lighting in these technical rooms is provided by a divisional circuit separate from their main power supply
and coming from the general services panel.
However, if the total power required for the main power supply and lighting is not more than 2 kVA, the
lighting does not require a separate circuit, unless specifically specified in this section.
772.3.1.3 Lighting
Manual control devices are placed so that at least one of them is accessible at each entrance to the
premises.
The average illuminance to be maintained is specified in Table 772A.
772.3.1.4 Socket sockets

Any technical or service room must have at least one 2P + T, 16 A power socket.
772.3.1.5 Technical alarm and signaling network The installation

of this network must be carried out in accordance with paragraph 772.4.
772.3.2 Elevators
The installation of elevators is governed by the EN 81-X series of standards: Safety rules for the
construction and installation of elevators.
772.3.2.1 Characteristics of premises and choice of electrical equipment based on external

influences
See guide UTE C 15-103.
- 463 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
772.3.2.2 Pipelines
a) Nature of the pipes The main power
supply originates from the main general services switchboard.
Please note that elevator supply pipes can be placed, under certain conditions, in the shafts reserved for connection installations
subject to the prior agreement of the Distribution Service (NF C 14-100).
b) Passage in the elevator shaft No pipes must pass
inside the elevator shaft with the exception of those dedicated to the elevator.
c) Section of power conductors
In the absence of more precise instructions from the elevator installer, the following provisions may be adopted:
The current used to calculate the section of the power conductors of an elevator motor is taken at least equal to:
Id
II += 3
not
In = normal operating current

Id = starting current
Attention is drawn to the fact that the power to be subscribed to from the Distribution Service for the main
power supply must take into account the current draw at start-up.
If the installation includes several elevators supplied by the same pipe and capable of starting simultaneously,
the section of the conductors of the common pipe which supplies them must be chosen, from the point of view
of heating, taking into account the sum of the currents calculated as above for each of the engines in the ratio
of 100% for the most powerful engine, 75% for the next and 60% for the others.
We further verify that whatever the number of elevators, the section adopted does not result in a voltage drop
greater than 5% or 8% for the sum of the currents Id affected by the coefficients above, depending on whether
the Power supply is provided directly by the low-voltage public distribution network or by a transformer station.
- 464 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
772.3.2.3 Machinery room
a) Elevator panel The

distribution panel is located as close as possible to the entrance door to the premises, inside it.
Its composition is specified in chapter 13 of EN 81.
DDR DDR
30mA 30mA
Padlockable
general
machine
switch
Cabin PC Duct PC PC Local

lighting 1 cabin lighting 1 bowl 1 lighting of elevator
roof 1 machinery machinery
spaces
Elevator 1 Elevator 1
To engine table
Elevator 1
Figure 772A – Example of a schematic diagram of the elevator machinery room panel
b) Lighting
The average illuminance to be maintained is specified in Table 772A.
The creation of shaft lighting is the domain of elevator installation.
c) Pipes foreign to the machinery

No pipes or devices, if they are unrelated to the operation or safety of the machine room, must be installed
there.

NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
772.3.2.4 Lighting of elevator landings in collective buildings If automatic control of landing
lighting by opening elevator landing doors is required, this control must not be carried out directly by devices placed on these
landing doors.
Lighting can be controlled:

- either by presence detector;
- either with the agreement of the elevator manufacturer, through contacts provided for this purpose, in
the machine operating cabinet, subject to protecting personnel working on the machinery against the
risks of any voltage originating from the electrical installation of the building. This must be done by
bringing the general power line of all the timers back to the elevator power supply panel. Personnel
safety conditions are met by the use of a general disconnecting device cutting all poles of the timer
coil control circuits and placed, for this purpose, on the distribution board provided for in 772.3.2.3 a) .
772.3.2.5 Pulley room
The pulley room must be equipped with a distribution board.

The power circuit for the pulley room can be taken from one of the general services lighting circuits.
772.3.2.6 Replacement or safety lighting Whenever the building has a
replacement or safety power supply, the machinery space must have lighting connected to this power supply.
Otherwise, emergency lighting using a non-permanent, manually controlled stand-alone unit must be
provided.
Replacement or emergency lighting may use at least one of the normal lighting devices.
Attention is drawn to the need for regular maintenance of autonomous emergency lighting units (BAES).
772.3.3 Boiler room
Boiler rooms containing heat production equipment with a useful power greater than 70 kW must comply
with the provisions of the interministerial decree of June 23, 1978.
772.4 Alarm and signaling installation 772.4.1 Alarm and/or
signaling installations are required either by a regulatory or normative text, or by a contractual text. They are either in the field
of safety or in the field of comfort.
The alarm installations are intended to warn the people responsible for taking the necessary measures in
the event of an incident or malfunction of the equipment or installations, in order to limit the effects and
restore the normal situation as quickly as possible. .
Fire detection installations must comply with current standards.
772.4.2 Security alarms and signals generally require an independent source (batteries, etc.).
These power supplies can be specific or common to several installations.

Any reporting reports are generally grouped together on a board in the guard room.

NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
Any reporting reports are generally grouped together on a board in the guard room.
Appendix – (normative) – Earthing installation

1
2 2
2 2
B P
3
4
1 Main protective conductor (earth riser) 2

Protective conductor of individual branch 3
Conductor of the main equipotential connection 4
Earth conductor
B Main terminal
P Metal pipes, e.g. water, gas, central heating
T Taken from the ground
Figure 772B – Example of grounding installation
a) earth conductor:
its minimum section must be:
2 - 25mm in bare copper,
2
- 35mm in aluminum (see NF C 15-100, 542.3.1),
b) main protective conductor:

its section is given in table 54C of NF C 15-100:
2
If Sph ÿ 16 mm , SPE = Sph

2 2
If 16 mm2 < Sph ÿ2 35 mm , SPE = 16mm
If Sph > 35 mm , SPE ÿ Sph/2.
c) protective conductor of the individual branch: its section is

equal to that of the active conductors of the connection.
However, in a TT scheme, the section of the protective conductor can be limited to:
2 - 25mm in bare copper,
2
- 35mm in aluminium.
____________
- 467 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772
(Blank page)
- 468 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-773
Part 7-773 – Protection of unsupervised facilities
NF C 15-100.
apply.
- 469 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-773
773.411.3 Protection against indirect contact
Protection against indirect contact of installations not permanently monitored and supplied by the low-voltage public distribution
network is ensured by one of the following measures:
a) Power supply to the installation or part of an installation via an isolation transformer complying with the standard in force (*). The
separation transformer, which must be class 2, is supplied immediately downstream of the connection circuit breaker which does
not have a differential function.
The installation part located downstream of the separation transformer is protected:

-
either following the measurement by electrical separation in accordance with the rules of 413, if this part only supplies one user
equipment, or following the rules of the TN or IT diagram.
-
Differential protection of other parts of the installation is ensured according to the circuit selection diagram defined in 535.4.2. The
connection between the connection circuit breaker and the isolation transformer is protected by double or reinforced insulation.
b) Protection by a type “S” branch circuit breaker (see 531.2.4.2.2). The installation part or the equipment whose power supply must
be maintained is connected directly to the connection circuit breaker. All or part of the rest of the installation is protected if
necessary by one or more differential devices placed downstream of the connection circuit breaker according to the circuit
selection diagram defined in 535.4.2.
c) In the case of installations other than those in residential premises, protection by an automatic reclosing circuit breaker, provided
that the reclosing device can be neutralized during the presence of people in the premises served, in order to maintain the
conditions of protection against indirect contact.
The number and spacing of restarts depend on the operating and implementation conditions, however, it is necessary to limit
the number of restarts, the consequences of which could be unfortunate for the equipment presenting a permanent fault.
The conditions under which this device can be neutralized and restored are the subject of a warning placed near the device.
The shutdown of certain devices or equipment, following the operation of a differential device, can have unfortunate consequences;
this is particularly the case for: - freezers and refrigerated cabinets, - frost-proof heating installations, -
telecommunications equipment in isolated structures, -
transmission relays for radio or television broadcasts, -
passages automatic leveling devices, - theft alarm or fire detection devices, - radio beacons.
The operation of the differential device may be due to a fault in other equipment protected by the same differential device, or to external
phenomena (for example atmospheric overvoltages).
______________
———————
(*) NF EN 61-558-2-1 (C 52-558-2-1)
- 470 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-781
Part 7-781 – Electrical service premises or locations
781.0 Scope of application ............................................. .................................................. .471
781.1 General ................................................ .................................................. ..............471
781.2 Protection by means of obstacles or by moving out of reach ............471
781.3 Lack of protection against direct contact .......................................... .............472
781.4 Minimum distances to be respected in service passages..................................472
781.5 Provisions concerning electrical service premises .......................................... ..474
The requirements of this part supplement the general requirements of the other parts of NF C 15-100.
apply.
- 471 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-781
This part deals with the specific provisions of electrical service premises or locations.
781.1 General
Electrical service premises or locations are premises or locations containing electrical equipment and access to which is reserved
for qualified people responsible for maintaining and monitoring the equipment.
Therefore, it is accepted that, in these premises or locations, protection against direct contact is ensured by means of obstacles
(see appendix B1 of part 4-41), or by placing them out of reach by moving away (see appendix B2 of part 4-41), and respecting
the conditions of 781.2. Protection against direct contact may even be absent, complying with the conditions of 781.3.
The premises or work locations reserved for the production, conversion or distribution of electricity, covered by article 22 of the
decree of November 14, 1988, are electrical service premises or locations as described above. The same applies to access
premises reserved for electricians defined in publication UTE C 18-510.
It should be noted that, for reasons of external influence conditions, it may be necessary to provide a room, rather than a location.
Electrical service premises may be prescribed by other regulatory texts (for example the fire safety regulations relating to
establishments open to the public) for reasons other than protection against direct contact, for example: - to protect premises
and clearances from fire risks constituted by materials
electric;
- in the case of electrical equipment belonging to a security installation:
• protect this equipment from fire originating from surrounding premises (see also
561.1) ;
• prevent these materials from being accessible to people other than those
designated by the head of the establishment (see also 562.2 and 563.5).
VS 781.2 Protection by means of obstacles or by moving out of reach Protection measures by means of obstacles
according to Annex B1 to Part 4-41 or by moving out of reach according to Annex B2 to Part 4-41 part 4-41 are permitted only in
premises where only informed (BA 4) or qualified (BA 5) (*) persons have access, in accordance with the operating instructions,
and if the following conditions are simultaneously met:
- the nominal voltage present in such premises (or locations) must not be greater than 1000 V in alternating current or 1500
V in direct current; the rules set out in 781.4.1 and 781.4.3 must be observed in the cases
- considered; the premises (or locations) must be marked clearly and visibly by appropriate markers.
-
———————
(*) Only persons authorized within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to work in the
conditions BA 4 and BA 5 (see also 512.2.16).
- 472 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-781
VS
781.3 Lack of protection against direct contact Protection against direct
contact is not required in premises accessible only to knowledgeable (BA4) or qualified (BA5) persons (*) duly instructed for the
particular need and if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
- the nominal voltage is not greater than 500 volts in alternating current and 750V in smooth direct current (BTA range);
This limitation is not prescribed by international standards and results from regulations for the protection of workers.
- the premises (or locations) must be marked clearly and visibly by appropriate markers; the entrance doors to the premises
VS (or locations)
- must allow easy exit to the outside. They must be able to be opened without a key from the inside, even if they are locked
from the outside; - for passages, the minimum dimensions set in 781.4.2 and 781.4.3 must be observed; if the bare active
parts belong to a distribution panel
and are located on the face carrying the operating devices, the ground or floor must be insulating or insulated for the voltage
- considered, in front of this face for at least 1 m width; - in the case of the presence of accumulators, when the nominal
voltage of the batteries is greater than 150 volts, additional requirements are given in 554.2.2.
781.4 Minimum distances to be respected

NOTE - The dimensions indicated below are rigorous minimum values. In special circumstances it may be appropriate, in the
interests of safety, to adopt higher values. Other considerations, such as working positions, evacuation facilities, etc. may require
larger values.
781.4.1 The distances indicated below must be observed when protection by means of obstacles is provided:
a) Width of the passage between obstacles or between control devices or between obstacles
and control devices: .............................. .................... 700 mm min. b) Width of the passage between control elements or
obstacles and wall:........ 700 mm min. c) Passage height under obstacle: ......................................... ..................... 2,000 mm min.
d) Lateral overflow distance of obstacles in relation to active parts .......................................... .................................................. .......................
200 mm min.
e) Distance between obstacles and bare active parts:

-
if the obstacle consists of a fence not having the degree of protection IP2X or
IPXXB .............................. ............................. 200 mm min. if the obstacle is constituted by a mesh with the degree of
-
protection IP2X or IPXXB or by a solid and rigid screen .............40mm
min.
NOTE - The above dimensions are when all parts of the obstacle are in place and closed.
781.4.2 In premises in which no protective measures are provided, the following dimensions must be respected for service
passages: a) When the passage is bordered on one side only by unprotected active
parts: - a1 ) width of the passage between the wall and the active parts
unprotected:............................................... ................................... 1000 mm min. - a2) free passage in front of the

control elements (handles, etc.):......... 700 mm min. b) When the passage is bordered on both sides by active parts: b1)
width of the passage between the parts and active conductors of
each side :............................................... .................................. 1,200 mm min. b2) free passage between the
control elements (handles, etc.): ....... 1,100 mm min. c) Height of active parts above the floor: .........................................
2,300 mm min.
———————
(*) Only persons authorized within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to work in the
conditions BA4 and BA5 (see also 512.2.16).

NF C 15-100 Part 7-781
Active parts
<IP2X vs)
2000
b) 2300
IP0X
700 700 700 700

has) has)
has) has)
Figure 781A – Protection by means of obstacles or by distancing
Figure 781B – Lack of protection against direct contact

NF C 15-100 Part 7-781
VS 781.4.3 Service passages longer than 20 m must be accessible at both ends.
For shorter passages, but longer than 6 m, accessibility at both ends is recommended.
781.5 Provisions concerning electrical service premises

781.5.1 Location
The general low voltage panel must be located as close as possible to the center of gravity of the electrical loads.
The center of gravity of electrical loads (power barycenter) is the location which takes into account the situation of high-
power consumption units, in order to reduce the length and section of the pipes.
The transformer(s) must be located as close as possible to the general low-voltage panel.
It is recommended that the electrical service room containing the general low voltage panel be located as close as
possible to the vertical distribution pipes.
781.5.2 Dimensions
The dimensions of electrical service premises in which special measures against direct contact are applied comply with
781.2 to 781.4. The premises containing the transformer stations, the generators, the UPS, the main electrical distribution
panel have minimum dimensions imposed by the dimensions of the equipment. Premises simply containing enclosed
electrical panels (cabinets or boxes) must meet the minimum dimensions given in Table 781A.
The following minimum distances must be respected around distribution boards and other distribution equipment.
Table 781A – Minimum distances around distribution boards
Power of the board
< 60 at kVA > 60 kVA > 250 to kVA > 250 to kVA
< 250kVA front connection rear connection
Front passage 700mm 1000mm 1500mm 1500mm
Rear passage 700mm
Ceiling height of 2000mm 2,500mm 2,500mm 2,500mm

the location
In the case of cabinets, a minimum distance of 400 mm must be respected between the lower part of the cabinet and the
finished floor, as well as between the upper part of the cabinet and the ceiling.
There is no need to respect the lower distance for boxes placed on the floor.
These distances allow interventions and the creation of connections.
- 475 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-781
If possible, a reserve of space for an extension of tables and cabinets must be provided.
781.5.3 Ventilation and conditioning
Electrical service premises must:

- either be ventilated to the outside either directly or via a duct
natural or mechanical way; the implementation of ventilation must be accompanied by
precautions against the introduction of dust into the equipment;
- or be air-conditioned.
The use of air conditioning ensures that temperatures are maintained; the equipment of
distribution cabinets are generally designed for normal operation at a
maximum temperature of 40 °C, the accumulator batteries to have their nominal autonomy at
20°C. See also section 554.2.
______________
- 476 - 2002

16 English

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

16 English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Machine Translated by Google

For: AMEC SPIE SA

5/10/2005 - 5:17 p.m.

ICS 29.020; 91.140.50

Low voltage electrical installations

Approved French standard

Correspondence Standards of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) of the 60364

Descriptors Electrical installations, buildings, residential premises.

Changes See Foreword.

Print UTE © 2002 – Reproduction prohibited

TITLE 1. Scope, object and fundamental principles

TITLE 3. Determination of the general characteristics of installations

TITLE 4. Protection to ensure security

TITLE 5. Choice and implementation of materials

TITLE 6. Verifications and maintenance of installations

TITLE 7. Rules for special installations and locations

- the evolution of production techniques and practices leads to adaptations and

3. This edition of standard NF C 15-100 includes:

7. The main changes to this standard concern the following points:

• Unsupervised facilities (773); • Electrical

NF C 15-100 standard Harmonization Document IEC Publication

A white box indicates that there is no corresponding IEC or CENELEC document.

Accessibility ................................................ 513.1 General rules

Measuring devices ........ ......................... 556 Choice and implementation

Barriers .................................................. 235.4 _ Definition

Cables .................................................. .... Table 52A Table 52D Standards

Heating (of premises) ............................. 753 Electric heating equipment

Charged conductors .............................. 523.5 Number

Direct contacts ......................................... 131.2.1 Design

Differential-residual current .................... 233.7 Definition

(1) See C 15-201.

Protection device at maximum

(presence of) (AD) ............................. 512.2.4 Warm- Features

Mechanical maintenance ............................. 464 Rules

Duct (ventilation, smoke extraction) ............ 528.2 Neighborhood of pipelines

*Immersion (AD7)................................... 512.2.4 Features

(3) See NF C 15-211.

*Insects (AL) ......................................... 512.2.9 Characteristics

705.415.2 Agricultural and horticultural premises

(4) See NF C 15-150.

Non-conductive premises ......................... 41/Annex C1 Protection

411.3 Protection against indirect contact

*Air movement (AR) ......................... 512.2.14 Characteristics

Neutral (conductor)................................... 232.2 Definition

Number of power points (per circuit) 771.314.2 O Residential premises

Obstacles ................................................. .. 235.6 Definition

708.530.2 Parks and caravans

- Very low voltage ................................... 414.4 SELV and PELV

- XIX - Updated: June 2005

Thermal resistivity of soils ......................... 523.3 Values

-XX- Updated: June 2005

Partial selectivity ......................................... 535.4.3.2 Total Rules

Ambient temperature (AA) ......................... 216.1 Tables General definition

Mobile units .............................................. 717 Emergency Special rules

Title 1 – Scope, object and fundamental principles

11 FIELD OF APPLICATION ............................................. .................................................. 2

12 PURPOSE ................................................ .................................................. ......................... 5

13 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES ............................................... ............................................. 5 131

14 LIMITS OF FACILITIES........................................................ .............................................12 141 Origin

a) buildings for residential use; b)

j) public or private lighting installations.

(2) - installations in premises for medical use; - cold cathode

113 This standard does not apply to: